IHRDC E-Learning Solutions Detailed Catalog

IPIMS Background LearningDetailed Course Catalog

IPIMS Action Learning

Petroleum Online

Business Essentials

e-Learning Solutions

Operations & Maintenance

IPIMSBackground Learning Course Catalog

PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Introduction and Overview

Fundamentals of Petroleum Geology (IHRDC_IPIMS_t30)

Description:

An overview of the fundamentals, introducing the primary geological factors controlling petroleum generation and

accumulation. Presents source rocks, primary and secondary migration and sealing condit ions. Provides perspective on varying

geological histories, basin configurations and economic considerations.

Duration:

Min: 2 hours 10 minutes

Max: 2 hours 20 minutes

Subtopics:

Basic Concepts of Petroleum Geology

Petroleum Generation and Maturation

Migration and Accumulation Processes

Petroleum Exploration Overview

Fundamentals of Petroleum Geology: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 1 of 123


Hydrocarbon Properties (IHRDC_IPIMS_t31)

Description:

Introduces the physical and chemical propert ies of petroleum, and the terminology explorat ionists use to classify and describe

them. Explains how these propert ies affect the behavior of petroleum--it s migration, entrapment and availability to

exploitation. Outlines specific production problems when unfavorable petroleum propert ies are present.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Gas Propert ies and Classificat ions

Crude Oil Propert ies, Classifications and Alterations

Hydrocarbon Propert ies: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 2 of 123


Subsurface Environment (IHRDC_IPIMS_t32)

Description:

Establishes the general condit ions of subsurface environments. Presents the nature and behavior of subsurface waters, fluid

pressures, geothermal factors and the fluid dynamics of sedimentary basins. Discusses how these factors can affect petroleum in

the subsurface environment. A reminder that for acquiring subsurface data, a dry hole can be as valuable as a producer.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Water Origins and Chemistry

Temperature and Thermal Gradient

Pressure Environments

Fluid Behavior

Subsurface Environment: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 3 of 123


Reservoirs (IHRDC_IPIMS_t34)

Description:

Outlines basic characterist ics of reservoir lithologies and discusses identification, measurement and evaluation of reservoir

condit ions in rocks. Considers reservoir propert ies which determine overall quality: porosity, permeability, and their

interrelationship; diagenet ic effects and reservoir continuity. Stresses the different requirements for evaluation of clast ic and

carbonate reservoirs.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Rock Propert ies

Diagenesis

Reservoir Continuity

Reservoirs: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 4 of 123


Traps (IHRDC_IPIMS_t35)

Description:

Petroleum generated from source rocks moves up through permeable st rata and would be lost at the earth's surface if not

"trapped" on its way up. Describes the characterist ics of the principal trap types, how they appear on geologic sections and

maps, and how they are analyzed in terms of geologic history. Examines constraints on production imposed by variat ions in

t rapping.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Hydrocarbon Traps: Introduction

Structural Traps

Stratigraphic Traps

Other Trap Types

Traps: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 5 of 123


Habitat of Hydrocarbons in Sedimentary Basins (IHRDC_IPIMS_t36)

Description:

Provides the format for genetic classification of sedimentary basins, drawing together the principles of the previous six modules

into the evaluat ion of the earth's plate tectonic framework. Explains identificat ion and classificat ion of sedimentary basins, their

role in forming oil and gas, and the habitats of oil and gas within them.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Sedimentary Basins: Overview

Cratonic Basins

Divergent Margin Basins

Convergent Margin Basins

Downwarp Basins and Tert iary Deltas

Basin Types: Review Exercises

Petroleum Characterist ics by Basin Type

Habitat of Hydrocarbons in Sedimentary Basins: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 6 of 123

PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Basic Skills of the Petroleum Geologist

Geologic Cross-Sections (IHRDC_IPIMS_t37)

Description:

Teaches the construct ion of the two principal types of cross sections--structural and strat igraphic--and their extensions into

three-dimensional (fence) diagrams. Int roduces computer generation of maps and sections.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Cross-Section Elements

Cross-Sections in Two Dimensions

Cross-Section Diagrams in Three-Dimensions

Cross-Sections: Computer Methods

Geologic Cross-Sections: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 7 of 123


Subsurface Mapping (IHRDC_IPIMS_t38)

Description:

An integrated approach to subsurface mapping, discussing downhole data, correlations between wells, and how to depict

surfaces and three-dimensional units on contour maps. Presents surface maps and geophysical or remote sensing surveys as aids

in delimit ing important st ructural and st rat igraphic relationships. Stresses proper correlation and use of borehole informat ion.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Lateral Correlation of Logged Data

Structural Contour Maps

Isopach and Other Subsurface Maps

Subsurface Mapping: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 8 of 123


Prospect Generation (IHRDC_IPIMS_t39)

Description:

Teaches how prospects are generated, emphasizing recognit ion of previously undelineated anomalies, and that although

each prospect is unique, the general patterns of prospect generat ion are roughly similar. Presents learning basic patterns by

using the experience of others and reviewing past cases.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Prospect Generat ion: Basic Concepts and Definit ions

Prospect Generat ion in Front ier Regions

Model Prospects

Prospect Generat ion: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 9 of 123

PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Petroleum Technology for theNon-Engineer

Drilling and Well Completion (IHRDC_IPIMS_t40)

Description:

Presents the integration of drilling and well complet ion technology in an overall development program, showing the

equipment and procedures involved as operations are carried out. Focuses on the responsibilit ies of individuals and service

companies at the drillsite.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Drilling Fundamentals

Rotary Drilling Rig Components

Drillst ring, Drill Bits and Drilling Fluid

Drilling Operations

Well Completion Technology

Case Histories, Drilling and Completion Programs

Drilling and Well Completion: References and Addit ional Informat ion

Topic 10 of 123


Production Technology (IHRDC_IPIMS_t41)

Description:

Describes the production technology techniques used to maximize production. Once production begins, the reservoir is only a

part of a larger system, and understanding the relat ionships among all elements--the wellbore, tubing string, art ificial lift

equipment, surface control devices, separators, t reaters, tanks and measuring devices--is crucial to economical and safe

recovery.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Well Completions

Surface Production Facilit ies

Production System Performance

Art ificial Lift

Production Technology: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 11 of 123

PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Reservoir Characterization

Subsurface Facies Analysis (IHRDC_IPIMS_t48)

Description:

Reviews basic parameters in defining a facies--lithology, sedimentary st ructures, paleontology, geometry and associated

environments. Discusses informat ion sources, including cores, cutt ings, well logs and seismic, and summarizes diagnost ic features

of major facies. Presents case studies on environmental diagnosis of productive sandstone and carbonate reservoirs.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Sedimentary Environments and Facies

Lithology

Sedimentary Structures, Geometry and Facies

Paleontology

Sources of Information

Sandstone Reservoir Facies

Carbonate Reservoir Facies

Subsurface Facies Analysis: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 12 of 123


Nonmarine Sandstone Reservoirs (IHRDC_IPIMS_t49)

Description:

Presents basic concepts and techniques of exploration for nonmarine sandstone reservoirs. Applies common tools for examining

nonmarine sett ings--such as rivers, desert dunes and lakes-- in terms of their genesis and recognit ion in the subsurface.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Classification of Nonmarine Sandstones

Alluvial Fan Environments

Braided St ream Environments

Meandering Channel Alluvial Systems

Eolian Environments

Lacustrine Environments

Exercises: Identifying Reservoir Environments

Nonmarine Sandstone Reservoirs: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 13 of 123


Marginal Marine Sandstone Reservoirs (IHRDC_IPIMS_t50)

Description:

Examines coastal barrier islands, shallow-marine shoals, bars and deltas, presenting deposit ional and erosional condit ions

dominant during formation. Describes diagnosis and recognit ion through use of seismic, well-log, map and core data.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Introduction to Marginal Marine Sandstone Reservoirs

Deltaic Environments

Barrier Islands

Marginal Marine Sandstone Reservoirs: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 14 of 123


Shelf Marine Sandstone Reservoirs (IHRDC_IPIMS_t51)

Description:

Describes characterist ics of shelf sand reservoirs, including elongate submarine fans, radial submarine fans and slope-apron

systems. Presents detection methods including seismic, well-log, core analysis, paleontology and production studies.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Introduction to Shelf Marine Sandstone Reservoirs

Deposit ional Processes of Shelf Sands

Shelf Sand Deposits

Diagnosis and Detection of Shelf Sands

Petroleum Geology, Reservoir Characterist ics

Shelf Marine Sandstone Reservoirs: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 15 of 123


Porosity Evolution in Sandstone Reservoirs (IHRDC_IPIMS_t52)

Description:

Describes porosity evolut ion in all sandstone reservoirs, regardless of deposit ional environment, and reviews factors that control

primary and secondary porosity. Evaluates tools and techniques used for descript ion of sandstone porosity and porosity

evolut ion. I llust rates applications of porosity evolut ion through case studies.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Descript ion of Sandstone Porosity

Diagenesis

Secondary Porosity

Evaluat ion Tools and Techniques

EandP Applications

Case Studies

Porosity Evolut ion in Sandstone Reservoirs: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 16 of 123


Exploration in Carbonate Rocks (IHRDC_IPIMS_t53)

Description:

Introduces carbonates by examining formation and deposit ion, focusing on ramp and slope models and the deposit ional

sett ings within them. Presents field examples of ancient and modern carbonate deposits and their reservoir characterist ics.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Introduction to Explorat ion in Carbonate Rocks

Carbonate Rocks Described

Analysis of Carbonate Rocks and Facies Distribution

Nonmarine Carbonate Sett ings

Coastal Sett ing

Shelf Sett ing

Shelf-Margin Sett ing

Foreslope Sett ing

Basinal Sett ing

Exploration in Carbonate Rocks: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 17 of 123


Porosity Evolution in Carbonate Rocks (IHRDC_IPIMS_t54)

Description:

Demonstrates the systematic evolut ion of carbonate porosity and describes classificat ions and condit ions used for predicting

porosity dist ribut ion. Discusses deposit ional and diagenet ic models of carbonates. Field studies illustrate how to handle porosity

parameters in production planning.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Introduction to Porosity Evolut ion in Carbonate Rocks

Diagenesis and Porosity Evolut ion

Evaluat ion of Porosity and Diagenetic History

Porosity Evolut ion and Petroleum Exploration

Porosity Evolut ion and Field Development

Porosity Evolut ion in Carbonate Rocks: Reference Section

Topic 18 of 123


Evaporites and their Role in Petroleum Exploration (IHRDC_IPIMS_t55)

Description:

Describes characterist ics of evaporites and examines their relat ionship to hydrocarbon accumulations, including their role as

source beds, reservoirs, t raps and seals. Discusses evaporite mineralogy and diagenesis, as well as analysis and identification

techniques. Field examples illustrate occurrences, evaluation and significance of evaporite structures.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Introduction to Evaporites and their Role in Petroleum Exploration

Sabkha Deposit ional Facies and Reservoirs

Subaqueous Evaporites

Ancient Deposit ional Models

Salt Structures, Sediments and Hydrocarbons

Evaporite/Dolomite/Hydrocarbon Association

Evaporites and their Role in Petroleum Exploration: References and Addit ion

Topic 19 of 123


Sequence Stratigraphy (IHRDC_IPIMS_t56)

Description:

Reviews a typical strat igraphic sequence, and examines each of its component systems t racts. Stresses the interplay between

sea level and sediment supply and how this interplay affects deposit ional geometries. Presents a methodology for interpreting

st ratigraphic sequences, incorporat ing well, seismic and biostratigraphic data. Discusses current controversies and future

trends.

Duration:



Subtopics:

General Concepts

Cyclostratigraphy

The Making of a Stratigraphic Sequence

Sequence Strat igraphy

Interpretation of Strat igraphic Sequences

Conclusions and Current Controversies

Sequence Strat igraphy: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 20 of 123

PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Structural Geology and GlobalTectonics

Structural Geology (IHRDC_IPIMS_t57)

Description:

Introduces structural geology and its application to explorat ion programs. Presents mechanics of deformation and use of

outcrop and subsurface studies to diagnose tectonic forces. Emphasizes regional deformat ion and reviews plate tectonic

schemes and effects.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Structural Features of Non-Tectonic Origin

Examples of Recent Structural Movements

Stress and St rain

Folds

Faults

Joints and Fractures

Unconformit ies

Structural Styles

Structural Geology: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 21 of 123


Plate Tectonics and Sedimentary Basins (IHRDC_IPIMS_t58)

Description:

Presents the history and concepts of plate tectonic theory as applied to petroleum exploration. Examines tectonic processes

involved in development of sedimentary basins, and describes tectonic influences on the explorat ion concerns of source,

reservoir, t rap, maturation and migrat ion. Discusses current issues in plate tectonic theory.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Introduction to Plate Tectonics and Sedimentary Basins

Plate Tectonics

Sedimentary Basin Parameters

Sedimentary Basin Development

Special Considerations of Plate Tectonics

Basin Classificat ion and Petroleum Prediction

Plate Tectonics and Sedimentary Basins: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 22 of 123


Divergent Margins and Rift Basins (IHRDC_IPIMS_t59)

Description:

Applies tectonic concepts learned in GL601 and 602, focusing on petroleum habitats in divergent margin and rift basins.

Discusses theories of rift ing and its effect on sedimentation. Classifies rift basins and examines each type through present day

examples.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Sedimentary Basins and Continental Margins

Petroleum Habitat

Rift ing and Basin Development

Structural Styles and Trapping Mechanisms

Nonmarine Basins in the Continental Interior

Marine Basins in the Continental Interior

Proto-Oceanic Basins

Subsided Divergent Margins

Exploration Considerations

Divergent Margins and Rift Basins: Reference Section

Topic 23 of 123


Convergent Margin Basins (IHRDC_IPIMS_t60)

Description:

Places convergent margins in a plate tectonic sett ing and examines general characterist ics. Relates petroleum habitats to

theories of basin development. Classifies convergent margin basins and presents examples. Proposes a strategy for petroleum

exploration in convergent margin basins.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Convergent Margins

Basin Classificat ion and Development

Basin Development

Foreland Basins and Associated Structures

Petroleum Habitat

Convergent Tectonic Regimes

Exploration Considerations

Convergent Margin Basins: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 24 of 123

PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Geochemistry

Introduction to Petroleum Chemistry (IHRDC_IPIMS_t61)

Description:

Focuses on characterist ics and chemical makeup of petroleum, tracing maturation of organic matter to petroleum.

Emphasizes development of kerogen and bitumen as transit ional steps, and explains modification of intermediate materials

during diagenesis, catagenesis, and metagenesis in response to increasing subsurface temperature. Presents examples of

source-rock studies, crude-oil correlations and crude oil-source rock parings.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Petroleum

Hydrocarbon Groups

Resins

Asphaltenes

Organic Matter: Progenitor of Petroleum

Organic Matter Maturat ion

Geochemical Evaluation Overview

Source Potential (Inherent)

Source Potential (Realized): Kerogen Evaluation

Source Potential (Realized): Bitumen/ Petroleum Evaluation

Correlation Studies

Introduction to Petroleum Chemistry: References and Addit ional Informat ion

Topic 25 of 123

PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Geochemistry

Applications of Petroleum Geochemistry (IHRDC_IPIMS_t62)

Description:

Demonstrates uses and limitations of geochemical techniques and their importance in exploration and production. Presents

appropriate sample select ion and preparation, as well as analyt ical techniques used in laboratories. Reviews and integrates

basic source rock and crude oil evaluation programs into more advanced basin study and modeling programs.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Geochemical Analyses: Kerogen

Geochemical Analyses: Bitumen/ Petroleum

Geochemical Analyses: Analyt ical Procedures

Geochemical Analyses: Sample Types

Geochemical Analyses: Sampling Procedures

Geochemical Programs in Petroleum Exploration

Geochemistry and Basin Evaluation

Geochemical Problem Solving

Applications of Petroleum Geochemistry: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 26 of 123

PETROLEUM GEOLOGY: Other Geological Techniques

Photogeology and Remote Sensing (IHRDC_IPIMS_t63)

Description:

Describes the physical principles of the major remote sensing techniques, evaluating the strengths and weaknesses of each

during applicat ion. Discusses aerial photographs, Landsat images, SPOT images, and thermal infrared and radar techniques.

Includes a glossary of remote sensing terms, and interpretation projects for each technique which relate remote surveys to

other geological data.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Remote Sensing Fundamentals

Aerial Photographs

Satellite Images (Landsat)

Satellite Images (SPOT, Fuyo and Resource)

Thermal Infrared Images

Radar Images

Photogeology and Remote Sensing: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 27 of 123


Basin Analysis (IHRDC_IPIMS_t64)

Description:

A complete introduction to basin evolut ion and evaluation. Discusses basin formation processes, geodynamic models, source

rocks, maturation, migration, and sedimentary basin models. Presents the impact of basin models on prospect generation,

measurement of basin histories and propert ies, and the principles and application of various basin evaluation methods. Refers

to case studies for analysis and summary.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Basin Analysis and Petroleum Analysis

Basin Formation Processes

Geodynamic Models

Source Rocks

Maturation Processes

Sedimentary Basin Models

Prospect Generat ion

Basin Histories and Propert ies

Mathematical Basin Analysis Models

Stratigraphic Basin Analysis Models

Basin Analysis Case Studies

Basin Analysis: References and Addit ional Informat ion

Topic 28 of 123


Play Analysis (IHRDC_IPIMS_t65)

Description:

Examines the crit ical elements of play analysis and evaluation, including play controls for structural styles and deposit ional

systems as well as the elements of reservoir, source, seal, t rap maturation and migration, and economic considerat ions.

Discusses the data requirements of play analysis and the planning and evolut ion of the play summary. Presents various

examples and case studies from both frontier and developed basins.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Play Analysis Int roduction

Play Elements

Play Controls

Play Analysis Methods

Risk Assessment and Analysis

Play Analysis Case Histories

Play Analysis: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 29 of 123


Reservoir Management (IHRDC_IPIMS_t993)

Description:

Describes the reservoir management techniques used to maximize product ion. Once production begins, the reservoir is only a

part of a larger system, and understanding the relat ionships among all elements--the wellbore, tubing string, art ificial lift

equipment, surface control devices, separators, t reaters, tanks and measuring devices--is crucial to economical and safe

recovery.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Rock and Fluid Propert ies

Natural Drive Mechanisms in Petroleum Reservoirs

Improved Oil Recovery

Reservoir Simulation

Reservoir Management: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 30 of 123


Deepwater Marine Sandstone Reservoirs (IHRDC_IPIMS_t2613)

Description:

Describes characterist ics of deepwater sand reservoirs, including elongate submarine fans, radial submarine fans and

slope-apron systems. Presents detection methods including seismic, well-log, core analysis, paleontology and production studies.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Introduction to Deepwater Marine Sandstone Reservoirs

Sedimentation Processes

Deposit ional Systems

Subsurface Diagnosis and Detection

Sequence Strat igraphy

Petroleum Geology and Reservoir Characterist ics

Deepwater Marine Sandstone Reservoirs: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 31 of 123


Hydrocarbon Generation and Migration (IHRDC_IPIMS_t3561)

Description:

Traces the natural condit ions leading to hydrocarbon generation and migration. Presents the effects of diagenesis and

petrogenesis on organic matter. Discusses kerogen types, physical and chemical factors that affect the maturation level and

geochemistry of petroleum, and the migration processes from petroleum source beds into the permeable carrier or reservoir

rock.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Generat ion and Maturation Processes

Migration Processes

Hydrocarbon Generation and Migration: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 32 of 123


Basic Geostatistics (IHRDC_IPIMS_t23340)

Description:

This presentation describes both classical statist ical and geostatist ical methodologies designed to quantify qualitat ive

information. Though the material presented is not heavily mathematical, the presentation is not simplist ic. General equations

and matrix notation are used in some sections. The equat ions are presented mostly for informational purposes, because

calculations used in geostatist ics tend to be tedious and very computer-intensive. This module presents an overview of

techniques that can be used to t ransform a tradit ional geological reservoir descript ion (a surface or 3D volume) into a

mathematical reservoir.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Introduction to Basic Geostatist ics

Classical Stat ist ical Concepts

Data Post ing and Validation

Regionalized Variables

Kriging

Data Integration

Condit ional Simulation

Public Domain Geostatist ics Programs

Case Studies

Selected Readings

Geostatist ics Glossary

Topic 33 of 123


Geosteering: Fundamentals, Planning, and Implementation (IHRDC_IPIMS_t36018)

Description:

GeoSteering is the application of geologic and engineering skill to direct a horizontal or extended-reach wellbore path, based

upon knowledge of the enclosing strat igraphy, with the expressed aim of maximizing wellbore exposure to the target reservoir.

This TOpic reviews valuable insights into the GeoSteering process, provided by a leading company with experience gained

over the course of steering nearly 2000 horizontal wells.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Directional Drilling: The Driving Force in Geosteering

Drilling Measurements and Logging Tools

Preparing the Geosteering Plan

Geosteering Practices

Case Study

Geosteering: Fundamentals, Planning, and Implementat ion: References and Add

Best Practices

Topic 34 of 123


Geographical Information Systems (IHRDC_IPIMS_t36166)

Description:

This topic examines the use of Geographical Information Systems (GIS) in the oil and gas industry. Beginning with an overview of

GIS design and applications and a descript ion of Geodetic Frameworks, it examines the type of information contained in a

typical oil and gas GIS. Case studies and examples are presented relating to a variety of GIS systems, and an Appendix of

GIS-related websites is included to help users find the most up-to-date information in this important area.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Introduction to Geographical Information Systems

GIS Design and Systems

Geodetic Frameworks

General and Background GIS Data

Exploration and Production GIS Data

Examples and Case Studies

Geographical Informat ion Systems: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 35 of 123

PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: Introductory Topics and SeismicSignals

Fundamentals of Exploration Geophysics (IHRDC_IPIMS_t66)

Description:

Analyzes geological situations where petroleum accumulations are possible and discusses tools used to locate and evaluate

those areas. Examines the divisions of an E&P company and the exploration decision-making process. Describes various cultural

and polit ical environments that affect explorat ion. Assumes no prior knowledge of geophysics.

Introduces reflection seismology, which accounts for 95% of the geophysical exploration effort. Examines the basic principles of

the method and discusses field work, processing, and interpretat ion. Describes the effect ive use of seismic data, as well as the

known pitfalls await ing the geophysicist.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Petroleum Exploration Overview

Seismic Methods

Fundamentals of Explorat ion Geophysics: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 36 of 123


Signal Theory: A Graphical Introduction (IHRDC_IPIMS_t67)

Description:

Imparts a broad understanding of the principles of signal theory. Extensive graphics introduce Fourier series, convolut ion and

correlat ion.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Waveforms

Operators

Noise

Correlation Techniques

Nonlinearity and Distort ion

Digital Representat ion of Waveforms

Signal Theory: A Graphical Introduct ion: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 37 of 123


Seismic Pulse Generation and Transmission (IHRDC_IPIMS_t69)

Description:

Examines the earth's response to a seismic source--a response affected by compression, divergence, absorpt ion, and the

generation and part it ioning of other wave types. Explores the nature of the seismic input, its variat ions, and the interpretation

risks that attend different sources.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Introduction to Seismic Pulse Generation and Transmission

Plane Compressional Waves

Spherical Compressional Waves

Physical Descript ion of the Seismic Method

Density and Velocity

Losses

Source Signature

Seismic Pulse Components: the Overall Picture

Shear Waves and Surface Waves

Seismic Pulse Generation and Transmission: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 38 of 123


Seismic Reflection (IHRDC_IPIMS_t70)

Description:

Explores the causes of seismic reflection and the effects of the earth's layering. Presents the synthetic seismogram and the

vert ical seismic profile, and t ies these images to the picture yielded by the seismic section. Examines the effects of mult iples and

saturants, as well as the geological significance of seismic reflection.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Reflect ion and Transmission

Mult iple Reflect ion

Curved and Discont inuous Reflectors

Seismic Response of a Layer

Short Path Mult iples

Geological Meaning of Reflectors

Saturant Effects

Non-Normal Incidence and Mode Conversion

Seismic Reflection: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 39 of 123


Geological Messages in the Seismic Trace (IHRDC_IPIMS_t71)

Description:

Explores the relat ionship between geological and seismic propert ies. Uses seismic strat igraphy to describe the seismic reflection

patterns of deposit ional environments, how to recognize source rocks, reservoir rocks and seals, and how to infer burial history,

likely saturant and geologic age.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Seismics and Geology

Rock Propert ies

Seismic Measurements and Geology

Reflect ion Patterns and Geology

Geological Messages in the Seismic Trace: References and Addit ional Informat ion

Topic 40 of 123

PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: Seismic Instruments and FieldTechniques

Introduction to Field Work (IHRDC_IPIMS_t72)

Description:

Introduces the field aspects of reflect ion seismology, examining seismic explorat ion in the field--on land, at sea, and in between.

Describes elements of seismic operation--instruments, locations, people and steps taken by seismic crews to record high-quality

data.

Details various tasks and environments peculiar to land-oriented field work. Emphasizes use of explosive sources and safety of

operations. Stresses public relat ions due to direct impact of land work on land owners, lessees and polit ical bodies.

Analyzes field work at sea and in the transit ion zone. Examines equipment, costs and special problems, hazards, requirements

and advantages of field work in marine sett ings. Part icular attention is paid to navigational systems.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Introduction to Field Work

Improving the Signal-to-Noise Ratio

Mult iple Coverage in Action

Recording Instruments

The Land Seismic Source

The Land Seismic Receiver

The Seismic Record

Acquisit ion Constraints

Costs and Contracts

Marine Work

The Transit ion Zone

Mult i-Component Data

Organizat ion of the Field Crew

Safety

The Location of Seismic Lines

The Observer's Report

Introduction to Field Work: References and Addit ional Information

Introduction to Field Work: Exercises

Topic 41 of 123


Surveying and Mapping on Land (IHRDC_IPIMS_t75)

Description:

Describes tasks of seismic crew surveyor: laying out seismic lines and recording spatial coordinates of each source or receiver.

Emphasizes precision, accuracy and appropriate tools. Examines electronic surveying and satellite-aided posit ioning, including

Global Posit ioning System.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Object ives and Requirements

The Figure and Rotation of the Earth

Frames of Reference

Surveying Methods

Land Surveying in Pract ice

Satellite Posit ioning Methods

Surveying and Mapping on Land: Exercises

Surveying and Mapping on Land: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 42 of 123


Positioning and Mapping at Sea (IHRDC_IPIMS_t76)

Description:

I llustrates requirements and methods of navigation and posit ioning in marine seismic operations. Gives the land surveyor's

nautical counterpart the necessary background to make required measurements, computations and compensations.

I llustrates steering ship on a planned line, relat ing line to previous surveys, and ensuring that a drilling rig can return to opt imal

location.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Introduction to Posit ioning and Mapping at Sea

Towed Streamer Acquisit ion

Satellite Posit ioning Systems

Secondary Posit ioning Systems

Posit ioning Systems Calibration

Definit ions Controls and Checks

Navigation Data

Navigation QC and Report ing

Addit ional Exploration Posit ioning Requirements

New Developments

Supplemental Informat ion

Posit ioning and Mapping at Sea: Exercises

Posit ioning and Mapping at Sea: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 43 of 123


Multiple Coverage (IHRDC_IPIMS_t77)

Description:

Focuses on mult iple coverage method of obtaining field data, which is an efficient means of improving signal-to-noise ratio,

and discusses use on land and at sea. Describes combination with common-midpoint stacking to further improve the rat io.

I llustrates survey planning to maximize coverage, minimize noise and work around physical obstacles.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Background

The Benefits and Limitations of Mult iple Coverage

The Surface Diagram

Mult iple Coverage at Sea

Mult iple Coverage On Land

Common-midpoint Stacking

Migration and Mult iple Coverage

Vert ical Seismic Profiling

Summary and Conclusions

Mult iple Coverage: References and Addit ional Information

Exercises and Solut ions

Conceptual Quest ions

Topic 44 of 123


Array Design (IHRDC_IPIMS_t78)

Description:

I llustrates noise reduction in the field by using arrays to enhance signal-to-noise ratio. Harmonizes array design as a field problem

with array design as a processing problem. Introduces an easy and effective approach to array design.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Array Design

Factors Affecting Group Dimensions

Approaches to Array Design

Tradit ional Array Design

Field Tests Measuring Source Generated Noise

A Universal Approach to Acquisit ion

Arrays in 3D

Arrays at Sea

Array Design: References and Addit ional Information


Topic 45 of 123


Vibroseis (IHRDC_IPIMS_t79)

Description:

Describes vibroseis--its use in the field and it s processing requirements--as an attract ive alternative to explosives in restricted

areas, now used in over half of all land operations. Discusses the mechanics of vibrator technology and the concept of pulse

compression to shape the sweep to an "impulsive" form.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Vibroseis in Principle

Vibroseis in Practice

Vibroseis: Exercises

Vibroseis: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 46 of 123


Choosing the Field Variables (IHRDC_IPIMS_t80)

Description:

Analyzes the exploration problem, the proper design of field programs, and the importance of the frequency variable.

Demonstrates how other variables depend on frequency and on each other. I llustrates how to optimize field work.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Introduction and Basic Concepts

Judgements From the Field Data

Field Variables

Experimental Shoot ing

Criteria for Choosing Field Variables

The Land Impulsive Source

The Vibroseis Source

Receivers and Recording Systems

Marine and Transit ion Zone Surveys

Conclusions

Choosing the Field Variables: References and Addit ional Information

Choosing the Field Variables: Exercises

Topic 47 of 123


Quality Control in the Field (IHRDC_IPIMS_t81)

Description:

Discusses quality control of land and marine operations. Presents the four major considerations of field quality control:

posit ioning, operations, record quality and report ing. Discusses crew safety and environmental concerns.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Introduction to Quality Control in the Field

Land Surveys

Marine Surveys

Safety and Environmental Concerns

Cost Effectiveness

Quality Control in the Field: References and Addit ional Informat ion

Quality Control in the Field: Exercises

Topic 48 of 123

PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: Seismic Interpretation

Basic Seismic Interpretation (IHRDC_IPIMS_t90)

Description:

Introduces seismic data interpretation. Describes petroleum habitats, explorat ion economics and management decision

criteria. Outlines specific geologic features recognizable on seismic sections. Teaches how to follow events along a section, as

well as t iming, picking and mapping them. I llustrates the use of seismic sections in interpreting geologic history.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Seismic Sections and Geological Features

Seismic Interpretation Examples

Basic Seismic Interpretation: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 49 of 123


Seismic Contouring (IHRDC_IPIMS_t91)

Description:

Introduces contouring. Describes mapping subsurface horizons by picking and t iming seismic events, finding counterparts

across faults or intrusions, and correlating between lines. Emphasizes interpolation for geologically plausible results.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Contouring Fundamentals

Contouring by Hand

Contouring by Machine

Interval Maps

Contour Maps: Operations

Seismic Contouring: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 50 of 123


Fault Interpretation (IHRDC_IPIMS_t92)

Description:

Presents types of fault ing along with the corresponding structural sett ings. Discusses the seismic expression of faults, in part icular

diffractions and fault plane reflect ions. Presents guidelines for fault interpretation, and discusses the impact of 3-D data and

workstations.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Faults in Petroleum Provinces

Stress and St rain

Fault Nomenclature

Seismic Expression of Faults

Fault Data Interpretation

Structural Styles and Fault ing

Faults: 3-D and Workstation Interpretation

Fault Interpretation: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 51 of 123


Velocity Interpretation and Depth Conversion (IHRDC_IPIMS_t93)

Description:

Provides an overview of the rock propert ies that affect velocity data. Presents t ime-depth conversion methods, detailing the

normalized interval velocity technique. Emphasizes the need for reliable maps when making exploration and drilling decisions.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Seismic Velocit ies

Normalized Interval Velocity

Well Velocit ies

Seismic Velocity Databases

Time-Depth Conversion Methods

Normalized Interval Velocity Techniques

Error Factors

Velocity Interpretation and Depth Conversion: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 52 of 123


Hydrocarbon Indicators (IHRDC_IPIMS_t94)

Description:

Discusses the various hydrocarbon indicators, explaining the physical causes of the significant feature recognized on seismic.

Presents approaches in acquisit ion, processing or interpretation which may upgrade an anomaly through validation as a

hydrocarbon indicator. Examines in detail the preservation of seismic att ributes, amplituderelated and other direct indicators,

inversion techniques and the use of 3D data and workstat ions.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Seismic Methods and Hydrocarbon Detection

Reflect ions and Seismic Parameters

Seismic Attributes and Their Preservation

Amplitude HCIs

Amplitude Versus offset (AVO)

Seismic Modeling

3-D Seismic Data, Workstations and Hydrocarbon Indicators

Shear Waves and Other Hydrocarbon Indicators

Hydrocarbon Indicator Validation

Hydrocarbon Indicators: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 53 of 123


Seismic Stratigraphic Modeling (IHRDC_IPIMS_t95)

Description:

Presents methods for extracting strat igraphic information from seismic data. Discusses acquisit ion concerns when the goal is

st rat igraphic analysis. Examines forward and inverse modeling, and AVO analysis. Presents case studies and the methods for

determining the success or failure of the methods applied.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Stratigraphic Prospects

Stratigraphic Seismology

Velocity and the Seismic Response

Forward Modeling

Inverse Modeling

Amplitude vs. offset Analysis

Seismic Strat igraphic Modeling: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 54 of 123

PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: 3-D Seismic and Other GeophysicalMethods

Gravity and Magnetics (IHRDC_IPIMS_t96)

Description:

Examines the physical processes responsible for observed gravimetric or magnetic effects, relat ing them to specific geophysical

or geological features. Explains instruments, proper field techniques and data processing methods. Using case studies, discusses

interpretation of both surface and borehole gravity surveys as well as magnetic surveys.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Gravitational Force Fields

Densit ies of Rocks

Determination of Gravity Effects on Geologic Bodies

Gravity Data: Reduct ion and Processing

Gravity Survey Design and Gravity Meters

Surface Gravity Interpretation

Borehole Gravity

Magnetic Force Fields

Magnetism of Rocks

Magnetic Anomalies and their Geological Significance

Magnetic Anomaly Signatures

Magnetic Inst ruments and Field Surveys

Magnetic Data Processing and Mapping

Magnetic Interpretat ion

Gravity and Magnetic Maps: Enhancement Methods

Gravity and Magnetics: References and Addit ional Informat ion

Topic 55 of 123


Other Geophysical Techniques (IHRDC_IPIMS_t996)

Description:

Presents in-situ velocity measurements. Integrates acoust ic-log data with velocity survey data. Describes interpretation of first

break arrival t imes and considerat ions in constructing a synthetic seismogram. Emphasizes correlation between the seismic

section and the synthetic seismogram.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Borehole Velocity Measurements

Synthetic Seismogram

Other Geophysical Techniques: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 56 of 123


Crosswell Seismology (IHRDC_IPIMS_t5600)

Description:

Crosswell methods use seismic tomography to image the reservoir zone between two or more wells. This topic int roduces you to

crosswell techniques and helps you understand when and where to apply them.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Introduction to Crosswell Seismology

When to Run a Crosswell Survey

Crosswell Data Acquisit ion

Crosswell Seismic Data Processing and Analysis

Crosswell Seismology Case Studies

Crosswell Seismology Exercises

Crosswell Seismology References and Addit ional Information

Crosswell Seismology Recommended Practices

Topic 57 of 123


Multicomponent Seismic Applications (IHRDC_IPIMS_t6105)

Description:

Provides an understanding of the value of recording mult icomponent seismic data. Describes the concepts of wave

propagation, shear wave splitt ing and amplitude variat ion with offset. Provides the basic principles of processing and

interpretation of mult icomponent data.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Introduction to Mult icomponent Seismic Applications

Exploration Value

Theory

Shear Source Shear Receiver

Compression Source Compression Receiver

Compression Source Shear Receiver

Processing

Interpretation

Review of Best Practices

Mult icomponent Seismic Applications: References and Addit ional Information

Mult icomponent Seismic Applications: Exercises

Topic 58 of 123


Vertical Seismic Profiles (IHRDC_IPIMS_t6365)

Description:

Examines VSP sources and receivers, and presents guidelines for planning and executing VSP surveys. Discusses data acquisit ion,

processing and interpretation, and methods for correlat ing VSP and seismic data. Provides examples of VSP exploration and

applicat ions.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Introduction to Vert ical Seismic Profiles

VSP Survey Fundamentals

VSP Survey Recording Geometries

The VSP Receiver

The VSP Source

Recording Systems

Pre-Survey Modeling

VSP Acquisit ion Practices and Concerns

VSP Processing Fundamentals

VSP Applications

Summary

Vert ical Seismic Profiles: References and Addit ional Information

Vert ical Seismic Profiles: Exercises

Topic 59 of 123


3-D and 4-D Seismic (IHRDC_IPIMS_t23455)

Description:

Introduces 3-D seismic techniques used in exploration and reservoir delineation. Describes operations involved in 3-D surveys,

including field work, processing and interpretation.

Presents a comprehensive look at 3-D techniques, including acquisit ion, processing and interpretat ion. Discusses acquisit ion

methods and quality control for land and marine surveys. Addresses velocity analyses, trace binning, NMO and migration.

Examines t ime slices, chair displays and other 3-D displays. I llustrates role and capabilit ies of the workstation in 3-D

interpretation. 4-D Seismic, also known as t ime-lapse monitoring is intended to highlight the differences between successive

vintages of 3-D seismic surveys that are caused by changes in reservoir propert ies due to production.

Duration:



Subtopics:

3-D Seismic Techniques: An Overview

3-D Seismic Data Acquisit ion

3-D Seismic Data Processing

3-D Interpretation Basics

3-D Interpretation in Practice

Overview of 3-D Volume Visualization

4-D Seismic Applications

3-D and 4-D Seismic: References and Addit ional Informat ion


Topic 60 of 123

PETROLEUM GEOPHYSICS: Seismic Processing

Basic Processing (IHRDC_IPIMS_t36504)

Description:

Outlines seismic processing objectives and describes how the sequential steps of pre-processing, stacking and velocity analysis,

migration and post-processing are used to generate the best possible image of the subsurface from recorded field data.

Discusses the effect of each step on the overall sequence, with emphasis on the two-fold goal of improving the signal-to-noise

ratio and locating seismic reflections with respect to their t rue spat ial posit ions.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Basic Processing Overview

Pre-Processing and Deconvolut ion

Stacking and Velocity Analysis

Migration and Post-Processes

Basic Processing: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 61 of 123


Initial Processes (IHRDC_IPIMS_t36535)

Description:

Describes the SEG-D and SEG-Y formats for recording and storing seismic data, along with the Observer's Reports and Field

Notes that contain essential informat ion for seismic data processing, and the init ial checks that are performed on field data.

Examines the steps involved in pre-processing seismic data, including gain recovery, de-mult iplexing, re-sampling, assigning

geometry, datum correct ions, amplitude adjustments, trace edit ing, common midpoint gather and common offset gather.

Addresses the pract ical considerat ions involved in selecting variables, establishing the processing order and reprocessing

exist ing seismic lines.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Field Data

Pre-Processing Flow

Practical Considerations

Init ial Processes: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 62 of 123


Velocities (IHRDC_IPIMS_t36565)

Description:

Reviews the physical factors that influence seismic velocity. Defines the various components of seismic velocity, and introduces

the concepts of stacking velocity and normal moveout. Describes analysis procedures and the practical considerations

involved, including techniques for interpreting and refining the velocity model. Discusses velocity analysis for anisotropic media.

Provides overviews of tomographic velocity analysis and migration velocity analysis.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Influencing Factors

Seismic Velocit ies Definit ion

Velocity Analysis

Practical Considerations for Velocity Analysis

Interpreting and Refining the Velocity Model

Addit ional Technologies

Velocit ies: References and Addit ional Informat ion

Topic 63 of 123


Stacking, Filtering and Display (IHRDC_IPIMS_t36607)

Description:

Describes the process of common midpoint stacking and int roduces alternate forms of stacking. Examines the use of

two-dimensional filters in separat ing different arrivals on the basis of their characterist ic velocit ies. Discusses pre-stack and

post-stack filtering processes, and the use of band pass filters, t ime variant filters and filter panels. Reviews different methods for

displaying final record sect ions based on the needs of the seismic interpreter.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Common Midpoint Stacking

Alternative Forms

Velocity Filters

Final Filtering

Display

Stacking, Filtering and Display: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 64 of 123


Seismic Migration (IHRDC_IPIMS_t36616)

Description:

Reviews the seismic reflect ion process. Examines the fundamentals of seismic migration and how geological features affect

seismic data. Discusses practical considerations in applying migration methods. Addresses the issue of seismic migration in

anisotropic media.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Overview of Seismic Migration

Seismic Migration Methods

Depth Migration

2D Versus 3D Migration

Seismic Migration in Anisotropic Media

Seismic Migration: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 65 of 123


Deconvolution (IHRDC_IPIMS_t36653)

Description:

Introduces the concept of the convolut ional model and describes the use of deconvolut ion in removing coherent noise and

minimizing the effect of the wavelet on the final stack. Defines deconvolut ion parameters. Examines single-trace, determinist ic

and mult i-t race deconvolut ion methods, along with alternative methods such as maximum likelihood, minimum entropy and

L1-norm deconvolut ion. Addresses pract ical considerat ions in applying deconvolut ion methods and provides a suggested

processing scheme.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Basic Concepts

Single-Trace Statist ical Deconvolut ion

Determinist ic Methods

Mult i-Trace Deconvolut ion

Alternative Methods of Deconvolut ion

Practical Considerations in Deconvolut ion

Deconvolut ion: References and Addit ional Informat ion

Topic 66 of 123


Static Corrections (IHRDC_IPIMS_t36726)

Description:

Examines how stat ic corrections are applied to seismic data to compensate for near-surface or water-bottom effects.

Describes long-wavelength stat ic problems and computation methods, including considerations in choosing a seismic datum

and accounting for the geology of the area. Examines determinist ic methods for deriving the near-surface velocity model.

Discusses short-wavelength stat ic corrections, including cross-correlation methods, surface-consistent methods, genetic

algorithms, cross-dip correct ions and 3-D statics. Describes layer replacement techniques of ray trace modeling and wave

equat ion datuming.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Basic Concepts

Long Wavelength Statics

Determinist ic Techniques for Deriving the Near Surface Velocity Models

Short Wavelength Static (Residual Static)

Layer Replacement Techniques

Static Corrections: References and Addit ional Informat ion

Topic 67 of 123

PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Production Equipment andOperations

Wellheads, Flow Control Equipment and Flowlines (IHRDC_IPIMS_t110)

Description:

Reviews the types and features of casing and tubing housings, Christmas tree components and flowline valves, as well as

flowline sizing, installat ions and operating procedures. Describes the basic design and operating requirements of typical

production manifolds and presents a wide variety of equipment options.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Casing and Tubing Head Equipment

Flow Control at the Wellhead

Flowlines

Valves, Fitt ings and Flanges

Production Manifolds

Wellheads, Flow Control Equipment and Flowlines: References and Addit ional

Topic 68 of 123


Fluid Separation and Treatment (IHRDC_IPIMS_t111)

Description:

Describes the functions and components of vert ical and horizontal separators and oil t reating equipment. I llust rates design

considerations, including sizing calculations, for both two-phase and three-phase flow.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Production Facility Overview

Separation of Produced Fluids

Treatment of Separat ion Oil

Fluid Separation and Treatment: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 69 of 123


Wireline Production Operations (IHRDC_IPIMS_t112)

Description:

A comprehensive introduction to wireline operations. Describes each component of the basic surface equipment setup and

the typical workstring of tools, along with commonly used subsurface complet ion and production control wireline equipment.

Describes the running and pulling procedures for Baker, Camco and Otis equipment.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Introduction to Wireline Production Work

Wireline Surface Equipment

Wireline Tool String, Basic Components

Wireline Tubing Condit ioning Skills

Wireline Pulling Tools and Running Tools

Wireline Fishing Tools

Wireline Bailers

Wireline Specialty Tools

Wireline-Operated Completion and Production Control Equipment

Wireline Remedial Operations

Wireline Well Maintenance and Data Gathering

Wireline Operat ing Requirements

Wireline Production Operations: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 70 of 123


Oilfield Safety (IHRDC_IPIMS_t113)

Description:

Introduces principles and general procedures for managing emergencies, report ing and invest igating accidents, and

maintaining safety in day-to-day activit ies. Addresses hazards that are common to most oil and gas sites, emphasizing

awareness, planning and training as keys to preventing accidents.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Emergency Prepareness

Incident Report ing and Invest igation

Safety Hazards in Oil and Gas Production

Safe Work Practices

Safety and Control of Site Activit ies

Fire Prevent ion and Control

Oilfield Safety: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 71 of 123


Cased Hole Logging (IHRDC_IPIMS_t114)

Description:

Introduces the logging techniques used in cased wells. Describes various types of radioactive tools for determining lithology and

fluid saturation, acoust ic devices for well integrity logging, and a range of flow monitoring logs. Highlights each tool's operating

principles.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Cased Hole Logging Overview

Formation Evaluation in Cased Holes

Cement Bond Evaluation

Casing Inspection

Qualitat ive Flow Evaluat ion

Flow Rate Determination in the Wellbore

Production Logging of Mult iphase Flow in Horizontal Wells

Cased Hole Logging: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 72 of 123

PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Drilling Engineering

Well Planning (IHRDC_IPIMS_t115)

Description:

Introduces the drilling procedure and provides a clear "blueprint" for the safe, efficient drilling of a well. Integrates the mud,

casing, bit , cementing and safety programs. Presents an understanding of how a well proposal is init iated and just ified

economically.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Well Planning Overview

Well Selection

AFE Preparat ion

Well Plan Organizat ion and Data Gathering

Well Design Considerations

Rig Design Considerations

Procedures

Drilling Contracts

Cost Reviews

Well Planning: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 73 of 123


Drill String Components (IHRDC_IPIMS_t116)

Description:

Introduces the tools that make up a typical drill st ring, including the kelly, the drill pipe, and the components of the bottomhole

assembly. Describes design, selection, performance and evaluation of common drill bit types. Emphasizes the general

applicat ion of various downhole tools and development of sound drilling practices.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Drill String Overview

Kelly

Drill Pipe

Drill Collars

Heavy Wall Drill Pipe

Bottomhole Assembly Tools

Drill String Components: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 74 of 123


Drilling Fluids and the Circulating System (IHRDC_IPIMS_t117)

Description:

Introduces drilling fluid types and describes field monitoring of their propert ies, along with cleaning and circulation equipment

employed at the wellsite. Emphasizes applications of drilling fluids and unique propert ies which make each fluid suitable to

control specific subsurface environments. Incorporates field footage of equipment with laboratory footage showing mud

components and test ing procedures.Summarizes environmental concerns related to use and disposal of drilling fluids. Includes

basic calculations used in drilling fluid engineering.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Drilling Fluids Overview

Drilling Rig Circulating System

Drilling Fluid Components and Addit ives

Drilling Fluid Systems

Solids Control

Clay Chemist ry

Environmental Aspects of Drilling Mud Engineering

Field Tests of Drilling Fluids

Mud Engineering Calculations

Drilling Fluids and the Circulating System: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 75 of 123


Directional and Horizontal Drilling (IHRDC_IPIMS_t118)

Description:

Introduces basic principles of wellbore deviation and directional control. Describes features, applications, benefits and

limitat ions of various directional and horizontal well profiles. Discusses tools, planning, survey techniques and operating

practices, point ing out problems that are unique to horizontal and high-angle directional drilling.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Directional Drilling Overview

Deviation in Vert ical Wells

Directional Drilling Tools and Techniques

Horizontal Wells

Drilling Hydraulics in Deviated Wells

Drill String and Bit Considerat ions in Deviated Wells

Underblanced Drilling in Direct ional Wells

Directional and Horizontal Drilling: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 76 of 123


Drilling Problems and Drilling Optimization (IHRDC_IPIMS_t119)

Description:

Describes occurrences, preventive measures and remedial actions for common downhole drilling problems. Addresses

considerations involved in drilling abnormal pressures, working in sour gas environments and planning fishing operations.

Discusses procedures for opt imizing bit hydraulics, bit weight and rotary speed to attain minimum cost drilling. Emphasizes

importance of the mud system in meet ing well objectives.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Drilling Object ives

Pressure, Hydraulics and Hole Cleaning

Abnormal Pressure Environments

Kick Detection and Control

Lost Circulation

Borehole Instability

Stuck Pipe

Fishing Operations

Hydrogen Sulfide

Drilling Optimization

Drilling Problems and Drilling Optimizat ion: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 77 of 123

PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Well Completion and Stimulation

Basic Completion Design and Practices (IHRDC_IPIMS_t120)

Description:

Introduces features used to categorize well completions, emphasizing the importance of correct tubing design and

techniques. Presents downhole components common in producing wells. Outlines the major completion operations: cementing,

logging, perforating, st imulation and sand control.

Duration:



Subtopics:

General Design Criteria

Basic Downhole Configurat ions

Lift Methods

Subsea Completions

Completion Productivity

Completion Planning

Topic 78 of 123


Cementing (IHRDC_IPIMS_t121)

Description:

Covers procedures and equipment used in primary and secondary cement jobs. Reviews the basic chemistry of various bulk

cement and cement addit ives, as well as industry-standard mixing procedures. Describes surface and downhole equipment,

precise placement techniques, quality control and safe work practices.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Introduction to Cementing

Manufacture and Classification of Oilwell Cements

Cement Test ing Procedures

Cement Addit ives

Primary Cementing Equipment

Primary Cementing Operat ions

Squeeze Cementing

Cement Plugs

Evaluat ing/Test ing the Cement Job

Fluid Flow Propert ies and Mud Displacement

Cementing: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 79 of 123


Perforating (IHRDC_IPIMS_t122)

Description:

Describes the operation of shaped charges, as well as basic categories of perforating guns and perforating methods. Reviews

API test ing procedures, methods of predicting and maximizing perforation product ivity, equipment and operating procedures

for wireline and tubing-conveyed techniques. Emphasizes job-planning, quality control and safety guidelines.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Introduction to Perforating

Perforating Gun Types

Perforating and Production Performance

Electric Wireline Perforating

Tubing-Conveyed Perforating

Perforating: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 80 of 123


Acidizing and Other Chemical Treatments (IHRDC_IPIMS_t123)

Description:

Introduces safe, cost-effective acid treatment design. Covers three basic treatments: acid washing, matrix acidizing and acid

fracturing. Describes the costs and potential hazards of acidizing, and emphasizes proper just ification and care in field

procedures. Reviews fundamentals of acid chemistry and test ing and field procedures.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Introduction to Acidizing

Acid Treating Solut ions

Addit ives in Acidizing Fluids

Matrix Acidizing

Fracture Acidizing

Divert ing Materials in Acidizing

Wellbore Cleanout and Scale Removal

Paraffins and Asphaltenes

Acidizing and Other Chemical Treatments: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 81 of 123


Hydraulic Fracturing (IHRDC_IPIMS_t124)

Description:

Introduces three aspects of hydraulic fracture st imulation: theory, design, and execut ion. Reviews rock mechanics and fracture

modeling. Discusses hydraulic fracture st imulation treatments, including determining fracture dimensions and selecting

proppants and chemical addit ives. Presents case study of an actual fracturing job.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Hydraulic Fracturing Fundamentals

Hydraulic Fracturing Fluids

Proppant Agents

Acid Fracturing

Hydraulic Fracture Treatment Design and Execut ion

Hydraulic Fracturing: Emerging Technologies

Hydraulic Fracturing: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 82 of 123


Sand Control (IHRDC_IPIMS_t125)

Description:

Covers sand control topics from rock mechanics to equipment. Emphasizes est imation and control methods. Presents

gravel-pack design and placement procedures in detail, describing surface equipment used, as well as downhole screens and

associated equipment.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Sand Production in Oil and Gas Wells

Completion and Production Practices

Liners and Screens

Gravel Packing

Frac-and-Pack Techniques

Consolidation Techniques

Sand Control in Wells Producing Heavy Oil

Sand Control: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 83 of 123


Horizontal Wells: Completion and Evaluation (IHRDC_IPIMS_t126)

Description:

Introduces the deliverability equation for horizontal wells. Compares horizontal and vert ical well performance. Identifies

formation characterist ics that favor horizontal wells, and discusses methods for their determinat ion. Describes basic well

configurations and complet ion designs. Looks at practical aspects of cementing, zonal isolation, casing design and sand

control. Address guidelines for matrix acid treatments and hydraulic fracture st imulations.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Horizontal Wells in a Reservoir Management Strategy

Horizontal Well Completions

Matrix St imulation of Horizontal Wells

Hydraulic Fracturing of Horizontal Wells

Mult ilateral, Mult ibranched and Mult ilevel Wells

Horizontal Wells: Completion and Evaluat ion: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 84 of 123

PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Other Petroleum Engineering Topics

Natural Gas Fluid Properties (IHRDC_IPIMS_t141)

Description:

Introduces basic concepts, inst rumentation and terminology used in natural gas engineering. Reviews characterist ics of

natural gas fluid systems. Describes devices for measuring temperature, pressure, volume, flow rate, density and other

propert ies, and discusses well selection, condit ioning and sampling procedures. Outlines methods for measuring mass flow rates

and determining mixed-stream composit ions.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Natural Gas Fluid Systems

Natural Gas Fluid Propert ies

Temperature Measurement

Pressure Measurement

Volume and Flow Rate Measurement

Gravity/ Density Measurement and Gas Composit ion

Natural Gas Fluid Sampling

Mass Flow Rate

Mixed Stream Composit ion

Natural Gas Fluid Propert ies: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 85 of 123


Risk Analysis Applied to Petroleum Investments (IHRDC_IPIMS_t142)

Description:

Introduces concepts of risk and uncertainty as they apply to the oil and gas indust ry. Describes risk analysis models, measures of

profitability and other decision-making tools. Reviews principles of probability distribution and introduces the Monte Carlo

simulat ion model. Presents procedures for running simulation models using @RISK software. Discusses the role of competit ive

bidding in the petroleum industry.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Risk Analysis Fundamentals

Probability Distributions

Monte Carlo Simulation Models

Competit ive Bidding

Risk Analysis Applied to Petroleum Investments: References and Addit ional Informat ion

Topic 86 of 123

PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Petroleum Production Performance

Fluid Flow and the Production System (IHRDC_IPIMS_t978)

Description:

Outlines the basic components of the producing system: reservoir, wellbore, and surface flow-control equipment. Explains the

interrelated nature of these components from the perspective of the production engineer.

Discusses inflow performance in more detail, presenting the basic methods for determining IPR curves from limited data.

Mathematics and terminology are explained for each technique.

Elaborates on vert ical lift performance, illustrat ing the flow regimes possible in vert ical tubing st rings as well as correlations for

determining pressure losses. Integrates inflow performance and vert ical lift performance for a flowing well.

Integrates the concepts introduced in the previous three modules, presenting graphical techniques for integrating inflow and

vert ical lift performance with surface-control condit ions.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Production Systems

Inflow Performance Relationship

Vert ical Lift Performance

Flowing Well Performance

Fluid Flow and the Production System: Reference Sect ion

Topic 87 of 123


Production Performance Evaluation (IHRDC_IPIMS_t982)

Description:

Presents the basis for graphical production-rate-extrapolation techniques. I llustrates and explains the fundamental equat ions

and smoothing procedures with examples.

Duration:

Min: 50 minutes


Subtopics:

Production Rate Decline Curves

Production Performance Evaluation: Reference Section

Topic 88 of 123


Drill Bits (IHRDC_IPIMS_t983)

Description:

Describes design, selection, performance and evaluation of common drill bit types. Emphasizes the general applicat ion of

various downhole tools and development of sound drilling practices.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Introduction to Drill Bits

Bit Design (Rolling Cutter Types)

Bit Design (Fixed Cutter Types)

Bit Hydraulics

Bit Selection Criteria

Bit Grading and Evaluation

Bit Operating Guidelines

Drill Bit s: References and Addit ional Informat ion

Topic 89 of 123

PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Reservoir Engineering

Reservoir Environments and Characterization (IHRDC_IPIMS_t984)

Description:

Introduces important deposit ional environments and processes. Explains the geological, geophysical and engineering

information vital to reservoir characterization, and its use in reservoir management.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Sandstone Reservoir Environments

Carbonate Reservoir Environments

Reservoir Characterization

Reservoir Environments and Characterization: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 90 of 123


Fundamentals of Reservoir Engineering (IHRDC_IPIMS_t986)

Description:

Introduces fluid flow and natural drive mechanisms. Describes basic reservoir engineering goals and the tools and resources

employed by reservoir engineers. Describes the behavior of gas and gas condensate reservoirs, using the real gas equation of

state and the P/Z versus cumulative production approaches. Discusses major drive mechanisms and the calculation of OIP

using material balance equations.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Basic Concepts in Reservoir Engineering

Reservoir Fluid Flow and Natural Drive Mechanisms

Fundamentals of Reservoir Engineering: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 91 of 123


Improved Recovery Processes (IHRDC_IPIMS_t987)

Description:

Secondary Recovery: Waterflooding & Gas Injection

Introduces the fundamental principles governing the displacement of oil by water in reservoir rocks, as well as techniques for

predicting oil recovery by water and gas injection. Describes the important factors to consider in planning secondary recovery

projects.

Enhanced Recovery: Miscible Flooding

Introduces the physical and chemical processes governing the recovery of oil by miscible displacing agents. Contains extensive

discussion of methods for est imating oil recovery. Describes the considerations involved in designing a miscible flood, and

illustrates these considerat ions by reviewing a number of pilot tests and commercial projects.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Secondary Recovery: Waterflooding and Gas Injection

Enhanced Recovery: Miscible Flooding

Improved Recovery Processes: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 92 of 123


Reservoir Modeling and Reserves Evaluation (IHRDC_IPIMS_t989)

Description:


Introduces the concepts of reservoir modeling, and outlines the steps involved in a reservoir simulation study. Reviews rock

propert ies, fluid propert ies and the mathematical descript ion of fluid flow dynamics in porous media. Describes computer

methods for sett ing up a numerical model and solving flow equations. Discusses pract ical applications of reservoir modeling,

including the use of special purpose simulators.

Reserves Estimation

Introduces reserves est imation and the industry definit ions used to categorize reserves. I llustrates principal methods of

calculation: analogy/statist ical, volumetric, material balance and performance trend analogy. Presents special considerations

for est imating reserves in fractured, geopressured, heavy oil, low permeability or part ial water-drive gas reservoirs.

Duration:



Subtopics:


Reserves Est imation

Reservoir Modeling and Reserves Evaluation: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 93 of 123


Issues in Reservoir Management (IHRDC_IPIMS_t991)

Description:

Evaluation of Naturally Fractured Reservoirs

Discusses the origin and classification of natural fractures, and outlines methods for detecting and characterizing them.

Discusses how the propert ies of fractured formations affect reservoir engineering considerations. Out lines general approaches

to modeling fractured reservoirs, illustrat ing these approaches with several case studies.

Reservoir Management of Mature Fields

Introduces the concept of synergism in reservoir management, stressing an interdisciplinary approach as key to maximizing a

field's potential. Outlines data requirements and methodology for evaluating a mature reservoir. Discusses applied reservoir

management from the standpoint of increasing reserves and monitoring performance, with special emphasis on waterflooding

and enhanced oil recovery projects.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Evaluat ion of Naturally Fractured Reservoirs

Reservoir Management of Mature Fields

Issues in Reservoir Management: References and Addit ional Informat ion

Topic 94 of 123


Completion Equipment (IHRDC_IPIMS_t1926)

Description:

Presents downhole components common in producing wells.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Tubulars

Packers

Art ificial Lift Equipment

Downhole Completion Accessories

Subsurface Safety Valves (SSSVs)

Wellhead Equipment

Completion Equipment: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 95 of 123


Oil and Gas Pipelines (IHRDC_IPIMS_t5723)

Description:

This topic covers the engineering design and construction aspects of oil and gas pipelines. Discusses pipeline history, key design

considerations (including hydraulic calculations and mechanical st rength), onshore and offshore constructions pract ices, cost

est imating, current operating practices and This topic covers the engineering design and construction aspects of oil and gas

pipelines. Discusses pipeline history, key design considerations (including hydraulic calculations and mechanical strength),

onshore and offshore construct ions practices, cost est imat ing, current operating practices and potential operating problems.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Overview of Oil and Gas Pipelines

Hydraulics

Mechanical Design

Construction

Operations

Oil and Gas Pipelines: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 96 of 123


Integrated Reservoir Characterization (IHRDC_IPIMS_t5858)

Description:

Integrated Reservoir Characterization pulls together data and talents from a number of disciplines to opt imize field production.

This topic describes the contributions of the geologist, geophysicist, petroleum engineer, and petrophysicist as they combine

data and interpretations to build a comprehensive model of the reservoir.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Introduction to Integrated Reservoir Characterizat ion

Assembly and Review of Exist ing Data

Data Acquisit ion

Data Analysis and Interpretation

Data Integration

Conclusion

Recommended Processes

Case Study 1 - Anasazi Field

Case Study 2 - Yibal Field

Integrated Reservoir Characterization: References and Addit ional Information

Integrated Reservoir Characterization: Exercises

Topic 97 of 123

PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Production Facilities Design

Oil Systems and Equipment (IHRDC_IPIMS_t6433)

Description:

These presentations provide an understanding of two-phase and three-phase separators, describe how they work and what

the design procedures are for sizing them. Then, different methods and procedures are described for oil t reating and associated

equipment design. Oil desalt ing is the process of removing water-soluble salts from an oil stream. This presentat ion describes the

equipment commonly used and provides references for sizing the equipment. Crude oil or condensate stabilizat ion describes

the various processes used to stabilize a crude oil or condensate st ream, and presents a preliminary method for determining

liquid recoveries through stabilizat ion.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Two Phase Separators

Three Phase Separators

Oil Treaters

Desalt ing

Crude Stabilizat ion

Oil Systems and Equipment: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 98 of 123


Gas Systems and Equipment (IHRDC_IPIMS_t6434)

Description:

Besides sales contract restrict ions, several other reasons exist for the removal of acid components from natural gas streams.

Among these are personnel safety, odor reduct ion, and fuel Btu improvement. The process of removing water vapor from a gas

st ream is called "gas dehydration. This presentation discusses conventional TEG dehydration and presents a method to size and

design the glycol dehydration equipment. Compressors are used whenever it is necessary to flow gas from a low pressure system

to a higher pressure system. This presentation provides guidelines on selecting the type of compressor to use for each

applicat ion, determining power requirements, and designing the piping system associated with the compressor.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Acid Gas Removal

Glycol Dehydration

Reciprocating Compressors

Gas Systems and Equipment: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 99 of 123


Water Systems and Equipment (IHRDC_IPIMS_t6435)

Description:

In production operations, it is often necessary to handle wastewater. The water must be separated from the oil and disposed of

in an environmentally safe manner. This presentation describes the equipment used to separate, t reat, collect, and dispose of

wastewater, along with procedures for designing a water treating system consist ing of skimmer tanks and vessels, plate

coalescers, flotation units, and/or disposal piles. Information about equipment selection and sizing for removing suspended

solids and dissolved gases from water is also provided.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Treating Oil from Produced Water

Removing Solids and Dissolved Gases from Produced Water

Water Systems and Equipment: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 100 of 123


Utility Systems and Equipment (IHRDC_IPIMS_t6436)

Description:

This topic presents informat ion on fuel system design, providing guidelines for determining the facility fuel requirements and

information on select ing equipment needed to treat fuels prior to use. Technical explanations on Fired heaters and their uses,

along with guidelines for selecting and specifying a fired heater is presented. The next tutorial provides methods for determining

the amount of waste heat energy available, and presents information and procedures on the design of a waste heat recovery

system. Then, various components of refrigeration and heating systems are described, and a procedure is established for sizing

evaporator duties, condenser duties, compressor horsepower, fan horsepower and duct sizes. In the last two subtopics, a basic

understanding of reciprocating and centrifugal pumps is provided.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Fuel Gas Systems

Fired Heaters and Hydrate Control

Heat Transfer Systems

Waste Heat Recovery

Heating, Vent ilat ion, and Air Condit ioning

Reciprocating Pumps

Centrifugal Pumps

Utility Systems and Equipment: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 101 of 123


Instrumentation (IHRDC_IPIMS_t6437)

Description:

This presentation covers the principles of control theory and the popular methods of implementation. Pressure, temperature

and, flow measurement equipment types and their selection criteria is explained in detail. Different types and typical mounting

practices for Level Instruments is presented. Control valves are described in terms of how to select the proper type of valve,

suitable materials, and an appropriate size. Specifications and review of Safety Shutdown and Wellhead Control systems are

covered in detail.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Controllers and Control Theory

Pressure Measurement and Control

Temperature Measurement and Control

Flow Measurement and Control

Level Measurement and Control

Control Valves

Safety Shutdown Systems

Wellhead Shutdown Systems

Instrumentat ion: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 102 of 123


Platform and Structural Design Considerations (IHRDC_IPIMS_t6438)

Description:

This presentation describes planning, designing, and arranging of equipment on offshore structures for the safe and efficient

production of oil and gas. General criteria is provided for designing living quarters. This content also provides the project

engineer with information for determining line size, wall thickness, and pressure rating class. Miscellaneous details to be

considered in designing a piping system also are discussed.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Offshore Facility Layout

Living Quarters Layout

Facilit ies Piping

Platform and Structural Design Considerations: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 103 of 123


Underbalanced Drilling (IHRDC_IPIMS_t23393)

Description:

This presentation covers the underbalanced drilling method, which is defined as the practice of drilling a well with the wellbore

fluid gradient less than the natural formation gradient. Besides minimizing lost circulation and increasing the penetrat ion rate,

this technique has a widely recognized benefit of minimizing the damage caused by invasion of drilling fluid into the formation.

Different underbalanced drilling equipment and techniques are discussed under this topic. The underbalanced well

classification system used by the industry and several case studies are also covered in this presentation.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Introduction to Underbalanced Drilling

Dry Air Drilling

Nitrogen Drilling

Natural Gas Drilling

Mist Drilling

Foam Drilling

Stiff Foam Drilling

Gasified Liquids

Flow-Drilling

Snub Drilling

Underbalanced Drilling: General Issues

Case Studies

Underbalanced Drilling: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 104 of 123


Intelligent Completions (IHRDC_IPIMS_t36209)

Description:

As the oil indust ry matures, it must seek better and more efficient ways to exploit diminishing resources. To maximize production

and improve the economics of reservoirs, oil companies must resort to a wide range of sophist icated completion strategies. By

real-t ime data monitoring with remote-controlled sliding sleeves or variable chokes, intelligent completions help operators to

better manage production, eliminate or reduce interventions and associated production downtime, well costs and risks. This

new IPIMS topic discusses the overall evolut ion of intelligent well complet ions, and describes a variety of intelligent well

technologies that focus on measurement and control techniques to optimize oil and gas production.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Introduction to Intelligent Completions

Fundamentals of Pressure Sensors

Fiber Opt ic Sensing and Telemetry Systems

Downhole Flow Control

Assessing Reliability

Intelligent Completions: References and Further Reading

Topic 105 of 123


Artificial Lift Methods (IHRDC_IPIMS_t36234)

Description:

Introduces the concept of art ificial lift as a means of optimizing production performance. Establishes screening and selection

criteria for the major art ificial lift methods. Describes surface and subsurface equipment, design procedures and operat ing

practices for continuous and intermittent gas lift , reciprocating rod pump, progressive cavity pump, hydraulic pump, electrical

submersible pump and plunger lift systems.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Art ificial Lift Overview

Gas Lift

Reciprocating Rod Pump Systems

Progressive Cavity Pump (PCP) Systems

Hydraulic Pump Systems

Electrical Submersible Pump (ESP) Systems

Plunger Lift Systems

Art ificial Lift Methods: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 106 of 123

PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Offshore Operations

Offshore Production Facilities (IHRDC_IPIMS_t36282)

Description:

Start ing with a broad look at the offshore oil and gas industry, including it s history, current scope, trends, challenges and an

overview of regulatory environments, this Topic examines the primary design considerations for offshore production facilit ies and

identifies key drivers and decision factors in offshore project development. It goes on to describe the various types of platforms,

surface components and subsea production facilit ies: their design features, equipment components operating considerat ions

and areas of applicat ion. Included are discussions of offshore pipelines, production equipment and operations, and

requirements for decommissioning and removal of offshore facilit ies. The presentation concludes with case studies of

deepwater operations in West Africa and the Gulf of Mexico.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Overview Of The Offshore Petroleum Industry

Primary Design Considerations For Offshore Production Facilit ies

Development Project Drivers And Key Decision Factors

Platforms And Surface Facilit ies

Subsea Production Facilit ies

Offshore Pipelines

Offshore Production Equipment And Operations

Decommissioning And Removal Of Offshore Facilit ies

Offshore Development: Case Studies

Offshore Production Facilit ies: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 107 of 123

PETROLEUM ENGINEERING: Offshore Operations

Deepwater Drilling (IHRDC_IPIMS_t36797)

Description:

The term “deepwater” has always been defined in terms of where offshore technology stood at a given moment. In the early

1960s, 500-foot water depths placed a practical limit on offshore drilling capabilit ies; by 2003, the water depth record had

surpassed 10,000 feet. This Topic describes the equipment and technology that have made such advances possible. Start ing

with an overview of worldwide drilling activity, it looks at the characterist ics of deepwater environments and the challenges

they pose with respect to rig requirements and offshore project management. It goes on to discuss the systems, equipment

and considerations involved in deepwater well planning, design and construction. It then examines some of the innovat ive

solut ions to deepwater drilling challenges, ranging from riserless drilling to dual act ivity operations. Finally, it presents several

case studies to show how these solut ions have been applied in the Gulf of Mexico, offshore eastern Canada and the North Sea.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Deepwater Projects And Environments

Deepwater Drilling Systems And Equipment

Deepwater Well Planning And Design

Deepwater Well Const ruction

Advanced Solut ions For Deepwater Drilling Challenges

Deepwater Case Histories

Deepwater Drilling: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 108 of 123

FORMATION EVALUATION: Wireline Well Logging

Well Log Interpretation (IHRDC_IPIMS_t26)

Description:

Explains commonly used log analysis techniques and formulas. Demonstrates the use of logging tools to evaluate porosity,

lithology and saturation. Presents computer applicat ions, methods and models and combines the various tools and

measurements in a concluding case study.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Quick-Look Analysis

Fluid Saturation

Fractures

Porosity

Lithology

Interpretation Models

Computer Applications

Field Studies

Well Log Interpretation: Reference Section

Advances in Low Resist ivity Pay Evaluat ion

Topic 109 of 123


Dipmeter Surveys (IHRDC_IPIMS_t27)

Description:

Introduces the standard four-arm dipmeter tool, which measures resist ivity, hole size and sonde orientation. Describes

correlat ions between recorded t races and true dips of bed boundaries. Presents characterist ic patterns from which structural

dip, fault ing, unconformit ies, bed geometry and deposit ional environment can be inferred. Also discusses the use of clustered

microresist ivity buttons to reveal bedding textures, vugs and fractures.

Duration:



Subtopics:

General Principles

Computation

Dip Patterns

Interpretation Overview

Structural Dip Interpretation

Lithological Interpretation

Fault Interpretation

Reef Interpretat ion

Unconformity Interpretation

Deposit ional Interpretation

Interpretation

Dipmeter Surveys: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 110 of 123

FORMATION EVALUATION: Rock and Fluid Sampling andAnalysis

Sampling and Analysis of Drilled Cuttings (IHRDC_IPIMS_t29)

Description:

Rock cutt ings from drill bit s can be the most reliable source of information available at a wellsite. Presents the procedures and

responsibilit ies involved in wellsite evaluation of cutt ings and cores. Emphasizes attention to quality control in the collection,

preparation, and storage of cutt ings and cores to ensure laboratory analysis accurately measures subsurface condit ions.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Rotary Drilling and Cutt ings Generat ion

Sample Collection and Handling

Sample Descript ion

Sampling and Analysis of Drilled Cutt ings: References and Addit ional Informat ion

Topic 111 of 123

FORMATION EVALUATION: Well Testing and Analysis

Fundamentals of Well Testing (IHRDC_IPIMS_t127)

Description:

Introduces the theory of pressure-transient analysis. I llust rates the measurement devices used to detect and record pressures

during well test ing. Presents fundamentals of well sampling and test ing.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Introduction to Fundamentals of Well Test ing

Pressure Profiles at the Wellbore

Defining the Reservoir Model

Quantitat ive Well Test Interpretat ion

Well Test Planning and Execution

Fundamentals of Well Test ing: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 112 of 123


Gas Well Testing (IHRDC_IPIMS_t128)

Description:

Presents the fundamental theory and mathematical basis for determining gaswell performance from well test data. Outlines

field test ing procedures and interpretation methods.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Conventional and Isochronal Gas Well Tests

Addit ional Test ing Options

Special Considerations in Test ing Gas Wells

Test Procedures and Regulat ions (Examples)

Gas Well Test ing: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 113 of 123


Oil Well Testing (IHRDC_IPIMS_t129)

Description:

Reviews the mathematical basis for different types of well tests and interpretation procedures for well test data, including

buildup and drawdown tests, mult iple rate tests, interference and pulse test ing.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Basics of Pressure Transient Analysis

Log-log Analysis

Test Design

Test Analysis

Oil Well Test ing: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 114 of 123


Drillstem Testing (IHRDC_IPIMS_t130)

Description:

Introduces equipment and procedures for drillstem test ing. Describes basic tool assemblies and operating procedures for fixed

and floating rig test ing. I llustrates qualitat ive and quantitat ive analysis of drillstem test data.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Overview of Drillstem Test ing

Types of Drillstem Tests

Tool String: Convent ional DST (Open Hole)

Tool String: Other DST Types

Test ing on Floating Vessels

Pressure Recorders for DSTs

Surface DST Equipment

DST Design and Field Procedures

DST Interpretation: General Aspects

DST Interpretation: Qualitat ive Analysis

DST Interpretation: Quantitat ive Analysis

Drillstem Test ing: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 115 of 123


Mud Logging (IHRDC_IPIMS_t997)

Description:

Demonstrates the techniques of conventional mud logging during the preparation of a formation log and accompanying

event reports. Presents the rate-of-penetration curve, lithology plot, total gas curve, gas composit ion curves and descript ive

track. Also discusses the use of mud logging in overpressure recognit ion, hydrocarbon evaluation and non-hydrocarbon gas

detect ion. Summarizes computer-based data acquisit ion and measurement-while-drilling techniques.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Introduction to Mud Logging

Conventional Mud Logging Practices

Penetration Rate and Lithology

Gas Measurement and Analysis

Supplemental Logging Techniques and Applications

Advanced Mud Logging and Advisory Practices

Selection of Services and Equipment

Mud Logging: References and Addit ional Informat ion

Topic 116 of 123


Coring and Core Analysis (IHRDC_IPIMS_t998)

Description:

Introduces the equipment and procedures used in core analysis. Outlines coring program objectives and design considerations,

as well as steps taken to properly preserve representat ive reservoir samples. I llustrates both routine and special core analysis

techniques.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Introduction to Coring and Core Analysis

Borehole Environment

Bottomhole Coring (Coring While Drilling)

Sidewall Coring (Coring After Drilling)

Major Types of Core Analysis

Core Sample Preparation

Porosity Measurement

Permeability Measurement

Saturation Measurement

Complementary Core Information

Core Analysis Reports

Special Core Analysis

Coring and Core Analysis: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 117 of 123


Fluid Sampling and Analysis (IHRDC_IPIMS_t999)

Description:

Reviews basic propert ies of hydrocarbon reservoir fluids and format ion water. I llustrates phase behavior, PVT propert ies, and

categorization of reservoir fluids. Describes equipment and procedures for laboratory analyses and fluid sampling including

surface and subsurface techniques. Presents correlations used to est imate reservoir fluid behavior.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Reservoir Fluids: Overview

Hydrocarbon Phase Behavior

Hydrocarbon Gases

Hydrocarbon Liquids

Two-Phase Systems

Formation Water

Fluid Sampling: General Considerations

Hydrocarbon Sampling

Water Sampling

Sampling: Transportation and Safety

Reservoir Fluid Analysis

Reservoir Fluid Correlations

Fluid Sampling and Analysis: References and Addit ional Informat ion

Topic 118 of 123


Borehole Imaging (IHRDC_IPIMS_t5610)

Description:

Advanced imaging technologies provide high-resolut ion information about lithology, structure, sedimentary features and

borehole condit ions. This Topic describes the operating principles, applications and limitations of acoust ic and resist ivity imaging

tools, and illustrates how you can use borehole imaging as a reservoir monitoring and characterization tool.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Borehole Imaging Overview

Borehole Imaging Technology

Borehole Imaging Methods

Borehole Imaging References and Addit ional Informat ion

Best Practices


Topic 119 of 123


Advanced Pressure Transient Analysis (IHRDC_IPIMS_t24035)

Description:

This presentation examines in detail the mathematical basis for well test interpretation, start ing with the concept of an ideal

reservoir model and the part ial differential equat ions used to describe single-phase and mult i-phase flow in porous media. It

discusses the use of dimensionless variables and type curves in pressure transient analysis, and describes interpretation methods

for anisotropic, hetereogenous and mult i-phase reservoirs. It also provides an overview of computer applications in pressure

transient analysis, discusses specialized well test ing procedures and their applications, and describes mathematical tools used in

pressure transient analysis, including Transformations, applications of the Superposit ion Principle, Convolut ion/Deconvolut ion

Methods, and Pressure Derivative Analysis.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Pressure Transient Test ing: Overview

Different ial Flow Equat ions for Pressure Transient Analysis

Dimensionless Variables and Their Applications

Type Curves

Pressure Transient Analysis in Anisotropic Reservoirs

Pressure Transient Analysis in Heterogeneous Reservoirs

Pressure Transient Analysis in Mult i-Phase Reservoirs

Pressure Transient Analysis-Computer Applications

Pressure Transient Analysis-Specialized Well Test ing Techniques

Advanced Pressure Transient Analysis: References and Addit ional Informat ion

Pressure Transient Analysis-Mathematical Tools

Well Test ing Nomenclature and Systems of Units

Topic 120 of 123


Formation Evaluation Overview (IHRDC_IPIMS_t29946)

Description:

Introduces the techniques of downhole formation evaluation, comparing wireline logging to other conventional downhole

evaluation methods. Discusses wellsite logging equipment and procedures, logging tools and the scientific principles on which

they are based, and the characterist ics of the borehole and surrounding rocks. Demonstrates interpretat ion through common

"quick-look" crossplots, overlay procedures, and computer analysis.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Introduction to Formation Evaluation

Borehole Environment


Laboratory Measurements

Formation Evaluation Overview: References and Addit ional Informat ion

Topic 121 of 123


Logging Equipment and Procedures (IHRDC_IPIMS_t29947)

Description:

Petrophysics, the study of rock-fluid systems, relates the physical parameters measured by well logging tools to actual reservoir

porosity, permeability and fluid saturation. Presents the commonly used logging tools--SP, gamma ray, resist ivity and

porosity--and their characterist ics and functions. Examines the interaction of rocks and fluids in both stat ic and dynamic

situations.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Logging Systems

Logging Procedures

Logging Equipment and Procedures: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 122 of 123


Well Logging Tools and Techniques (IHRDC_IPIMS_t29948)

Description:

Presents the commonly used logging tools--SP, gamma ray, resist ivity and porosity--and their characterist ics and functions

including coverage of Magnetic Resonance Logging. Examines the interaction of rocks and fluids in both static and dynamic

situations.

Duration:



Subtopics:

Magnetic Resonance Logs

Spontaneous Potential Log

Gamma Ray Log

Resist ivity Logs

Dielectric Logs

Density Logs

Neutron Logs

Acoust ic Logs

Special Open Hole Tools

Cased Hole Logs

Casing Inspection Logs

Production Logs

Sampling and Test ing

Well Logging Tools and Techniques: References and Addit ional Information

Topic 123 of 123

IPIMSAction Learning Course Catalog

EXPLORATION: Basin Analysis

Sedimentology (IHRDC_IPIMS_a290)

Description:

Competency Statement: Identify sedimentary rocks and processes from such information as outcrops, core reports, well logs and

cutt ings. Describe sedimentary and diagenetic processes. Define deposit ional environments and facies architecture within the

context of basin analysis. Describe the role of petrographic studies, such as XRD, SEM and thin-section analysis in sedimentology.

Learning Objective:

Use core and outcrop data to define lithofacies and deposit ional environments in terms of composit ion, texture,

geometry and sedimentary st ructure.

Use core data and well logs to construct lithostratigraphic columns, infer deposit ional environments and build geologic

cross-sections.

Review facies trends and extrapolate them to a regional scale.

Use sedimentological interpretations as a basis for building facies and net-to gross sand maps.

Assignment Instruction: As a member of the New Ventures Team, Explorat ion, your responsibility is to evaluate new exploration

opportunit ies. Your role is to understand the sedimentological development and potential of basins that Beta Exploration, Inc.

desires to explore in. In many cases you have a limited amount of data to make a recommendation with.

This learning module will allow you to use the data available in this region and interpret the deposit ional systems.

The exist ing information in this exploration area is limited. Some wells have been drilled in the past and sp and gamma logs are

available. New wells have been drilled recently and intervals of interest were cored. Gathering, defining and interpreting well

data are important tasks of explorat ion geologists to construct correlations and maps.

The base map of the region is below. The data set used for this exercise includes surface outcrop information, core descript ions

and electric logs of wells.

You will have the descript ion of grain size and texture, primary sedimentary structures, ichnofacies and other data to classify

the lithofacies and complete the facies analysis for certain wells. Addit ionally, you will calibrate cores to well logs to complete

your analysis.

Using this information, you will interpret the facies successions and deposit ional environments in each well. Subsequently you will

const ruct a correlation with 5 wells (1, 2, 3, 4 and 5) and map paleoenvironments distribution.

Finally, you will make a net sand map to observe the t rend of sandstone deposit ion.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 1 of 87


Sequence Stratigraphy (IHRDC_IPIMS_a291)

Description:

Competency Statement: Identify sequence boundaries and flooding surfaces in a chronostratigraphic framework. Determine

deposit ional environments and related facies within a chronostratigraphic framework by analyzing well logs, core samples,

outcrops and other information. Develop a model to evaluate the basin-wide distribution of source, reservoir and seal rocks.

Learning Objective:

Outline principle genetic types of deposits used in sequence st rat igraphy (e.g., normal regressive, forced regressive,

t ransgressive, and st illstand.).

Define st rat igraphic cross-sections based on sequence strat igraphy concepts.

Predict reservoir occurrences based on an understanding of the relationships between accommodation space,

sediment supply, stacking patterns and unconformit ies.

Interpret strat igraphic evolut ion in a basin.

Assignment Instruction: As a member of the Exploration team for ACME Petroleum Co., you have been selected for a sequence

stratigraphy study in the Eastern Venezuelan Basin, one of the largest oil producing basins of the world. As part of your

responsibilit ies, you will have to provide information on the continuity of reservoirs and regional seals that might be useful for the

rest of your team.

The section comprises a fluvial deltaic system deposited during the Early Miocene (18.5 my) and Middle Miocene (13.8 my). The

units deposited since the Middle Miocene, unconformably overly Cretaceous shales with high organic matter content, which

const itutes most of the source rock which for the hydrocarbons of the basin.

The geological interpretation of well logs was integrated with the biostrat igraphic and sedimentological information obtained

from core and sidewall samples. This integration allowed for the sedimentary sect ion to be subdivided into geometrical

packages bounded by unconformit ies and internal surfaces. Based on this interpretat ion third order sequences were identified.

For carrying out this exercise GR and resist ivity logs of 5 wells were used as well as information from two cores taken from Wells 1

and 4.

The figure below shows the location of the wells studied.

Wells location map.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 2 of 87


Seismic Sequence Stratigraphy (IHRDC_IPIMS_a292)

Description:

Competency Statement: Use the sequence strat igraphic framework to define seismic sequences with seismic reflection data.

Analyze system tracts and determine deposit ional environments. Predict the distribution of source, reservoir and seal from the

established sequence strat igraphy framework.

Learning Objective:

Explain key concepts of seismic sequence st rat igraphy and the techniques used to evaluate the seismic data.

Establish the major sequences and flooding surfaces for basic sequence analysis.

Integrate available well, biostratigraphic and outcrop data into the framework.

Determine deposit ional environment and facies.

Use seismic data to interpret deposit ional sequences.


opportunit ies for Beta Exploration, Inc. As the Seismic Sequence St ratigrapher your role is to evaluate the seismic data to

provide insight to other team members on the strat igraphic section of the basin with part icular emphasis on potent ial source,

reservoir, seal and traps.

The studied area is located to the northeast of the Australian Platform. Strat igraphically, the sect ion varies from Upper Triassic

to Lower Cretaceous (Location map). The exercise is roughly based on a paper by Erskine and Vail (After Erskine and Vail: in

Bally, A. W. (editor), Atlas of Seismic St ratigraphy 1987, AAPG).

Three seismic lines were used for the exercise. In addit ion, two wells A and B support the st rat igraphic interpretation of the area.

See locat ion map below.

Four unconformit ies, as well as their correlative surfaces, bound three third order sequences including their identifiable system

tracts ident ifed from older to youngers as: I , I I and I I I . The age of the unconformit ies were determined through paleontological

data obtained from wells drilled in the area and from the global marine cycles chart. The Sequences are named SB132, SB129,

SB127 and SB126.

TD (Time Depth) plots were deived for both wells by means of synthet ic seismograms calculated from sonic logs taken in the

wells. The creation of synthet ics allows well linformation in depth to be t ied to seismic data in t ime. Thus we are able to

evaluate the same lithological intervals in the well and on the seismic line.

As a final remark, a composite strat igraphic cross sect ion, where the seismic and the well data are integrated, is provided in

order to show the result obtained in this seismic strat igraphy exercise (Integrated st rat igraphic section).

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 3 of 87


Biostratigraphy (IHRDC_IPIMS_a293)

Description:

Competency Statement: Use plant and animal fossils from cutt ings, cores or outcrops to dist inguish among rock units, determine

their ages and infer the sedimentary environment.

Learning Objective:

Describe the different classes of microfossils and their use.

Infer sedimentary environments based on occurrences, identification and classification of microfossils.

Use microfossils as a basis for est imat ing the ages of rock units.

Demonstrate the use of abundance and diversity charts.

Use microfossils as a basis for correlating rock units between two wells.

Assignment Instruction: The company Beta Exploration Inc. is planning a bid for a new block. As a member of the exploration

team, your role is to analyze the biostratigraphic information available in the area. You count on the informat ion of four wells,

which will be integrated with well-logs and the seismic profiles.

This exercise will show the importance of biostratigraphic analysis throughout the microfossil examination. You will learn about

the use of several groups of microfossils which can be used to "date" rocks (through biostratigraphy) and to interpret

sedimentary environments.

Biozones were inferred from first occurrences down hole. The ages were assigned using the zonal schemes applied to the area.

You will use the accompanying charts with equivalent zonal schemes for your analysis. This information will inable you to build a

biost ratigraphic correlation of the 4 wells.

Analyzing the microfossil indicators of deposit ional environments you will interpret the biofacies changes through the sect ion

studied and you will make a biofacies maps of the area.

The integration of biostratigraphy with other geological disciplines, such as geophysics, sedimentology, petrophysics, and

geochemistry is needed for geologicalmodeling and petroleum system studies, which in turn are essential for planning and

developing better exploration strategies

The chart 'Chronostratigraphic equivalence of the palynological zonations for northern South America and Venezuela'

(modified from Lorente et al., 1997) contains ages of stage boundaries (in Ma) according to (1) Haq et al. (1987) and (2)

Berggren et al. (1995).

You will make a chronost ratigraphic correlation between the wells using biostratigraphy.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 4 of 87


Petroleum Geochemistry (IHRDC_IPIMS_a294)

Description:

Competency Statement: Understand geochemical concept of origin and occurrence of petroleum. Describe its composit ion

and classification of oil and gas. Identify source rock based on geochemical analysis. Understand correlat ion of source rock with

subsurface hydrocarbon accumulation.

Learning Objective:

Understand composit ion and classification of oil and gas.

Understand types of kerogen, generation, expulsion and migration of petroleum.

Describe principal tools and methods for evaluation of source rock.

Interpret source rock quality and maturity.

Evaluate 1-D maturation model.

Assignment Instruction: As a member of the New Ventures Team, Explorat ion, your responsibility is to evaluate a regional

integrated geochemical study which includes source rocks evaluation, oil geochemistry and their correlation with source rocks,

reconstruction of the hydrocarbon generating area and the analysis of the geochemical modeling of a pilot well as an

example of a sedimentary basin.

The total drainage area of the basin is limited to the north and northeast by a fault , and to the south, southeast, southwest ,

west and northwest by mountains (Fig.1). The tectonic sett ing of the basin, relevant to hydrocarbon habitat, changed

through t ime and includes the evolut ionary history of the basin during Cretaceous and Cenozoic periods. The present structural

configuration of the basin began to develop since the Miocene. During the Miocene-Recent period it became an

intermontane basin in a foredeep posit ion.

In Aptian-Albian t imes, a marine transgression led to the deposit ion of thick shallow water carbonate platform and associated

sediments. During maximum transgression between the Cenomanian and the Coniacian, the sedimentat ion was typically of

pelagic and euxinic facies, represented by limestones and calcareous shales. During Paleocene towards SW and W of the basin,

clast ic sediments were deposited and in the central part the sedimentat ion occurred in a shallow marine platform. During the

lower to middle Eocene t ime, the sedimentation was mainly fluvial (SW), fluvio-deltaic to deltaic on the platform and turbidite

and flysh to the east.

Nearly 100 wells were analyzed (cores and cutt ings), and the analysis of TOC, pyrolysis, visual kerogen, UV, GC, biomarkers

(GC-MS), and TTI were determinated The important oil prone source rocks were deposited during the Cretaceous. The other

sequences in the basin (Paleocene and Eocene) show mainly gas prone type I I I organic matter with low potentials. Limestones

and calcareous shales contain organic carbon (OC) between 1.5 – 9.6% with average of 3.8%. The samples show high

concentration of extractable organic matter (>2000ppm) and hydrocarbons (>1000 ppm).

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 5 of 87

EXPLORATION: Dynamics of Deformation

Tectonics (IHRDC_IPIMS_a297)

Description:

Competency Statement: Determine global tectonic sett ing based on age and paleogeographic maps. Recognize result ing

basin and it s evolut ion. I llustrate structural styles determined by this tectonic sett ing.

Learning Objective:

Determine plate tectonic history for prospective geographic area and age.

Describe basin development and evolut ion based on tectonic sett ing.

Define potent ial structural styles based on tectonic sett ing.

Ident ify potential hydrocarbon traps result ing from a structural style.

Assignment Instruction: As a member of Acme Explorat ion, Inc., New Ventures Team, your responsibility is to evaluate new

exploration opportunit ies. The Company, has decided to explore in the Maracaibo Basin because of new leasing opportunit ies.

Your role is to provide the exploration team with an evaluation of the plate tectonics sett ing, basin development and

potent ial trapping style. Your contribution will affect many team members work because accurate understanding of the

regional tectonics will influence many of your team member's working hypotheses.

The user will learn about global plate movement and lithosphere formation. The genesis, evolut ion and st ructuring of the

Caribbean region will be highlighted. The assignment will include the tectonic evolut ion of the Maracaibo Basin. The evolut ion

of the main faults, their movement, periods of deformation and type of basin formed will be developed. General knowledge

about the different stages of the paleogeographic evolut ion of the basin as well as age of rift ing, foreland basin structuring

and passive margin phase will be addressed.

The user will also ident ify the tectonic regime of the study area and the type of fault ing present using sample seismic lines

drawings and structural map. This analysis of the main fault will allow for the identificat ion of potential hydrocarbon t raps

result ing from this st ructural style and the hydrocarbon migration routes.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 6 of 87


Structural Geology (IHRDC_IPIMS_a298)

Description:

Competency Statement: Identify and interpret different st ructural styles in their tectonic sett ing using geologic maps, cross

sections, seismic and well log data. Analyze and predict potential trapping configurat ions based on the structural style.

Evaluate the effect of structural style on the overall petroleum system.

Learning Objective:

Use surface maps, subsurface maps, cross sections and logs to identify and interpret structural styles.

Predict the potent ial types of faults and folds associated with a structural style.

Understand key characterist ics of different types of faults and folds.

Determine different t rapping mechanisms which result from different st ructural styles.


opportunit ies. Lake Oil Ventures Ltd, is a subsidiary of Acme Exploration Inc. The former has decided to explore in the central

part of the Maracaibo Basin because of new leasing opportunit ies. Your role is to provide the exploration team with an

evaluation of the structural sett ing and potential trapping configurations corresponding to the structural style. Addit ionally

you will evaluate the effect of structural style on the possible petroleum system present.

Your contribution will affect many of the team member’s work, because accurate understanding of the tectonic derived

st ructural style of the area will influence many of your team members’ working hypotheses.

The concept of structural style is based on comparat ive tectonics. This concept ident ifies patterns in deformation which in turn

can lead to better understanding global repetit ion of such patterns. Structural geology in it s broadest sense, examines regional

st ructural features, their interrelationships, evolut ion, and effects on sedimentation.

This means that, prior to exploration, the types of source and reservoir rock, migration paths, and hydrocarbon traps can be

predicted, or at least anticipated to a certain extent.

The user will identify the st ructural style of the study area and type of fault ing present in the sample seismic lines drawings and

st ructural map. The type of fault ing and ident ification of potential hydrocarbon traps result ing from a structural style.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 7 of 87


Rock Properties and Mechanics (IHRDC_IPIMS_a296)

Description:

Competency Statement: Identify rock mechanical propert ies from core, cutt ings and electrical logs. Use analysis to address

issues related to fractures, subsurface pressures, subsidence and compaction. Illustrate an understanding of rock propert ies

that effect seismic response.

Learning Objective:

Define basic rock mechanical propert ies, describe how they are measured.

Understand the differences between laboratory measurements and in-situ propert ies.

Predict formation subsurface pressure environment and principal stress direct ions.

Define propert ies that effect seismic response and how these propert ies relate to AVO effect.

Assignment Instruction: As a specialist assigned to the Exploration New Ventures Team, your responsibility is to apply your

specialty to evaluate new exploration opportunit ies. Explorat ion team members come to you to gain insight and support in

applying rock propert ies and mechanics to exploration problems. These problems may be related to tectonics, seismic

evaluation or reservoir performance. You often have a limited data set to extrapolate from.

Rock Mechanics is a very powerful approach for reservoir descript ion and management. It provides useful and efficient links

between mechanical and acoust ical propert ies which lead to a deep understanding of the stress-st rain behavior of subsurface

beds. Used properly, together with geostatist ical concepts, it can substantially help to elaborate an accurate picture of our

geological targets.

In this assignment, you will observe laboratory data from well cores and well logs that will assist you in the calculation of the

elast ic modulus of a reservoir target. Using these characterizations together with fluid subst itut ion concepts and storage

(porosity) and transport (permeability), you will be able to est imate the acoust ic response to different saturation fluids.

In this sense, you will:

Calculate porosity and permeability from laboratory data

Use stress-strain relationships for linear elast icity to est imate the elast ic modulus

Use inversion from acoust ic logs and laboratory data to est imate the elast ic modulus

Give a very educated guess for the stress state on the subsurface

Est imate the seismic signature of fluids and porosity

Take all the quest ions as input for the subsequent quest ions. Take note of all your correct answers because you may use that

information in the next tasks.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 8 of 87

EXPLORATION: Surface Geology and Reconnaissance

Surface Geology (IHRDC_IPIMS_a300)

Description:

Competency Statement: Identify surface geologic units and tectonic elements with a geologic map. Demonstrate the use of

cross sections in conjunction with geologic maps.

Learning Objective:

Demonstrate ablity to read surface geological maps.

I llustrate relationship between a cross section and geological map.

Locate a part icular rock unit on a surface geology map and define that unit 's geographic dist ribut ion.

Demonstrate understanding of an outcrop descript ion and find rock units on a geological map.

Understand various cross-section preparation tehniques and factors influencing their choice.

Assignment Instruction: As a Geologist member of the New Ventures Exploration Team, your assignment is to evaluate new

exploration opportunit ies for Beta Exploration Inc.

Your task is to evaluate the surface geological information available in the sett ing of the Basin that Beta Explorat ion Inc. Needs

to explore. The other team members will integrate this information with subsurface information that will provide a better

understanding of the strat igraphy of the basin and it s petroleum system.

A surface geologic map is shown of an area located at the southern flank of the Eastern Venezuela Serrania del Interior. In this

area, essentially Cretaceous age sedimentary rocks outcrop (Location Map). The geologic map shows the geographic

distribution of the lithostratigraphic units recognized in the area through the informat ion collected from outcrops, aerial

photographs and their relat ionship with the topography.

The strat igraphy of the area is comprised by the Barranquin, Garcia and El Cantil Formations, from the Lower Cretaceous

(Barremian to Albian) and San Antonio (Campanian). The Barranquin Formation consists essentially of coarse grained quartz

sandstones, siltstones and shales of fluvial-deltaic environments, interbedded with scarce fossiliferous limestones towards the

upper section.

The Garcia Formation represents a rapid deepening of the environments, as well as deposit ion of dark, calcareous, highly

fossiliferous shales, with an est imated uniform thickness of 90 meters throughout the area.

The Cant il Format ion, is characterized by a shallowing t rend of the marine environments and carbonaceous shales. The San

Antonio Formation shows a fault contact with the previously mentioned sections, towards the south of the area.

A geologic cross sect ion in an E-W direction, allows observat ion of the st rat igraphic configuration of the Lower Cretaceous units

and their relat ionship to the topographical features.

For the most part, the Garcia Formation, given its characterist ic shaly and fossiliferous content, represents the maximum marine

flood for the Lower Cretaceous of Eastern Venezuela, and could be considered a potential source rock. The type section of the

Garcia Formation is located east of the eastern flank of the Pico Garcia, where it outcrops in a cont inuous manner.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 9 of 87


Remote Sensing (IHRDC_IPIMS_a302)

Description:

Competency Statement: Demonstrate understanding of different remote sensing data and its application to explorat ion. Use

remote sensing techniques to identify geomorphological and structural characterist ics. Demonstrate knowledge of how

remote sensing can identify surface hydrocarbon anomalies.

Learning Objective:

Use satellite imagery to identify geographical and geological elements on the Earth surface.

Ident ify simple structural styles based on remote sensing data.

Use remote sensing data to locate hydrocarbon seeps.

Analyze regional structural styles from remote sensing images in order to identify potential areas for exploration.

Assignment Instruction: As a member of the Exploration team for ACME Petroleum Co., you have been assigned for a

Geomorphologic and geological interpretation study at the western edge of the Barinas-Apure basin.

Satellite Landsat images are analyzed together with various complementary data sets to evaluate their potential in the

hydrocarbon exploration process.

Within your responsibilit ies, you will have to provide information using a methodology based on photo interpretation criteria

using optical sensor LANDSAT at a 1:100,000 scale. The first step will be to identify drainage patterns based on the main

hydrography. Afterwards, a geomorphologic reconnaissance identifying valleys, terraces, alluvial fans will be conducted. From

the geological point of view, traces of layers, structural guidelines, synclines, anticlines, faults and unconformit ies will be

identified.

The study area is located at the western edge of the Barinas-Apure basin on the South American Craton.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 10 of 87


Geodetic Coordinate Systems (IHRDC_IPIMS_a303)

Description:

Competency Statement: Understand the differences between coordinate systems and the variables that define them.

Recognize the need to convert data from one system to another. Determine the most appropriate cartographic system for the

area of interest.

Learning Objective:

Dist iguish between different coordinate systems.

List variables necessary to define a coordinate systems.

Ident ify strengths and weakness of different coordinate systems.

Descripe work flow to establish coordinate system of different data types.

Describe the Global Posit ioning System and how it is used in determining geodesic posit ions.

Review and convert cartographic data and maps to the most applicable geographic system.

Assignment Instruction: You are a member of the Company New Ventures Inc. In this exercise, you are going to be a team

member of two different projects. The first project is a geodetic survey to support the development of a geologic map of

Mexico. The second project is a topographic survey for shot points of a seismic lines from a survey conducted in the Eastern part

of Venezuela.

Your responsibility is to establish the Primary Control Network taking into consideration the legal and technical standards of the

two coordinate systems.This includes their t ransformation, precision, specific t ies according to client`s specifications, as well as

verify horizontal and vert ical control points.

With this exercise you will learn how to design a Geodetic Survey; defining the survey method in order to analyze and interpret

the field data that will aid in development of the corresponding maps.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 11 of 87


Magnetostratigraphy, Chemostratigraphy and Radiometric Dating

(IHRDC_IPIMS_a301)

Description:

Competency Statement: Understand principles and techniques of magnetostrat igraphy, chemostratigraphy and radiometric

dating. Describe the practical application of these techniques in non-fossiliferous rock units. Explain how they provide pert inent

information in petroleum exploration.

Learning Objective:

Describe the basic principles and techniques used in magnetostratigraphy.

Describe the basic principles and techniques used in chemostrat igraphy.

Describe the basic principles and techniques used in radiometric measurements.

Demostrate an understanding of the geologic reasons to apply these techniques.

Incorporate these dating techniques with outcrop and surface geological maps.

Understand dating techniques for subsurface samples like convent ional cores.

Understand advantages and disadvantages of each dating technique.

Assignment Instruction: You work in the special studies section of a very experienced E&P Company. The role of your section is to

advise the different exploration projects/teams about frontier basins, areas, plays and prospects. Your specialty is the use of

special dating techniques and their integration into the prospecting processes.

In this assignment you will use different dating techniques (Magnetostratigraphy, Radiometry and Chemostratigraphy) in order

to provide a geo-chronologic framework for exploration of several frontier areas.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 12 of 87


Gravity, Magnetic and Electromagnetic Exploration Methods (IHRDC_IPIMS_a304)

Description:

Competency Statement: Recognize uses and limitat ions of gravity, magnetics and electromagnetic (EM) methods of

exploration. List survey design criteria for each technique. Est imate the thickness of the sedimentary section of a basin using

different data types.

Learning Objective:

Describe the basic principles and tools used in gravity, magnetic and electromagnetic techniques.

Ident ify main exploration applicat ion for gravity, magnetics and electro-magnetic surveys.

Out line design considerat ions of gravity, magnetic and electromagnetic surveys.

Apply basic interpretat ion techniques to determine depth to basement.

Assignment Instruction: Potential Fields (Gravity, Magnetism and Electromagnetic) data are very often neglected as an

exploration tool.

In the early history (1900 to 1960) of the petroleum indust ry, these methods played a superb role in the discoveries of most of the

reserves already consumed worldwide. These discoveries included almost 100% of the onshore fields in Texas, California, Russia,

Iraq, Iran, Saudi Arabia and Venezuela, which are st ill under exploitation today.

Since the 90′s, integrated interpretation (using gravity, magnetism, seismic, well and outcrop data) is the common standard in

many major O&G companies.

Electromagnetic methods were the preferred tool of choice used by the Russians in the exploration and discovery of its vast

reserves until the 70`s, using either magneto-telluric or conventional arrays. Also, in the present, electrical methods are used to

detect aquifers which are of interest for water formation disposal and /or CO2 sequestrat ion.

In this Assignment, you will play the role of a Geophysical advisor to diverse E&P teams within you company. Your duties will

include:

Defining the feasibility of gravity and/or magnet ic surveys (establishing if a given geological configuration is detectable

using gravity and/or magnetic measurements)

Defining parameters for gravity data acquisit ion and processing

Interpreting gravity and/or magnetic data in order to detect and characterize causative bodies (basement and/or

within the sedimentary section), and for establish next steps in explorat ion

Interpreting Magneto-Telluric data to interpret Basement structural features

Defining the feasibility of electrical surveys (establishing if a given geological configuration is detectable using

convent ional electrical methods)

Defining parameters for acquisit ion and processing of electrical data

Interpreting electrical data in order to recommend future activit ies in either water formation disposal and /or CO2

sequestration, produced at fields present ly under explotat ion

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 13 of 87

EXPLORATION: Seismic Methods

Seismic Data Acquisition (IHRDC_IPIMS_a306)

Description:

Competency Statement: Select the most favorable seismic acquisit ion configuration for the area of interest . Select source and

receiver array for proposed survey. Evaluate trade-off between 2-D and 3-D acquisit ion for the exploration objective.

Learning Objective:

Understand the primary principles of seismic survey design.

Ident ify the basic concepts and field operat ions involved in seismic data acquisit ion.

Contrast differences between 2-D and 3-D acquisit ion.

Describe key elements of marine vs. non-marine acquisit ion.

Evaluate horizontal and vert ical seismic resolut ion.

Evaluate practical considerations in survey design.

Assignment Instruction: You are a junior member of the Geophysics E&P team for the Company Acme Inc. Your team is

presently involved in the seismic data acquisit ion process in Bass Basin, offshore Australia.

You should be acquainted with the seismic data acquisit ion methods that are one of the key activit ies in Exploration and

Production for obtaining the best possible images of the subsurface.

Seismic prospecting is actually the most widespread tool for hydrocarbon exploration. Its power is based on the ability to give

you an image of the subsurface. This information can be used to describe structurally the area of study or obtain acoust ic

(somet imes elast ic) response of the rocks and fluids contained on them. Seismic Acquisit ion represents more than 80% of the

exploration financial investment, due to this fact a good survey design is crucial not only for the quality of the image that

should be obtained but also for st rong economical reasons.

In this scenario you will make a simple 3D marine seismic survey design based on an init ial geological descript ion and some basic

seismic information. The main parameters that you need to est imate are (not necessarily in this order):

Areal extent of the survey1.

Line length2.

Migration aperture3.

Line interval4.

Group interval5.

Shot Interval6.

Vert ical and Horizontal resolut ion7.

In this case our target is at Bass basin, offshore Australia. Basin deposit ional models indicate that probable reservoir sands are

now within the oil window, giving deep unexplored port ions of the Bass basin considerable petroleum potent ial. The survey

objective is to illuminate all Paleocene formations trough the whole area with 48 fold coverage near structural traps. For this

exercise the complexit ies of shot interval est imation due to vessel speed and air-gun recovery are not taken into account.

The Assignment Pages should be done sequentially as all answers could be used as input for subsequent quest ions. So, take

notes of all your findings during the completion of this exercise.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 14 of 87


Geophysical Instrumentation (IHRDC_IPIMS_a307)

Description:

Competency Statement: Evaluate the physical mechanics of source and receivers. Describe receivers and possible receiver

configurations depending on noise. Review application of field test ing. Evaluate basic recording instrument types. Incorporate

quality control during data collection.

Learning Objective:

Describe different types of seismic sources, receivers and their applications.

Ident ify the most common types of recording instruments.

Ident ify the most common types of restrict ions that limit configurat ion of a seismic program.

Describe different data formats for the acquisit ion process.

Propose a work flow to monitor and maintain quality control over seismic acquisit ion procedures.

Assignment Instruction: Subsurface seismic imaging is based on mechanical wave’s reflect ions in the Earth interior. The basic

protocol involves wave generation and wave recording usually at surface level. In other words is like “hitt ing the earth and

wait and listen to the echo from beneath”. This apparent ly simple experiment becomes quite complex if you realice that your

target is several kilometers deep, so you need a strong and clean signal (emission and reception) to enhance your subsurface

image. The seismic information volume you will manage could easily exceed the terabyte size. Also there are plenty of noise

sources which will degrade the quality of your seismic data.

The instruments used to excite and record the Earth mechanical response must be adequate to topographic and

environmental condit ions in order to be able to perform the seismic experiment in a part icular terrain and also obtain the best

possible signal/noise rat io.

In this assignment you are working for the instrumentation department of a transnational geophysical services provider. You

have been requested to analyze an area for environmental, topographical and cultural considerations effecting a seismic

surveying and propose the best source receiver configuration according for that survey.

Specifications and descript ions for available seismic equipment are located in Reference and Field Data. It is strongly

suggested to read this material before attempting this exercise and save the informatioon on your hard drive to keep it easily

available.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 15 of 87


Seismic Survey Design (IHRDC_IPIMS_a338)

Description:

Competency Statement: Describe enviormental factors that require modification to normal marine/non-marine seismic data

acquisit ion. Include access, water depth, surface terrain, noise and obstruct ions. Indicate appropriate source, reciever or

geometries considerations for each case.

Learning Objective:

List non-conventional seismic survey types and their application.

List non-conventional source and reciever types and their application.

List source and receiver limitations for a t ransit ion zone seismic survey.

Describe possible shooting solut ions for seismic acquist ion in an exist ing field with obstruct ions.

Describe exploration reasons for shear wave acquisit ion.

Assignment Instruction: The design of a seismic survey is a complex task since it depends on several factors in addit ion to wave

propagation, such as costs: logist ics, safety regulat ions, environment and geographical sett ings. The design for a part icular

survey should take into consideration all Geological and Geophysical requirements as well as the survey environment. A

successful seismic survey design not only generates a good seismic image of the subsurface but does so economically, safely,

efficiently and in as environmentally friendly manner as possible.

In this assignment you are a E&P team seismic acquisit ion geophysicist. Your resbonsibility is to make decisions regarding the

design of three seismic surveys.

Project #1: A seismic survey in a t ransit ion zone.

Project #2: A seismic survey in an area with obstructions

Project #3: A shear wave survey in a marine environment

In this assignment you are a E&P team seismic acquisit ion geophysicist. Your resbonsibility is to make decisions regarding the

design of three seismic surveys.

Decide which seismic source and receiver type is most appropriate for a specific area.1.

Decide which operational technique is most suitable for specific areas of a transit ion zone survey.2.

Make decisions when faced with operational limitations in a transit ion zone.3.

Ident ify possible shooting solut ions when obstacles are encountered.4.

Decide between telemetry and distributed systems depending on environmental factors.5.

Ident ify important aspects of shear wave acquisit ion.6.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 16 of 87


Seismic Data Processing (IHRDC_IPIMS_a308)

Description:

Competency Statement: Design the seismic processing sequence by select ing the appropriate processing methods. Perform the

data processing and quality control, and work with the interpreter to make sure that the outcome truly reflects the geological

characterist ics of the area.

Learning Objective:

Describe the basic seismic processing sequence from pre-processing and deconvolut ion through stacking and velocity

analysis, to migrat ion and post-processes.

Understand the application of different types of deconvolut ion, velocity analyses and migration techniques.

Review processing steps in the context of the objectives of the seismic interpretation.

Assignment Instruction: As a member of the Exploration team for the Company Solut ions. Inc, you should be acquainted with

the seismic data processing methods that are one of the key activit ies in Exploration and Production for obtaining the best

processing of subsurface images.

Reflect ion Seismic Methods, as part of the seismic data processing process, are the tools of choice for hydrocarbon exploration

because they can give an image of the subsurface and its structural and (sometimes) strat igraphical features. Seismic data

processing is the cornerstone for this image generation from the raw data recorded at seismic surveys. Different processes are

applied to improve the quality of the image, not only for the purpose of interpretation but also for extract ing acoust ic and

elast ic information from seismic sections or volumes.

This module will introduce you to the basic theoretical concepts and its applications at different seismic processing stages.

During this exercise you will process a 3D onshore seismic survey. The survey area is about 500Km2 with low st ructural complexity

and one well has been drilled. The target is around 3 seconds two way travel t ime. The seismic source used was dynamite. From

previous 2D seismic informat ion, the main fault ing system is extensional with some half-graben interpreted. Your task is to go

through the QC (Quality Control) of a processing sequence applied to seismic data.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 17 of 87


Wellbore Seismic (IHRDC_IPIMS_a309)

Description:

Competency Statement: Evaluate the applicability of wellbore seismic technology to a part icular well. Determine the need for

check shot survey, synthetic seismogram, vert ical seismic profiling (VSP) and cross-well tomography. Use seismic sect ions,

petrophysics and geological informat ion to determine the wellbore seismic program.

Learning Objective:

Ident ify the applicability of a wellbore seismic program for the exploration objective.

Acquisit ion configurations for different wellbore seismic techniques.

Describe the acquisit ion and QC of the check shot survey / VSP.

Describe the generation and QC of a synthetic seismogram from well logs and check shot data.

Surface Seismic has become the tool of choice for reservoir delineation. However, the generated image is always an offset-t ime

image. In order to obtain an offset-depth image (which corresponds to a more accurate subsurface picture) several

techniques have been developed. Synthetic seismograms, Check shots and VSP (Vert ical Seismic Profile) surveys are some of

these techniques.

This assignment will introduce you in the basic steps in Synthetic Seismograms generation and its correlations with real seismic

data. Also you will develop a VSP project where the seismic-well calibration power of this technique is evidenced.

You are assigned into two different projects for the Upstream Technology Group Inc. (UTC). Their descript ions are:

1.- Synthetic Seismogram Building and Seismic-Well Calibration: In an exploratory block a 3D seismic survey has been acquired.

Only one well has been drilled (Well UTC-1X). This well has a total depth of 6390’ and GR, density and DT logs were run from

4000’ to final depth. A T-Z table was obtained using a local check shot.

2.- Zero-Offset VSP survey acquisition, processing and interpretation: An offshore exploratory block has 3D pre-stack seismic data.

A successful well has been drilled (Well UTC-1Y) and UTC wants to calibrate the seismic and the well information in order to

have a better picture of the prospecting horizons in their areal extent.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 18 of 87


2-D Seismic Interpretation (IHRDC_IPIMS_a310)

Description:

Competency Statement: Evaluate seismic sections to interpret chronostratigraphic units and structural elements. Use the

techniques of seismic interpretat ion to pick horizons and faults over an interval of interest. Tie exist ing well informat ion to the

seismic section using a synthetic seismogram. Combine the seismic interpretat ion and well data to create a seismic t ime map.

Learning Objective:

Tie well information to the seismic section using the synthetic seismogram or check shot survey.

Ident ify major reflections in the seismic data set.

Enumerate criteria for picking faults based on the regional structural style.

Describe conformable and unconformable seismic reflection geometry.

Describe the steps to complete a seismic t ime map.

Assignment Instruction: You work for an oil company who has intentions to bid for an offshore and practically unexplored area.

The Host Government has provided your company with a data pack consist ing of 160 Km of 2D seismic and two wells (see map

below). As a member of the exploration team, your work is to use this information for evaluating the hydrocarbon potential of

the area in order to decide whether to abandon further efforts or to continue with the explorat ion, provided your company

makes an attractive proposal for the area and the Host Government accepts.

Your contribution to this init iat ive is to provide the seismic interpretation of the area, mapping st ructural and st rat igraphic

features with exploration potent ial.After analysis you will propose further seismic surveys and/or reprocessing of exist ing seismic

lines as needed.

2D seismic lines and wells distribution

Data Provided:

Six 2D seismic lines

Well A Info (TD=11940 ft), Sonic log, gamma ray log, density log, check shot survey

Well B Info (TD=12585 ft)

Map with seismic lines and wells locat ion

The assignment should be done sequent ially as all answers could be used as input for subsequent quest ions. So, take notes of all

your findings during the completion of this exercise.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 19 of 87


3-D Seismic Interpretation (IHRDC_IPIMS_a339)

Description:

Competency Statement: Interprete a 3-D seismic survey using seismic sections and t ime slices to interpret horizons and faults.

Display an understanding of the use of t ime slices, horizon slices and other 3-D techniques play in 3-D interpretation.

Learning Objective:

Ident ify common horizon auto-picker parameters and their effects.

Enumerate criteria for picking faults on t ime slices.

Describe various 3-D survey display options.

Describe creation and uses of horizon slices.

List parameters for amplitude extract ion of a 3-D horizon.

Assignment Instruction: In a given deep water area (see map), there will be a bid round for exploration. Your company has

interest in the area and consequently has assigned you to evaluate the area and to provide a specialist opinion for further

investment.

Only four wells have been drilled in the basin, the results were:

Well A: dry

Well B: dry with gas shows

Well C: oil discovery well

Well D: oil and gas discovery well

The first step in your assignment is to attend to a data room, where you will analyze a dataset composed by information

gathered from the interpretat ion of two 3D seismic volumes (see map), including structural maps, t ime slices, attributes

maps/horizons.

After completion of the data room activit ies you will:

Use the information previously analyzed to present a structural and strat igraphic framework for the area

Recommend the use of certain techniques to improve the knowledge of the basin

Convey to your company management the meaning of seismic amplitudes and the character of the seismic reflect ion

data

Use the available data to propose and support potential prospects in the area;

Give advice for decisions to be taken over the area, in terms of prospect ranking

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 20 of 87


Seismic Attributes and Direct Hydrocarbon Indicators (DHIs) (IHRDC_IPIMS_a340)

Description:

Competency Statement: Evaluate seismic attribute sections to enhance conventional seismic interpretat ion. Identify the

seismic effects of a 'bright spot' anomaly and their physical cause. Describe the Amplitude Vs. Offset (AVO) effect and the

physics that govern the response. List the attributes of the Hilbert Transform and their mathmatical formulation.

Learning Objective:

List possible effects to seismic amplitude response on 'Bright Spot' prospect.

Describe AVO response and its causes.

Explain the limitat ions of AVO response.

Review Hilbert transform attributes.

Describe work flow for evaluating attribute effectiveness.

Assignment Instruction: Surface seismic has become the most important tool in hydrocarbon reservoir delineation. During the

last decades most of the effort was focused on structural imaging and hydraulic barriers descript ions. However due to the

recent advances in computational hardware and new theoretical approaches to sedimentat ion processes and wave

phenomena, seismic att ributes have taken the leading edge as hydrocarbon indicators. AVO, Amplitude analysis, Frequency

decomposit ion, Wave Attenuation and Elast ic inversion are only a few important techniques which t ransform wave

information into probabilist ic parameters to hydrocarbon discovery.

The following assignment will take you through an example of hydrocarbon indicators start ing from the QC of the seismic data

to the feasible presence of hydrocarbons using wave information.

You are a member of a reservoir characterization team working on a gas prone area. Two exploratory wells have been drilled in

the area. The first well was located over a structural high and was proved successful. The second well was located down dip

and no production was achieved from it . Both drilling plans and locations were devised using 2D conventional seismic. A new

3D seismic survey was acquired in order to have a better picture of the Gas-Water-Contact distribution and other possible

accumulations in the block using seismic attributes as hydrocarbon indicators.

The main target is the reservoir discovered by the first well at 4500’ depth (2000ms TWT approx) and other two possible

accumulations at 3500ms and 7000ms TWT in the area which have not been proven yet.

In this project you need to supervise a complete sequence of reservoir seismic attributes characterization from the seismic QC

to AVO characterization and the identification of new opportunit ies.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 21 of 87

EXPLORATION: Reservoir Description and Characterization

Petrophysical Evaluation (IHRDC_IPIMS_a313)

Description:

Competency Statement: Determine rock and fluid propert ies using open hole logs, mud logs, cutt ings and core data. Evaluate

lithology, mineralogy, fluid distribution, temperature and pressure gradients including rock quality.

Learning Objective:

Define key petrophysical propert ies and their significance.

Describe the operating principles, capabilit ies, limitations and areas of application of commonly used open hole logging

devices.

Describe basic response and limitation of each log type.

Validate log response using core and well cutt ings.

Assignment Instruction: Beta Petroleum is to drill a wildcat on a structure in the New Basin. As the Operations Geologist you will

have a significant influence on the data acquisit ion for this well including the open-hole logging program in consultation with

the Petrophysicist.

Following agreement with those involved you will specify a data acquisit ion program (mud-logging and wireline logging).

To ensure you are prepared for this assignment you will review the petrophysical principles that you have previously learnt on

training courses. As it is not clear what lithology and pore fill may be encountered, you will review the log responses to be

expected for a variety of possibilit ies.

The last part of the assignment you will witness the logging job and carry out a quick look evaluation of the logs to select WLFT

pressure and sample points plus SWS depths. Based on the information gathered you will interpret the fluid distribution in the

well and establish the basic petrophysical parameters :- clay volume, porosity and water saturation.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 22 of 87


Interpretation of Well Logs (IHRDC_IPIMS_a314)

Description:

Competency Statement: Use electromagnetic, radioactive, acoust ic and other logs to infer strat igraphic and st ructural

characterist ics of subsurface formations. Determine basic propert ies of a potential reservior.

Learning Objective:

Describe common log responses for source, reservoir and seal units.

Describe common log patterns and their facies equivalent.

Apply basic log interpretation methods to determine porosity, permeability, fluid saturation and boundaries for reservoir

descript ion.

Make a preliminary est imate of reserves using Well 1 and analog field parameters.

Assignment Instruction: Beta Petroleum has drilled a wildcat on the Gama structure in the New Basin. The well has reached TD

and there are indications of reservoir rock and hydrocarbons from mud logs, cutt ings and side wall cores. The init ial logging run,

t riple combo, indicates a high resist ivity zone. You will analyze the logs for reservoir and seal. As part of your evaluation of the

reservoir you will determine: gross thickness, net sand, net pay, porosity, permeability and water saturation.

If possible you will use log character with other data to determine a lithofacies for the reservoir. Remember this evaluation will

directly influence whether or not an addit ional well is drilled on the structure.

On the last Assignment Page you will be asked by the VP of Exploration to use your analysis to support or reject a delineation

well.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 23 of 87


Reservoir Geology (IHRDC_IPIMS_a315)

Description:

Competency Statement: Generate a geological reservoir model. Define reservoir in terms of continuity, lithology, facies

distribution, structural geometry and style. Using the petrophysical parameters developed from well log analysis, est imate the

original oil and gas volume in place.

Learning Objective:

Establish geological reservoir model define, object ives and modeling tasks.

Review reservoir architecture, reservoir propert ies and their dist ribut ion, and integrate for construction of a stat ic

geological model.

Integrate seismic horizons and facies into the geological model.

Est imate original hydrocarbons in place.

Assignment Instruction: Beta Petroleum has drilled a successful wildcat (Gama 1) and three delineation wells (Gama 2, Gama 3

and Gama 4) on the Gama structure in the New Basin.

The discovery well found gas and oil in the so called Lower Graben Sand Formation, albeit with a ODT/WUT situation. Therefore

the 1st appraisal (delineation) well (Gama 2) was aimed at defining the OWC.

All of the wells have been logged and a whole core was taken of the reservoir in Well #3 (Gama 3).

As the Exploration geologists you are aksed to develop a static reservoir model and determine the oil in place (STOIIP) for the

Lower Graben Sand Reservoir. This requires you to interpret flow units in and between the wells and assess the reservoir

propert ies across the structure. Regional knowledge indicates that the Lower Graben Sands can be sub-divided into 4 Flow

Units each with (slightly) different propert ies.

As reference, as type log, well (F2-2A) located some 8.6 km to the North-West can be used to sub-divide the objective sands in

the wells under invest igat ion.

Developing the static model requires insight into the deposit ional environment and at present you only have information from

a regional study. Therefore interpretation of the local, or prospect deposit ional environment needs to be determined from logs

taken in the 1st well (Gama 1) and subsequently verified with core data from the Gama 3 well.

Based on regional information the Lower Graben Sand in the field area is interpreted as a fluvial-deltaic to a t idal delta

deposit ional system, building out in a Northern direction.

The top of the Lower Graben Sands is picked at the occurence of the first (larger) sand beds below the (marine) shales of the

Middle Graben Shale package.

These Lower Graben Sands have been subdivided elsewhere into four "Flow Units". These Units (1 to 4) are considered successive

cycles of lower delta plain deposits, in which the reservoir sands were developed as:

• t idal distributary channel fills,

• t idal channel bars,

• channel margins and

• lagoonal backwash systems.

Using the Deposit ional Environment as referenced, a judgement will be made with regards to the reservoir continuity of the

individual permeable and non-permeable beds defining the “flow units” (i.e. the individual beds controlling the direction of fluid

flow through the reservoir into the producing wells).

Based on different relat ions in width/thickness and length/width rat ios, several cases with respect to sand body dimensions

have been considered, but the medium case is st ill considered the most reasonable in the fluvio-deltaic/t idal dist ributary, and

estuarine environment. In this scenario the width/thickness rat io is 100 and the length/width ratio is 5.

Although in the process of subsurface modelling the definit ion of “Flow Units” is an essential step, for calculating the

STOIIP this information is only relevant when est imating the average reservoir propert ies as parameters to the calculat ion.

As part of this Learning Plan the learner will need to review the depth st ructure map for the prospect reservoir as derived from

seismic, showing the overall st ructural configuration and the presence and distribution of the field faults.

The structure is faulted, displays 4 way dip-closer, and appears to be filled to spill point . The crest of the structure is found at a

depth of some 3025 m and to the northwest of the discovery well. The structure is broken up by two sets of normal faults which

form a NW-SE trending 1.5 km wide crestal graben, believed to be of Triassic age. A younger NNE-SSW t rending set breaks up

the eastern and north-eastern flanks of the field. The throw of the faults varies from 10 - 85 m. The faults are part ly sealing and

may be contributing to some compartmentalization of the field.

Wells 3 & 4 (Gama 3 & 4) were drilled on the same structure, penetrat ing what appears to be the same hydrocarbon bearing

reservoir and display similar contacts as far as can be concluded from the present data, but this needs to be verified using the

available pressure iinformation.

Wells 3 & 4 (Gama 3 & 4) were drilled on the same structure, penetrat ing what appears to be the same hydrocarbon bearing

reservoir and display similar contacts as far as can be concluded from the present data, but this needs to be verified using the

available pressure iinformation.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 24 of 87


Reservoir Geology (IHRDC_IPIMS_a315)


Reservoir Geophysics (IHRDC_IPIMS_a334)

Description:

Competency Statement: Analyze and interpret seismic and geological information for the purpose of reservoir descript ion.

Convert seismic t ime horizons to depth, based on well and seismic velocit ies. Evaluate seismic facies and their deposit ional

environment in order to produce analogs of their potential reservoirs.

Learning Objective:

Analyze seismic interpretation to determine best methodology for depth conversion.

Present Pros and Cons of different depthing approaches.

Select deposit ional model analog that best fits the regional and seismic facies characterist ics.

Evaluate seismic facies with reservoir propert ies determined from wells, to gain insight to reservoir property distribution.

Assignment Instruction: As the lead Geophysicist for Beta Petroleum's explorat ion effort in the New Basin you have developed

t ime structure maps for mult iple horizons for Structure Gama. Now four wells have been drilled and the Geologists are preparing

to develop a reservoir model for evaluation of reserves.

Your first concern is to develop a methodology for taking the known reservoir to depth. The data available are two check shot

surveys, two sonic logs and seismic velocit ies from the 2-D seismic survey of the area. An addit ional concern is the different

oil/water contact in Well 3.

Secondarily, you have noticed a seismic facies change in the reservoir in a north to south direction. Coordinate your seismic

facies analysis with the Geologist to determine a deposit ional environment and likely lithofacies. As part of this effort describe a

methodology for evaluating seismic amplitudes in the reservoir interval.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 25 of 87


Exploration Geostatistics (IHRDC_IPIMS_a336)

Description:

Competency Statement: Use stat ist ical methods to describe the characterist ics of the hydrocarbon-bearing system. Validate

the descript ion by comparing data with reservoir analogs. Establish support ing t rends for predicting propert ies in both drilled

and non-drilled areas. Characterize dependence among mult iple variables. Describe risk and uncertainty using probabilist ic

distributions.

Learning Objective:

Apply preliminary stat ist ical analysis methods to geological data.

Apply conventional techniques to validate reservoir data and trend maps.

Demonstrate an understanding of risk and uncertainty in probablist ic distributions.

Build single model variograms for simple reservoir propert ies.

Apply basic Krigging techniques to generate representative reservoir parameter maps.

Assignment Instruction: Beta Petroleum has drilled a wildcat and three delineation wells on a st ructure in the New Basin. All of

the wells have been logged and a whole core was taken of the reservoir in Well 4. Petrophysical analysis has been completed

for all wells and is available for use.

You are to evaluate different statist ical methods for distributing reservoir propert ies. In addit ion to petrophysical data a facies

map based on the well information and seismic data is available.

As part of this process variograms will be developed for each of the reservoir propert ies. Incorporate the range of data

available: basin analog, outcrop, whole core and well log analysis into construction of the variograms. Remember that Well 3 is

anomalous due to its thin reservoir sect ion and different oil/water contact.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 26 of 87

EXPLORATION: Wellsite Geological Operations

Geological Operations and Logistics (IHRDC_IPIMS_a318)

Description:

Competency Statement: Determine the necessary resources for carrying out exploratory projects. Build a plan to address

permitt ing, environmental and safety considerations, location construction, contracts, evaluation and specialized services.

Understand the importance of the budgetary cycle and how it effects operations.

Learning Objective:

Determine resources, steps and t imeline for exploratory well.

Ident ify and address issues related to contracting for exploratory services: such as scope of work, technical evaluation,

and input for commercial evaluation.

Describe data collection program for exploratory well.

Collect and evaluate requests for exploratory well data and evaluate impact on budget.

Describe data collection program for delineation well.

Assignment Instruction: As an Operations Geologist you will develop, monitor and report on the drilling of the first exploratory

well in the New Basin. If this well is a discovery, appraisal wells will be drilled to determine the potential size of the discovery. You

will be involved in all stages of the exploratory program and report progress to management and the explorat ion team.

Your first responsibility is to coordinate the drilling plan. This includes location confirmation, permitt ing, site preparation,

coordination with drilling engineers, communicat ion with drilling contractor and coordination with contractors providing data

collection services. Construction of a t imeline for all activit ies will be crucial for successful completion of your function.

Part of this role is a budgetary function with regard to overall cost and cost of individual expenditure areas. The Exploration

Manager will look to you to develop and t rack expenditures. You need to plan for cont ingencies and have alternat ives to the

init ial drilling and evaluation program that st ill conform to the overall objectives of the well.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 27 of 87


Data Logging and Geological Information (IHRDC_IPIMS_a320)

Description:

Competency Statement: Design programs for collecting subsurface rock and fluid samples. Design mud-logging and cutt ings

program. Evaluate and select coring program. Specify requirements for measuring formation pressures and temperatures.

Determine the necessary studies to be carried out using these data.

Learning Objective:

Specify mud logging requirements including: collection intervals, sampling preparation, hydorcarbon indicators and

lithology report ing.

Design a well-cutt ing program including analysis; identify what uses these samples are used for.

Describe order and inter-relationshiip of different well evaluation techniques.

Design a coring program and specify procedures for sample collection, handling and analysis.

Define fluid sampling requirements. Specify types of equipment to be used.

Ident ify other data collection services that maybe needed for the successful evaluation.

As Operations Geologist you will develop, monitor and report on the drilling of the first exploratory well in New Basin. If this Well 1

is a discovery appraisal wells will be drilled to determine the potential size of the discovery. You will be involved in all stages of

the exploratory program and report progress to management and the exploration team.

The Operations Geologist needs to have a clear understanding of the objectives of the well and subsequent evaluation

program. Design a well logging program and other data collection programs for evaluation of this int ial wildcat well. Consider

the needs of Geologist , Geophysics and Engineer.

The first well has indicated hydrocarbons and reservior based on mud log results. What changes to your int ial data collect ion

program will you propose? What will be the order of these addit ional data? Planning has included addit ional funds for

enhanced evaluation but requests for addit ional data outstrip available funds. Describe the priorit izat ion of addit ional

evaluation data.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 28 of 87


Exploratory and Delineation Drilling (IHRDC_IPIMS_a319)

Description:

Competency Statement: Monitor drilling programs for exploratory and delineation wells. Discuss the drilling program and

understand the required equipment and procedures for each stage of well operations. Evaluate logic for wildcat location and

subsequent delineation wells.

Learning Objective:

Generate a proposal and Statement of Requirements for an exploratory or delineation well, providing input for the well

design, drilling program and evaluation.

Describe the relationship between formation evaluation requirements and the various aspects of well design and

const ruction.

Monitor and report on drilling operat ions to ensure clear communications.

Discuss trade offs between drilling 'High' or 'Off" structure for init ial wildcat.

Evaluate location of delineation well, Well 2, based on results of a wildcat discovery and economic threshold.

As Operations Geologist you will develop, monitor and report on the drilling of the first exploratory well in the New Basin. If this

well, Well 1, is a discovery appraisal wells will be drilled to determine the potential size of the discovery. You will be involved in all

stages of the exploratory program and report progress to management and the exploration team.

The Operations Geologist needs to have a clear understanding of the objectives of the well and subsequent economic

evaluation program. Based on the exist ing structure map and expected reservoir propert ies select a location that balances

chance of discovery and understanding of the reservoir size. Five other structures have been identified in the New Basin.

The first well, Well 1, has indicated hydrocarbons and reservoir based on well logs, samples and formation test ing. An updated

st ructure map and economic threshold have been developed with data from Well 1, select a second locat ion. This location

should be selected to define a commercial hydrocarbon accumulation.

The second appraisal location, Well 2, has proven to be a successful well. Logs indicate a thicker reservoir full to base. Where will

the third appraisal well be drilled to try to define a water contact?

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 29 of 87

EXPLORATION: Exploration Project Management

Exploration Project Management (IHRDC_IPIMS_a322)

Description:

Competency Statement: In this Learning Module you will be introduced to the project management stage-gate process with

specific focus on the init ial visualizat ion or exploration phase.

Learning Objective:

Upon complication of this module, the learner will be able to:

Describe the five step stage-gate process.

Determine the criteria necessary to move a prospect through the process to drilling.

Determine what data is necessary to provide a basic economic analysis of a prospect.

Apply uncertainty to determine stage-gate qualification.

Assignment Instruction: As the team lead for your integrated exploration interpretation project you are responsible for the

technical assessment quality of the project but also making sure the prospect meets commercial and company economic

goals. Because of the risks, the complexit ies and the sheer magnitudes of the investments needed to develop an oilfield, your

company has divided the analysis and decisions into discreet, sequential stages using a disciplined project management

process. In this lesson you will work through the defined process.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 30 of 87


The Exploration Process (IHRDC_IPIMS_a323)

Description:

Competency Statement: Examine the data types and steps necessary to construct a vision of success statement thru to

prospect generation and evaluation.

Learning Objective:

The objectives of this Learning Module are to introduce the learner to:

Key steps of an exploration study.

Understand the roles science, engineering and commercial input play in the decision process.

Integrate the concepts of risk and risk sensit ivity to the decision process.

Assignment Instruction: The exploration process integrates several fields of knowledge. As the team lead in your exploration

department it is your responsibility to make sure all available data has been gathered, analyzed, and uncertaint ies have been

identified for your management team.

For this assignment you will be asked to review your prospect, determine what data has been integrated, and if uncertaint ies

exist, explore what steps you might recommend to eliminate or reduce the uncertainty impact on your decisions. You will make

a decision to part icipate in the play or not.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 31 of 87


Value of Information (IHRDC_IPIMS_a326)

Description:

Competency Statement: Analyze the “value” of the information that will be gained by applying various technologies to a high

risk variable and then decide if it is worth the extra cost to the project.

Learning Objective:

The objectives of this Learning Module are to:

Measure the value of data vs. the cost on a project.

Determine mult iple scenarios that can accomplish the business goals and their impact on the prospects economics.

Understand the cost benefit decision process and uncertainty in making both science and business and decisions.

Assignment Instruction: The exploration team has preliminary maps over the structures associated with our concessions. The

maps are based on old vintage 2D data. Based on the available data it appears the structure is present, however the team

has assigned a high risk factor to the structure due to its structural orientat ion.

Management has pushed back on funding this new drill project unless you can convince them other wise. Your team will need

to determine the value of shoot ing a new seismic survey, it’s impact on the projects profitability and if there are other data

available that could convince management to commit the funds.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 32 of 87


Prospect Economics and Uncertainty Analysis (IHRDC_IPIMS_a327)

Description:

Competency Statement: Evaluate the risk under uncertainty of an ident ified play area and apply business principles that will

lead to assigning an economic value to the proposed concessions.

Learning Objective:

The learner will be able to:

Characterize a reservoir.

Assess the impact of drilling hazards and wellbore design on prospect economics.

Use field analogies to est imate range of risked recoverable reserves.

Develop and exploratory drilling plan

Create a drilling AFE

Assignment Instruction: The exploration team has completed prospect generation for the play area of interest and are now

ready to evaluate the economics and request funding to invest in the exploratory well. In this assignment you will test the

sensit ivity of the exploration variables to understand their impact on the value of the prospect, the design criteria for drilling,

and the impact of regulatory constraints on the exploratory drilling plan. You will then const ruct an AFE to present to decision

review board to request funding.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 33 of 87


Exploration Business Management (IHRDC_IPIMS_a342)

Description:

Competency Statement: Management is asking you for prospects that can be considered for drilling in the upcoming year. You

will evaluate a prospect based on the findings of two different exploration teams.

Learning Objective:

The Learner will be able to:

Build a business case for drilling an exploratory based on input data from your teams.

Understand the components and processes behind the process.

Apply the process to make a decision that measures value against opportunity.

Present the business case for the play identified by your explorat ion teams.

Assignment Instruction: As the manager of exploration you have asked two independent technical teams to analyze the same

area in the basin. They have each come up with a recommendation for the area that you will have to evaluate and decide

which one you want to move to FID. In this assignment you will review the input of known data, look at which team has

minimized the uncertainty and the overall value of the prospect and make recommendations to your management decision

review board.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 34 of 87

RESERVOIR MANAGEMENT: Reservoir Engineering Fundamentals

Reservoir Rock and Fluid Properties (IHRDC_IPIMS_a1)

Description:

Competency Statement: Define the propert ies of the reservoir rock/fluid system.

Learning Objective: Upon completing this Learning Module assignment, the part icipant should be able to

define the following reservoir propert ies and understand their importance in the overall reservoir development scheme:

Rock propert ies: porosity, permeability, fluid saturat ion, compressibility, anisotropy

Fluid propert ies: phase behavior, PVT relationships, density, viscosity, compressibility, formation volume factor,

gas-oil rat io

Rock/fluid interact ions: wettability, interfacial tension, capillary pressure, relat ive permeability

read and understand wellsite descript ions of recovered core material, evaluate the core handling and preservation

techniques employed, and select sample intervals for laboratory analysis

generate a procedure for preparing and analyzing selected core samples, specifying the tests to be run and the

information to be obtained; describe the laboratory techniques and perform the calculations used for determining rock

propert ies

design procedures for obtaining representat ive surface and subsurface formation fluid samples

describe procedures for generating PVT analyses of reservoir fluid samples, and interpret the result ing reports

use published correlations to est imate reservoir fluid propert ies

Assignment Instruction: In this assignment, you will define the basic rock and fluid propert ies of a recently discovered reservoir in

the Republic of Sucre.

You will be in charge of obtaining representative fluid samples and determining their Pressure-Volume-Temperature (PVT)

characterist ics. You will also design a coring and core analysis program for a new well, and use the results to define basic rock

propert ies and rock-fluid interactions.

The discovery well, Well 4E1-NE, tested at 1550 STB/D of 35 degree API oil [246 m3/D, 0.85 specific gravity], with a producing

gas-oil rat io of 680 SCF/STB [121 m3/m3] and a water cut of about three percent. It is currently on an extended product ion test.

The second well drilled in this field , Well 5C1-SW, tested all water and was subsequently suspended.

Before your company acquired these drilling blocks, a medium-sized independent had run a series of seismic surveys in the area.

Your company purchased these data, from which the Geology and Geophysics departments constructed a subsurface

contour map showing the approximate st ructure boundaries and the top of the Upper Sand.

You are now part of the interdisciplinary team charged with characterizing the reservoir and developing an optimal

exploitation strategy. Right now, you do not have much to work with—just the contour map and the well data obtained so far.

(You can access this material by clicking on the References that accompany each assignment quest ion.)

What you will need to do at this point, then, is to use the available data to try to define some basic reservoir rock and fluid

propert ies.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 40 of 87


Rock Mechanics Fundamentals (IHRDC_IPIMS_a2)

Description:

Competency Statement: Apply rock mechanics fundamentals to discribe well, reservoir and production behavior.


define the following rock mechanical propert ies under various condit ions of confining pressure, describe how these

propert ies influence wellbore stability, directional drilling considerat ions, well completion design and other aspects of

reservoir development, and know how they are measured in the laboratory:

Brinell hardness

Tensile st rength

Normal/shear stress relat ionships and failure mechanisms (Mohr circles)

Young’s modulus

Poisson’s rat io

Compressive strength

Shear st rength

Assignment Instruction: Rock mechanics is a basic element of reservoir descript ion, well design and production optimization.

Knowledge of rock mechanical propert ies is crit ical to successful reservoir management.

In this assignment, you will define rock mechanical propert ies based on an analysis of core samples from Well 2A5-NE. You will:

(1) select core samples for measuring rock mechanical propert ies

(2) est imate the overburden and pore pressuress at reservoir depth

(3) determine rock mechanical propert ies under reservoir condit ions

(4) calculate rock compressive strength, Young's Modulus and Poisson's rat io,

(5) Use a Mohr diagram to interpret the reservoir's shear stress rate

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 41 of 87


Stability and Rock Deformation Models (IHRDC_IPIMS_a3)

Description:

Competency Statement: Generate a stability and rock deformation model.


identify the presence and orientation of fracture systems in the reservoir

Assignment Instruction: To understand formation stress response, we start by measuring the mechanical propert ies of

representative core samples in the laboratory. This gives us information about the rock's strength and stability under a given set

of condit ions.

We then apply this empirical knowledge to the formation by combining our core observations with such geologic informat ion as

well logs, st ructure maps and regional outcrop studies.

In this assignment, you will review core descript ions for evidence of natural fractures and other tectonic activity. You will then

incorporate your observations with other data sources to determine the principal stress directions in the formation.

Core analysis, including rock mechanical propert ies tests, have been done on selected samples from Well 2A5-NE. Early seismic

measurements and log data from offset wells indicate that the reservoir is bounded by normal faults on the east and west .

Your object ive in reviewing this core information is to

(1) determine the formation’s principal stress directions,

(2) and find indications of tectonic activity.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 42 of 87


Reservoir Drive Mechanisms (IHRDC_IPIMS_a4)

Description:

Competency Statement: Identify and interpret production mechanisms to predict the behavior of oil, gas and gas condensate

reservoirs.


identify primary reservoir drive mechanisms (solut ion gas drive, water drive, gas cap drive) by observing production and

pressure trends.

est imate original hydrocarbons in place, using both volumetric and material balance methods, and develop a range of

est imates for technical recovery factors and reserves.

Assignment Instruction: The ult imate goal of reservoir management is to optimize economically the development and

production of hydrocarbons. This requires answers to three quest ions:

(1) How much hydrocarbon is there?

(2) How much of it is recoverable?

(3) How fast can it be recovered?

In other words, we need to determine , respectively, the oil and gas in place, the reserves, and the production rate.

Your job in this assignment scenario is to review the reservoir data that have been collected to this point and

est imate the original hydrocarbon in place using volumetric and material balance methods,

qualitat ively evaluate the reservoir drive mechanisms, and

est imate the reservoir’s primary recovery factor

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 43 of 87


Multidisciplinary Reservoir Management (IHRDC_IPIMS_a6)

Description:

Competency Statement: Contribute to the efforts of a mult idisciplinary reservoir management team, based on a general

knowledge of related disciplines.


demonstrate a basic knowledge of disciplines outside of reservoir engineering (i.e., Geology, Sedimentology,

Petrophysiscs, Geophysics, etc.), and establish a working relationship with specialists from these disciplines.

understand the role of different disciplines in the overall process of reservoir characterization and exploitation.

Assignment Instruction: Much of our reservoir data comes from disciplines outside of reservoir engineering. The init ial structure

map, for example, may be generated from seismic measurements and geological interpretation, with subsequent information

coming from well logs, cores, production data and other sources.

In this assignment, you will review the well and field data that have been gathered to date for the Upper/Middle sands, so

that you can have an idea of what tools are available for describing the subsurface environment. You will also look at how

various E&P disciplines may fit into the overall reservoir management task.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 44 of 87

RESERVOIR MANAGEMENT: Well Logging and SubsurfaceMapping

Interdisciplinary Data Acquisition (IHRDC_IPIMS_a121)

Description:

Competency Statement: Gather, view, classify and validate the mult idisciplinary information required for conducting integrated

reservoir studies.


access PDVSA engineering and geoscience databases and identify information that is relevant to the field under study.

classify information according to discipline and what reservoir parameters it helps to define.

Assignment Instruction: In this Learning Module, you will establish general data acquisit ion requirements for an integrated

reservoir study of the Sucre field. You will consider both exist ing and potent ial data sources, and determine what information

you need to start building a reservoir model. By the t ime you complete this module, you should be able to determine

information needs, identify and access interdisciplinary data resources, and compile reservoir information based on the

parameters to be defined.

In this Learning Module assignment, the reservoir is in the early appraisal stage of its life. Its status at the t ime of this assignment

is as follows:

A structure contour map has been generated from seismic data and interpretat ions of regional geological data.

Well 4E1-NE, the discovery well, is currently on an extended production test.

Well 5C1-SW tested all water, and was subsequent ly suspended.

Drilling is in progress on Well 2A5-NE. A conventional coring program has been authorized, and should be gett ing

underway soon.

The reservoir management team is already at work compiling a database of reservoir information. Your job in this assignment is

to provide some ideas of what this database can contribute to the task of reservoir management, and what information

should be added to it .

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 45 of 87


Wireline Well Logging (IHRDC_IPIMS_a122)

Description:

Competency Statement: Select and apply the appropriate well logging tools for a part icular set of well condit ions and reservoir

study parameters.


select the appropriate logging tool(s) for evaluating a given reservoir prameter, taking into account operating

condit ions and limitat ions.

specify procedures, surface equipment, and auxiliary tools to be employed on a logging job.

Assignment Instruction: In this Learning Module, you will select and apply the appropriate tools for conducting open hole

logging surveys at Well 2A5-NE, based on well condit ions and formation evaluation objectives. By the t ime you complete this

module, you should understand the basic operating principles of commonly used logging tools and be able to determine their

areas of applicat ion.

Conductor casing has been set at Well 2A5-NE, and the surface hole is currently being drilled. Your tasks in this assignment are

to review the surface logging program, and then to select the appropriate tools for logging from Target Depth to the shoe of

the surface casing.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 46 of 87


Well Log Quality Control (IHRDC_IPIMS_a123)

Description:

Competency Statement: Validate the quality of information supplied by the logging service company to ensure that the data

can be used in generating a petrophysical reservoir model.


monitor the quality control of logging procedures, including calibration, correct ion and choice of scales)

Assignment Instruction: In this Learning Module, you will be in charge of well log quality control at Well 2A5-NE. By the t ime you

complete this module, you should be able to define basic survey parameters, establish log scales, monitor tool responses, and

confirm the validity of the data acquired from commonly used logging devices.

You are approaching target depth on Well 2A5-NE, and you will short ly be calling out the service company crew to log the 8

1/2 inch hole interval. Your job in this assignment is to establish some general guidelines for conducting logging operations,

review tool calibrat ions and monitor survey progress.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 47 of 87


Well Log Interpretation (IHRDC_IPIMS_a124)

Description:

Competency Statement: Determine reservoir rock propert ies using well log analysis.


Use log analysis to identify reservoir rock propert ies (fluid saturation, porosity, fluid contacts, permeabilit ies, bulk shale

content, net oil sand, fractures)

Assignment Instruction: In this Learning Module, you will use basic well log interpretation techniques to identify potential pay

zones, define basic reservoir propert ies and est imate the hydrocarbons in place in terms of reservoir volume per unit area. By the

t ime you complete this module, you should be able to apply log analysis methods to the task of generating a petrophysical

reservoir model.

The open hole formation evaluation program at Well 2A5-NE is in progress, and field copies of the lithology, resist ivity and

porosity logs are now available. Your job in this assignment is to review these logs and make an init ial evaluat ion of the well's

hydrocarbon potential. Your evaluation is an important first step in deciding whether to complete the well, so be sure to

carefully examine the log data.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 48 of 87


Subsurface Mapping (IHRDC_IPIMS_a125)

Description:

Competency Statement: Develop geological, petrophysical and sedimentological maps for use in generating a reservoir model.


generate geologic cross sections from well logs.

draw subsurface contours and construct geologic and geophysical maps.

Assignment Instruction: The original st ructure contour map for the Upper/Middle Sand reservoir was derived from seismic data

acquired from an independent operator. Since then, three wells have been drilled, and the seismic data have undergone

reprocessing and extensive addit ional interpretat ion. As a result, you now have a new base map, which shows the locat ions of

the new wells and depth markers to the top of the Upper Sand. In this assignment, you will revise the Upper Sand st ructure map

to reflect these new data (be careful--the updated map may or may not be similar to the original map!)

To complete the assignment, you will consider several addit ional formation parameters that may be conducive to subsurface

contour mapping, and consider how they could be used to describe this reservoir.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 49 of 87


Reserves Definitions, Reporting and Mapping (IHRDC_IPIMS_a126)

Description:

Competency Statement: Elaborate and update from the maps generated during the modeling of the reservoir, the maps

required by the Ministry of Energy and Mines in offical format, for the administrat ion and control of the reserves.


access the applications used to generate MEM maps in official formatt

generate a map using the applciations.

Assignment Instruction: The Ministry of Natural Resources is a department of the Nat ional Executive of the Republic of Sucre. Its

responsibilit ies include establishing norms and regulations for business operations in the hydrocarbon sector, in accordance with

laws established by the National Legislature.

The Ministry's organization and objectives are basically the same as those of the Ministry of Energy and Mines (MEM) in the

neighboring Republic of Venezuela, and the norms that it has established for oil and gas operations are identical to MEM

standards. For this reason, the quest ions that you are asked in this assignment use MEM standards as primary reference sources.

In this Assignment, you will review the present status of the Upper/Middle sand reservoir, determine what reports you need to

submit to the Ministry, and decide how to classify well locations and est imated hydrocarbon reserves in keeping with

established norms. You will also ensure that the symbols and conventions used in the official maps that are submitted with

these reports are consistent with Ministry standards. By the t ime you complete the Assignment, you should be able to comply

with MEM standards for report ing reserves and generating subsurface maps using accepted symbols, conventions and

nomenclature.

The current status of the Upper/Middle sand reservoir is as follows:

Well 4E1-NE, the discovery well, is on an extended production test. Permanent completion is pending.

Well 5C1-SW was suspended after well logs and a formation test indicated that it exposed the Upper Sand below the

water-oil contact.

Well 2A5-NE has been drilled and tested, and a successful open hole format ion test has been carried out.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 50 of 87

RESERVOIR MANAGEMENT: Reservoir Characterization andModeling

Compaction and Subsidence (IHRDC_IPIMS_a127)

Description:

Competency Statement: Analyze, calculate and validate compaction, subsidence and sett ling parameters to predict their

influence on the behavior of the project and their impact on recovery, using the results of this analysis to optimize exploitation

projects.


measure compact ion, subsidence parameters.

determine the significanc of these parrmeters with re determining drive mechanisms, etc.

Assignment Instruction: A sedimentary formation is the product of rock part icle deposit ion, an ongoing process in which an

underlying layer of part icles is buried and forced downward by succeeding layers. As deposit ion and burial proceed, the

underlying layer is subjected to a progressively increasing overburden pressure. This increased overburden results in

compact ion--a reduction in the thickness and bulk volume of the underlying layer.

Compaction also takes place when fluids are withdrawn from a subsurface format ion. Fluid withdrawal causes a decrease in

pore pressure, which in turn increases the grain-to-grain, or mat rix pressure of the rock part icles and causes them to compact.

The amount of compaction that occurs in a given formation depends only upon the difference between the vert ically applied

overburden pressure and the fluid, or pore pressure. Thus, the uniaxial compaction of a rock sample of thickness h can be

expressed as

DVb/ Vb = Dh/h

Depending on geological condit ions, subsurface compaction may be associated with varying degrees of subsidence, or sinking

of the ground at the surface.

Compaction and its associated effect of surface subsidence can, in certain situat ions, have significant effects on reservoir

management st rategies and field operations. In this Assignment, you will build your general understanding of these

phenomena and see how they can influence reservoir engineering decisions. You will also look at a system that has been

developed by PDVSA to describe and predict compaction and subsidence in areas where they are of part icular concern.

By the t ime you complete this assignment, you should be able to identify situations where compaction and subsidence may be

important considerations in a reservoir management strategy, and you should be able to begin using computer-based tools for

predicting compaction and subsidence under various condit ions.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 51 of 87


Pressure/Production Data Analysis (IHRDC_IPIMS_a128)

Description:

Competency Statement: Analyze and interpret pressure and production data for incorporat ion into the reservoir model.

Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to

review and acquire well test information

validate pressure test information

prepare well test data for analysis

diagnose and interpret the pressure test

design and interpret production records; analyze production behavior

Assignment Instruction: Well 4E1-NE is the first well drilled in the Upper/Middle Sand reservoir. The well was completed with 7-inch

casing, selectively perforated and placed on an extended production test. Test ing was conducted in several stages. The first

stage, which is the subject of this assignment, involved test ing 16 feet of interval in the upper port ion of the identified pay

intervals. This test was designed to gather information on reservoir flow characterist ics, and in part icular, to determine the

nature of a nearby fault that had been identified on the structure map. Your job in this assignment is to review the data from

this init ial test and evaluate the reservoir permeability, near-wellbore effects and boundary effects.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 52 of 87


Flow Unit Determination (IHRDC_IPIMS_a129)

Description:

Competency Statement: Establish flow units within the reservoir.


Establish the areal and vert ical dist ribut ion of zones with similar behavior in agreement with the reservoir model.

Ident ify and delineate the rock volumes with sedimentological, petrophysical and reservoir propert ies that enable

hydraulic communication.

Assignment Instruction: Most reservoirs are not homogeneous. Rather, they exhibit complex variat ions in continuity, thickness

patterns and other propert ies, including porosity, permeability and capillary pressure. A reservoir is typically subdivided into

zones or areas based upon differences in rock propert ies. The complexity of reservoir rock imposes a challenge to geoscientists

and engineers in applying available technologies and their experience to improving oil and gas recovery.

The purpose of geological mapping is to ident ify flow units that contain oil and gas, and once they are found, to apply geologic

evidence and concepts toward achieving the most efficient development and production of these prospects. However, it is

important to remember that these geologic maps are never finished. When new wells are drilled or old wells are re-examined,

new information becomes available, and the extent and geometry of flow units must be updated. Original maps may be

based upon a few scattered control points. This means that in the early stages of geological work, a careful study of the local

area should be made.

Lithofacies maps are quite helpful in defining various reservoir rock types. The correlat ion of a number of reservoir propert ies,

including porosity and permeability, becomes much more meaningful when applied to a specific rock type.

During the production phase of a reservoir, more informat ion about flow units is obtained by t ransient well test ing and careful

monitoring of individual well performance. Reservoir pressure maps are part icularly useful for evaluating reservoir continuity. The

areal distribution of reservoir pressure in different zones as a function of t ime can help us to identify pay discontinuit ies and flow

barriers. Vert ical pressure profiles are also useful in defining the effect of vert ical permeability within a given reservoir section.

History matching of field performance, using a numerical reservoir simulator, can provide great insight into the cont inuity of flow

units and reservoir propert ies in inter-well areas where there is no measurements. In this process, the geological propert ies such

porosity, permeability and pay continuity are changed in order to match the observed field performance.

Different steps in gathering data for flow unit determination are:

In the geological phase:

General reservoir configurat ion

Fluids distribution

Continuity and thickness

Rock type, porosity and permeability cutoffs

Fluid contacts

Vert ical strat ificat ion

During the production phase:

Logging

Well performance

Well test ing

Relative permeability, capillary pressure and wettability tests

Inter-well t racers

In this assignment, you will be taking a short break from your work in the Sucre field, while the geologists on the reservoir

management team prepare an analysis of some of the information that has been gathered so far from the upper/middle

sands. During this t ime you will work on identifying the flow units within another reservoir where your company is actively

involved in the Nuri formation.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 53 of 87


Reservoir Simulation (IHRDC_IPIMS_a130)

Description:

Competency Statement: Apply analyt ical and numerical simulation techniques to the development, test ing and refining of a

reservoir model, and the generation of an opt imal reservoir exploitat ion plan.


define reservoir simulation objectives

define simulator geometry and dimensions, and assign flow equations to the proposed model

define simulator grid and boundary condit ions

compile reservoir model input parameters

develop finite-difference approximations to solve the flow equations

plan numerical simulat ion computer runs and interpret the results

use simulat ion results to determine the optimum exploitat ion scheme

Assignment Instruction: A typical reservoir simulation study is conducted in four stages:

Gather all relevant reservoir data.1.

Init ialize the developed model.2.

Validate the model using a history matching process.3.

Forecast the reservoir's future behavior.4.

Once the structure, thickness, porosity and permeability maps are obtained, the data need to be discretized according to the

gridding system used. Fluid propert ies are entered into the model either using a data table or in the form of a correlation. For

mult i-phase flow problems, relat ive permeability relat ionships and capillary pressure curves also need to be obtained.

Models are typically init ialized with respect to the water/oil or gas/oil contact depths and a reference datum-level pressure

value.

For the init ialization, the simulator is run unt il the hydrostatic equilibrium of the exist ing phases is established.

Validation of the model requires a detailed production history of all wells in the reservoir. The production data should contain

information about open intervals, well st imulations and product ion rate of each phase (oil, gas, water).

After the model is history matched against the exist ing production data, it can be used to predict future reservoir behavior for

different development scenarios.

Keep in mind that these predict ions are only as good as the basic input that was entered into the model.

Your assignment here is to gather all the iso-surface maps and fit a body-centered grid on top of the reservoir structure.

You also need to collect all the PVT data that will be used during the simulation.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 54 of 87

RESERVOIR MANAGEMENT: Reservoir Surveillance

Data Acquisition (IHRDC_IPIMS_a161)

Description:

Competency Statement: Acquire and analyze the necessary data for optimizing reservoir surveillance.

Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to acquire and analyze pressure data, PVT

reports, production records, injection records, production tests, fluid sampling, injectivity tests, and other information for the

purpose of monitoring reservoir behavior.

Assignment Instruction: Reservoir surveillance is a process of identifying, gathering and interpreting the information needed to

effectively manage the reservoir and maximize economic hydrocarbon recovery. This process become more and more crit ical

as a field passes through the various phases of primary, secondary and enhanced recovery.

In this assignment, you will plan a data acquisit ion program for the Upper/Middle Sands that includes the following elements:

Present and future object ives1.

Data requirements2.

Data sources3.

Acquisit ion methods4.

Interpretation of collected data5.

By the t ime you complete this assignment, you should be able to acquire and analyze pressure data, PVT reports, production

records, injection records, production tests, fluid sampling, injectivity tests, and other information for the purpose of monitoring

reservoir behavior.

The explorat ion/appraisal program for this reservoir is currently in its third year. So far, four wells have been drilled: 4E1-NE,

5C1-SW (suspended), 2A5-NE and 5A1-SW.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 55 of 87


Geologic/Seismic Integration (IHRDC_IPIMS_a162)

Description:

Competency Statement: Integrate mult idimensional seismic information and geological data to optimize the processes of

reservoir monitoring and exploitation.

Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to establish a basis for integrating

geophysical and geological data and incorporating them into the reservoir surveillance program.

Assignment Instruction: Reservoir surveillance is a process of gathering and analyzing the information necessary to control

operations and maximize the economic recovery of hydrocarbons. Geologists and geophysicists play a key role in this process,

from early explorat ion and appraisal to the mature stages of production.

In this assignment, you will consider how various geological and geophysical tools can be used for reservoir monitoring, and

determine their applicability to the surveillance program for the Upper/Middle Sands.

By the t ime you complete this assignment, you should be able to establish a basis for integrating geophysical and geological

data and incorporating them into the reservoir surveillance program.

The explorat ion/appraisal program for this reservoir is currently in its third year. So far, four wells have been drilled: 4E1-NE,

5C1-SW (suspended), 2A5-NE and 5A1-SW.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 56 of 87


Geological Model Updating (IHRDC_IPIMS_a163)

Description:

Competency Statement: Update the geological model of the reservoir.

Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to apply informat ion from newly acquired

well logs, core samples and other data sources to refine the geological model of the reservoir, including its structure, strat igrapy,

dimensions and boundaries.

Assignment Instruction: The geological model is a basic element of any reservoir descript ion. It characterizes such parameters as

reservoir structure, strat igraphy and dimensions based on logs, core analyses and other data. These parameters are essential to

est imating hydrocarbon-in-place and reserves potential.

In this assignment, you will review available information from the Upper/Middle Sands and compare it with the present

geological model. You will then revise the geological model as necessary. Based on your interpretations, you will develop

important insights into the reservoir cont inuity and deposit ional environment, and establish or confirm the reservoir limits.

By the t ime you complete this module, you should be able to apply information from well logs, core samples and other data

sources to refine the geological model of the reservoir, including its st ructure, st rat igrapy, dimensions and boundaries.

The explorat ion/appraisal program for the Upper/Middle Sands has been completed, and the reservoir is currently entering its

first development year. Wells drilled and evaluated to date are 4E1-NE, 5C1-SW (suspended), 2A5-NE, 5A1-SW and 5A2-SE.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 57 of 87


Petrophysical Model Updating (IHRDC_IPIMS_a164)

Description:

Competency Statement: Update the petrophysical model of the reservoir.

Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to use well logs, cores, correlations and

other tools to establish the distribution of petrophysical propert ies in the reservoir.

Assignment Instruction: Reservoir quality is determined primarily by the distribution of petrophysical propert ies such as porosity

and permeability, pore size distribution and pore geometry, and the presence of pore-filling materials that may have an effect

on productivity or hydrocarbon recovery efficiency. Other important factors, such as relative permeability and capillary

pressure relat ionships, are related to rock wettability and capillary pressure effects. Thus, in order to fully describe reservoir

quality, it is necessary to have a knowledge of the composit ion and characterist ics of the reservoir fluids, as swell as the rock

pore system.

In this assignment, you will determine reservoir propert ies for input into the Upper/Middle Sands petrophysical model. By the

t ime you complete this assignment, you should be able to use well logs, cores, correlat ions and other tools to establish the

distribution of petorphysical propert ies in the reservoir.

The explorat ion/appraisal program for the Upper/Middle Sands has been completed, and the reservoir is currently entering its

first development year. Wells drilled and evaluated to date are 4E1-NE, 5C1-SW (suspended), 2A5-NE, 5A1-SW and 5A2-SE.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 58 of 87


Reservoir Model Updating (IHRDC_IPIMS_a165)

Description:

Competency Statement: Update the reservoir model.


Incorporate new production data (selective & different ial) into the reservoir model, along with new information from

well/core analyses.

Refine the reservoir model based on differences between predicted and actual pressure and product ion data.

Assignment Instruction: A preliminary reservoir model of the Upper/Middle Sands was generated during the

exploration/appraisal period. In this assignment, you will review the most current available data and history-match the

reservoir’s actual performance with that predicted by the original model. Based on the results of the history match, you may

choose to modify one or more of the following parameters:

Data summary

Grid data

Thickness data

Porosity data

Permeability data

Saturation data

With this updated reservoir model, you can test different exploitation scenarios to determine which one results in the optimal

economic recovery.

The field is presently under development, during which t ime it has been placed on limited production. Active wells include

4E1-NE, 2A5-NE, 5A1-SW and 5A2-SE.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 59 of 87

RESERVOIR MANAGEMENT: Reservoir Development Strategies

Economic Evaluation (IHRDC_IPIMS_a201)

Description:

Competency Statement: Use economic evaluation methods to select the most profitable project and/or exploitation strategy,

and formulate a project budget.

Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to apply economic evaluat ion techniques

that are necessary for analyzing proposed long-range exploitation st rategies and/or projects in the areas of reservoir, drilling

and production.

Assignment Instruction: Based on reservoir model and well performance predict ions that were generated during the

exploration/appraisal period, the reservoir management team is current ly looking at 3 potential development scenarios for the

primary recovery stage:

Case 1a Case 2a Case 3a

MDR

(Maximum Design Rate)

7500 STB/D

[1193 m3/D]

15000 STB/D

[2385 m3/D]

22500 STB/D

[3578 m3/D]

Exploration/appraisal wells to be completed 4 4 4

Addit ional wells to be drilled and completed 1 6 11

Total number of wells 5 10 15

The simulator runs used to generate these cases were based on the following assumptions:

Volumetric (closed pressure boundary) reservoir.

Production begins in the first production year at the MDR, even though the reservoir actually produced at low rates

under test condit ions during the exploration/appraisal stage.

Average init ial production per well = 1500 STB/D [apx. 240 m3/D]—under the assumed reservoir parameters, this

appears to be the maximum natural flow rate that is sustainable for a significant t ime period.

In this assignment, you will compile the available informat ion and generate net discounted cash flow predictions for each of

these cases. You will then evaluate each case in terms of its primary economic indicators, taking into account the sensit ivity of

the evaluation to uncertaint ies in the input parameters.

NOTE: An MS Excel spreadsheet, Proj_Template, has been included as a reference for this assignment. You may use this

spreadsheet to enter input parameters and run economics for each Case. If you do so, be sure to save each case as a

separate file, because you will be referring back to it as you progress through the assignment.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 60 of 87


Permitting for Well Operations (IHRDC_IPIMS_a202)

Description:

Competency Statement: Prepare the required permission requests for drilling, workover/recompletion, st imulation,

abandonment and well servicing operations to satisfy the established legal requirements of governmental regulatory

organizations.

Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to follow proper procedures for obtaining

permission to conduct drilling, workover/recompletion, st imulations, abandonment proposals and well servicing operations, in

accordance the established legal requirements of the MEM, MARNR and other official organizat ions.

Assignment Instruction: The Ministry of Natural Resources is a department of the Nat ional Executive of the Republic of Sucre. Its

responsibilit ies include establishing norms and regulations for business operations in the hydrocarbon sector, in accordance with

laws established by the National Legislature.

As is t rue for similar regulatory agencies in other countries, the Ministry of Natural Resources oversees the permitt ing of oil and

gas operations, including those that pertain to well drilling, complet ion workover and abandonment.

The Ministry's permitt ing requirements are basically the same as those of the Ministry of Energy and Mines (MEM) in the

neighboring Republic of Venezuela, and the norms that it has established for oil and gas operations are identical to MEM

standards. For this reason, the quest ions that you are asked in this assignment use MEM standards as primary reference sources.

In this learning module assignment, you will apply the permitt ing requirements of the Ministry in the following areas:

Drilling of a new well

Workover and abandonment operations

Project management as it relates to improved recovery operations, well spacing crit ieria and gas ut ilizat ion

requirements.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 61 of 87

PRODUCTION ENGINEERING AND OPERATIONS: ReservoirDevelopment Strategies

Health, Safety and Environment (IHRDC_IPIMS_a203)

Description:

Competency Statement: Apply the laws, regulations and norms relating to personal, environmental and industrial safety as they

apply to oil and gas operat ions.


apply the laws, regulations and norms in matters of personal, industrial and environmental safety, with the objective of

protecting the integrity of persons, installat ions, equipment and the environment.

identify instances in which safe practices are not being followed, and take steps to correct the situation

Assignment Instruction: The reservoir is currently in its development and early production stages. Drilling, construct ion and

production activit ies are fully underway. In each of these activit ies, it is imperative to maintain safe operations, protect the

health and well-being of personnel, and preserve the environment.

In this module assignment, you will be observing drilling rig operations with an eye toward your own personal safety and that of

others at the wellsite. You will review incident descript ions from various field locations and try to determine what went wrong in

each case and how the incident could have been prevented. And you will look at several issues related to fire protection at an

upstream production facility.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 62 of 87


Reservoir Management and Control (IHRDC_IPIMS_a204)

Description:

Competency Statement: Opt imize reservoir management and control decisions using surveillance techniques, information

systems, technical indicators and financial guidelines.

Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to do the following:

Manage available resources (e.g., reserves, assets, personnel, budget) in order to maximize hydrocarbon reserves and

minimize recovery cost .

Make appropriate reservoir management and control decisions with the aid of surveillance techniques, information

systems and technology applications to generate pressure and production histories, maps and other key reservoir data.

Assignment Instruction: The Upper/Middle Sands have been on production for about 11 months. Fifteen wells are currently

active, and the information that you have available includes both detailed and summary reports of pressure and production

behavior. In this assignment, you will use this informat ion to refine the reservoir descript ion, improve well performance and work

toward developing an optimal exploitation strategy.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 63 of 87


Improved Recovery (IHRDC_IPIMS_a205)

Description:

Competency Statement: Evaluate the improved recovery potential of the reservoir.


Apply basic screening criteria and determine a reservoir’s suitability for various improved recovery processes, including

waterflooding and enhanced oil recovery.

Observe waterflood performance and perform basic recovery calculations, based on a frontal advance model and

analysis of fractional flow curves.

Determine the displacement efficiency of a pilot waterflood.

Assignment Instruction: Improved recovery, in the context of this assignment, refers to processes that supplement natural

reservoir drive mechanisms. These processes are generally grouped into two main categories:

secondary recovery, which includes waterflooding and immiscible gas injection

enhanced oil recovery (EOR), which includes miscible, chemical and thermal methods.

Although individual processes vary widely in type and applicability to part icular condit ions, they have one objective in

common: to improve the displacement efficiency of hydrocarbons from the reservoir.

In this assignment, you will review the performance of the Upper/Middle Sands under primary depletion and conduct a

preliminary waterflood screening, including a pilot flood to serve as a field t rial of the process. The reservoir has been on

production for just over one year. There are currently 15 active wells.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 64 of 87

RESERVOIR MANAGEMENT: Reservoir Management Practices

Implementation of Reservoir Development Strategies (IHRDC_IPIMS_a206)

Description:

Competency Statement: Develop a st rategic scenario and budget for implementing a reservoir development scheme and

producing actual reserves.


Use reservoir studies to develop a resource base (drilling plans, future improved recovery, information acquisit ion,

applicat ion of new technologies, facilit ies and infrastructure).

Evaluate reservoir exploitation schemes through the use of corporate management indicators

Assignment Instruction: The Upper/Middle sands project is about to complete it s ninth year (fourth production year). You have

recently concluded a twenty-month pilot waterflood in the fault block occupied by Wells 4E2-SE and 4D2-SW. In this

assignment, you will evaluate the results of this pilot project in preparation for implementing a field-wide waterflood. You will

then address the practical aspects of implement ing the full-scale project, generate a development scenario based on the

data that you have gathered during the primary production stage, and formulate a project budget.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 65 of 87


Reservoir Surveillance and Control (IHRDC_IPIMS_a208)

Description:

Competency Statement: Understand and apply reservoir surveillance and control techniques to confirm the materialization of

the proposed strategies in the reservoir exploitation scheme


compare actual reservoir behavior to various performance predict ion tools and account for differences

evaluate the effectiveness of the exploitation st rategy

explain reasons why actual reservoir performance deviated from init ial predictions

Assignment Instruction: The Upper/Middle Sands have been on production for more than 20 years, 15 of them under waterflood.

On the basis of daily average product ion, this reservoir has already passed its economic limit, with water cuts routinely

exceeding 90 percent. But thanks to the efforts of field personnel in applying good product ion practices and bringing

operating costs down to a minimum, the field is st ill making a small profit . It remains to be seen whether this field has addit ional

potent ial through a realignment of the waterflood or implementation of enhanced oil recovery methods.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 66 of 87


Contracts (IHRDC_IPIMS_a209)

Description:

Competency Statement: Analyze scenarios, make suitable contract models and study special projects in areas of the

exploitation macro process, assuring business profitability and respecting the prevailing laws and norms of contracts.


analyze field projects and generate contract models

evaluate contracts in terms of project profitability

Assignment Instruction: As a reservoir manager, you are certain to spend much of your t ime dealing with companies that

provide products, materials or services ranging from downhole tools to simulation software to engineering expert ise. You may

also work with research inst itut ions, government agencies, other operating companies, and even with private individuals. All of

these working relationships are governed by legal agreements, or contracts.

A contract defines the rights that each party has in a business relat ionship, the obligations that each party has toward the

other, and the legal, fiscal and operat ing terms under which these rights and obligations are maintained. When properly

drafted and negotiated in good faith, a contract works to the mutual benefit and protection of both part ies. It is important,

therefore, that you understand and be able to apply key contract provisions.

In this Learning Module, you will focus on two types of contracts: a term sheet for a Turnkey Drilling Contract with Daywork

Provisions, patterned after the International Association of Drilling Contractors’ model (IADC--1998), and a Master Agreement

for Contract Services, patterned after models developed by the IADC and the International Association of Geophysical

Contractors (IAGC).

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 67 of 87

DRILLING AND WELL COMPLETION: Drilling and Well CompletionPractices

Initial Well Planning (IHRDC_IPIMS_a241)

Description:

Competency Statement: Define basic drilling and well completion requirements based on reservoir management objectives.

Ident ify crit ical logist ical issues and HSE considerations. Generate budget cost est imate.


Review an init ial well proposal and identify key drilling and complet ion object ives.

Gather and evaluate offset data and other information pert inent to the well objectives.

Document and evaluate indicators of potential drilling hazards and/or HSE risks.

Ident ify appropriate methods for predicting pore pressures, fracture pressures, and subsurface temperatures, and plot

predicted pressures and temperatures versus depth.

Determine format ion fluids to be encountered and potential contaminants.

Out line crit ical issues relating to surface locat ion, including those related to logist ics, safety and environmental

protection.

Generate a budget-level est imate of dry-hole and total well costs.

Assignment Instruction: The Asset Management Team responsible for PETROS Corporation’s port ion of the Tremont onshore field

has recently completed an appraisal of the 6th Zone reservoir, and is now preparing a development program. The team has

given you a proposed bottomhole location for the first development well, Adams 8. The target location is in Block D-4,

approximately 0.5 km [1640 ft] from the property boundary between PETROS Corporation and Apex Oil & Gas Company. The

discovery well for the 6th Zone anticline was Apex's Copley 1. Four addit ional wells (Copley 3, Adams 4, Adams 6 and Adams 7)

have either tested or are currently producing commercial quantit ies of oil; Three others (Copley 2, Stuart 1 and Adams 5) were

drilled outside of the structure boundaries and subsequently abandoned. Your tasks in this assignment are to establish the

drilling objectives for this well in keeping with the overall reservoir management strategy, and to ident ify some of the key issues

to be addressed in the well planning process.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 68 of 87


Well Design (IHRDC_IPIMS_a242)

Description:

Competency Statement: Define basic well design parameters, including well profile, casing points and casing/hole diameters.

Design casing strings and outline cementing requirements. Select surface equipment components. Generate preliminary cost

est imates for inclusion in AFE.


Select a surface locat ion for a new well and establish an optimal target radius

Pick casing points and specify casing and hole diameters for each drilled sect ion

Establish a well t rajectory in keeping with overall drilling object ives

Select casing weights, grades and connect ions based on consideration of maximum load condit ions

Determine general requirements for primary cementing operations.

Specify wellhead equipment components and their working pressure rat ings.

Assignment Instruction: An init ial review of the Adams 8 well proposal served to clarify the drilling objectives, identify crit ical well

planning issues and provide some knowledge of the surface and subsurface environments. It is now t ime to start the designing

the well. The start ing point will be to finalize the surface and bottomhole locations so that you can establish a well profile. At

the same t ime, you will pick your casing points, decide on the casing and hole diameters for each interval and recommend the

working pressure ratings for the wellhead components. You will then specify the weights, grades and connections to be used

for each casing string, and outline the primary cementing requirements for the surface casing. Finally, you will provide a cost

est imate to be used in preparing the AFE for this well.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 69 of 87


Drilling Program Planning and Implementation (IHRDC_IPIMS_a243)

Description:

Competency Statement: Design mud program for each hole section. Establish well control precautions and procedures. Design

drill string and bottomhole assembly. Plan bit and hydraulics programs. Evaluate rig specificat ions and capabilit ies.

Learning Objective: Upon completion of this module, the part icipant should be able to:

Out line mud system specifications for individual hole sect ions based on well condit ions and drilling objectives.

Establish basic well control requirements.

Specify circulating system requirements and evaluate hydraulics practices based on offset well performance.

Review offset bit performance as a basis for developing bit selection criteria for a new well.

Provide general recommendations for the drill string configuration and design of the bottomhole assembly.

Review rig specifications and capabilit ies in the context of drilling program requirements.

Assignment Instruction: In this assignment, you will address various aspects of planning and carrying out the drilling program for

Adams 8, a new development well in the Tremont field. Your work will include designing the mud and hydraulics programs,

reviewing basic well control precautions, establishing guidelines for bit selection, and designing the drill string. Although you will

not be directly involved in reviewing bids and selecting the drilling contractor, you will be providing input regarding power

requirements, hoist ing capabilit ies and circulating system capacit ies that will be valuable in the rig selection process. Your goal

in this assignment is to develop a program that ensures safe well operations, minimizes drilling cost and meets the design

requirements of the well.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 70 of 87


Drilling Operations (IHRDC_IPIMS_a244)

Description:

Competency Statement: Monitor drilling parameters and well progress. Take steps to opt imize bit runs, mud system performance

and directional control. Ensure HSE compliance. Ant icipate drilling problems and work to minimize their impact.


Optimize drilling performance through careful monitoring and analysis of well parameters.

Select bottomhole assembly configurations for various hole intervals and operating condit ions.

Oversee routine cementing operations in shallow hole intervals.

Diagnose a stuck pipe incident and out line fishing procedures.

Monitor drilling parameters for indications of abnormal pore pressure and take the approriate init ial actions in response

to a potent ial kick situation.

Assignment Instruction: The drilling crew is ready to spud Adams 8, and you are in charge of day-to-day operations. To begin this

assignment, you will approve the bottomhole assembly configuration for the surface hole interval and supervise the running

and cementing of a 13 3/8 inch [339.7 mm] casing string. Next, you will monitor the progress of the intermediate hole section

and take steps to opt imize drilling performance. Finally, you will begin drilling below the intermediate casing, paying part icular

attention to detecting a pressure transit ion zone that has already been ident ified at other 6th Zone wells. By way of caution,

note that drilling operat ions do not always proceed smoothly. Although this assignment is fairly straightforward, be prepared to

address problems that may occur.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 71 of 87


Well Completion Operations (IHRDC_IPIMS_a245)

Description:

Competency Statement: Prepare well for format ion evaluation. Ensure that logging and test ing operations proceed smoothly.

Run and cement production casing. Evaluate primary cement job and need for remedial cementing operations. Prepare well

for final completion.


Prepare the well for open-hole logging operations and take steps to ensure that such operations proceed smoothly.

Alert the wellsite geologist and service company logging engineer of hole condit ions that may require modifications or

special precautions in the logging program.

Assist in planning and carrying out a drill stem test .

Determine safe operating parameters for running a production casing string.

Plan and carry out a simple single-stage primary cementing operat ion.

Use temperature surveys to determine the top of cement in the casing/hole annulus.

Out line the steps involved in preparing the well for final completion and releasing the drilling rig.

Assignment Instruction: As you approach target depth at Adams 8, your concern now shifts from opt imizing the drilling process

to preparing the well for logging, test ing and completion operat ions. Although you are not directly involved in planning the

formation evaluation program, you are responsible for monitoring hole condit ions, gett ing tools safely to bottom and in general

ensuring that operations proceed according to plan. Once these operations are completed, you will focus on the crucial task

of running and cementing the 7-inch [178 mm] production casing. At the conclusion of this assignment, the well should be

ready for a workover rig to perforate the production casing, run tubing and turn the well over to the Production Department.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 72 of 87

DRILLING AND WELL COMPLETION: Drilling, Workover and WellServicing

Well Planning (IHRDC_IPIMS_a41)

Description:

Competency Statement: Identify, monitor and evaluate drilling, workover, st imulation and well servicing proposals and act ivit ies

in the context of optimizing the overall reservoir exploitation scheme.


contribute to the well planning process by understanding the reservoir engineering aspects of the proposed work and

having a knowledge of drilling, workover and well servicing fundamentals

work with the geologist and the drilling engineer to select well locations, target depths and casing points

Assignment Instruction: Long-term exploitation strategies for this reservoir are currently being considered for the Upper/ Middle

Sand reservoir. Management has appropriated funds for continued drilling, and has already approved a new well proposal for

Block 5A1-SW. In this assignment, you will recommend the target depth and radius for well 5A1-SW. You will determine what

mud weights to use during drilling, specify casing points, and decide on formation evaluation requirements. This reservoir has

been on product ion for just over two years. A total of six wells have been drilled, one of which was abandoned. Production is

currently averaging about 2000 barrels of oil per day under solut ion gas drive at well over its bubble point pressure. These wells,

although init ially designated as "Upper Sand" producers, expose both the Upper and Middle sand reservoirs.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 73 of 87


Well Completion Design (IHRDC_IPIMS_a42)

Description:

Competency Statement: Select the appropriate tubing and accessories for completing wells in keeping with the product ion

method required for the reservoir, and to facilitate future workover, servicing and st imulation work.


select the proper sizes and grades of tubulars to maintain the integrity of the wellbore and handle anticipated

production

select the downhole casing and tubing accessories needed to optimize production and future well work

Assignment Instruction: Well 5A1-SW is currently in the planning stage. The well specifications established so far include target

depth and radius, well profile, mud weight requirements, approximate casing points and formation evaluation needs.

In this assignment, you will work on the well's completion design. You will select the completion type and tubing configuration,

specify the casing and tubing diameters to be used, and design the surface and product ion casing strings.

The success of your design will depend on how well it handles the anticipated product ion, compatibility of the various hole,

casing and tubing sizes, adequacy of the casing design loads, and cost.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 74 of 87


Drilling and Workover Fluids (IHRDC_IPIMS_a43)

Description:

Competency Statement: Select the appropriate drilling/workover fluid for meet ing well objectives and, minimizing formation

damage with no impact on the environment.


evaluate the features, benefit s and limitations of various mud systems and addit ives, and select the one most

appropriate for a given well

specify controls on fluid propert ies in order to optimize drilling and workover operations

Assignment Instruction: Drilling and completion fluids are essential to safe and successful well operations. In this assignment, you

will select the appropriate fluids for drilling and completing Well 5A1-SW, monitor their propert ies, and recommend changes as

needed. By the t ime you complete this module, you should be able to evaluate the features, benefits and limitat ions of various

mud systems and addit ives, and specify controls on fluid propert ies for optimizing drilling and workover operations.

The AFE for drilling Well 5A1-SW has been approved, and operations are gett ing underway. Once drilling begins, your job will be

to closely monitor the propert ies of the mud system you have selected, and to make changes in the mud system as operating

condit ions may require.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 75 of 87


Drilling and Workover Hydraulics (IHRDC_IPIMS_a44)

Description:

Competency Statement: Maximize penetration rates, minimize format ion damage and ensure hole stability through the proper

applicat ion of drilling hydraulics principles.


determine the pressure losses that occur in the rig circulating system

use basic calculation methods to determine optimal bit nozzle size, annular velocity and other rig hydraulics parameters

diagnose drilling problems result ing from poor hydraulics practices

Assignment Instruction: The objective of a drilling hydraulics program is to maximize bit life and penetration rate by efficiently

removing drilled cutt ings and by cleaning, cooling and lubricating the bit and drill string. The key to a sucessful hydraulic

program is to deliver an optimal amount of energy to the bit.

The easiest way to control and optimize drilling hydraulics is to select the appropriate bit nozzle diameters for delivering the

maximum amount of hydraulic energy to the bottom of the hole.

In assignment, you will learn to use drilling hydraulics principles to maximize penetration rates, ensure hole stability, optimize hole

cleaning characterist ics and minimize format ion damage.

By the t ime you complete this module, you should be able to determine pressure losses in the rig circulating system and select

the appropriate bit nozzle diameters for optimizing hydraulic energy.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 76 of 87


Cementing (IHRDC_IPIMS_a45)

Description:

Competency Statement: Determine the most appropriate procedures, equipment, tools and cementing materials for assuring a

high-quality cement job.


determine the volume, displacement and density requirements for cementing a casing st ring

select the cement addit ives appropriate to a given job

specify the casing accessories to be use on a primary cement job

outline the steps involved in cementing a string of casing

evaluate the results of a primary or squeeze cement ing operation

calculate the volumes and displacements required to set a cement plug

Assignment Instruction: In this assignment, you will determine the appropriate procedures, materials and equipment for assuring

a high-quality cement job on Well 5A1-SW. By the t ime you complete this module, you should be able to determine cement

volume, density and displacement requirements, select cement addit ives, specify casing accessories, outline cementing

procedures, evaluate job results, and make basic cement plug calculations.

Well 5A1-SW has been drilled to T.D., and the openhole formation evaluation program has been completed. It is now t ime to

run and cement the production string. The purpose of this primary cement job, in which cement slurry is pumped down through

the casing and up the casing-hole annulus, is to form a seal between the casing and formation, and to support the weight of

the casing string.

In this module, you will determine how much cement you need for the production casing, what materials and addit ives you

should use, what casing accessories and equipment you need, and what procedures you should follow. You will then evaluate

the success of the primary cement job and, if necessary, recommend remedial work.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 77 of 87


Directional, Horizontal and Multilateral Wells (IHRDC_IPIMS_a46)

Description:

Competency Statement: Contribute to the planning and design of non-conventional well completions.


identify reservoirs that are suitable candidates for horizontal or mult ilateral wells

apply knowledge of the reservoir to a selection of the well t rajectory

select the best general completion design for a horizontal or mult ilateral well in a given reservoir

Assignment Instruction: Without directional drilling much of the world's oil and gas would be unrecoverable. Horizontal and

mult ilateral wells, which are special applications of directional drilling technology, are a proven means of improving

productivity and reducing overall development costs in certain types of reservoirs.

In this assignment, you will define basic direct ional drilling parameters and establish the trajectory for a possible re-drill of an

exist ing well. You will look at the feasibility of horizontal and mult ilateral wells from a reservoir management perspective, and

consider some of the issues involved in planning and designing these wells. By the t ime you complete this module, you should be

able to calculate a simple well t rajectory, identify candidate reservoirs for horizontal wells and select the best general

completion design for a given reservoir.

Well 5C1-SW was the second well drilled in the Upper/Middle sands. Detailed log analysis and an open hole formation test

indicated that the top of the Upper Sand at 14800 ft [4511 m] was below the oil-water contact. The well was subsequently

plugged back with cement to the surface casing and suspended

Several members of the reservoir management team have suggested re-drilling this well upstructure to Block 5B1-NE. The drilling

department will evaluate the feasibility and costs of re-drilling from below the surface casing. Your job will be to establish some

of the basic directional parameters and calculating a trajectory for this well, which will be designated 5C1-SW R/D.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 78 of 87

PRODUCTION ENGINEERING AND OPERATIONS: ProductionFundamentals

Production Methods (IHRDC_IPIMS_a81)

Description:

Competency Statement: Apply basic production engineering principles to optimizing the reservoir exploitation scheme.


select the opt imal complet ion design and the proper surface and subsurface equipment for producing a flowing oil well

efficiently and economically

optimize flowing well performance based on knowledge of inflow performance, vert ical lift performance and surface

choke performance

determine when art ificial lift will be necessary in order to maintain oil production at desired levels, and select the most

appropriate lift method for a given well

specify design and equipment requirements for placing a well on art ificial lift

Assignment Instruction: In this Learning Module, you will specify the completion design for Well 5A1-SW and evaluate its

performance potential. By the t ime you complete this module, you should be able to opt imize flowing well performance using

nodal analysis principles, determine when art ificial lift will be necessary in order to maintain oil production, and select the best

lift method for a given set of operating condit ions.

Well 5A1-SW has been recently drilled to the Upper/Middle sands. It is to be completed by selectively perforating the 7-inch

casing, which has been cemented at a depth of 14400 ft. In this module assignment, you will review actual and est imated field

data, select the general well configuration, and specify requirements for subsurface producing equipment. You will define the

well's inflow performance relationship (IPR), determine its vert ical lift performance for various producing rates, and establish

surface flow parameters. You will then combine these analyses to define and predict the flowing well's performance. You will

also review various art ificial lift methods to determine how this well will be produced once it can no longer flow.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 79 of 87


Production Optimization (IHRDC_IPIMS_a82)

Description:

Competency Statement: Opt imize the perfomance of individual producing wells.


analyze well behavior, using nodal analysis and interpreting historical production trends

diagnose equipment problems and/or detect production deviations

identify production problems relating to pressure decline, water, gas or sand production, low productivity, formation

damage or equipment failure

recommend actions required for optimizing production, identify candidate wells for well servicing, st imulation and/or

sand control and indicate the best method to use

Assignment Instruction: In this Learning Module, you will review the actual performance of Well 5A1-SW, as well as that of several

other wells in offsett ing fields, in an effort to optimize their production rates. By the t ime you complete this module, you should

be able to analyze well behavior using nodal analysis and historical production trends, diagnose equipment problems and/or

detect production deviations, and recommend the appropriate action for optimizing production.

Well 5A1-SW has been completed in the Upper/Middle sands, and a production and buildup tests have been completed. You

now need to see if the well's actual performance matches what was predicted before its completion. You will be looking for

ways to optimize this well's product ion under both current and future reservoir condit ions. You will also look at other wells,

including two that are currently producing using electric submersible pumps and one that is planned as a rod pump

completion, and make recommendat ions regarding their performance.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 80 of 87


Production Facilities (IHRDC_IPIMS_a83)

Description:

Competency Statement: Determine surface facility requirements for handling the gas and liquid production volumes established

for the reservoir.


determine fluid handling and transport requirements for surface facilit ies and equipment

identify the surface facility components needed to handle the field's production, specifying their capacit ies and

pressure ratings

generate a general surface facilit ies layout showing the path of the produced fluids from the wellhead to the

transportation point (pipeline or loading rack)

Assignment Instruction: In this Learning Module, you will make preliminary recommendations regarding the surface production

facility design for the Sucre field. By the t ime you complete this module, you should be able to determine basic requirements for

handling produced oil, water and gas, and develop a general surface facility layout showing the path of the produced fluids

from the wellhead to the sales point.

A production forecast has been generated for the Upper/Middle sands based on extended production tests and currently

available rock and fluid data. You will decide how to use this forecast in sizing the surface facilit ies, and you will determine what

types of fluid handling, separation and treating equipment will be needed. You will also specify the path that the produced

fluids will follow through the production facility. Although your work will be of a very preliminary and general nature, it will be

instrumental in future cost analyses, budget planning, and, ult imately, selection of an optimal reservoir development scenario.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 81 of 87


Well Testing (IHRDC_IPIMS_a84)

Description:

Competency Statement: Design and execute a well test.


select candidate wells for test ing and specify test objectives

design a pressure transient test and select equipment in keeping with the stated objectives

monitor the test and interpret the results

Assignment Instruction: In this Learning Module, you will establish basic objectives and procedures for test ing new wells in the

Upper/Middle sands of the Sucre field. You will also review tests that were run in other reservoirs, and use the results of a drill

stem test (DST) to determine well deliverability parameters. By the t ime you complete this module, you should be able plan,

execute, monitor and interpret a simple pressure transient test.

Formation evaluat ion of the Upper/Middle sands--including successful product ion tests of Wells 4E1-NE and 5A1-SW--has

established this reservoir's commercial hydrocarbon potential. The reservoir management team has generated est imates of oil

in place and recovery factors; it has even predicted a production schedule and outlined basic surface facility specifications.

These est imates are, however, very preliminary, and based on assumptions which may or may not prove valid over t ime. There is

st ill a good deal of appraisal and planning to be done before the reservoir moves into the development stage of its life.

Your assignment in this Learning Module is to assist in the reservoir appraisal by developing general guidelines for a well test ing

program, based on your understanding of formation evaluation objectives and test procedures. You will also be looking at DST

results from wells in other fields so that you may become familiar with basic methods of test monitoring and interpretat ion. In

later assignments, you will become more involved in the analysis of pressure transient tests, part icularly with respect to modern

interpretation methods.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 82 of 87

PRODUCTION ENGINEERING AND OPERATIONS: Production andOperating Practices

Flowing Well Performance and Production System Analysis (IHRDC_IPIMS_a281)

Description:

Competency Statement: Establish Inflow Performance Relat ionship (IPR) and determine flowing well potential. Use systems

analysis approach to predict and optimize product ion.


Use production data to define a well's IPR and flow potential under current operating condit ions.

Predict changes in well potential result ing from declining reservoir pressures.

Evaluate the effects of various operat ing parameters on flowing well performance.

Design a single-well product ion system based on analysis of individual system components.

Select the appropriate tubing and flowline diameters for optimizing well performance.

Predict future production rates based on changing operating condit ions.

Assignment Instruction: Well TR-34 is a recently completed development well in the Main Body sands of the Firestone Field. You

have just completed an extended production test of this flowing well in preparation for tying it into the field's main production

facilit ies. In this assignment, you will t reat this well as a single product ion system extending from the reservoir to the first-stage

production separator. You will analyze the test results to determine the well's potential and the effect of various operating

parameters on its performance. You will then use your analysis to establish an optimal production rate and size the tubing and

surface flowline.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 83 of 87


Artificial Lift Methods (IHRDC_IPIMS_a282)

Description:

Competency Statement: Determine need for art ificial lift . Evaluate and design system.


Dist inguish among the common methods of art ificial lift and understand their advantages and limitat ions.

Select the most appropriate art ificial lift method for a given set of well and economic condit ions.

Perform basic surface and subsurface design calculations for gas lift and pump-assisted systems.

Monitor art ificial lift performance .

Assignment Instruction: Art ificial lift is a means of reducing the backpressure on a well so that it can be produced at some

desired rate. This may be accomplished by reducing the density of the wellbore fluid column, as is done in gas lift , or by using a

pump to physically displace the fluids to the surface. In this Assignment, you will consider both types of art ificial lift as you

evaluate three scenarios: (1) a flowing well that has experienced a significant decline in production rate as reservoir pressure

has decreased, (2) a well that is to be incorporated into an exist ing gas lift system, and (3) the installat ion of an Electrical

Submersible Pump (ESP) at a water source well. Although these scenarios do not cover all of the art ificial lift systems and

combinations of methods that are currently available, they will give you a good idea of the issues that you must consider in

designing such a system.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 84 of 87


Well Stimulation and Sand Control (IHRDC_IPIMS_a283)

Description:

Competency Statement: Diagnose production problems related to formation damage and recommend appropriate solut ions.


Diagnose various types of formation damage and identify st imulation candidates.

Design a matrix acid st imulation t reatment based on specific well condit ions and reservoir characterist ics.

Specify the materials, equipment and pumping schedule for a hydraulic fracturing procedure.

Apply tradit ional and modern sand control methods to optimize well productivity

Assignment Instruction: Well st imulation treatments, which are designed to restore or enhance well productivity, are of two

basic types. Mat rix t reatments are performed at pressures that are below the formation fracture pressure; they are primarily

designed to remove near-wellbore damage. Fract ure t reatments, on the other hand, are performed at pressures above the

formation fracture pressure; they are designed to open up highly conduct ive flow paths between the reservoir and the

wellbore, thereby bypassing near-wellbore damage and changing the flow patterns around the well.

Sand cont rol technolgy is built around preventing loose sand and other unconsolidated formation solids from plugging the

formation or entering the wellbore. As you will see in this assignment, st imulation and sand control technologies are in some

ways closely related, and under certain circumstances, may even overlap.

In this assignment, you will carry out preliminary design work both for a matrix acid st imulation and a hydraulic fracture

treatment, and will also select the appropriate sand control measures for a flowing production well. In each case, you will

evaluate the nature and extent of the near-wellbore damage that has made st imulat ion and/or sand control necessary.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 85 of 87


Workover Planning and Operations (IHRDC_IPIMS_a284)

Description:

Competency Statement: Identify workover candidates and out line procedures for accomplishing well object ives.


Evaluate well performance and identify workover or abandonment candidates.

Plan safe workovers using the tools and methods appropriate to individual wells.

Apply procedures and standards in accordance with recognized safe practices and regulatory requirements.

Assignment Instruction: A review of the producing wells in the Adams port ion of the Tremont Field has indicated that several

wells need attention and may be workover candidates. In this assignment, you will evaluate condit ions at these wells, take

steps to troubleshoot these condit ions, and recommend remedial action. You will also be gett ing ready to perforate the

production casing in Adams 8, a newly drilled Sixth Zone producer.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 86 of 87


Surface Production Operations (IHRDC_IPIMS_a285)

Description:

Competency Statement: Generate production facilit ies requirements. Promote safe practices in production operat ions.


Review surface flowing well condit ions with the goal of optimizing production.

Describe the basic layout of an upstream producing facility and the funct ions of its major components.

Out line the general requirements for separating and treat ing produced oil as a basis for a detailed facility design.

Plan and oversee routine field maintenance work, and maintain a safe operation through proper application of good

work pract ices and the careful control of site act ivit ies.

Assignment Instruction: The Sucre field's exist ing upstream surface facilit ies are designed for primary recovery, but that is about

to change as preparations begin for a full-scale water injection project in The Upper/Middle Sands. As part of these

preparations, you will address some of the general issues involved in modifying these facilit ies. You will also be involved in

ongoing field operations; specifically, you will be responsible for safely completing repair and maintenance work on one of the

field's main production separators.

Duration:

8:00:00 hrs

Module 87 of 87

Petroleum OnlineCourse Catalog

All Sectors

Oil and Gas Industry Overview (IHRDC_PO_I1)

Description:

A comprehensive overview of the industry; learn what petroleum is, where it comes from and how it affects all of our lives on a

daily basis. Become familiar with the various phases of the Oil and Gas Value Chain – upstream, midst ream and downstream –

the key industry players, the basics of oil and gas supply, demand and pricing and the challenges that the industry faces as

demand for these important form of energy grows by 50% in the next 25 years.

Duration:

2:00:00 hrs

Outline:

Overview

Crude Oil and Natural Gas: From Source to Final Products

Chemistry of Hydrocarbons

Origins of Crude Oil and Natural Gas

Petroleum Migration and Accumulation

Petroleum Reservoirs

Separation and Treatment of Produced Oil and Gas

Gas Handling and Processing

Crude Oil Refining

Petrochemicals

Measurement Units and Conversion Factors

Crude Oil Measurement

Oil Quality: API Gravity

Natural Gas Measurement

Gas Liquids and Petroleum Product Measurement

Energy Content and Equivalency

Thermal Energy Equivalency:

Hydrocarbon Price Equivalency:

Conversion Table and Electronic Calculator

Oil and Gas Value Chain

Upstream Sector

Negotiation of Upstream Agreements

Exploration

Field Development

Long-term Production

Wholesale Hydrocarbon Markets

Midstream Sector

Crude Transportation

Refining of Crude Oil

Midstream Natural Gas Value Chain

Gas Processing

Natural Gas Pipeline Transportation and Storage

Downstream Sector

Downstream Natural Gas Value Chain

Main Global Players in the International Petroleum Industry

OPEC

Vert ically Integrated Global Companies

World Primary Energy Markets and the Role of Hydrocarbons

Energy Supply and Demand Fundamentals

Energy Demand

Energy Supply

Crude Oil Supply, Demand and Cross-border Trade

Natural Gas Reserves

Natural Gas Supply, Demand and Cross-border Trade

Natural Gas Prices

Emerging Commodity Price

Final Thoughts

Important Oil and Gas Statistical References

Websites of Importance

Acknowledgments

Module 1 of 14

Upstream Sector

Upstream Oil and Gas Agreements (IHRDC_PO_I2)

Description:

A comprehensive overview of the industry; learn what petroleum is, where it comes from and how it affects all of our lives on a

daily basis. Become familiar with the various phases of the Oil and Gas Value Chain – upstream, midst ream and downstream –

the key industry players, the basics of oil and gas supply, demand and pricing and the challenges that the industry faces as

demand for these important form of energy grows by 50% in the next 25 years.

Duration:

2:00:00 hrs

Outline:

Overview

Historical Perspective

Methods for Obtaining a Host Government Agreement

Four Types of Exploration Agreements

The Concession Agreement

US Offshore License Agreement

West Africa Concession Agreement

Addit ional Oil Ent it lement

Part icipation of National Oil Company: Working Interest Options

Training Commitment and Other Forms of Sustainable Development

The Production Sharing Contract

Fiscal Terms

Risk Service Agreements

Natural Gas Discoveries: Post-Discovery Negotiations

Joint Operating Agreements

Nicola Case Study

Agreement Stages

Costs During Exploration

Work Program and Relinquishment of Blocks

Field Production and Development Costs

Concession Agreement

Sandland Business Game

Summary

Glossary of Terms

Model Form for International Joint Operating Agreement

Module 2 of 14

Upstream Sector

Petroleum Geology and The Exploration Process (IHRDC_PO_I3)

Description:

Upstream agreements define the legal, business and working relationships that exist between companies that explore for and

produce oil and gas and the government agencies or private part ies that own the mineral rights. Learn how an oil and gas

lease is negotiated with a landowner in the U.S. and then analyze the two major forms of agreements used by host countries –

the Concession Agreement and the Production Sharing Contract.

Duration:

2:00:00 hrs

Outline:

Overview

Fundamentals of Petroleum Geology

Building of Sedimentary Basins

Sedimentary Environments

Sedimentary Rock Propert ies: Porosity and Permeability

Formation of Crude Oil and Natural Gas

Petroleum Migration and Accumulation

Petroleum Reservoirs and Reservoir Traps

Reservoir Seals

Summary

The Exploration Process

Broad Surveying Techniques

Exist ing Well Data

Geophysical Surveying and the Seismic Reflection Method

Conducting a 2D Seismic Survey

Seismic Survey of the Pam Basin

3D and 4D Seismic Surveys

Economics of the Pam Basin Prospect

Summary

References

Module 3 of 14

Upstream Sector

Drilling and Well Completions (IHRDC_PO_I4)

Description:

Examine the geological condit ions that make for a good petroleum prospect, and learn why oil and gas are found in some

places and not others. Also learn the step-by-step process that exploration teams follow to identify projects, from the init ial

surface reconnaissance to the drilling of exploratory wells.

Duration:

2:00:00 hrs

Outline:

Overview

Drilling Objectives

Surface and Subsurface Environments

Rig Counts

Drilling Technology

Phases of Well Construction

Well Planning

Init ial Steps

Authorization for Expenditure (AFE)

Environmental and Regulatory Considerations

Support and Logist ics

Drilling Rig Procurement

Drilling Contracts

Well Design

Subsurface Pressure and Temperature

Hole Sect ions

Well Trajectory

Deviation Control

Directional Drilling

Horizontal Drilling

Geosteering

Mult ilateral Wells

Drilling Operations

Rig Systems and Equipment

Hoist ing and Rotating Systems

Circulating System

Well Control System

Power Generation and Transmission System

Types of Drilling Rigs

Onshore (Land) Rigs

Offshore Rigs

Subsurface Drilling Equipment

Drill String Components

Drill Bit s

Drilling Procedures

Drilling Problems

Remote Monitoring and Operations Support

Formation Evaluation and Testing

Well Completion

Completion Design

Well St imulation

Production Tubing

Wellhead and Surface Flow Control Equipment

Summary

References

Additional Resources

Acknowledgments

Module 4 of 14

Upstream Sector

Field Development and Production (IHRDC_PO_I5)

Description:

The development and production of an oil or gas field is among the most involved and challenging business undertakings.

Learn the steps involved in field development, from its init ial planning stages, through reservoir analysis, subsurface design and

const ruction of surface facilit ies. This module also covers components of long-term production, reservoir management and

facilit ies maintenance.

Duration:

2:00:00 hrs

Outline:

Overview

Reservoir Management Objectives

Hydrocarbons in Place

Recovery Factor

Oil and Gas Reserves

Primary Recovery

Improved Recovery

Production Schedule

Optimal Design Rate

Reservoir Description and Characterization

Reservoir Parameters

Geology and St ructure


Pressure and Temperature

Data Acquisit ion, Interpretation and Analysis

Geological and Seismic Interpretations

Well Logs and Core Data

Well Tests

Production Data

Integrated Reservoir Characterization

Reservoir Mapping and Reserves Evaluation

Subsurface Maps and What They Tell Us

Reserves Definitons and Classificat ions

Reserves Evaluation Methods

Uncertaint ies in Reserves Evaluation

Monte Carlo Analysis / Probablist ic Representat ion of Reserves

Reservoir Modeling

Object ives

Elements of a Simulation Study

Subsurface Development Plan

Reservoir Performance

Natural Drive Mechanisms

Improved Recovery Processes

Well Product ivity

Production System Overview

Flowing Well Performance

Art ificial Lift

Completion and Production Planning

Est imating Field Performance

Field Development Studies

Surface Development Plan

Surface Facilit ies

General Considerations

Onshore Facilit ies

Offshore Facilit ies

Economic Evaluation and Field Management

Cash Flow Analysis

Field Management Example

Cost Est imating and Scheduling


Operating Cost and Financial Assumptions


Health, Safety and Environmental Considerations

Health and Safety

Hazards in Field Operations

Safety in Day-to-Day Operations

Emergency Preparedness

Environment

Issues in Field Development and Product ion

Regulatory Considerat ions

Summary

References

Appendix

Module 5 of 14

Upstream Sector

Field Development and Production (IHRDC_PO_I5)

Upstream Sector

Upstream Gas: From Exploration to Wholesale Markets (IHRDC_PO_I13)

Description:

Devoted to the upstream gas value chain, this module begins with an overview of the significant gas propert ies and shows

how a gas prospect is discovered and then developed into a viable producing entity. Important topics include the est imat ion

of resources and reserves, field design process and surface facilit ies required to satisfy gas market specifications. It ends with a

summary of the nature of the wholesale gas and gas liquids markets in various countries and typical wholesale agreements.

Duration:

2:00:00 hrs

Outline:

Overview

Basic Gas and Gas Liquid Properties and Terminology

Gas and gas liquids composit ion and propert ies

Definit ion of industry terms: LNG, LPG, NGL’s, CNG

Gas Industry Value Chain with Emphasis on the Upstream Sector

Upstream Petroleum Project Management Stages and Workflow

Background on two gas exploration prospects

Location

Landowner or Host Country Exploration Agreements

Technical Support for the Prospect

Potential Gas Markets

Demand, Timing, Sale Point, Prices and Contract Terms

Project Planning and Economics

Exploration and Field Development Plan and Schedule

Reserves, Production, Rates, CAPEX, OPEX, IRR

Permits and Authorizations Required. HSE Issues

Risk Analysis:Exploration, Development, Production, Market, Government

Partner Issues

Exploration of gas prospects

Gas Exploration Basics

Exploration Plan: Costs and Schedule

Exploration well plan, evaluation and expected costs

Results of Explorat ion

Review of Reserves

Wholesale Gas Markets and Project Market Options

Project Economics

Authorization to Move to Next Stage

Planning Gas Field Development

Review of Alternative Subsurface Development Plans

Optimization of Subsurface Development Plan

Preparing Surface Facilit ies Plan

Environmental and Social Impact Report

Sources of Project Capital: Debt and Equity

Project Partner Agreements

Finalizing Gas Sales Contract

Obtaining Government and Other Permits

Project Management Plans

Authorization to Move to Development

Development of New Discoveries

Implementing the Development Plan

Project Management Issues: Scope, Schedule, Cost, Quality, Communications, Risks and Procurement

Engineering, Procurement and Construct ion Agreement

Final Costs and Timing

Managing the Production Cycle

Managing the Field Production Life Cycle

Operations and Maintenance of Facilit ies

Monitoring Well and Reservoir Performance

Adding Wells and Compression

Reservoir Management

Managing Sales and Customer Relations

Financial and Partner Report ing

Summary of the Outcome of the Two Prospects

Summary of Case Studies and Drivers of Upstream Gas Success

References

Module 6 of 14

Upstream Sector

Upstream Gas: From Exploration to Wholesale Markets (IHRDC_PO_I13)

Midstream Sector

Marketing and Trading of Crude Oil (IHRDC_PO_I6)

Description:

Geological studies and seismic surveys can indicate an oil or gas prospect, but the only way to know if that prospect contains

oil or gas is to drill wells. Get an introduction to the basics of the rotary drilling process and learn the dramatic advances in

drilling technology that have taken place in recent years.

Duration:

2:00:00 hrs

Outline:

Overview

Changing Nature of the Crude Oil Market

Control of the Market by the "Majors"

Shared Control

The Opec Transit ion

Price Shock of 1973

World Recession

Nationalization, Market Transformation and New Discoveries

Price Shock of 1979

Falling Demand

Market-Related Crude Pricing

Advent of Spot Markets

Crude Oil Pricing Today

Marker Crudes

Crude Oil Assay

Price Report ing

Pricing of Other Crudes

Use of the Futures Markets for Price Formation

The Role of OPEC in Price Formation

Fundamentals of a Physical Crude Oil Contract

Seller / Buyer Relationship

Tit le Transfer Arrangements / Point of Sale

Other Contract Terms

Typical Price Sett ing

Negotiation of Physical Contracts

Stages in the Negotiation of a Crude Contract

Contract Examples

Colombia Crude Sale to Unspecified End User

Sale of Crude to a Refiner in the Caribbean

Nigerian Crude Sale to Trader

Fundamentals of Financial Derivatives

Forward and Future Contracts

Crude Contracts Offered by Financial Exchanges

How a Futures Contract Works

General Features of the Oil Futures Market

Use of Derivatives in Price Risk Management

Hedges: Buy or Sell Crude Oil

SWAPS: Convert Variable Price to a Fixed Price

Options: Sett ing a Floor or Ceiling Price

Typical Players In The Petroleum Derivatives Markets

Trading of Crude Oil: Using Both Physical and Financial Contracts

Summary

References

Exhibits

Module 7 of 14

Midstream Sector

Crude Oil Transportation and Storage (IHRDC_PO_I7)

Description:

Like other commodit ies, the market determines the value of crude oil. Examine how crude oil markets and pricing are

established based on global and regional supply and demand, how organizations such as OPEC affect these markets on a

wholesale level.

Duration:

2:00:00 hrs

Outline:

Overview

Crude Oil Pipelines

System Components

Examples of International Pipelines

Phases of Pipeline Development

Pipeline Operat ions

Pipeline Tariffs

Batching

Pipeline Maintenance

“Pigging”

Pipeline Inspection

Corrosion Prevention

Pipeline Safety

Crude Oil Storage

Temporary Storage of Crude Oil

Strategic Storage of Crude Oil

Nicola Case study: Pipeline and Storage Decisions

Oil Tankers

Tanker Sizes

Tanker Classifications

Trade Routes

Chokepoints

Demand and Supply

Development of the World Tanker Trade

Ownership and Hiring of Tankers

Tanker Rates

Worldscale Calculation

Tanker Safety

Nicola case study: Shipping Decision

Other Forms of Crude Oil Transportation

References

Acknowledgments

Module 8 of 14

Midstream Sector

Midstream Gas: Gas Processing, Transportation and Load Balancing

(IHRDC_PO_I14)

Description:

The module covers the midst ream gas value chain; essentially, the t ransportation of gas in pipelines and LNG ships and the

balancing of market swings through the use of gas storage facilit ies. The pipeline section focuses on design, operations and

tariffs, the LNG sect ion centers around the design and economics of the LNG value chain from liquefaction to receiving

terminals and the load balancing section summarizes the various options available to manage the pipeline swings between

gas supply and market demand and their typical costs.

Duration:

2:00:00 hrs

Outline:

Overview

Gas Processing

Gas Processing Terminology

Propert ies of Natural Gas & Natural Gas Liquids

Surface Facilit ies

Key Products of Natural Gas Processing

Ethane

Propane

Iso-Butane

Normal Butane

Natural Gasoline

Gas Processing Opt ions

Gas Processing Systems

Markets for Gas Liquids

Global Supply and Demand

Natural Gas Pipelines

Gas Pipeline History and Milestones

Global Pipeline Infrastructure

North America

South America

Europe

Former Soviet Union

Asia

Australia

Pipeline Design

Wall Thickness

Composite Reinforcement

Capacity vs. Diameter

Capacity vs. Operating Capacity

Transmission System Design

Pipeline Economics Development Process

Onshore

Offshore

Pipeline Tariff Structure

Regulated Market

Deregulated Market

History of the United States

History of the United Kingdom

Liquified Natural Gas

LNG Value Chain

LNG History and Milestones

LNG Process

Liquifact ion

LNG Trains

Transporation

Regasification

LNG Economics

LNG Markets & Trade

Load Balancing & Underground Gas Storage

Load Balancing Applications

Load Duration Curve

Winter Flow Pattern

Underground Storage Options

Underground Storage Capacity & Trends

Thomas Corners Gas Storage Case Study

Surface Storage Options

LNG Peakshaving

Interruptible Customers

Pore Storage Withdrawal

Summary

References

Module 9 of 14

Midstream Sector

Midstream Gas: Gas Processing, Transportation and Load Balancing

(IHRDC_PO_I14)

Midstream Sector

Refining and Product Specifications (IHRDC_PO_I8)

Description:

Every day, some 85 million barrels of crude oil are transported from producing fields to major refining centers, many of which are

located hundreds or thousands of miles apart. Learn how, and at what cost, crude oil is t ransported in pipelines and tankers –

the two most practical and economical methods for moving large volumes of crude oil over long distances.

Duration:

2:00:00 hrs

Outline:

Overview

Crude Oil Characteristics

Crude Oil Chemistry

Paraffins (Alkanes)

Olefins and Aromatics

Naphthenes

Heating Value of Hydrocarbons

Boiling Points of Hydrocarbons

Volume Changes during Refining

Crude Quality: API Gravity and Sulfur Content

API Gravity

Sulfur Content

Marker Crudes and Pricing Benchmarks

Crude Quality: Yield of Petroleum Fractions

The Refining Process

Crude Yields and Product Demand

Functions of a Refinery

Hydroskimming Refinery

Cracking Refinery

Deep Conversion Coking Refinery

Refinery Complexity

Non-Refined Petroleum Supply/Blend Streams

Ethanol

Bio-Diesel

Gas-to-Liquids

Refining Economics

Cost of Crude Oil and Value of Petroleum Products

Impact of Refining Complexity on Refining Margins

Impact of Refining Capacity on Refining Margins

Refinery Case Study: Addit ion 100,000 b/d Delayed Coker

Future Trends


Health and Safety

Environment

Summary

References

Module 10 of 14

Downstream Sector

Marketing & Distribution of Petroleum Products (IHRDC_PO_I9)

Description:

Once crude oil has been refined into transportation fuels, heating oil, lubricants and other products, it must be marketed and

distributed to commercial and retail customers. In this module you will learn how refined products make their way to pipelines,

terminals, service stations and other outlets where the profits are being made in this downstream sector of the industry and the

economics of the modern gasoline super-stat ion.

Duration:

2:00:00 hrs

Outline:

Overview

Petroleum Products and Services

Fuels for Transportation and Heating

Gasoline and Diesel

Composit ion

Performance Characterist ics

Kerosene (Aviation)

Fuel Oils (Marine)

Heating Fuels

Liquefied Petroleum Gases (LPGs)

Developments in Fuels, Bio-Fuels and Fuel Cells

Non-fuel Specialty Products and Streams

Lubricants and Greases

Engine Lubricants

Transmission Lubricants

Indust rial Oils

Greases

Bitumens

Chemicals and Solvents

Other Products

The Marketplace for Petroleum Products

Retail Customers

Commercial Customers

Basics of Marketing Petroleum Products

Marketing Segmentation and Customer Focus

Retail Sector

Commercial Sector

Mobil Case Study Synopsis

Worldwide Demand and Pricing for Petroleum Products

Products Markets in Europe

Product Markets in North America

Products Markets in Asia Pacific

The Downstream Value Chain: From Refinery to Final Sale

Manufacturing of Petroleum Products

Product Transportat ion, Storage and Distribution

Import ing Products Using Product Carriers

Intermediate Bulk Storage

Regional Transportat ion, Addit ives and Branding

Product Pipelines

Barges

Rail Transportation

Truck Transportation

Market Out lets:Wholesale, Commercial and Retail

Downstream Petroleum Examples – Spain and New England

CLH Distribution System

Global’s Value Chain

Pricing Along the Downstream Value Chain

Product Market Complexity and Competit ion

Petroleum Distribution Costs and Margins

Profit Margins at the Retail Service Station

The Modern Gasoline Station


Summary

References

Module 11 of 14

Downstream Sector

Marketing & Distribution of Petroleum Products (IHRDC_PO_I9)

Downstream Sector

Downstream Gas: Gas Distribution, Marketing & Trading (IHRDC_PO_I10)

Description:

This module covers the downstream gas value chain including gas distribution, the key gas market sectors and the manner in

which gas supply is managed and sold into the retail market. Emphasis is also placed on the nature of the gas markets in

different regions of the world. The gas distribution coverage includes the design of a typical gas distribution system, the services

it provides, typical distribution tariffs and billing structure. Gas markets discussed include residential, commercial, industrial,

power generation, vehicle fuel and petrochemicals. Gas marketing and trading is introduced through the strategy that a

"typical" gas distribution company follows in managing its gas supply in an "open access" gas industry environment.

Duration:

2:00:00 hrs

Outline:

Overview

Gas Distribution

LDC Distribution System

Regulation

Deregulat ion

LDC Supply System Model

Distribution Operations

Gas Service Functions

Technologies in Gas Distribution

LNG

Receiving & Vaporization Facility

LNG Truck

Local LNG Storage

Gas Distribution Markets

Ident ification of Markets

Major Classes of Gas Markets

Assessing Market Demand

Sources of Market Information

Gas Supply Economics

Natural Gas Pricing

Direct Markets

Power Generation

Indust rial

Retail Markets

Resident ial

Commercial

Vehicle Fuel

Petrochemicals

Power Generation

Indust rial

Gas Trading

Regulation

Deregulat ion

Convergence

"Open Access"

Henry Hub

Gas Daily Index

Basic Deal Types

Physical Gas and Measure Exposure

Hedging Fixed-Price Risk

Hedging Basis Risk

Exchange and OTC Trading

Summary

References

Module 12 of 14

Downstream Sector

Overview of Petrochemicals (IHRDC_PO_I11)

Description:

Crude oil, like other raw materials, has few practical uses in and of itself. It s value lies in the products that can be extracted

from it . Learn how crude oil is processed into commercial products through various refining processes. Also explore why some

refineries are more complex than others and what business decisions go into each day’s refinery run.

Duration:

2:00:00 hrs

Outline:

Overview: What are Petrochemicals?

Characteristics of the Petrochemical Industry

Global Nature of the Industry

Common Specifications for most Products

Readily Available Technology

Large Scale, Capital Intensive

Key to Success

The Seven Basic Petrochemical Building Blocks

Product Families and End-Uses

Methane

Ammonia

Methanol

Gas-to-Liquids (GTL)

Olefins

Ethylene

Propylene

Butadiene

The Aromatics

Benzene

Toluene

Xylenes

Petrochemical Plant Economics

Components of Capital Investment

Owner’s Project Costs

Total Fixed Investment

Components of Product ion Costs

Variable costs

Fixed Costs

Cash Cost of Production

Depreciat ion

Total Cost of Production

Return on Capital Investment

Required Plant Gate Price

Economics of a Mega-Methanol Project

Why Invest in Petrochemical?

Price Sett ing Mechanisms

Demand Limited Scenario

Production Limited Scenario

Profitability Cycles

Major Indust ry Issues

Feedstock Costs

Globalization and International Competit iveness

Environmental Regulations

Case Studies and Project Decriptions

References

Books

Associations

Selected Petrochemical Consult ing Companies

Selected Internet Sites with Petrochemical Industry Information

Acknowledgments

Module 13 of 14

All Sectors

Oil and Gas Business Game (IHRDC_PO_I12)

Description:

Nicola, a dynamic Business Simulat ion Game, is used to integrate the subject matter of each "Content Module" to recreate the

challenge of discovering, producing, and market ing oil and gas to learn where value, in the form of financial performance, is

created along the value chain.

Duration:

2:00:00 hrs

Module 14 of 14

BusinessEssentialsCourse Catalog

Finance

Overview of Finance (IHRDC_BEES_FIN0101)

Description:

Provides background on the financial environment by familiarizing you with it s major characterist ics, definit ions, and functions.

You will learn how financial decisions fit into the world of business decision-making and how these choices pose problems,

challenges, and opportunit ies for organizations and individuals.

Duration:

4:00:00 hrs

Courses:

Types of Business Organizations

Wealth and Profit Maximization

Business Ethics and Social Responsibility

Where Does the Finance Function Fit In and What Are It s Typical Responsibilit ies?

Agency Relationships: Stockholders and Managers

Motivating Managers

The Five Key Principles of Financial Management

Financial Markets and Inst itut ions

Financing and Operations Growth

The Stock Market

The Cost of Money: Interest Rates and Required Rates of Return

Vocabulary Game

Self-Assessment

Self-Assessment Re-Test

For Further Reference

Module 1 of 35

Finance

Accounting Concepts and Financial Statement Analysis (IHRDC_BEES_FIN0201)

Description:

Develops an understanding of account ing concepts and the ability to interpret major financial accounting statements and

financial management tasks. Finance is essentially a type of applied economics that makes extensive use of accounting

concepts and definit ions.

Duration:

4:00:00 hrs

Courses:

Annual Reports and Financial Statements

The Balance Sheet

The Income Statement

Retained Earnings and Statement of Cash Flows

Financial Analysis: Using Ratios

Financial Ratios and Benchmarking

Vocabulary Game

Self-Assessment



Module 2 of 35

Finance

Time Value of Money Principles (IHRDC_BEES_FIN0301)

Description:

Learn the basic techniques (compounding, discounting, present and future value) used in evaluating all financial decisions,

and their cash flow implications.

Duration:

4:00:00 hrs

Courses:

Understanding Time Lines

Calculating Future and Present Values

Annuit ies and Perpetuit ies

Cash Flow Possibilit ies

Interest Rates and the Power of Compound Interest

Vocabulary Game

Self-Assessment



Module 3 of 35

Finance

Risk and Return (IHRDC_BEES_FIN0401)

Description:

Reviews the many different ways to measure risk when considering a decision, each of which will produce different results. In this

module you will learn about the relationship between risk and return and explore the benefit s of diversification.

Duration:

4:00:00 hrs

Courses:

Fundamentals

Different Types of Risk

Investments and Variability of Retur

Risk and Investment Decisions

Calculating risk and rates of return

Diversificat ion and Risk

Other Concepts: CAPM, APT, VaR

Self Assessment

Self Assessment Re-Test

Module 4 of 35

Finance

Budgeting (IHRDC_BEES_FIN0501)

Description:

Learn the basics of budgeting, including the varying types of budgets, and explore the benefits of budgeting.

Duration:

4:00:00 hrs

Courses:

Budget Basics

Strategic Budgeting

The Master Budget

Operating Budgets

Managing the budget process

Vocabulary Game

Self-Assessment


Module 5 of 35

Finance

Practical Tools for Planning and Control (IHRDC_BEES_FIN0601)

Description:

Considers the practical tools of finance and accounting for decisionmaking by organizat ions. You will learn about cost benefit

analysis, return on investment (ROI), fixed and variable costs, breakeven and CVP (cost-volume-profit) analysis, t racking and

performance measures, as well as the Balanced Scorecard and its uses.

Duration:

4:00:00 hrs

Courses:

Cost-Benefit Analysis

Return on Investment and Payback Period

Fixed and Variable Costs

Breakeven analysis and Cost Volume Profit (CVP) analysis

Breakeven analysis- An Example

Tracking and Performance

Balanced Scorecard Measurements

Vocabulary Game

Self-Assessment



Module 6 of 35

Finance

Valuing Real Assets (IHRDC_BEES_FIN0701)

Description:

Addresses the use of the basic principles of finance to determine the desirability of acquiring an asset that is expected to

produce a future cash flow stream. The term capital budget ing is the name given to this process. You will also learn to conduct

a financial analysis of an asset or project under consideration.

Duration:

4:00:00 hrs

Courses:

What is Capital Budget ing?

Est imating Cash Flows

Assessing Project Risk

Net Present Value and Internal Rate of Return

Useful Tools for Capital Budget ing

Self-Assessment



Course Feedback

Module 7 of 35

Communications

Effective Communication (IHRDC_BEES_COM0101)

Description:

Focuses on improving business writ ing. You will learn how to write clearly and directly for your audience.

Duration:

2:30:00 hrs

Courses:

Why Effective Communication Matters

How We Communicate

The Problem with Jargon

Factors for Effective Communication

Knowing Your Audience

Ethical Communication

Self-Assessment

Module 8 of 35

Communications

Organizing and Structuring (IHRDC_BEES_COM0201)

Description:

Reviews purposeful writ ing, as well as organizing and structuring your writ ing. You will learn how to brainstorm, conduct

research, and deal with writer's block.

Duration:

2:30:00 hrs

Courses:

Writ ing and Communicating with Purpose

Who is your audience? What is your message?

Out lining: Formal and Informal

Brainstorming Techniques

Research

Overcoming Writer's Block

Self-Assessment

Module 9 of 35

Communications

Writing Effectively (IHRDC_BEES_COM0301)

Description:

You will learn how to be a better writer and how to revise your writ ing to make it purposeful and effective.

Duration:

2:30:00 hrs

Courses:

Writ ing Concisely

Writ ing Quickly

Writ ing Quickly: Structure

Revising Your Writ ing

Revising: Jargon

Email

Addit ional Resources: Business Writ ing

Self-Assessment

Module 10 of 35

Communications

Presentations Basics (IHRDC_BEES_COM0401)

Description:

Teaches you the basics of how to organize, st ructure and create presentations. Since many organizations use PowerPoint as a

way of communicat ing information, this module offers advice and guidance on the most effect ive and persuasive uses of

PowerPoint.

Duration:

2:30:00 hrs

Courses:

Why Effective Communication Matters

Understanding How We Communicate

Presentations: Visual Aids

PowerPoint Presentations: Graphic Rules of Thumb

PowerPoint Presentations: Creating Summary Slides

PowerPoint Presentations: Creating Summary Slides I I

Vocabulary Game

Self-Assessment

Module 11 of 35

Communications

Purposeful Presentations (IHRDC_BEES_COM0501)

Description:

Builds on Presentat ion Basics and helps learners organize, structure and create presentations

Duration:

2:30:00 hrs

Courses:

Organizing your Communication

Organizing your Presentation: Forecast, Present and Echo

PowerPoint Presentations: Other Visual Considerations

PowerPoint Presentations: Creating a Presentat ion

Revising PowerPoint

PowerPoint Presentations: Creating a Presentat ion I I

Tips on Face-to-Face Presentations

Addit ional Resources: Presentations

Self-Assessment

Module 12 of 35

Human Resources Management

Introduction to Human Resource Management (IHRDC_BEES_HRM0101)

Description:

Explains Human Resource Management and discusses it s role and value in an organization. You will learn the key HRM funct ions

and concepts, its st rategic contribution to the organizat ion and understand the role of HRM planning. Ethical, cultural, polit ical

and logist ical HRM issues are also addressed.

Duration:

2:30:00 hrs

Courses:

Fundamentals

Att itudes about Human Resource Management

The Strategic Importance of HRM

HRM Vocabulary Game

Key HRM Functions and Concepts

Reading

Centralized and Decentralized HRM

HRM Planning

HRM and Ethics

Global HRM Issues

RIGS: Making the Case for HRM (mini-case)

Web Research: HR Associat ion Resources

Practice Self-Assessment

Self-Assessment

For Further Exploration

Module 13 of 35


Planning and Recruiting (IHRDC_BEES_HRM0201)

Description:

Details the role of HRM in developing an organization’s strategic plan. You will learn the benefits of HRM planning, including

effective recruitment strategies.

Duration:

2:30:00 hrs

Courses:

HRM Planning

Mini-case: Why plan?

Effective Recruitment Ads

Avoiding Recruitment Mistakes

Mini-case: Looking for Candidates

Practice Self Assessment

Self Assessment

Module 14 of 35


Employee Selection (IHRDC_BEES_HRM0301)

Description:

Reviews how to conduct an effective job interview, reference checks and how to select appropriate pre-employment tests.

Duration:

2:30:00 hrs

Courses:

Finding the Right Person

Mini-case: Interviewing for Pacific Machine Tools

Employee Fit

Test ing Prospect ive Employees

Individual Exercise: Evaluat ing an Integrity Test

Mini-case: A Hiring Dilemma

HR Vocabulary Game


Self-Assessment

Module 15 of 35


Training and Development (IHRDC_BEES_HRM0401)

Description:

Introduces the various types of training programs used to keep employee’s skills current , with an eye toward an organization’s

st rategic goals, and – through personnel development – shaping the future of the organization itself.

Duration:

2:30:00 hrs

Courses:

Training Issues

Designing an Orientation Program

Diversity Training

Mini-case: Team Building

Developing Employees

Mini-case: Const ructing a Development Plan

Web Resources


Self-Assessment

Module 16 of 35


Employment Benefits (IHRDC_BEES_HRM0501)

Description:

Focuses on the benefit s that a company is legally required to offer employees. You will learn about the range of benefit s

available and what role they play in a competit ive compensation package. Issues involved in the selection and administ rat ion

of employee benefits are discussed.

Duration:

2:30:00 hrs

Courses:

Introduction to Benefits

Mini-case: Benefits Costs

Health Care Issues

Vacations and Holidays

Mini-Case: Unused Vacation Days

HR Vocabulary Game

Web Resources: Benefits


Self-Assessment

Module 17 of 35


Performance Management (IHRDC_BEES_HRM0601)

Description:

Explains the value of a performance management system and discusses various types of systems. You will learn to conduct a

performance management interview and how to design a performance improvement plan.

Duration:

2:30:00 hrs

Courses:

Performance Evaluation Characterist ics

Performance Management Systems

Fair Measurements

The Appraisal Process

Handling Appraisal Results

Performance Management Solut ions

Vocabulary Game


Self-Assessment

Module 18 of 35


Compensation (IHRDC_BEES_HRM0701)

Description:

Addresses the role of and the key issues in compensation systems in an organizat ion. You will learn the linkages between

compensation and motivation and the pros and cons for “pay-for-performance” systems. Competit ive pay and pay equity is

also discussed.

Duration:

2:30:00 hrs

Courses:

Compensation

Compensation and Motivation

Video: Compensation Systems

Compensation Considerations

Pay for Performance

Case Study: Commissions

Vocabulary Game

Pay Surveys and Market Compensation


Self-Assessment

Module 19 of 35


Talent Management and Career Development (IHRDC_BEES_HRM0801)

Description:

Considers the crit ical value of a career development program to an organization. You will learn the five stages in the career

lifecycle and the needs of an employee at each stage. Key tools for career development are discussed and compared.

Duration:

2:30:00 hrs

Courses:

Why Career Development?

Career Life-cycle

Tools for Career Development

Generat ional Issues

Career Development Issues

Career Quest ions

Summary and Addit ional Reading


Self-Assessment

Module 20 of 35


Equal Employment Opportunity (IHRDC_BEES_HRM0901)

Description:

Reviews the major employment and ant i-discrimination laws as well as the basic steps to take in dealing with discrimination

complaints. You will learn ways to develop and maintain a diverse workforce

Duration:

2:30:00 hrs

Courses:

Equal Opportunity and Employment Issues

Mini-case: Discrimination at Pacific Machine Tools?

Mini-quiz: Discrimination

Mini-case: Making a Choice on Promotion at Pacific Machine Tools

Alternate Work Arrangements at Pacific Machine Tools

Web Research and Essay: Diversity in the Workforce


Self-Assessment

Module 21 of 35


Ethics, Employee Rights, and Discipline (IHRDC_BEES_HRM1001)

Description:

Reviews the major employment and ant i-discrimination laws as well as the basic steps to take in dealing with discrimination

complaints. You will learn ways to develop and maintain a diverse workforce

Duration:

2:30:00 hrs

Courses:

HR and Ethics

Introducing An Ethics Code

Progressive Discipline

Staying out of Legal Trouble

Mini-case: Handling A Proposed Termination

Mini-case: Progressive Discipline

HR Vocabulary Game

Labor Relations


Self-Assessment

Module 22 of 35


Employee Health and Safety (IHRDC_BEES_HRM1101)

Description:

In part icular, the oil and gas industry must pay special attention to the health and safety of its employees. This module discusses

how a company is legally responsible for protecting it s employees, as well as methods to handle substance abuse, mental illness,

and other stress-related issues employees may face on the job.

Duration:

2:30:00 hrs

Courses:

Safety and Health Issues

OSHA

Mini-case: When Employees Don't Follow the Rules

Substance Abuse

Stress Management

Mini-case: Unhappy or Dangerous?

Web Resources: Finding Help


Self-Assessment

Module 23 of 35


Other HRM Issues: Work/Life Balance and Global HRM (IHRDC_BEES_HRM1201)

Description:

Introduces the issues involved with work/life balance and the role of HRM in a global environment. Both topics involve the

changing dynamics of the business world.

Duration:

2:30:00 hrs

Courses:

The Importance of Work/Life Balance

Key Work/Life Balance Issues

Assessing Att itudes Toward Work, Career, and Life

Work/Life Balance Approaches

Reading

Key Terms in Global HRM

Global HRM Issues

Global Career Development


Self-Assessment

Module 24 of 35

Project Management

Introduction to Project Management (Fourth Edition) (IHRDC_BEES_PMT0101)

Description:

This 1-module course was designed as a supplemental study guide for the major content areas of Chapters 1 and 2 of A Guide

to the Project Management Body of Knowledge (PMBOK® Guide), Fourth Edit ion. In this course, you will consider some of the

organizational issues surrounding project management. You will review how different organizations handle the responsibilit ies of

project management and will focus on the entity known as a project management office, or PMO. You will also learn how

organizational structure can play a key role in the success or failure of project management.

Duration:

3:30:00 hrs

Courses:

Presentation: Projects in Context: Understanding the Bigger Picture

Presentation: Stakeholders

Presentation: Project Management Office (PMO), Resources, and Influences

Presentation: Organizational St ructures

Presentation: Project Life Cycle: Understanding Phases and Project Tendencies

Best Practices: Select ing a Project Manager

Best Practices: Project Manager Candidate Profile Review

Interactive: PM Vocabulary Game

Self-Assessment

PMBOK® Guide Chapter 1 and 2 Quiz

Module 25 of 35

Project Management

Project Processes and Project Integration Management (Fourth Edition)

(IHRDC_BEES_PMT0102)

Description:

This course was designed as a supplemental study guide for the major content areas of Chapters 3 and 4 of A Guide to the

Project Management Body of Knowledge (PMBOK® Guide), Fourth Edit ion. In this course, you will be introduced to the five

project management process groups and nine project management knowledge areas into which PMI® sorts all project

activit ies. You will also learn how processes in the Project Integrat ion Management knowledge area encourage relationships

between project processes that keep the project's activit ies co-ordinated and on track for success.

Duration:

3:30:00 hrs

Courses:

Presentation: Project Processes: An Integrated Flow

Presentation: Project Management Processes, Project Management Process Groups, and Project Management

Knowledge Areas

Exercise: Process Groups And Their Const ituent Processes

Presentation: Project Integration Management

Presentation: Project Charter and Major Project Documents

Presentation: Executing, Monitoring, and Closing Project Integration Management Processes

Presentation: Handling the Kick-Off Meeting

Interactive: Vocabulary Game

Self Assessment

PMBOK® Guide Chapter 3 Quiz


Module 26 of 35

Project Management

Project Scope Management (Fourth Edition) (IHRDC_BEES_PMT0103)

Description:

This course was designed as a supplemental study guide for the major content areas of Chapter 5 of A Guide to the Project

Management Body of Knowledge (PMBOK® Guide), Fourth Edit ion. In this course, you will consider many of the key issues

surrounding Project Scope Management.

Duration:

3:30:00 hrs

Courses:

Presentation: Collect Requirements [

] and Define Scope [

2]

Presentation: Create Work Breakdown Structure [

3]

Presentation: Verify Scope [

4] and Control Scope [

5]

Best Practices: Project Review Reports and Meetings

Best Practices: Updating Stakeholders

Vocabulary Game

Self-Assessment


Module 27 of 35

Project Management

Project Time Management (Fourth Edition) (IHRDC_BEES_PMT0104)

Description:


Management Body of Knowledge (PMBOK® Guide), Fourth Edit ion. In this course, you will consider how to best plan and

schedule activit ies. You will familiarize yourself with the various techniques used to calculate and analyze activity t ime

est imates, including ways to est imate the duration of activit ies.

Duration:

3:30:00 hrs

Courses:

Presentation: Defining Activit ies

Presentation: Sequencing Activit ies

Presentation: Est imating Activity Resources and Durations

Exercise: Est imat ion Using PERT and Z-Score

Presentation: Develop Schedule and the Crit ical Path Method

Exercise: Identifying the Crit ical Path

Best Practices: Crashing

Best Practices: Scheduling Pract ice

Vocabulary Game

Self-Assessment


Module 28 of 35

Project Management

Project Cost Management (Fourth Edition) (IHRDC_BEES_PMT0105)

Description:


Management Body of Knowledge (PMBOK® Guide), Fourth Edit ion. In this course, you will consider the general approaches to

cost management, such as the methods that are used to est imate and budget for project costs. You will also learn about the

interrelationship of various cost control concepts and possible responses a project management team might make if a project

is falling behind schedule or overrunning its budget.

Duration:

3:30:00 hrs

Courses:

Presentation: Est imate Costs

Presentation: Determine Budget and the Cost Performance Baseline

Presentation: Cost Analysis and Cost Control

Exercise: Evaluating Project Status

Best Practices: Cost Est imating and Budgeting


Self-Assessment


Module 29 of 35

Project Management

Project Quality Management (Fourth Edition) (IHRDC_BEES_PMT0106)

Description:


Management Body of Knowledge (PMBOK® Guide), Fourth Edit ion. In this course, you will learn how the project management

team ensures that a project is completed at the level of quality required by all the stakeholders. From customers to the

performing organization, there are many inputs to the process. This course will explain how the project management team can

plan for, execute, and monitor and control quality.

Duration:

3:30:00 hrs

Courses:

Presentation: Project Quality Management Overview and Plan Quality

Presentation: Planning Tools and Techniques

Presentation: Flowcharts

Presentation: Perform Quality Assurance and Perform Quality Control

Exercise: Choosing the Correct Tool

Best Practices Mini-Case: Improving Public Improvements

Vocabulary Game

Self-Assessment


Module 30 of 35

Project Management

Project Human Resource Management (Fourth Edition) (IHRDC_BEES_PMT0107)

Description:


Management Body of Knowledge (PMBOK® Guide), Fourth Edit ion. In this course, you will learn how to acquire and negotiate

the best staff, how to define roles and responsibilit ies in project documentation, and how to employ the essent ials of good

people management.

Duration:

3:30:00 hrs

Courses:

Presentation: Project Human Resource Management

Presentation: Acquire Project Team

Presentation: Develop Project Team

Presentation: Manage Project Team

Presentation: Conflict Management

Best Practices Mini-Case: The Cycle Time Improvement Project

Best Practices: Gathering Input for Decision-Making

Best Practices: Web Resources on Group Dynamics

Best Practices Mini-Case: Selecting a Decision-Making Approach

Vocabulary Game

Self-Assessment


Module 31 of 35

Project Management

Project Communications Management (Fourth Edition) (IHRDC_BEES_PMT0108)

Description:


Management Body of Knowledge (PMBOK® Guide), Fourth Edit ion. In this course, you will learn about how project

management teams can effectively communicate with the project's various stakeholders.

Duration:

3:30:00 hrs

Courses:

Project Communications Management and Communications Basics online

Ident ify Stakeholders online

Plan Communications and Distribute Information online

Manage Stakeholder Expectations online

Report Performance online

Best Practices: Mini-case: Confronting Communication Challenges online

Vocabulary Game online

Self-Assessment test


Module 32 of 35

Project Management

Project Risk Management (Fourth Edition) (IHRDC_BEES_PMT0109)

Description:


Management Body of Knowledge (PMBOK® Guide), Fourth Edit ion. In this course, you will define the core elements of risk

management, including the risk register. You will also understand how risks are identified, priorit ized, quantified and used in

decision-making.

Duration:

3:30:00 hrs

Courses:

Presentation: Plan Risk Management

Presentation: Identify Risks

Presentation: Perform Qualitat ive Risk Management

Presentation: Perform Quantitat ive Risk Analysis

Exercise: Perform Quantitat ive Risk Analysis

Presentation: Plan Risk Responses and Monitor and Control Risks

Best Practices: Web Research

Vocabulary Game

Self-Assessment


Module 33 of 35

Project Management

Project Procurement Management (Fourth Edition) (IHRDC_BEES_PMT0110)

Description:


Management Body of Knowledge (PMBOK® Guide), Fourth Edit ion. In this course, you will consider the various aspects of the

Project Procurement Management knowledge area.

Duration:

3:30:00 hrs

Courses:

Presentation: Plan Procurements

Presentation: Conduct Procurements

Presentation: Administer Procurements and Close Procurements

Exercise: Pinpoint ing the Procurement Process

Presentation: Contract Negotiation


Self-Assessment


Module 34 of 35

Project Management

Project Management Practice Examination and Examination Strategies (Fourth

Edition) (IHRDC_BEES_PMT0201)

Description:

This Pract ice Exam covers the Project Management Inst itute's standard, A Guide to the Project Management Body of

Knowledge (PMBOK® Guide). The practice exam contains mult iple-choice quest ions that provide a comprehensive review of

the PMBOK® Guide.

Duration:

3:30:00 hrs

Courses:

Practice Examination 1: PMBOK® Guide Knowledge

Practice Examination 2: PMBOK® Guide Knowledge

Project Management Professional (PMP®) Exam Strategies

Introduction to the PMP® Exam

PMI's PMP® Code of Professional Conduct

Tips for PMP® Exam Test Taking

Key PMBOK® Guide Content to Memorize

Test Center Logist ics

Ending the Test

Exam Strategy Self-Assessment

Module 35 of 35

Operations& Maintenance e-Learning

Course Catalog

PROCESS OPERATIONS CURRICULUM

International Human Resources Development Corporation

Operations & Maintenance e-Learning

For The Oi l And Gas Indus t r y

Process Operations

BOILERS: Basic Principles and Types (IHRDC_OM_AOBBP)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to fundamental concepts related to industrial plant boilers. After

completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the basic requirements for steam production and combustion and

explain how a boiler produces steam. They should also be able to ident ify three types of heat t ransfer and explain how heat

t ransfer occurs in a typical boiler. In addit ion, trainees should be able to describe how water, combust ion gases, and steam flow

through fire tube and water tube boilers.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Principles of Operation

State the basic requirements for steam production.

State the basic requirements for combustion.

Explain in general terms how a boiler produces steam.

Heat Transfer

Describe heat transfer.

State three ways in which heat t ransfer can occur in a typical boiler.

Ident ify problems that can interfere with proper heat transfer and the effect of each on boiler operation.

Boiler Types

Name two basic types of boilers.

Describe the basic differences between fire tube and water tube boilers.

Describe how water, combustion gases, and steam flow through fire tube and water tube boilers.

Subjects:


Steam Production and Combustion

Basic Boiler Operat ing Principles

Heat Transfer

Types of Heat Transfer

Heat Transfer Problems

Heat Transfer in a Boiler

Boiler Types

Fire Tube Boilers

Water Tube Boilers

Course 1 of 245

Process Operations

BOILERS: Combustion, Water and Steam (IHRDC_OM_AOBOW)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic principles associated with combustion in a boiler

and the flow of air and combustion gases during boiler operation. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to identify

the elements needed for combust ion in a boiler, explain how fuel is delivered to the burners, and describe the parts and

operation of various types of burners. They should also be able to describe the air and gas flow path through a boiler and

describe methods used to remove part iculates and harmful gases from combustion gases. In addit ion, trainees should be able

to explain when and why vents, drains, blowdown valves, and soot blowers are used.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Combustion Equipment

Describe the parts and operation of typical gas burners, oil burners, and stokers.

Air Flow

Ident ify some devices used to improve the efficiency of boiler operations.

Explain how air flow is produced in a typical boiler.

Explain why changes in boiler load require fuel and air adjustments.

State why it is necessary to maintain a proper fuel-to-air rat io in a boiler.

Describe the parts and basic operation of a typical rotary air heater.

Explain how rotary air heaters improve efficiency of boiler operations.

Water and Steam Flow

Explain how natural circulat ion occurs in a typical water tube boiler.

Explain how controlled circulation occurs in a typical water tube boiler.

Describe an economizer, why it is used, and how it improves efficiency.

Name some devices commonly used to remove moisture from steam and how they operate.

Subjects:

Combustion Equipment

Gas Burners

Oil Burners

Stokers

Air Flow

Draft

Fuel-to-Air Ratio

Air Heaters

Water and Steam Flow

Boiler Water Circulation

Economizers

Moisture Separators

Course 2 of 245

Process Operations

CHEMISTRY: Basic Principles 1 (IHRDC_OM_AOCB1)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic concepts associated with the composit ion of matter

and the general characterist ics of compounds, mixtures, and solut ions. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to

identify the part icles that make up an atom and describe two ways in which atoms form chemical bonds. They should also be

able to explain what compounds and mixtures are, and how they differ from one another. In addit ion, trainees should be able

to describe what a solut ion is, calculate the weights of materials in a percent-by-weight solut ion, and explain what a pH

measurement represents.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Introduction to Chemistry

Define: material, matter, mass, element, atom, proton, neutron, and electron.

Ident ify the part icles that make up an atom.

Define: valence electron and ion.

Describe two ways in which atoms form chemical bonds.

Compounds and Mixtures

Define: compound and chemical reaction.

Define mixture.

Explain how compounds and mixtures differ from one another.

Solutions

Define: solut ion, solute, solvent, homogeneous, and concentration.

Calculate the weights of the materials in a percent-by-weight solut ion, given the weight of the solut ion and the

percentage of solute.

Explain what a pH measurement represents.

Subjects:

Introduction to Chemistry

Composit ion of Matter

Valence Electrons and Chemical Bonds

Compounds and Mixtures

Compounds

Mixtures

Solutions

Characterist ics

Percent-by-Weight

pH Measurements

Course 3 of 245

Process Operations

CHEMISTRY: Basic Principles 2 (IHRDC_OM_AOCB2)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the principles of chemical reactions, material balancing, and

organic chemistry. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to use a chemical equat ion to explain what occurs during

a chemical reaction, and how combustion reactions, replacement reactions, and neutralizat ion occur. Trainees should also be

able to define material balancing, and describe the basic steps involved in balancing the materials represented in a simple

equat ion. In addit ion, trainees should be able to explain what organic chemistry is and how some organic chemicals are

named.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Chemical Reactions

Ident ify three common types of chemical react ions.

Define: chemical equation and chemical reaction.

Use a chemical equation to explain what occurs during a simple chemical reaction.

Define endothermic and exothermic in terms of their application to chemical react ions.

Explain how a combust ion reaction, replacement reaction, and neutralization reaction occur.

Explain how the acidity or alkalinity of a liquid is measured.

Material Balancing

Explain the meaning of material balancing.

Ident ify the steps involved in balancing the materials represented in a simple equation.

Given the actual weight of one material in a reaction, use the relative weights of the atoms in the reaction to

determine the actual weights of the other materials involved.

Organic Chemistry

Define organic chemistry.

Explain how some organic chemicals are named.

Subjects:

Chemical Reactions

Chemical Equat ions

Combustion Reactions

Replacement and Neutralization Reactions

Material Balancing

Steps in Material Balancing

Relative and Actual Weights

Organic Chemistry

Basis of Organic Chemistry

Naming Organic Chemicals

Course 4 of 245

Process Operations

CHEMISTRY: Material Balancing (IHRDC_OM_AOCMB)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic concepts associated with using balanced chemical

equat ions to calculate the amounts of reactants and products in process reactions. After completing this unit , t rainees should

be able to explain what material balancing is, verify that a chemical equation is balanced, and use a balanced equation to

calculate the amounts of reactants and products in a reaction when the weight of one reactant is given. They should also be

able to identify two basic factors that can limit the product ion of a process system, perform material balancing for a process

system when reactant supply is the limit ing factor, and perform material balancing for a system in which a specific amount of

product is to be produced.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Chemical Equations

Explain the meaning of material balancing.

Verify that a chemical equation is balanced.

Define molecular weight and explain how to calculate the weight of a molecule.

Calculate the amounts of reactants and products in a reaction when given the weight of one reactant.

Limiting Factors

Ident ify two basic factors that can limit the production of a process system.

Convert reactant supplies expressed as total amounts into supply rates.

Determine the limit ing factor of a process system that is being operated to produce as much product as

possible.

Perform material balancing for a process system when reactant supply is the limit ing factor.

Perform material balancing for a system in which a specific amount of product is to be produced.

Subjects:

Chemical Equations

Equations

Molecular Weights

Actual Weights

Limiting Factors

Determining the Limit ing Factor

Determining Reactant Amounts

Course 5 of 245

Process Operations

CHEMISTRY: Reaction Rates (IHRDC_OM_AOCRR)

Overview:

This interactive unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic concepts associated with the rates at which chemical

react ions occur. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe two factors that determine the rates of

react ions, and the effects of temperature, pressure, concentrat ion, and surface area on reaction rates. They should also be

able to describe how catalysts affect reaction rates and how temperature and pressure affect equilibrium react ions.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Reaction Rate Factors

Define react ion rate.

Explain how chemical reactions occur and describe two factors that determine the rates of react ions.

Describe the effects of temperature, pressure, concentration, and surface area on reaction rates.

Catalysts

Define catalyst.

Describe how adsorption catalysts work.

Explain how some catalysts can become poisoned.

Describe how catalysts work by forming an intermediate product during a reaction.

Equilibrium Reactions

Define equilibrium and equilibrium point .

Describe the effects of temperature and pressure on an equilibrium reaction.

Describe one way that products can be stabilized.

Subjects:

Reaction Rate Factors

Chemical React ions

Effects of Variables

Catalysts

Adsorption-Type Catalysts

Intermediate-Type Catalysts

Equilibrium Reactions

Equilibrium

Temperature and Pressure

Stabilizing Products

Course 6 of 245

Process Operations

COMPRESSORS: Centrifugal and Axial (IHRDC_OM_AOCCA)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic concepts associated with the parts and operation of

centrifugal and axial compressors. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the main parts and the

general operation of single-stage centrifugal compressors, mult istage centrifugal compressors, and axial compressors. They

should also be able to describe the functions of compressor lubrication systems, seals, bearings, and common auxiliary devices.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Compressor Types

Describe the basic operation of a centrifugal compressor.

Describe the basic operation of an axial compressor.

Describe the components and operat ion of a single-stage centrifugal compressor.

Describe the components and operat ion of a mult istage centrifugal compressor.

Describe the components and operat ion of an axial compressor.

System Components

Describe the function of a compressor lubrication system.

Describe the functions of compressor seals and a seal oil system.

Describe the function of bearings.

Describe how drivers and couplings are used with compressors.

Describe the function of an aftercooler.

Describe the function of safety valves and receivers in compressor systems.

Subjects:

Compressor Types

Introduction

Centrifugal Compressors

Axial Compressors

System Components

Lubrication, Seals, and Bearings

Auxiliary Devices

Course 7 of 245

Process Operations

COMPRESSORS: Introduction (IHRDC_OM_AOCIN)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the operation of compressors and compressed gas systems.

After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe two general types of compressors and the components and

operation of a typical compressed air system. They should also be able to explain the hazards and safety precautions of

compressors and compressed gas systems. In addit ion, trainees should be able to describe the functions of systems and devices

that are commonly used with compressors and compressed gas systems.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Compressors and Systems

Describe two general types of compressors.

Describe some characterist ics that all compressors share.

Ident ify the components of a typical compressed air system.

Describe the operation of a typical compressed air system.

Describe hazards and safety precautions associated with compressors.

Describe hazards and safety precautions associated with compressed gas systems.

System Components

Describe the function of a filter.

Describe the function of an air cooling system and a water cooling system.

Describe the function of a lubricat ion system.

Describe the function of an oil separator.

Describe the function of a demister.

Describe the function of a dryer.

Describe the function of a receiver.

Describe the function of an unloader.

Describe the function of safety valves.

Subjects:

Compressors and Systems

Compressors

Compressed Air Systems

Compressor Hazards

System Components

Filtering, Cooling, and Lubrication

System Auxiliaries

Course 8 of 245

Process Operations

COMPRESSORS: Operation of Centrifugal and Axial Types (IHRDC_OM_AOCOC)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic concepts associated with the startup, operat ion, and

shutdown of centrifugal and axial compressors. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the general

functions of instrumentation and control devices used with centrifugal and axial compressors. They should also be able to

identify operator responsibilit ies associated with start ing up, operating, and shutt ing down centrifugal and axial compressors.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Instrumentation and Control

State the general features of instrumentation and control devices used with centrifugal and axial compressors.

Describe how instrumentation and control devices can maintain the values of a compressor's process variables.

Describe how instrumentation and control devices can keep a compressor operating within a stable operat ing

range.

Operation

Describe the general steps involved in preparing a compressor for startup.

Describe the general steps involved in warming up a compressor.

Describe the general steps in start ing gas flow to a compressor and bringing a compressor up to operating

speed.

Describe typical compressor operating checks.

Describe some of the general steps involved in a compressor shutdown.

Subjects:


Functions

Surge Control

Operation

Startup

Operation and Shutdown

Course 9 of 245

Process Operations

COMPRESSORS: Positive Displacement (IHRDC_OM_AOCPD)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic concepts associated with the operation of posit ive

displacement compressors. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to identify the main parts and describe the

general operation of various types of reciprocating and rotary compressors. They should also be able to identify operator

responsibilit ies associated with start ing up, operat ing, and shutt ing down compressors.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Compressor Types

Ident ify the main parts of a reciprocating compressor.

Describe the general operation of a reciprocating compressor.

Ident ify different types of reciprocating compressors and describe their operation.

Ident ify the main parts of a typical rotary compressor.

Describe the general operation of different types of rotary compressors.

Compressor Operations

Describe general checks that should be made before a compressor is started.

Describe general procedures for start ing up a compressor.

Describe general checks that should be made while a compressor is running.

Describe general procedures for shutt ing down a compressor.

Describe general procedures for putt ing a portable compressor in operation.

Subjects:

Compressor Types

Reciprocating Compressors

Reciprocating Compressor Variat ions

Rotary Compressors

Compressor Operations

Pre-Startup Checks

Startup, Operation, and Shutdown

Portable Compressors

Course 10 of 245

Process Operations

DIAGRAMS: Basic Diagrams and Symbols 1 (IHRDC_OM_AODB1)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to plant system diagrams and diagram symbols. After completing

this unit, t rainees should be able to identify and describe the purpose of several kinds of system diagrams, and be able to

describe the information found on each type. Trainees should also be able to identify symbols commonly used on flow diagrams,

and how to use a flow diagram to trace the flow paths of a system.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Types of Diagrams

Ident ify and describe the purpose of equipment arrangement diagrams, elevation drawings, piping system

(flow) diagrams, piping and instrumentat ion diagrams (P&IDs), electrical diagrams, and legends.

In general terms, describe the informat ion found on each type of diagram.

Flow Diagram Symbols

Ident ify some basic symbols associated with flow diagrams.

Ident ify symbols commonly used to represent components in flow diagrams.

Describe the basic operation of the components typically found in a fluid system.

Reading Diagram Symbols

Ident ify the four basic parts of a system.

Ident ify the components of a typical fluid system and relate them to their symbols and functions.

Subjects:

Types of Diagrams

Equipment Location Diagrams

System Diagrams


Tanks, Pumps, and Valves

Actuators

Heat Exchangers

Reading Diagram Symbols

Block Diagrams

Flow Diagrams

Course 11 of 245

Process Operations

DIAGRAMS: Basic Diagrams and Symbols 2 (IHRDC_OM_AODB2)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with symbols commonly used on piping and inst rumentation

diagrams (P&IDs) and electrical one-line diagrams. After complet ing this unit, t rainees should be able to ident ify instrument

symbols and line symbols used in P&IDs, describe the types of information typically found on a legend, and use a P&ID to locate

the components of a system. They should also be able to identify symbols used on electrical one-line diagrams.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams

Ident ify instruments using an identification chart.

Ident ify line and instrument symbols used in piping and instrumentation diagrams.

Using a System Diagram

Describe the types of information typically found on a legend.

Locate the components in a boiler fuel oil system by identifying the symbols used to represent them.

Electrical Diagrams

Ident ify symbols commonly found on one-line electrical diagrams.

Trace out a typical one-line diagram and briefly describe its connect ions.

Subjects:


Instrument Symbols

Reading a P&ID


Legends


Electrical Diagrams

Main Transformer Section

Load Center Section

Course 12 of 245

Process Operations

DIAGRAMS: Flow and Electrical (IHRDC_OM_AODUF)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the use of flow diagrams and electrical one-line diagrams.

After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to use a flow diagram to trace the flow of materials through a system, and

use a flow diagram and a valve lineup checklist to line up valves in a system. They should also be able to use an electrical

one-line diagram to learn the components and layout of an electrical system, and to determine how to isolate a piece of

equipment for maintenance or repair.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Using Flow Diagrams

Describe how flow diagrams can be used to become familiar with a system.

Describe how flow diagrams can be used to line up valves.

Describe the relationship between flow diagrams and valve lineup checklists.

Using Electrical Diagrams

Describe how electrical one-line diagrams can be used to learn the components and layouts of electrical

systems.

Describe how electrical one-line diagrams can be used to determine how to isolate equipment for

maintenance and repairs.

Subjects:

Using Flow Diagrams

Learning a Plant System

Lining Up Valves

Using Electrical Diagrams

Learning an Electrical System

Isolating Equipment

Course 13 of 245

Process Operations

DIAGRAMS: Piping and Instrumentation (IHRDC_OM_AODUI)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to make trainees familiar with the use of piping and instrumentat ion diagrams (P&IDs).

After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the kinds of information that can be found on a P&ID and

explain why this information is useful. They should also be able to explain how to use P&IDs to troubleshoot system problems.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Introduction

Describe the types of information provided by P&IDs and explain why this information is useful.

Describe how a P&ID can be used to become familiar with the instrumentation associated with a system.

Troubleshooting

Describe how P&IDs can be useful in t roubleshooting problems.

Subjects:

Introduction

Information on P&IDs

Learning a System

Troubleshooting

Water Treatment System Problem

De-Aerator System Problem

Course 14 of 245

Process Operations

DISTILLATION: Basic Principles (IHRDC_OM_AODBP)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic principles of the dist illat ion process. After

completing this unit, t rainees should be able to explain how changes in the state of matter relate to the dist illat ion process and

how these changes are affected by temperature and pressure. They should also be able to explain how a liquid mixture can be

separated into lighter and heavier components by dist illat ion, and be able to describe the basic operation of single-batch

dist illat ion systems, successive-batch dist illat ion systems, and continuous dist illat ion systems.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Principles of Distillation

Explain how changes in temperature and pressure affect the boiling point of a substance.

Define dist illat ion.

Explain how changes in the state of matter relate to the dist illat ion process.

Define: sensible heat, init ial boiling point , boiling range, final boiling point, and latent heat.

Define: vapor pressure, external pressure, part ial pressure, and relat ive volatility.

Explain the relationship between vapor pressure and the following: boiling point, temperature, and external

pressure.

Distillation Processes

Explain how a liquid mixture can be separated into lighter and heavier components by dist illat ion.

Describe the characterist ics of liquid mixtures that make dist illat ion possible.

Describe the basic operation of single-batch, successive-batch, and continuous dist illat ion systems.

Subjects:

Principles of Distillation

States of Matter

Heat

Pressure

Distillation Processes

Separation of Liquid Mixtures

Batch

Continuous

Course 15 of 245

Process Operations

DISTILLATION: Basic System Components and Operation (IHRDC_OM_AODBS)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic components and operation of a typical dist illat ion

system. After completing the unit , t rainees should be able to describe the functions of the major components of a dist illat ion

system and describe how the dist illat ion process occurs in a dist illat ion tower. They should also be able to explain how refluxing

and reboiling affect product purity and how bubble caps and packing affect the dist illat ion process in dist illat ion towers. In

addit ion, trainees should be able to explain why it is important to monitor and control dist illat ion tower temperatures and

pressures.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Basic Distillation System

List and explain major equipment functions in a typical dist illat ion system.

Define overhead product, bottoms product, and boil-up.

Describe the basic operation of a dist illat ion tower.

Explain how a typical sieve-type dist illat ion tower operates.

List and explain the purpose of the three sections of a dist illat ion tower.

Define fractionat ion.

Explain how refluxing and reboiling help minimize overlap.

Define external reflux and internal reflux.

Explain how packed towers differ from dist illat ion towers using bubble caps.

Compare and contrast the operation of bubble caps and packing grids.


Describe adjustments made when product purity is unacceptable.

Ident ify crit ical temperature points in a dist illat ion tower.

Describe the effects of incorrect temperatures at various points in a dist illat ion tower.

Explain what a temperature gradient is and how it is measured.

Explain how temperatures can be controlled in a basic system.

Ident ify crit ical pressure points in a basic system.

Describe the effects of incorrect pressures in a system.

Subjects:

Basic Distillation System

Introduction to Dist illat ion Systems

Tower Operat ion

Refluxing and Reboiling

Bubble Caps and Packing


Temperature

Pressure

Course 16 of 245

Process Operations

DISTILLATION: Control Systems (IHRDC_OM_AODCS)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic principles of operation of systems that control

dist illat ion processes. After completing this unit , t rainees should be able to describe typical material balance and energy

balance control loops and explain how these control loops respond to process disturbances. They should also be able to

describe how a dist illat ion tower is operated to maintain product specifications.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Balances

Explain what is meant by material balance and identify typical variables.

Explain what is meant by energy balance and ident ify typical variables.

Describe typical material balance and energy balance control loops.

Define steady state operation and process disturbance.

Describe how a typical dist illat ion tower control system responds to a process disturbance (change in feed

composit ion).

Process Temperatures

Describe how a typical dist illat ion tower control system responds to an increase in bottom temperature.

Explain how the following condit ions affect the composit ion of a dist illat ion system's overhead and bottom

products: increase in bottom temperature, decrease in bottom temperature, and change in external reflux.

Product Composition

Explain the difference between direct and indirect composit ion measurements.

Explain what is meant by product giveaway.

Describe how a typical dist illat ion tower is operated to maintain product specificat ions.

Explain what is meant by process lag.

Subjects:

Balances

Material Balance

Energy Balance

Process Disturbances

Process Temperatures

Bottom Temperature

External Reflux

Product Composition

Product Specifications

Maintaining Specifications

Course 17 of 245

Process Operations

DISTILLATION: Operating Problems (IHRDC_OM_AODOP)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with some of the problems that can occur during the operation of

dist illat ion systems. After completing this unit, trainees should be able to describe problems that can occur when the amount of

reflux going back to the column is incorrect, and when the reboiler in a dist illat ion system is operated improperly.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Feed Problems

Explain the role of the feed rate in maintaining column equilibrium.

Ident ify problems that can occur when the feed rate is incorrect.

Describe condit ions that can lead to three operating problems: overloading, flooding, and puking.

Describe some mechanical causes of overloading.

Explain how to identify a flooded condit ion in a dist illat ion tower.

Explain how a liquid flood can be broken.

Explain how flooding can be prevented or controlled.

Ident ify process disturbances that can result from changes in the feed to a dist illat ion tower.

Ident ify problems that can show up during startup.

Reflux Problems

Define reflux.

Describe what can happen if the amount of reflux going back to the column is not correct.

Ident ify typical disturbances that can occur in shell and tube condensers and fin-fan condensers.

Reboiler Problems

Describe sources of heat input for a dist illat ion tower.

Explain the role of reboiler operation in maintaining column equilibrium.

Ident ify problems that can occur when the reboiler is operated incorrectly.

Ident ify typical disturbances that can occur in shell and tube reboilers and fired reboilers.

Define overfract ionation.

Subjects:

Feed Problems

Feed Control

Overloading

Other Problems

Reflux Problems

Improper Reflux

Condenser Problems

Reboiler Problems

Reboiler Purpose

Improper Operation

Overfractionation

Course 18 of 245

Process Operations

DISTILLATION: System Startup and Shutdown (IHRDC_OM_AODSS)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic procedures for start ing up and shutt ing down a

dist illat ion system. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe pre-startup checks that are commonly made

on a vacuum dist illat ion system and describe what takes place during a typical startup procedure. They should also be able to

describe general procedures for short-term, emergency, and long-term shutdowns.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Startup

Briefly describe the dist illat ion process.

State the purpose of pre-startup checks.

List pre-startup checks commonly made on a vacuum dist illat ion system.

Describe what takes place during a dist illat ion startup procedure.

Shutdown

Describe a typical short -term shutdown procedure.

Describe a typical emergency shutdown procedure.

Describe a typical long-term shutdown procedure.

Subjects:

Startup

System Overview

Pre-Startup Checks

Startup Procedures

Shutdown

Short-Term Shutdown

Long-Term Shutdown

Course 19 of 245

Process Operations

DISTILLATION: Towers, Reboilers and Condensers (IHRDC_OM_AODTR)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic principles of operation of dist illat ion towers,

reboilers, and condensers. After complet ing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the difference between a binary tower

and a mult idraw tower and explain why the physical dimensions of a tower can vary. They should also be able to explain why

vacuum dist illat ion and azeotropic dist illat ion are used, and how various types of reboilers and condensers are used in

dist illat ion systems.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Towers and Processes

Describe the major difference between a binary tower and a mult idraw tower.

Describe the basic operation of a side-draw tower.

Describe three factors that affect the physical dimensions of a dist illat ion tower.

Given the name of a dist illat ion tower, describe the tower's main function.

Give three basic reasons why vacuum dist illat ion is used.

Explain what an azeotropic mixture is and identify two methods of azeotropic dist illat ion.

Reboilers and Condensers

Explain the difference between the following types of reboilers: forced versus natural circulat ion and external

versus internal.

Describe two ways that condensers can be categorized in overhead systems.

Subjects:

Towers and Processes

Mult idraw Towers

Tower Variat ions

Vacuum Towers

Azeotropic Dist illat ion

Reboilers and Condensers

Reboilers

Condensers

Course 20 of 245

Process Operations

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT: AC and DC Motors (IHRDC_OM_AOEAC)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic concepts associated with the operation of electric

motors. After completing this unit , t rainees should be able to explain the basic principles of motor operation and describe the

basic operation of a simple AC motor and a simple DC motor. They should also be able to identify and describe the function of

each part of a typical AC motor and a typical DC motor.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Motor Fundamentals

Explain the purpose of a motor.

Explain what is meant by motor act ion.

Explain the basic principles of motor operation.

Define the following terms: alternating current, rotor, and stator.

Describe how a simple AC motor operates.

Describe how a simple DC motor operates.

Motor Parts

Ident ify the parts of a typical AC motor and describe the function of each part.

Ident ify the parts of a typical DC motor and describe the function of each part .

Subjects:

Motor Fundamentals

Basic Motor Theory

AC Motor Fundamentals

DC Motor Fundamentals

Motor Parts

AC Motors

DC Motors

Course 21 of 245

Process Operations

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT: Electrical Production and Distribution (IHRDC_OM_AOEEP)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic concepts associated with the production and

distribution of electric power for use by process systems. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to identify and

explain the funct ions of the major components in an electrical distribution system. In addit ion, trainees should be able to

describe general hazards associated with these systems and how to minimize the possible effects of the hazards.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Power Generation

In general terms, explain how power comes into an industrial facility from an off-site source.

List three sources of on-site power generation.

Power Distribution

Ident ify and explain the function of the major components in a typical electrical power distribution system.

Ident ify general hazards associated with electrical distribution systems.

Describe, in general terms, how to aid a vict im of electrical shock.

Describe, in general terms, how to ext inguish an electrical fire.

Subjects:

Power Generation

Off-Site Power Generation

On-Site Power Generation

Power Distribution

System Components

Safety

Course 22 of 245

Process Operations

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT: Motor Controllers and Operation (IHRDC_OM_AOEMC)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic concepts associated with what motor controllers do

and how they do it . Typical steps for start ing up, checking, and shutt ing down motors are also covered. After complet ing this

unit, t rainees should be able to explain how motor controllers control and protect motors. They should also be able to describe

how to start up a motor, perform operat ing checks on a motor, and shut down a motor.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Motor Controllers

Explain the purpose of a motor controller.

Describe the features of a typical AC motor controller contactor.

Describe how a motor controller can protect a motor.

Using an electrical diagram, identify the parts of a typical AC motor controller and describe the function of

each part .

State the purpose of overload devices.

Explain the difference between thermal and magnetic overload devices.

Ident ify the parts of typical overload devices and describe their operation.

Motor Operation

List typical steps for start ing up a motor.

Describe normal operating checks associated with motor operation.

List typical steps for shutt ing down a motor.

Subjects:

Motor Controllers

Fundamentals

AC Controllers

Overload Devices

Motor Operation

Startup

Operations

Switches

Course 23 of 245

Process Operations

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT: Transformers, Breakers and Switches (IHRDC_OM_AOEBS)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the operation of transformers, circuit breakers, and various

types of switches. After completing this unit , t rainees should be able to explain the principles of transformer operat ion, ident ify

some of the basic components of a transformer, and describe checks that are generally made during a transformer inspection.

They should also be able to describe the general operation of a circuit breaker, explain how to reset a tripped circuit breaker

and rack out a circuit breaker, and describe the basic operation of pushbotton switches and rotary switches.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Transformers

Explain the function of a transformer.

Describe, in general terms, how a transformer works.

Ident ify and describe some of the basic components of transformers.

Describe checks that should be made when a transformer is inspected.

Breakers and Switches

Describe the general operation of a circuit breaker.

List general steps associated with resett ing a circuit breaker that has tripped.

List general steps associated with racking out a circuit breaker.

Describe the general function of a switch.

Explain how different types of pushbotton switches and rotary switches operate.

Subjects:

Transformers

Operating Principles

Transformer Components

Transformer Inspection

Breakers and Switches

Circuit Breaker Operat ion

Resett ing and Racking Out

Switches

Course 24 of 245

Process Operations

EQUIPMENT DRIVE COMPONENTS: Couplings (IHRDC_OM_AOEBP)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic concepts associated with the general operation of

equipment drive components, in part icular, couplings and clutches. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to

describe the general function of equipment drive components and some general operator checks and safety concerns related

to equipment drive components. They should also be able to identify and describe various types of couplings and a typical

clutch, as well as describe common operator checks and concerns that apply to these part icular equipment drive

components.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Introduction

Explain what equipment drive components are and state some of their functions.

Describe general operator checks and safety concerns related to drive components.

Explain why different types of drive components may be used together in some instances.

Describe basic operating characterist ics that affect the operation of rotating equipment and define the

following terms: endplay, torque, torque surge, and shock load.

Couplings

Explain what a coupling is and describe its general function.

Ident ify and describe some commonly used fixed speed couplings.

Describe common operator checks and concerns that apply to fixed speed couplings.

Explain what a variable speed coupling is, and describe it s general function.

Define slip.

Ident ify and describe some commonly used variable speed couplings.

Describe common operator checks and concerns that apply to variable speed couplings.

Clutches

Explain what a clutch is, and its general function.

Describe one type of disc clutch.

Describe some general operator checks and concerns that apply to a typical clutch.

Subjects:

Introduction

Drive Components

Characterist ics

Couplings

Fixed Speed Couplings

Variable Speed Couplings

Clutches

Clutch Fundamentals

Operator Checks

Course 25 of 245

Process Operations

EQUIPMENT DRIVE COMPONENTS: Gear, Belt and Chain Drives

(IHRDC_OM_AOEGB)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic concepts associated with the operation of gear drives,

belt drives, and chain drives. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the general function of gear drives,

belt drives, and chain drives, and explain how each of these equipment drive components operates to transfer power from a

driver to a piece of driven equipment. They should also be able to describe operator checks that are commonly performed on

gear drives, belt drives, and chain drives.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Gears

Explain what a gear drive is, and its general function.

Ident ify the major components of a typical gearbox.

Describe typical operator checks and concerns that apply to gear drives.

Belts and Chains

Explain what a belt is and describe its general function.

Describe typical single and mult iple V-belt drives.

Explain what a chain drive is and its general function.

Describe a typical chain drive and some common ways that chain drives are lubricated.

Describe typical operator checks and concerns that apply to belt drives.

Describe typical operator checks and concerns that apply to chain drives.

Subjects:

Gears

Function

Operator Checks

Belts and Chains

Belt Drives

Chain Drives

Operator Checks

Course 26 of 245

Process Operations

EQUIPMENT LUBRICATION: Lubricants and Bearings (IHRDC_OM_AOELB)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the types of lubricants and bearings used in indust rial

facilit ies. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to explain how lubricants reduce frict ion, describe the

characterist ics of oil and grease, and describe applicat ions in which oils and greases are used as lubricants. Trainees should also

be able to name several solid lubricants, and give an example of a synthetic lubricant. In addit ion, trainees should be able to

describe sleeve bearings, rolling element bearings, and radial loads and thrust loads on shafts and bearings.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Oils and Greases

Define frict ion and explain how lubricants reduce it .

Define viscosity and describe the effect of temperature on it .

Define oil and explain when it is a better lubricant than grease.

Define grease and describe its consistency and how it is indicated.

Describe when grease is a better lubricant than oil.

Solids, Additives, and Synthetics

List three solid lubricants.

Explain how extreme-pressure lubricants protect gears.

Explain why lubricant oxidation is harmful.

Name two harmful substances formed from lubricant oxidation.

State a function of detergents and dispersants in lubricants.

Name a synthetic lubricant.

Bearings

Describe lubricant action in sleeve bearings.

Describe how rolling elements help reduce frict ion.

Describe thrust loads and radial loads on shafts and bearings.

Subjects:

Oils and Greases

Frict ion

Oil

Grease

Solids, Additives, and Synthetics

Solid Lubricants

Addit ives and Synthetics

Bearings

Sleeve Bearings

Rolling Element Bearings

Course 27 of 245

Process Operations

EQUIPMENT LUBRICATION: Using Lubricants (IHRDC_OM_AOEUL)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with some of the methods and devices used to lubricate

equipment components such as bearings. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the use of hand

grease guns, pneumatic grease guns, grease cups, and centralized lubricators. They should also be able to explain the basic

operation of drip-feed oilers, oil baths, bott le oilers, ring oilers, and circulating oil systems. In addit ion, trainees should be able to

describe the use of contact seals, labyrinth seals, and mechanical seals, and to describe how valve packing is lubricated.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Lubricating with Grease

Describe two ways in which hand grease guns can be filled.

Explain why bearing housings should be checked for overheating before greasing.

Describe how to grease a bearing with a drain hole.

Describe a pneumatic grease gun.

Name two types of automatic grease lubricators.

Lubricating with Oil

List four items on a typical lubrication schedule or chart.

Name two ways that oil is dispensed from large drums.

Describe the operation of a drip-feed oiler.

Explain how an oil bath lubricates bearings and gears.

Name three ways to check oil level.

Explain how a bott le oiler maintains constant oil level.

Explain how a ring oiler works.

Describe a typical circulating oil system.

List three things to check in a circulating oil system.

Seals and Packing

State two reasons for using seals.

Define: contact seals, labyrinth seals, and mechanical seals.

Explain why a noticeable amount of leakage from a seal can be harmful.

Explain how valve packing prevents leakage.

Explain why grease guns and lubricators are used on valves.

Subjects:

Lubricating with Grease

Grease Guns

Automatic Grease Lubricators

Lubricating with Oil

Lubrication Schedules

Lubricating Devices

Circulating Oil Systems

Seals and Packing

Seals

Packing Lubrication

Course 28 of 245

Process Operations

FURNACES: Introduction (IHRDC_OM_AOFIN)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to the basic concepts associated with furnace operation. After

completing the unit, t rainees should be able to ident ify the major parts of a furnace and describe, in general terms, how a

furnace produces heat. They should also be able to explain how heat transfer occurs in a furnace, and how air, combustion

gases, and process fluid moves through different types of furnaces.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Fundamentals

Ident ify the major parts of a furnace.

Ident ify the major furnace systems.

Explain how a furnace produces heat.

Combustion

State the requirements for combust ion.

Ident ify three types of heat t ransfer and how they occur in a furnace.

Furnace Flow Paths

Define draft.

Describe the basic operating principles of natural draft furnaces, forced draft furnaces, and balanced draft

furnaces.

Explain how draft is controlled in a natural draft furnace.

Explain how process fluid circulates in a furnace.

Ident ify problems associated with improper process fluid flow.

Subjects:

Fundamentals

Components

Operation

Combustion

Fundamentals

Heat Transfer

Furnace Flow Paths

Draft

Process Fluid

Course 29 of 245

Process Operations

FURNACES: Operating Conditions (IHRDC_OM_AOFOC)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with general operator responsibilit ies associated with operating a

furnace. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to identify instrumentation used to monitor furnace temperature

control systems and process fluid control systems. They should also be able to identify condit ions that should be checked during

furnace operations, and explain how to detect and respond to abnormal condit ions.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:


Ident ify the instrumentation used to monitor furnace operating condit ions.

Describe the basic operating principles of furnace temperature control systems and process fluid control

systems.

Inspection and Adjustments

Ident ify condit ions that should be inspected during furnace operation.

Explain how to detect burner problems and make the appropriate burner adjustments.

Abnormal Conditions

Explain how to detect and respond to these furnace air flow problems: air leaks, insufficient air flow, and

afterburning.

Explain how to operate a furnace at reduced firing rates.

Explain how to detect and respond to freeze-ups in the fuel supply system and process fluid system.

Subjects:


Instrumentat ion and Process Variables

Control Systems

Inspection and Adjustments

Furnace Inspect ion

Burner Adjustments

Abnormal Conditions

Air Flow Problems

Fuel System Problems

Process Fluid Problems

Course 30 of 245

Process Operations

FURNACES: Startup and Shutdown (IHRDC_OM_AOFSS)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic procedures for start ing up and shutt ing down a

furnace. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe basic procedures for preparing a furnace for startup,

establishing the flow of process fluid, and lighting the burners. They should also be able to describe general considerat ions and

basic procedures associated with planned furnace shutdowns and unplanned, or emergency, furnace shutdowns.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Startup

Describe the major operator responsibilit ies involved in preparing furnace startup.

Explain how and why a furnace is purged.

Describe how to establish the flow of process fluid in a furnace.

Describe how to light gas burners, oil burners, and combinat ion burners.

Describe a typical startup procedure for natural draft and balanced draft furnaces.

Shutdown

Describe a typical planned shutdown procedure.

Ident ify furnace condit ions that may require an emergency, or unplanned shutdown.

Ident ify typical emergency shutdown systems and equipment.

Subjects:

Startup

Preparations

Establishing Flow

Lighting Burners

Shutdown

Planned Shutdown

Emergency Shutdown

Course 31 of 245

Process Operations

HEAT EXCHANGERS: Condensers and Reboilers (IHRDC_OM_AOHCR)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to the basic operation of condensers and reboilers. After

completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the function and operation of a typical condenser, basic procedures

for start ing up and shutt ing down a condenser, and some operator checks that are typically performed during condenser

operation. They should also be able to explain the operation of kett le-type and thermosiphon reboilers, and identify some

operator responsibilit ies associated with reboiler operation.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Condensers

Describe the function of condensers.

Describe the operation of a typical condenser.

Describe the startup procedure for a typical condenser.

Describe a general condenser shutdown procedure.

Describe some checks made during the operation of a condenser.

Reboilers

Describe how a kett le-type reboiler operates.

Describe how a thermosiphon reboiler operates.

Describe some operator responsibilit ies associated with reboiler operation.

Subjects:

Condensers

Condenser Operation

Condenser Startups and Shutdowns

Operator Checks

Reboilers

Kett le-Type Reboilers

Thermosiphon Reboilers

Operator Responsibilit ies

Course 32 of 245

Process Operations

HEAT EXCHANGERS: Cooling Towers (IHRDC_OM_AOHCT)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to the basic operation of a cooling water system and various

types of cooling towers. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to explain how cooling occurs in a cooling tower,

and describe the general design and operation of natural-draft and mechanical-draft cooling towers. They should also be able

to describe general procedures for shutt ing down and start ing up one cell of a mult icell cooling tower. In addit ion, trainees

should be able to describe operator checks that are typically performed on cooling towers, the effects of contaminants on

cooling water, and how chemicals can be safely added to cooling water systems.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Introduction

Describe the operation of a basic cooling water system.

Describe what occurs in the tower during the cooling process.

Describe the general operation of a natural-draft cooling tower and the two types of mechanical-draft cooling

towers: induced-draft towers and forced-draft towers.

Operation

Describe a typical shutdown and startup procedure for one cell of a mult icell cooling tower.

Describe typical operator checks for cooling towers.

Chemistry

Explain what suspended and dissolved solids are and how they affect a cooling water system.

Explain how problems caused by suspended and dissolved solids can be minimized.

Explain what dissolved gases and micro-organisms are, how they affect cooling water systems, and how their

effects can be minimized.

Describe ways chemicals are added to cooling water systems.

Describe precautions when working with hazardous chemicals.

Subjects:

Introduction

Cooling Systems

Cooling Tower Design

Operation

Cell Shutdown and Startup

Operator Checks

Chemistry

Cooling Water Contamination

Chemical Addit ion

Course 33 of 245

Process Operations

HEAT EXCHANGERS: Introduction (IHRDC_OM_AOHIN)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to basic principles of heat t ransfer and the components and

operating principles of shell and tube, and plate heat exchangers. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to explain

what heat is, and describe three ways that heat transfer can occur in a heat exchanger. They should also be able to describe

the basic operation and components of a shell and tube heat exchanger, and identify auxiliary equipment that is commonly

used with heat exchangers. Finally, t rainees should be able to explain how a plate heat exchanger operates and identify its

components.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Principles

Define heat.

Explain heat transfer by conduction, convection, and radiation.

Explain how heat is t ransferred in a typical heat exchanger.

Explain how various factors can affect heat transfer.

Shell and Tube

Describe the operation of typical shell and tube heat exchangers.

Explain how heat exchangers are used as coolers and heaters.

Describe the functions of the auxiliary components used with heat exchangers.

Describe the different flow paths fluids take in shell and tube heat exchangers.

Plate

Describe the basic operation of a plate heat exchanger.

Ident ify the components of a typical plate heat exchanger.

Subjects:

Principles

Heat and Heat Transfer

Heat Transfer Factors

Shell and Tube

Basic Operation

Auxiliary Equipment

Flow Paths

Plate

Operation

Components

Course 34 of 245

Process Operations

HEAT EXCHANGERS: Operation of Shell and Tube Types (IHRDC_OM_AOHOS)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the startup, operation, and shutdown of shell and tube heat

exchangers. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe general procedures for the startup and shutdown of

a shell and tube heat exchanger and ident ify some of the operator responsibilit ies associated with their operation. Trainees

should also be able to identify basic operating problems that may be associated with shell and tube heat exchangers, and

explain how they can be corrected.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Startup and Shutdown

Describe a general procedure for start ing up a shell and tube heat exchanger.

Describe a general procedure for shutt ing down a shell and tube heat exchanger.

Describe general operator responsibilit ies associated with the operation of a shell and tube heat exchanger.

Heat Exchanger Problems

Explain what fouling is and how it can be corrected.

Explain what leakage is and how it can be corrected.

Explain what air or vapor binding is and how it can be corrected.

Subjects:


Startup

Shutdown



Fouling

Tube Leaks

Air and Vapor Binding

Course 35 of 245

Process Operations

I & C: Automatic Process Control 1 (IHRDC_OM_AOIA1)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic concepts associated with automatic control of process

systems. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the functions of the four basic elements of an automatic

process control system and explain how a process disturbance can affect a process control system. They should also be able to

explain how feedback control and feedforward control can be used in process control systems. In addit ion, trainees should be

able to explain how resistance, capacitance, dead t ime, and lag t ime can affect a process control system.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Control Methods

State the function of a process control system.

Describe the functions of the four basic elements of an automated process control system.

Explain what a process disturbance is and how it can affect a process control system.

Describe feedback and feedforward control and explain how they can be used in a process control system.

Process Dynamics

Define resistance and capacitance.

Define dead t ime and lag t ime.

Explain how resistance, capacitance, dead t ime, and lag t ime can affect a process control system.

Subjects:

Control Methods

Automatic Control Systems

Feedback Control

Feedforward Control

Process Dynamics

Process Characterist ics

System Responses

Course 36 of 245

Process Operations

I & C: Automatic Process Control 2 (IHRDC_OM_AOIA2)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with control modes used with automatic process control systems.

After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe two-posit ion control, proport ional control, reset control, rate

control, and PID control and explain how each of these control modes works in a control system. They should also be able to

explain how proport ional band applies to a control system.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Two-Position and Proportional

Describe two-posit ion control and explain how it works in a control system.

Describe proport ional control and explain how it works in a control system.

Explain how proport ional band applies to a control system.

Reset, Rate, and PID

Describe reset control and explain how it works in a control system.

Describe rate control and explain how it works in a control system.

Describe PID control and explain how it works in a control system.

Subjects:

Two-Position and Proportional

Two-Posit ion Control

Proport ional Control

Proport ional Band

Reset, Rate, and PID

Reset Control

Rate Control

PID Control

Course 37 of 245

Process Operations

I & C: Measurement of Concentration (IHRDC_OM_AOIMC)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to some informat ion about analyt ical variables and to some

methods for measuring concentration in liquids and gases. After complet ing this unit, t rainees should be able to define five

analyt ical variables that are commonly measured in plants, and explain how and why analyt ical variables are measured. They

should also be able to describe the basic operat ion of several different types of analyzers that can be used to measure liquid

and gas concentrations.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Introduction to Analytical Measurement

State the general purpose of analyt ical measurements.

Define: concentration, density, clarity, humidity, moisture, and analyzer.

Liquid Concentration Analysis

Explain what pH measurements represent.

Explain how a pH scale is structured and how to interpret pH values.

Describe the basic operation of a typical pH analyzer and a typical electrical conductivity measuring device.

Gas Concentration Analysis

Describe the basic operation of a paramagnetic oxygen analyzer, a thermal conductivity gas analyzer, and a

chromatograph.

Subjects:

Introduction to Analytical Measurement

Analyt ical Variables

Measuring Analyt ical Variables

Liquid Concentration Analysis

What is Concentration?

pH Measurements

pH Analyzer Operation

Conductivity Measurements

Gas Concentration Analysis

Oxygen Concentration Measurement

Non-Oxygen Gas Concentration Measurement

Complex Gas Concentration Measurement

Course 38 of 245

Process Operations

I & C: Measurement of Density, Clarity and Moisture (IHRDC_OM_AOIDC)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to some devices that can be used to measure density, clarity, and

moisture. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to define various terms associated with density, clarity, and

moisture, and describe the basic operation of devices used to measure density, clarity, humidity, and moisture.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Density Measurement

Define density.

Explain the difference between density and specific gravity.

Describe the basic operation of a hydrometer.

Describe the use of a bubbler system to measure density.

Describe the operation of a radioactive density analyzer.

Clarity Measurement

Define clarity.

Describe the basic operation of a colorimeter, a turbidity meter, and an opacity meter.

Moisture Measurement

Define humidity and moisture.

Describe the basic operation of a sling psychrometer.

Describe the basic operation of a wet and dry bulb recording psychrometer.

Describe the basic operation of a hygrometer.

Describe the basic operation of an infrared moisture analyzer.

Subjects:

Density Measurement

Density and Specific Gravity

Hydrometers

Density Bubbler System

Radioact ive Density Analyzer

Clarity Measurement

Principles of Clarity Analysis

Colorimeter

Turbidity Meter

Opacity Meter

Moisture Measurement

Humidity and Moisture

Measuring Humidity

Measuring Moisture

Course 39 of 245

Process Operations

I & C: Measurement of Level and Flow (IHRDC_OM_AOIML)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to instruments that measure level and flow. After complet ing this

unit, t rainees should be able to explain what level is and describe the basic operation of various direct and indirect level

measurement devices. They should also be able to explain what fluid flow, flow rate, and total flow are and describe some

common examples of direct and indirect flow measurements.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Level Measurement

Define: level, cont inuous level measurement, and single-point level detection.

Describe basic operation of the following level measurement devices: plumb bob, gauge glass, float and tape,

and conductivity probes.

Describe the basic operation of these level measurement devices: pressure gauge, bubbler system, and D/P cell.

Flow Measurement

Define fluid flow, flow rate, and total flow.

List basic units of measurement for flow rate.

Describe common examples of direct flow measurement.

Describe common examples of indirect flow measurement.

Subjects:

Level Measurement

Principles of Level Measurement

Direct Level Measurement Devices

Indirect Level Measurement Devices

Flow Measurement

Principles of Flow Measurement

Direct Flow Measurement Devices

Indirect Flow Measurement Devices

Course 40 of 245

Process Operations

I & C: Measurement of Pressure and Temperature (IHRDC_OM_AOIMP)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to some of the fundamental aspects of process variable

measurement and to some of the basic instruments used for pressure and temperature measurement. After completing this

unit, t rainees should be able to describe the function of process instrumentat ion and how to obtain accurate readings from

instruments such as gauges, indicators, and recorders. They should also be able to explain what pressure and temperature are

and how they are expressed, and the operat ion of several pressure and temperature measuring devices.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Measuring Process Variables

State the general function of process instrumentation.

List four process variables monitored by process instrumentation.

Explain how parallax can affect an instrument reading.

Explain how to use a mult iplication factor when reading an instrument.

Describe how to read gauges, indicators, recorders, and digital meters.


Define pressure in terms of solids, liquids, and gases.

Describe three types of scales used to indicate pressure.

List basic units of measurement for pressure.

Describe three types of manometers.

Describe the basic operation of Bourdon tube, bellows, and diaphragm pressure elements.

Describe the basic operation of a pressure transmitter.


Explain the general relat ionship between heat and temperature.

List basic units of measurement for temperature.

Describe the basic operation of a fluid thermometer, bimetallic thermometer, thermocouple, and Resistance

Temperature Detector (RTD).

Subjects:

Measuring Process Variables

Process Variables and Inst rumentation

Reading Instruments


Pressure and Pressure Scales

Manometers

Pressure Elements and Transmitters


Temperature and Temperature Scales

Thermometers

Thermocouples and RTDs

Measurement of Level and Flow

Course 41 of 245

Process Operations

INDUSTRIAL MATH: Algebra (IHRDC_OM_AOIAL)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic concepts of algebra. After completing this unit,

t rainees should be able to define terms commonly associated with the use of algebra, isolate an unknown in an equat ion, and

use the processes of distribution and factoring. They should also be able to explain what rat ios and proport ions are, and the

difference between a direct proport ion and an inverse proport ion. Finally, t rainees should be able to use a calculator to solve

math problems.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Introduction to Algebra

State the difference between arithmetic and algebraic operations.

Define the terms: constant, unknown, variable, and equation.

Describe how equations are used to solve an arithmetic or algebraic problem.

Explain how to maintain an equation's balance.

Describe how the unknown in an equat ion can be isolated.

Describe the operation of dist ribut ion.

Describe the operation of factoring.

Ratios and Proportions

Explain what a ratio is and how ratios can be expressed.

Explain the difference between a direct proport ion and an inverse proport ion.

Calculators

Explain how to use a calculator.

Subjects:

Introduction to Algebra

Basic Principles

Isolating an Unknown

Distribution

Factoring

Ratios and Proportions

Calculators

Parts of a Calculator

Types of Logic

Course 42 of 245

Process Operations

INDUSTRIAL MATH: Basic Operation 1 (IHRDC_OM_AOIB1)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to the basic principles of addit ion, subtraction, mult iplication, and

division. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe how to add, subtract, and mult iply numbers in vert ical

columns, and how to do short and long division. They should also be able to explain powers of numbers and roots of numbers, as

well as shortcuts for mult iplying and dividing with mult iples of ten.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Addition and Subtraction

Define number line.

Describe the basic principles of addit ion and subtract ion.

Describe the base 10 number system.

Describe how to add and subtract numbers in vert ical columns.

Multiplication

Describe the basic principles of mult iplicat ion.

Explain how to use a mult iplication table.

Describe how to mult iply numbers in vert ical columns.

Describe a shortcut for mult iplying with mult iples of ten.

Explain powers of numbers.

Explain roots of numbers.

Division

Describe the basic principles of division.

Explain how short division is done.

Explain how long division is done.

Describe a shortcut for dividing with mult iples of ten.

Describe a shortcut for dividing with powers of numbers.

Subjects:

Addition and Subtraction

Number Line

Addit ion in Vert ical Columns

Subtraction in Vert ical Columns

Multiplication

Principles of Mult iplication

Mult iplication in Vert ical Columns

Powers and Roots

Division

Principles of Division

Long Division

Course 43 of 245

Process Operations

INDUSTRIAL MATH: Basic Operation 2 (IHRDC_OM_AOIB2)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic mathematical operations involving signed numbers,

averaging, rates, fract ions, decimals, and conversions. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to perform basic

mathematical operations with signed numbers, perform combined operations in the proper order, find the average of a group

of numbers, and calculate rates. They should also be able to add, subtract, mult iply, and divide with fract ions and decimals.

Finally, t rainees should be able to convert between fract ions, decimals, and percents; write numbers using scientific notation;

and use conversion tables.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Math Operations

Explain how to do basic math operat ions with signed numbers.

Define grouping symbols.

Explain the order in which combined operations are performed.

Explain how to calculate averages and rates.

Fractions

Explain what a fraction is, and how to add and subtract them.

Describe how to get common denominators, and what a lowest common denominator is.

Explain how to mult iply and divide fractions.

Explain how to express a fraction in simplest terms.

Explain what a mixed number is, and how to convert whole and mixed numbers to fractions.

Decimals and Conversions

Define decimal.

Describe basic math operat ions involving decimals.

Describe how to convert between fractions and decimals.

Describe how to write numbers using scientific notation.

Explain what percents are.

List how to convert between fractions, decimals, and percents.

Describe conversion tables: factor-type and equivalents-type.

Subjects:

Math Operations

Signed Numbers

Combined Operat ions

Averaging

Rates

Fractions

Add and Subtract

Mult iply and Divide

Mixed Numbers

Decimals and Conversions

Decimals

Number Conversions

Conversion Tables

Course 44 of 245

Process Operations

INDUSTRIAL MATH: Formulas, Graphs and Trends (IHRDC_OM_AOIFC)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic principles associated with using formulas, reading

and interpreting graphs, and detecting and analyzing trends. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to explain

what a formula is and how to use formulas to find areas, volumes, and volumetric flow rates. They should also be able to

describe how graphs and charts can provide information about process variables. In addit ion, trainees should be able to

describe basic procedures for detecting and analyzing trends.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Formulas

Define formula.

Describe how formulas can be used to find areas.

Describe how formulas can be used to find volumes.

Define flow rate.

Describe how to use volumetric flow rate formulas.

Graphs, Charts, and Trends

Describe how graphs can provide information about process variables.

Describe how charts can provide information about process variables.

Describe what a t rend is and explain the difference between expected trends and unexpected trends.

Describe some basic procedures for detecting a trend.

Describe some basic procedures for analyzing a trend.

Subjects:

Formulas

Area

Volume

Volumetric Flow Rate

Graphs, Charts, and Trends

Graphs

Charts

Trends

Course 45 of 245

Process Operations

ON-THE-JOB-TRAINING: Implementation and Evaluation (IHRDC_OM_AOOIE)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic concepts associated with on-the-job training (OJT) of

plant operators. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to identify qualit ies that an effective OJT instructor should

possess, and describe considerations associated with scheduling, planning for, and conduct ing OJT. They should also be able to

describe how the trainee, the instructor, and the overall OJT program can be evaluated.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Implementation

Ident ify qualit ies and characterist ics of an effective OJT inst ructor.

Ident ify some t raining strategies that an instructor can use during OJT.

Describe considerations involved in scheduling OJT.

Ident ify preparations that should be made before OJT is implemented.

Describe methods of conducting OJT.

Describe coaching skills that an instructor can use during OJT.

Evaluation

Describe how a trainee's performance can be evaluated.

Describe how on-the-job training instructors can evaluate themselves and the OJT program.

Review the main steps and principles of a typical OJT program.

Subjects:

Implementation

The OJT Instructor

Planning for OJT

OJT Methods

Evaluation

Trainee Evaluation

Program Evaluation

OJT Review

Course 46 of 245

Process Operations

ON-THE-JOB-TRAINING: Preparation (IHRDC_OM_AOOPR)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic concepts associated with on-the-job training (OJT) of

plant operators. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to compare OJT and classroom training, and describe the

basic steps in a formalized OJT program. They should also be able to explain how to determine specific training needs for a

trainee, and describe training materials that are commonly used for OJT.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

What is OJT?

Compare OJT and classroom training.

List advantages and disadvantages of OJT.

Ident ify the basic steps included in a formal OJT program.

Training Needs

Ident ify sources of information for analyzing an operator's job.

Explain what a job and task analysis is.

Describe how to profile the trainee and tailor training according to individual needs.

Describe how to determine training needs that are to be met specifically through OJT.

Training Materials

Explain what a performance object ive is.

Describe the use of an OJT t raining checklist .

Ident ify some t raining aids that can be used for OJT.

Subjects:

What is OJT?

OJT vs. Classroom Training

Pros and Cons

Basic Steps

Training Needs

Job and Task Analysis

Trainee Profile

Determining Training Methods

Training Materials

Object ives and Checklists

Training Aids

Course 47 of 245

Process Operations

OPERATOR RESPONSIBILITIES: Communication (IHRDC_OM_AOOCO)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic operator responsibilit ies associated with interpersonal

relationships and data collection and use. After complet ing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the components of a

basic communication model and an operator's responsibilit ies for communicating with other plant personnel, customers, and

members of the surrounding community. They should also be able to describe operator responsibilit ies associated with

collecting and using written data and part icipating in effective shift changes.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Interpersonal Responsibilities

Describe the components of a basic communicat ion model.

Describe basic operator interpersonal responsibilit ies with the company, peers, supervisory personnel, personnel

in other departments, and new operators.

Ident ify the four steps in an on-the-job training program for new operators.

Describe basic operator interpersonal responsibilit ies with customers and the community.

Data Collection and Use

Describe operator responsibilit ies associated with scheduled readings, statist ical process control (SPC) charts,

sample and laboratory analysis reports and logs.

Ident ify three characterist ics of an effective relief.

Subjects:

Interpersonal Responsibilities

The Communication Model

Inside the Plant

Outside the Plant

Data Collection and Use

Written Data

Oral Data

Course 48 of 245

Process Operations

OPERATOR RESPONSIBILITIES: Introduction (IHRDC_OM_AOOTC)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the general responsibilit ies of an operator in an indust rial

facility. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe operator responsibilit ies associated with process control,

safety, and communication. They should also be able to describe an outside operator's responsibilit ies during inspections and

routine operations, and the general responsibilit ies of a control room operator. They should also be able to describe the effects

that changing weather condit ions have on system operation.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Overview

Describe operator responsibilit ies associated with controlling a product ion process, safe operation of a facility,

and fire and accident prevention.

Explain why good communications are important in an industrial facility.

Ident ify the types of information that an oncoming operator should find out during a shift change.

Plant Operators

Describe an outside operator's responsibilit ies during inspections.

Describe an outside operator's responsibilit ies during routine operat ions.

Describe the general responsibilit ies of a control room operator.

Describe the effects of changing weather condit ions on system operat ion.

Subjects:

Overview

The Operator's Role

Plant Operators

Outside Operators

Control Room Operators

Course 49 of 245

Process Operations

OPERATOR RESPONSIBILITIES: Plant Production and Safety (IHRDC_OM_AOOPP)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with operator responsibilit ies during routine plant production

operations and for ensuring safety during all phases of plant operation. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to

describe operator responsibilit ies associated with routine production dut ies, prevent ive maintenance, and troubleshooting.

They should also be able to describe operator safety responsibilit ies for normal and abnormal operations and during scheduled

startups and shutdowns. In addit ion, they should be able to describe the operator's role with respect to permit procedures and

government regulations.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Production

Describe operator responsibilit ies associated with routine product ion duties, data interpretation, waste disposal,

and vapor emissions monitoring.

Describe operator responsibilit ies associated with prevent ive maintenance.

Describe operator responsibilit ies associated with troubleshoot ing.

Safety

Describe operator safety responsibilit ies associated with normal plant condit ions.

Describe operator safety responsibilit ies associated with abnormal plant condit ions.

Describe operator safety responsibilit ies associated with scheduled plant startups and shutdowns.

Describe the operator's role in lockout/tagout procedures and confined space procedures.

Explain, in simple terms, the purposes of the following regulations: HAZCOM, HAZWOPER, and SARA I I I .

Subjects:

Production

Operator Duties

Prevent ive Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Safety

Normal and Abnormal Condit ions

Startups and Shutdowns

Permits and Regulat ions

Course 50 of 245

Process Operations

OPERATOR RESPONSIBILITIES: Trends, Maintenance and Emergencies

(IHRDC_OM_AOOIM)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic operator responsibilit ies associated with trend analysis,

equipment maintenance, and emergency situat ions. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe ways to

detect and analyze trends, explain how work orders are used, and describe how to perform some minor maintenance tasks.

They should also be able to explain how operators can prepare for emergency situations and describe operator responsibilit ies

during emergencies.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Trends

Describe how trends can be detected.

Describe a four-step approach to analyzing trends.

Maintaining Equipment

Explain the purpose of work orders.

Describe how valve packing can be adjusted.

Describe how to safely reset a t ripped circuit breaker.

Describe how to change a strainer basket in a duplex strainer.

Emergency Situations

Explain how operators can prepare for emergency situat ions.

Describe general operator responsibilit ies during emergency situations.

Describe general operator responsibilit ies during fire emergency situations.

Subjects:

Trends

Trend Detection

Trend Analysis

Maintaining Equipment

Work Orders

Operator Tasks

Emergency Situations

Preparing for Emergencies

Responding to Emergencies

Course 51 of 245

Process Operations

PIPING AND AUXILIARIES: Basic Components and Functions (IHRDC_OM_AOPAB)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with some of the basic components commonly found in piping

systems. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to state the purpose of piping and pipe fitt ings, and be able to list

some common types of pipe fitt ings. They should also be able to describe devices that are used to accommodate the weight

and movement of piping, and to explain how insulation and heat tracing help to control temperatures in piping systems.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Pipes and Pipe Fittings

State the purpose of piping.

State the purpose of pipe fitt ings.

Describe the following types of pipe fitt ings: nipple, coupling, union, flange, elbow, tee, Y, bell reducer, bushing,

plug, and cap.

Pipe Weight and Movement

Explain why piping moves and why this movement needs to be controlled.

State the functions of pipe hangers and supports.

State the functions of expansion joints and expansion loops.

Insulation and Heat Tracing

Explain why piping is insulated.

Describe how steam and electrical heat tracing methods work.

Subjects:

Pipes and Pipe Fittings

Pipes and Connections

Types of Pipe Fit t ings

Pipe Weight and Movement

Pipe Supports

Expansion Devices

Insulation and Heat Tracing

Insulation

Heat Tracing

Course 52 of 245

Process Operations

PIPING AND AUXILIARIES: System Components and Operation (IHRDC_OM_AOPAS)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with some of the auxiliary components commonly found in piping

systems. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the function and operation of rupture discs, relief valves,

safety valves, and some common types of steam traps. They should also be able to describe basic procedures for draining liquid

systems and some typical operator checks for fluid systems.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Protective Devices

Describe the function and operation of a rupture disc.

Describe the function and operation of a relief valve.

Describe the function and operation of a safety valve.

Steam Traps

Describe the function of a steam trap.

Describe the operation of the following types of mechanical steam traps: float traps and inverted bucket traps.

Describe the operation of a thermostatic steam trap.

Describe some typical operator checks for steam traps.

System Operation

Describe basic procedures for draining liquid systems.

Describe basic procedures for filling liquid systems.

Describe typical operator checks for fluid systems.

Subjects:

Protective Devices

Rupture Discs

Relief Valves

Safety Valves

Steam Traps

Mechanical Steam Traps

Thermostatic Steam Traps

Operator Checks

System Operation

Draining Liquid Systems

Filling Liquid Systems

Operator Checks

Course 53 of 245

Process Operations

PLANT SCIENCE: Basic Electrical Circuits (IHRDC_OM_AOPBC)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic principles associated with the parts and operation of

electrical circuits. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to identify the parts of a basic circuit, describe the

relationships between voltage, current, and resistance in a circuit, explain how current flows through series circuits and parallel

circuits, describe the basic operation of transformers, fuses, circuit breakers, and solenoids, and explain how voltmeters and

ammeters can help operators detect electrical problems.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Basic Circuits

List the parts of a basic circuit .

Explain how Ohm's Law describes the relationships between current, voltage, and resistance in a circuit.

Explain the basic difference between series circuits and parallel circuits with respect to current flow.

Describe the basic operation of a transformer.

Explain the difference between a step-up transformer and a step-down transformer.

Protection and Indicators

State the general function of fuses and circuit breakers.

Describe the basic operation of a fuse.

Describe the basic operation of a circuit breaker.

Describe the basic operation of a solenoid.

Explain how voltmeters and ammeters can help personnel spot electrical problems before equipment damage

occurs.

Subjects:

Basic Circuits

Parts of a Circuit

Ohm's Law

Series and Parallel Circuits

Transformers

Protection and Indicators

Protective Equipment

Voltmeters and Ammeters

Course 54 of 245

Process Operations

PLANT SCIENCE: Basic Electrical Principles (IHRDC_OM_AOPBE)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic principles of electricity and the basic operation of

electric motors. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to explain what electricity is, and how it can be produced by

chemical action, heat, light, and magnetic effects. They should also be able to describe the basic operation of a DC motor, a

single-phase AC motor, and a three-phase AC motor.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Electricity

Define the following terms: electrical potential, current, and voltage.

Describe three sources of electrical potential: chemical act ion, heat, and light.

List the three elements necessary to create an electrical potent ial using magnetic effects.

Recognize and describe a sine wave.

Explain the basic differences between single-phase power and three-phase power.

Electric Motors

Describe basic motor action.

Describe the principle of operation of a DC motor.

Describe the principle of operation of an AC motor.

Subjects:

Electricity

What is Electricity?

Chemical Act ion, Heat, and Light

Electricity, Magnetism, and Alternating Current

Electric Motors

Basic Motor Operation

DC Motor Operation

AC Motor Operat ion

Course 55 of 245

Process Operations

PLANT SCIENCE: Basic Principles (IHRDC_OM_AOPBP)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to scientific principles associated with units of measurement and

with force and motion. After completing this unit , t rainees should be able to identify fundamental units of measurement for

length, t ime, and mass, and identify fundamental units of measurement for pressure, temperature, flow, and level. They should

also be able to explain the relationship between force and motion and describe the three laws of force and motion.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Unit of Measurement

Ident ify fundamental units of measurement for length, t ime, and mass.

Ident ify fundamental units of measurement for the process variables pressure, temperature, flow, and level.

Force and Motion

Explain the relationship between force and motion.

State the three laws of force and motion.

Define inert ia.

Define acceleration.

Subjects:

Units of Measurement

Fundamental Dimensions

Process Variable Measurements

Force and Motion

Introduction

Laws of Force and Motion

Course 56 of 245

Process Operations

PLANT SCIENCE: Fluid Systems (IHRDC_OM_AOPFS)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to the characterist ics, components, and operation of fluid

systems. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to explain, in general terms, what a plant system is, and what a fluid

is. They should also be able to explain the basic layout of a liquid system and describe energy conversions in a liquid system.

Trainees should also be able to describe the basic parts of a compressed air system and the basic operation of several gas and

vapor system devices.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Liquid Systems

Explain, in general terms, what a plant system is.

Explain what a fluid is.

Describe the effects of pressure changes on a static fluid.

Describe the four basic parts of a liquid system.

Describe the effects of energy conversions on a fluid under steady-state condit ions.

Describe some of the energy conversions that take place in liquid systems.

Gas and Vapor Systems

Describe the basic parts of a typical compressed air system.

Describe the operation of a jet pump.

Describe the operation of a nozzle.

Describe the operation of a condenser.

Subjects:

Liquid Systems

Systems and Fluids

Basic System Layout

Energy Conversions

Gas and Vapor Systems

Compressed Air System

Gas and Vapor System Devices

Course 57 of 245

Process Operations

PLANT SCIENCE: Forces and Machines (IHRDC_OM_AOPLM)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to scientific principles associated with applied forces and the

operation of basic machines. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to define work, power, and efficiency, and

explain the mechanical advantage of the inclined plane and the lever. They should also be able to explain the hydraulic

principle and the relationship between frict ion and the operation of machines.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Work, Power, and Efficiency

Define work and explain its relat ionship to energy.

Define power.

Explain why efficiency is important to plant operation.

Basic Machines

Define mechanical advantage.

Explain the mechanical advantage of the inclined plane.

Explain the mechanical advantage of the lever.

Explain the hydraulic principle and give examples of where it applies.

Discuss some of the effects of frict ion.

Subjects:

Work, Power, and Efficiency

Work

Power

Efficiency

Basic Machines

The Inclined Plane

The Lever

The Hydraulic Principle

Frict ion

Course 58 of 245

Process Operations

PLANT SCIENCE: Gases and Flowing Liquids (IHRDC_OM_AOPGF)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with general concepts associated with the propert ies of gases

and flowing liquids. After completing this unit , t rainees should be able to describe the major propert ies of gases and explain

how these propert ies are related. They should also be able to explain how pressure can be measured and the effects of flow,

velocity, and frict ion on the head pressure of a liquid.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Gas Properties

Describe the effects of temperature and pressure on gases.

Explain how Boyle's Law and Charles' Law relate to the pressure and volume of gases.

Explain how the General Gas Law relates to temperature, pressure and volume of a gas.

Measuring Pressure

Explain how atmospheric pressure can be measured.

Describe the effects of pressure on a manometer.

Explain how various scales can be used to measure pressure.

Flowing Liquids

Define: flow, flow rate, steady-state condit ions, stat ic condit ions, head, and head pressure.

Describe the effects of flow on pressure.

Describe the effects of velocity on pressure.

Describe the effects of frict ion on pressure.

Subjects:

Gas Properties

Temperature and Pressure Effects

Gas Laws

Measuring Pressure

Atmospheric Pressure

Manometers

Pressure Scales

Flowing Liquids

Flow and Flow Rate

Effects of Flowing Liquids

Course 59 of 245

Process Operations

PLANT SCIENCE: Heat (IHRDC_OM_AOPHE)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to some of the basic principles associated with heat and heat

t ransfer. After completing this unit , t rainees should be able to describe some of the effects of heat, the relationship between

temperature and thermal energy, and the Law of Energy Conservat ion. Trainees should also be able to define terms sensible

heat and latent heat and to describe the effects of pressure on the temperature at which a substance undergoes a phase

change.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

What Is Heat?

Describe some of the effects of heat.

Describe the relationship between temperature and thermal energy.

Describe the Law of Energy Conservation.

Phase Changes

Define sensible heat and latent heat.

Describe the effects of pressure on the temperature at which a substance undergoes a phase change.

Subjects:

What is Heat?

Effects of Heat

Temperature and Thermal Energy

The Law of Energy Conservation

Phase Changes

Sensible Heat and Latent Heat


Course 60 of 245

Process Operations

PLANT SCIENCE: Heat Transfer (IHRDC_OM_AOPHT)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to the fundamentals of heat transfer and the basic operation of a

typical heat exchanger. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the effects of a temperature difference

on heat t ransfer and the three modes of heat transfer. They should also be able to describe the basic operation of a shell and

tube heat exchanger and identify problems that can occur in a heat exchanger.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Heat Transfer Fundamentals

Describe the effects of temperature difference on heat t ransfer.

Define specific heat and give examples.

Recognize the formula for heat transfer.

Modes of Heat Transfer

List and describe the three modes of heat transfer.

Describe conduct ion heat transfer.

Describe natural convect ion and forced convection.

Describe how heat transfer takes place between two fluids separated by a solid boundary.

Describe what affects heat transfer between two fluids.

Describe radiation heat transfer.

Heat Exchanger Operation

Describe the general operation of a shell and tube heat exchanger.

Describe the operation of a lube oil cooler.

Describe problems that can occur in heat exchangers and explain how these problems can be minimized.

Describe the insulating effects of rust and scale buildup.

Subjects:

Heat Transfer Fundamentals

The Process of Heat Transfer

Specific Heat

Heat Transfer Formula

Modes of Heat Transfer

Conduction

Convection

Radiation

Heat Exchanger Operation

Shell and Tube Heat Exchangers


Course 61 of 245

Process Operations

PLANT SCIENCE: Process Dynamics and Measurement (IHRDC_OM_AOPPD)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the characterist ics of dynamic process operation and with

devices that are commonly used to measure process variables. After complet ing this unit, t rainees should be able to explain

what resistance and capacitance are in process systems and to describe factors that affect the response of a process system

to operating changes and process disturbances. Trainees should also be able to describe devices that can be used to measure

pressure, flow, level, and temperature.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Dynamic Operation

Describe resistance and capacitance in process systems.

Describe and give examples of system characterist ics between periods of steady-state condit ions when

changes occur.

Process Variable Measurement

Describe ways that pressure can be measured.

Describe ways that flow can be measured.

Describe ways that level can be measured.

Describe ways that temperature can be measured.

Subjects:

Dynamic Operation

Resistance and Capacitance

System Response to Changes

Process Variable Measurement

Pressure Measurement Devices

Flow Measurement Devices

Level Measurement Devices

Temperature Measurement Devices

Course 62 of 245

Process Operations

PLANT SCIENCE: Solids and Liquids (IHRDC_OM_AOPSL)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic scientific principles that relate to solids and liquids.

After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the general molecular structure of solids, liquids, and gases. They

should also be able to describe specific propert ies attributed to solids and liquids.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Forms of Matter

Ident ify the three forms of matter and explain how they are structured.

Give a general descript ion of the molecular structure and the characterist ics of solids, liquids, and gases.

Compare and contrast the molecular structures of different solids.

Explain why liquids can flow.

Solids

Define mass, density, and stress.

Ident ify five types of stress and their effects on solids.

Define elast icity and temperature.

Describe the effects of temperature on solids.

Liquids

Describe how liquids seek their own level.

Define viscosity.

Describe the property of wett ing and explain why it occurs.

Describe buoyancy and explain why it occurs.

Describe specific gravity and how it relates to density.

Describe the effects of temperature and pressure on liquids.

Subjects:

Forms of Matter

Solids

Mass and Density

Stress and Elast icity

Temperature Effects

Liquids

Propert ies of Liquids

Temperature and Pressure Effects

Course 63 of 245

Process Operations

POWER PLANT BOILERS: Abnormal Conditions and Emergencies

(IHRDC_OM_AOBAC)

Overview:

This is an interactive training module designed to familiarize trainees with some abnormal operating condit ions that a boiler

operator may encounter on the job. Specific attention is directed to typical procedures used by plants to handle these

situations and to the methods and means available to the operator to anticipate problems and to minimize the chances of

their occurring.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Common Problems

Describe typical procedures for dealing with the loss of certain boiler auxiliaries.

Describe basic procedures for dealing with leaks that occur inside and outside a boiler.

Describe how safety valves are used to protect boilers against overpressure.

Describe what boiler operators should do to deal with leaking safety valves.

Describe basic procedures for dealing with fires in coal yards, bunkers, feeders, pulverizers, and air preheaters.

Explain how equipment fires start and identify actions that operators should avoid when equipment fires occur.

Boiler Explosions

Describe some of the basic causes of boiler explosions.

Explain what operators can do to help prevent boiler explosions.

Describe some situations that can cause a loss of all boiler flame.

Describe some basic procedures for preventing a loss of all boiler flame.

Subjects:

Common Problems

Loss of Auxiliaries

Leaks

Overpressure

Equipment Fires

Boiler Explosions

Causes of Explosions

Loss of Flame

Course 64 of 245

Process Operations

POWER PLANT BOILERS: Combustion and Operation (IHRDC_OM_AOBCO)

Overview:

The requirements for combustion in a boiler are identified and described. This unit traces the air and gas flow path through a

typical boiler and describes the functions of the components in the flow path. Principles of boiler operation from an operator's

point of view are identified and described.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Combustion

List elements needed for combustion in a boiler.

Describe the parts and function of a typical burner in a boiler furnace and howthe burner helps to satisfy the

elements of combust ion in a boiler.

Describe the fuel system for a typical coal-fired boiler.

Describe a typical burner for an oil-fired boiler.

Describe a typical burner for a gas-fired boiler.

Define the following terms: fuel/air rat io, excess air, and excess oxygen.

Describe operator responsibilit ies associated with maintaining the correct fuel/air rat io.

Air and Gas

Trace the air and gas flow path through a boiler.

Explain how hot combustion gases are used to increase boiler efficiency.

Describe the basic operation of two types of air preheaters.

Describe some of the harmful effects that can be caused by combustion gas by-products.

Describe equipment commonly used to remove part iculates and harmful gases from combustion gases.

Boiler Operation

Describe the location and purpose of boiler vents.

Describe the location and purpose of boiler drains.

Explain what blowdown valves are.

State the purpose of soot blowing.

Describe the operation of a typical soot blower.

Subjects:

Combustion

Elements of Combustion

Boiler Fuel Systems

Fuel/Air Rat io

Air and Gas

Air and Gas Flow Path

Pollut ion Controls

Boiler Operation

Vents, Drains, and Blowdown Valves

Soot blowing

Course 65 of 245

Process Operations

POWER PLANT BOILERS: Normal Operations (IHRDC_OM_AOBNO)

Overview:

This is an interactive module designed to present an overview of the basic procedures for normal operations of a drum-type

boiler. Trainees will learn what is meant by steady state condit ions and efficiency, the basic instrumentation used to monitor the

operation of a boiler, how steam temperature is controlled, and the basic procedures for ash handling.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Overview

Explain what steady state condit ions for a boiler are.

Describe some of the systems and components that must be monitored during boiler operation under steady

state condit ions.

Describe typical operator concerns associated with the energy losses that occur during normal operation of a

boiler.

Monitoring and Controlling Operations

Describe basic operator responsibilit ies for monitoring a boiler's steam/water circuit .

Describe typical control room instrumentation that is used to monitor a boiler's steam/water circuit.

Describe basic operator responsibilit ies for monitoring combust ion and the air/gas circuit for a boiler.

Describe typical control room instrumentation that is used to monitor combustion and the air/gas circuit for a

boiler.

Describe some of the basic systems and components checks that operators perform during normal boiler

operation.

Describe five methods that are used in power plants for controlling steam temperature.

Ash Handling

Describe the basic procedures for removing bottom ash.

Describe the basic procedures for removing fly ash.

Subjects:

Overview

Steady State Condit ions

Energy Losses

Monitoring and Controlling Operations

The Steam/Water Circuit

The Air/Gas Circuit

Steam Temperature

Ash Handling

Bottom Ash

Fly Ash

Course 66 of 245

Process Operations

POWER PLANT BOILERS: Startup and Shutdown (IHRDC_OM_AOBSS)

Overview:

This is an interactive training module designed to familiarize trainees with basic techniques for start ing up and shutt ing down

drum-type boilers. After completing this module, the t rainees should be able to describe basic procedures for performing a cold

startup of a drum-type boiler, light ing off the furnace, warming up the boiler and establishing the boiler flame. They should also

be able to describe basic procedures for shutt ing down a typical drum-type boiler. In addit ion, the trainees should be able to

compare and contrast the startup and shutdown of a drum-type boiler with the startup and shutdown of a once-through

boiler.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Basic Procedures

Describe basic checks that boiler operators make during an init ial pre-startup walkthrough.

Describe typical procedures for a cold startup of a controlled circulation, drumtype boiler.

Describe basic preparat ions for lighting off the furnace, how light-off is init iated, and how a typical boiler is

warmed up.

Describe how pulverizers are started up and controlled.

Describe how the main coal burners are ignited and controlled.

Describe the basic procedures for shutt ing down a typical drum-type boiler.

Once-Through Boilers

Describe the basic differences and similarit ies between the operation of a oncethrough boiler and a drum-type

boiler.

Describe how a steam/water separation system is used during the startup and the shutdown of a once-through

boiler.

Subjects:

Basic Procedures

Cold Startup

Light-off and Warmup

Establishing a Boiler Flame

Shutdown


Basic Operations

Steam/Water Separation

Course 67 of 245

Process Operations

POWER PLANT BOILERS: Water and Steam (IHRDC_OM_AOBWS)

Overview:

This unit begins by explaining why water circulates in a boiler, and describes the flow path of water through a typical

drum-type boiler. Differences between natural circulation and controlled circulation are explained, and the components and

functions of a typical boiler drum are examined. The unit goes on to explain how the components found in a steam flow path

affect the production and use of steam. The unit concludes with a look at what the crit ical point is, and why some boilers

operate at or above crit ical condit ions. Also covered is the operator's role in maintaining the correct steam pressure in

drum-type and once-through boilers.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Water

State the purposes of water circulation in a boiler.

Describe the water flow path through a typical drum-type boiler.

Describe the basic principle of natural circulation and two factors that can affect it .

Describe the differences between natural and controlled circulations.

Describe the functions and components of a typical boiler drum.

Steam

Define: boiling, saturation, temperature, and superheat.

Describe the steam flow path from the boiler to the condenser in a typical generating unit.

State the function of a superheater and describe how superheaters can be classified.

State the function of a desuperheater.

State the function of a reheater and describe how reheaters can be classified.

Describe the basic operation of a condenser.

Supercritical Boilers

Define crit ical point .

Explain why some boilers operate above the crit ical point.

Describe the flow path of water in a once-through boiler.

State the advantages and disadvantages of a once-through supercrit ical boiler.

Explain how steam pressure is maintained in drum-type and once-through boilers.

Subjects:

Water

Water Flow Path

Circulation

Boiler Drum

Steam

Introduction

Steam Flow Path

Supercritical Boilers

Crit ical Condit ions


Boiler Operations

Course 68 of 245

Process Operations

POWER PLANT OPERATION: Basic Principles (IHRDC_OM_AOOBP)

Overview:

At the complet ion of this inst ructional unit, t rainees will be able to describe how plant systems respond to changes in load on a

unit, and list operator responsibilit ies during load changes. In addit ion, trainees will be able to describe the functions of bearings,

operation of sliding surface bearings and rolling contact bearings, operator responsibilit ies associated with bearings, and how

bearings are lubricated.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Load Changes

Describe how a plant responds to changes in load on a unit.

Describe the basic responsibilit ies of an operator during a load change.

Bearings and Lubrication

Describe two major types of bearings.

Describe the basic functions of all bearings.

Describe the operation of a typical sliding surface bearing.

Describe the operation of rolling contact bearings.

Describe some of the basic bearing checks operators perform.

Describe how grease is used as a lubricant.

Describe how oil is used as a lubricant.

Subjects:

Load Changes

Plant Responses

Operator Responses

Bearings and Lubrication

Bearings

Lubrication

Course 69 of 245

Process Operations

POWER PLANT OPERATION: Safety and Pollution Control (IHRDC_OM_AOOSP)

Overview:

Trainees are introduced to plant safety concepts through a discussion of how a combination of plant procedures and common

sense are used to protect operators on the job. They are also introduced to potential pollut ion problems in a power plant and

the equipment used to deal with these potential problems.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Plant Safety

Describe some of the basic protect ive equipment that operators commonly use.

Describe how a tagging system is used to provide protection to personnel working on plant equipment.

Pollution Control

Ident ify a source of air pollut ion in a power plant.

Describe some of the techniques used to control air pollut ion released by a plant.

Ident ify a source of thermal pollut ion in a power plant.

Describe operator responsibilit ies for monitoring thermal pollut ion leaving the plant.

Ident ify a major source of water pollut ion in a power plant.

Describe operator responsibilit ies for monitoring wastewater leaving the plant.

Describe some of the equipment that can be used to minimize the effects of noise pollut ion.

Subjects:

Plant Safety

Personal Protection

Plant Safety

Pollution Control

Air Pollut ion

Thermal Pollut ion

Water Pollut ion

Noise Pollut ion

Course 70 of 245

Process Operations

POWER PLANT TURBINES: Bearings and Operation (IHRDC_OM_AOTBO)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic principles associated with turbine shaft bearing

lubrication, turbine speed control, and turbine operation. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to identify and

describe the functions of the components of a typical turbine lube oil system. They should also be able to describe the basic

components and operat ion of a typical turbine speed control system.

In addit ion, they should be able to describe operator responsibilit ies associated with turbine startup, operation, and shutdown.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Bearing Lubrication

State the functions of the following basic components typically found in a turbine lube oil system: reservoir, main

lube oil pump, booster pump, and lube oil coolers.

State the functions of the following addit ional components typically found in a turbine lube oil system: AC

auxiliary pump, DC emergency pump, AC turning gear pump, and vapor extractor.

Explain why it is important to make sure that the controllers for the standby oil pumps are in the standby or

automatic posit ions.

Describe a situation in which increase in bearing oil temperature could indicate a problem.

Describe a situation in which an increase in bearing oil temperature is considered normal.

Turbine Control

Ident ify two major systems commonly used to control turbine speed.

Describe the basic components of a turbine speed control system.

Describe how turbine speed is controlled by a mechanical-hydraulic control system with a flyweight governor.

Describe what happens when a turbine trip occurs.

Turbine Operation

Explain why the warmup period is important.

Explain why it is important to prevent water buildup and describe how this is done.

Describe the steps involved in a typical shutdown procedure.

Subjects:

Bearing Lubrication

Basic Components

Addit ional Components


Turbine Control

Basics

Example

Turbine Operation

Startup

Normal Operation and Shutdown

Course 71 of 245

Process Operations

POWER PLANT TURBINES: Boiler and Turbine Protection (IHRDC_OM_AOPPB)

Overview:

This unit describes the basic operat ion and startup requirements of a balanced-draft, controlled circulation, drum-type boiler. It

also identifies common problems that affect the combustion side of a boiler and the water and steam side of a boiler, and it

describes automatic controls and operator actions that address those problems. The unit goes on to describe common turbine

problems, including temperature- and pressure-related problems, overspeed, vibration and eccentricity. Automatic protective

devices and operator actions that address those problems are also described.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Boilers

Describe the basic operation of a balanced-draft, controlled circulation, drumtype boiler.

Ident ify and describe the basic requirements for start ing up a boiler.

Ident ify common boiler combustion problems.

Describe automatic controls that regulate the combustion process.

Describe actions that operators can take to address combustion problems.

Ident ify automatic protect ive devices associated with the combust ion process.

Ident ify common problems that occur on the water and steam side of a boiler.

Describe actions that operators can take to address water and steam problems.

Ident ify automatic protect ive devices associated with the boiler steam/water cycle.

Turbines

Ident ify common temperature-related and pressure-related turbine problems.

Describe actions that operators can take to address turbine problems related to temperature and pressure.

Ident ify automatic protect ive devices associated with temperature and pressure problems.

Describe turbine problems associated with overspeed, vibration and eccentricity.

Describe actions that operators can take to address overspeed, vibration and eccentricity problems.

Ident ify automatic protect ive devices associated with overspeed, vibration and eccentricity problems.

Subjects:

Boilers

Basic Operation and Startup

Combustion Problems

Water and Steam Problems

Turbines

Temperature and Pressure Problems

Overspeed, Vibration and Eccentricity

Course 72 of 245

Process Operations

POWER PLANT TURBINES: Condensate and Feedwater Systems (IHRDC_OM_AOCFS)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic layout of a typical condensate and feedwater

system and the basic operation of the system's individual components. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to

identify the components in a condensate and feedwater system and describe the basic operation of each component. They

should also be able to explain how the system normally operates, describe operator responsibilit ies associated with normal

operation, and identify some common operat ing problems.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

System Overview

Describe the basic layout of a typical condensate and feedwater system.

Describe the basic function and operation of the individual components in a typical condensate and

feedwater system.

System Operation

Describe the normal operation of a typical condensate and feedwater system and identify typical operator

responsibilit ies that are associated with normal operation.

Ident ify and describe some common operating problems that may occur in a condensate and feedwater

system and describe basic steps for dealing with these problems.

Subjects:

System Overview

System Layout

System Components

System Operation

Normal Operation

Operating Problems

Course 73 of 245

Process Operations

POWER PLANT TURBINES: Condenser and Circulating Water (IHRDC_OM_AOPPC)

Overview:

This training unit provides basic information about the design and function of power plant condensers and circulating water

systems. It describes the operation of a single-pass condenser and a two-pass condenser, as well as various air removal system

components. The unit also covers the basic operation of a once-through circulating water system, and it describes how

mechanical draft cooling towers and natural draft cooling towers work.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Condensers

Describe the basic function of a condenser.

Describe the operation of a single-pass condenser and a two-pass condenser.

Describe the basic function of an air removal system.

Describe the operation of a reciprocating vacuum pump, a rotary vacuum pump and an air ejector.

Ident ify and describe routine checks that operators should perform on a condenser.

Circulating Water Systems

Describe the basic operation of a once-through circulat ing water system.

Describe how mechanical draft cooling towers and natural draft cooling towers function.

Subjects:

Condensers

Function and Design

Air Removal Systems

Condenser Operation

Circulating Water Systems

Once-Through Systems

Cooling Towers

Course 74 of 245

Process Operations

POWER PLANT TURBINES: Fundamentals (IHRDC_OM_AOPPF)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with various types of hazards that may exist in a power plant.

After completing this unit, the trainees should be able to identify common types of mechanical and electrical hazards,

temperature and pressure hazards, and fire and chemical hazards. They should also be able to describe devices and

techniques that can be used to prevent or minimize these hazards.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Mechanical & Electrical

Describe condit ions that commonly lead to material and equipment failure.

Ident ify ways to detect equipment failure.

Describe common electrical hazards in a power plant.

Ident ify devices used to prevent or minimize electrical hazards.

Temperature & Pressure

Ident ify devices used to prevent abnormal temperature condit ions.

Ident ify devices used to prevent abnormal pressure condit ions.

Chemical & Fire

Ident ify common chemical hazards in a power plant

Ident ify ways to prevent chemical hazards.

Describe fire protection systems commonly found in power plants.

Subjects:

Mechanical & Electrical

Equipment Failure

Electrical Hazards

Temperature & Pressure

Abnormal Temperature

Abnormal Pressure

Chemical & Fire

Chemical Hazards

Fire Protection

Course 75 of 245

Process Operations

POWER PLANT TURBINES: Integrated Systems (IHRDC_OM_AOPPI)

Overview:

In this unit , t rainees will learn what logic diagrams are and how they are used to represent the functions carried out by plant

protection equipment. Common types of logic gates are identified and described, and interlock logic is examined. The unit also

describes how logic diagrams can be used to represent condit ions that cause boiler trips, turbine trips and generator trips, and

it explains how the protection systems for boilers, turbines and generators are interrelated.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Logic Diagrams

Describe what logic diagrams are and how they can be used to represent functions carried out by plant

protection equipment.

Describe the functions of AND gates, OR gates, NOT gates and t ime delay (TD) gates in logic circuits.

Describe what interlocks are and how the actions of interlocks associated with boiler operations are

represented in logic diagrams.

Trip Logic

Describe how logic diagrams can be used to represent condit ions that cause equipment trips.

Ident ify condit ions that can cause a boiler trip and describe how a logic diagram can be used to illustrate

those condit ions.

Ident ify condit ions that can cause a turbine trip and describe how a logic diagram can be used to illustrate

those condit ions.

Ident ify condit ions that can cause a generator trip and describe how a logic diagram can be used to illustrate

those condit ions.

Describe how the protection systems for boilers, turbines and generators are interrelated.

Subjects:

Logic Diagrams

Overview

Logic Gates

Interlock Logic

Trip Logic

Boiler Trips

Turbine Trips

Generator Trips

Integrated Protection

Course 76 of 245

Process Operations

POWER PLANT TURBINES: Power and Energy (IHRDC_OM_AOPPE)

Overview:

This unit will introduce trainees to basic components of a power system and describe how these components are arranged to

deliver power to customers. It will also examine the energy conversions that are necessary to produce power in a power plant

and discuss basic principles of how an operator responds to emergency condit ions.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

The Power System

State the function of a generator.

Define the following terms: unit, watt, and megawatt.

Describe how power is typically dist ributed to customers.

Define the following terms: switchyard, substations, and power system.

Define demand.

Describe the function of the load dispatcher.

Explain why there are variat ions in demand.

Explain why supply must always equal demand.

Energy Conversion

Explain how energy is converted to produce electricity in fossil fuel plants.

State some of the advantages and disadvantages of fossil fuel plants.

Explain how energy is converted to produce electricity in gas turbine plants.

State some of the advantages and disadvantages of gas turbine plants.

Explain how energy is converted to produce electricity in nuclear plants.

State some of the advantages and disadvantages of nuclear plants.

Subjects:

The Power System

Generat ing Power

Distributing Power

Demand

Energy Conversion

Fossil Fuel Plants

Gas Turbine Plants

Hydroelectric Plants

Nuclear Power Plants

Course 77 of 245

Process Operations

POWER PLANT TURBINES: Power Generation (IHRDC_OM_AOPGE)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic operat ion of an AC generator and auxiliary systems

and components associated with it . After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to explain how voltage is induced in an

AC generator, how an AC generator produces current, and how an AC generator can be cooled.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Generating Electricity

Name the basic parts of a generator and describe the function of each in inducing voltage.

Describe the primary difference between a single-phase generator and a threephase generator.

Name two factors that determine the frequency of the current produced by a generator.

Explain why the frequency of a generator's output must be controlled.

Explain the function of the exciter in a generator.

Name the parts of a DC exciter and the parts of a brushless exciter and describe their functions.

Generator Cooling

Explain why a large generator is typically cooled with hydrogen instead of air.

Explain the function of an oil seal in a hydrogen-cooled generator.

Describe how hydrogen is supplied to a generator cooling system.

Explain the purpose of each of the following components in a hydrogen generator cooling system: purity

analyzer, core monitor, hydrogen dryer, liquid detector.

Explain how carbon dioxide and air are used to purge a generator cooling system.

Describe the flow of water in a typical stator cooling system.

Describe the function of each of the following components in a typical stator cooling system: temperature

control valve, pressure control valve, demineralizer.

Subjects:

Generating Electricity

Principles of Induction

Output Frequency

Generator Excitation

Generator Cooling

Hydrogen Cooling

Cooling Auxiliary Systems

Gas Purging

Stator Cooling System

Course 78 of 245

Process Operations

POWER PLANT TURBINES: Steam Cycle (IHRDC_OM_AOPSC)

Overview:

In this unit , main components of the steam cycle in a fossil fuel fired power plant will be identified. The unit will also trace the

order in which steam and water flow through these components in order to show how the components are arranged.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Components

Describe how a boiler works.

Describe how fuel and air are supplied to a boiler.

Describe how a turbine works.

Describe how a condenser works.

Describe the function of the condensate-feedwater system.

Describe the function of the circulating water system.

Describe the function of the makeup water system.

Flow

Describe how steam and water move through the steam cycle.

Describe how the flow of steam and the flow of water are controlled.

Describe how the flow of fuel to the boiler can be controlled.

Describe three general actions that must be taken during any emergency.

Describe the emergency act ions that must be taken if there is a loss of flame in the boiler.

Subjects:

Components

Boilers

Turbines

Condensers

Flow

Movement of Steam and Water

Steam and Water Flow Control

Fuel Flow Control

Emergencies

Course 79 of 245

Process Operations

POWER PLANT TURBINES: Steam Flow (IHRDC_OM_AOTSF)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic principles associated with the construction and

operation of steam turbines. After completing this unit , t rainees should be able to state the functions of the main parts of a

typical turbine and describe how steam causes impulse blades and reaction blades to turn a turbine's wheels. They should also

be able to describe the purpose and operat ion of a gland steam seal system, a gland steam seal exhaust system, a carbon

seal, and a water seal.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Construction and Rotation

State the functions of the following turbine parts: wheels, blades, diaphragms, steam chest , nozzle block, and

rotor.

State the functions of stop valves and control valves.

Describe how steam causes impulse blades to turn a turbine's wheels.

Describe how steam causes reaction blades to turn a turbine's wheels.

State the functions of reheat stop valves and intercept valves.

Define a turbine trip and describe how it protects a turbine.

Sealing Systems

Describe the purpose for and operat ion of a gland steam seal system.

Describe the purpose for and operat ion of a gland steam seal exhaust system.

Describe the operation of a carbon seal.

Describe the operation of a water seal.

Subjects:

Construction and Rotation

Construction

Rotation

Sealing Systems

Steam Seals

Carbon and Water Seals

Course 80 of 245

Process Operations

POWER PLANT TURBINES: Steam Systems (IHRDC_OM_AOPPS)

Overview:

This is an interactive training module designed to present basic information on the steam/water cycle in a power plant. Specific

attention is directed to the main steam system, the reheat steam system, the extract ion steam system and the auxiliary steam

system. Basic procedures for a plant startup and several operator checks on steam systems and components are also included.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Systems and Components

Describe how steam flows through the various steam systems that make up a typical power plant's

steam/water cycle.

Ident ify the components of a main steam system and describe their functions.

Ident ify the components of a reheat steam system and describe their functions.

Explain why steam piping contains expansion loops and bends.

Ident ify the components of an extraction steam system and describe their functions.

Explain how an extraction steam system improves plant efficiency.

Describe typical uses of auxiliary steam in a power plant.

Ident ify some typical components of an auxiliary steam system and describe their functions.

Describe how the components that control the pressure and temperature of auxiliary steam operate.

Systems Operations

Describe some basic procedures for removing accumulated condensate and gradually warming up steam

systems components during a plant startup.

Describe some basic checks that operators should make to ensure that steam systems and their components

are operating properly.

Subjects:

Systems and Components

Steam/Water Cycle

Main Steam System

Reheat Steam System

Extraction Steam System

Auxiliary Steam System

Systems Operations

Plant Startup

Systems Inspections

Course 81 of 245

Process Operations

PROCESS SAMPLING: Obtaining Samples (IHRDC_OM_AOPOS)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic concepts associated with obtaining samples of

process materials. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe hazards associated with sampling and the

precautions that may be required. They should also be able to take contaminant-free representative samples of process liquids,

solids, and gases.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Introduction

Explain why samples are taken in process systems.

Describe some hazards associated with sampling materials.

Describe protective clothing that should be worn when taking samples of hazardous and non-hazardous

materials.

Describe two types of respirators worn when sampling involves materials that produce harmful dust part icles or

toxic fumes.

Liquids

Describe how to keep liquid samples from being contaminated when they are taken.

Explain how to make sure that a representative sample of a liquid is obtained.

Describe information typically included on a sample label.

Solids and Gases

Describe how to obtain contaminant-free representat ive samples of process solids.

Describe how to obtain contaminant-free representat ive samples of process gases.

Subjects:

Introduction

Basic Principles

Protective Clothing

Respirators

Liquids

Preparing to Sample

Obtaining a Sample

Labeling a Sample

Solids and Gases

Sampling Solids

Sampling Gases

Course 82 of 245

Process Operations

PROCESS SAMPLING: Testing Samples (IHRDC_OM_AOPTS)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic procedures for performing tests on samples of process

materials and products. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe how to perform a pH test , a percent

solids test , a specific gravity test , and a t it rat ion. They should also be able to describe the operat ion of a gas chromatograph

and how it is used to perform tests on complex gas mixtures or solut ions.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

pH and Percent Solids

Describe how a pH test is performed.

Describe how a percent solids test is performed.

Specific Gravities and Titrations

Describe how a specific gravity test is performed.

Describe how a t it rat ion is performed.

Gas Chromatographs

Describe how a gas chromatograph operates.

Describe how to perform a gas chromatograph test.

Subjects:

pH and Percent Solids

pH Tests

Percent Solids Tests

Specific Gravities and Titrations

Specific Gravity Tests

Tit rat ions

Gas Chromatographs

Operation

Performing a Test

Course 83 of 245

Process Operations

PUMPS: Basic Types and Operation (IHRDC_OM_AOPBT)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to the basic components and operation of posit ive displacement

pumps and centrifugal pumps. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to explain how pumps can be identified,

identify the basic components of a pump, and describe the functions of various types of pump auxiliary equipment and

systems. They should also be able to describe the general operation of reciprocating and rotary posit ive displacement pumps,

and single-stage and mult istage centrifugal pumps.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Pump Fundamentals

Given a simple system diagram, locate each pump, tell what it does, and ident ify it by one or more names.

Ident ify the casing, the inlet , and the out let on a pump.

Name two general categories of pumps.

Explain the functions of the following types of pump auxiliary equipment and systems drivers, couplings, strainers,

lubricating systems, packing, and mechanical seals.

Positive Displacement Pumps

Describe the general operation of a reciprocating posit ive displacement pump.

Describe the general operation of a rotary posit ive displacement pump.

Centrifugal Pumps

Describe the general operation of a single-stage centrifugal pump.

Describe the general operation of a mult istage centrifugal pump.

Subjects:

Pump Fundamentals

Pump Identification

Pump Components

Auxiliary Equipment

Positive Displacement Pumps

Reciprocating Pumps

Rotary Pumps

Centrifugal Pumps

Single-Stage Pumps

Mult istage Pumps

Course 84 of 245

Process Operations

PUMPS: Fundamentals of Centrifugal Types (IHRDC_OM_AOPFC)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to the fundamental operating principles of single-stage and

mult istage centrifugal pumps. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the general operating principles of

a centrifugal pump. Specifically, they should be able to describe the differences between radial, axial, and mixed flow pumps,

and describe the basic operation of a vert ically-mounted and mult istage pump. Trainees should also be able to describe the

purpose and the basic operation of a mechanical seal flush system.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Centrifugal Pump Operation

Describe general operating principles of a centrifugal pump.

Explain differences between radial flow, axial flow, and mixed flow pumps.

Explain the principles of operation of a vert ically mounted centrifugal pump.

Describe the basic operation of a typical mult istage centrifugal pump.

Describe two ways that mult istage centrifugal pumps can minimize axial thrust.

Centrifugal Pump Components

Explain the differences between an open impeller, a closed impeller, and a semi-open impeller.

Compare and contrast a single-suction impeller and a double-suction impeller.

Describe the general design and function of a diffuser.

Describe the purpose and basic operation of a mechanical seal flush system.

Subjects:

Centrifugal Pump Operation

Principles of Operat ion

Vert ical Pumps

Mult istage Pumps

Centrifugal Pump Components

Impellers and Diffusers

Mechanical Seal Systems

Course 85 of 245

Process Operations

PUMPS: Operation of Centrifugal Types (IHRDC_OM_AOPOC)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic operat ion of centrifugal pumps. After complet ing

this unit, t rainees should be able to describe techniques for priming a centrifugal pump and explain general procedures for

start ing and shutt ing down a pump. Trainees should also be able to describe some general checks that may be made on an

operating pump and describe operator concerns related to air and vapor binding in a centrifugal pump.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:


Describe techniques used to prime a centrifugal pump.

Describe a procedure for start ing up a centrifugal pump.

Describe a procedure for shutt ing down a centrifugal pump.

Pump Operation

Describe checks that should be made on an operating centrifugal pump and its auxiliary equipment.

Describe indications of air binding and vapor binding in a pump and some of the possible sources of in-leakage

to a pump.

Subjects:


Priming

Pump Startup and Shutdown

Pump Operation

Operator Checks

Air Binding and Vapor Binding

Course 86 of 245

Process Operations

PUMPS: Performance and Inspection (IHRDC_OM_AOPER)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to factors that affect the performance of pumps and some of the

symptoms of improper pump operation. After complet ing this unit, t rainees should be able to ident ify and explain the

relationship between various factors that affect pump performance, and to explain how pump performance can be

evaluated. They should also be able to identify symptoms of some common pump problems and explain how to check a pump

for signs of problems such as leaks and cavitation.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Pump Performance

Define and explain the relat ionship between the following: static head, dynamic head, suction head, discharge

head, and total head.

Describe some basic ways pump performance can be determined.

Explain the relationship between minimum net posit ive suction head and cavitation.

Pump Inspection

Ident ify symptoms that may indicate abnormal pump operation.

Ident ify pump components that should be checked for leaks.

Describe common symptoms of cavitation.

List some ways to stop or minimize cavitation.

Subjects:

Pump Performance

Head

Suction Head and Cavitation

Pump Inspection

Symptoms of Pump Problems

Checking for Leaks

Checking for Cavitation

Course 87 of 245

Process Operations

PUMPS: Reciprocating Positive Displacement Types (IHRDC_OM_AOPRE)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic parts and operation of several types of

reciprocating posit ive displacement pumps. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the general

operation of the following types of pumps: single-acting piston pumps, single-acting plunger pumps, double-acting piston

pumps, duplex piston pumps, motor-driven diaphragm pumps, and air-operated diaphragm pumps. Trainees should also be

able to describe a general procedure for start ing up and shutt ing down a typical reciprocat ing pump, and to explain the

function and operation of a relief valve.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Piston and Plunger Pumps

Describe the general operation of a single-acting piston pump.

Describe the general operation of a plunger pump.

Describe the general operation of a double-acting piston pump.

Describe the general operation and an advantage of a duplex piston pump.

Diaphragm Pumps

Describe the general operation of a motor-driven diaphragm pump.

Describe the general operation of an air-operated diaphragm pump.

Pump Operation

Describe a general procedure for start ing up a reciprocating pump.

Describe a general procedure for shutt ing down a reciprocating pump.

Explain the purpose of a relief valve.

Subjects:

Piston and Plunger Pumps

Single-Acting Pumps

Double-Act ing Pumps

Duplex Pumps

Diaphragm Pumps

Motor-Driven Diaphragm Pumps

Air-Operated Diaphragm Pumps

Pump Operation

Pump Startup and Shutdown

Relief Valves

Course 88 of 245

Process Operations

PUMPS: Rotary Positive Displacement Types (IHRDC_OM_AOPRP)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic parts and operation of several types of rotary

posit ive displacement pumps. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the general operation of the

following types of pumps: screw pumps, gear pumps, lobe pumps, vane pumps, and tubing pumps. They should also be able to

describe a general procedure for start ing up and shutt ing down a typical rotary pump, and to explain the function and

operation of a relief valve.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Types of Rotary Pumps

Describe the general operation of a progressive cavity pump.

Describe the general operation of a two-screw pump.

Describe the general operation of an external gear pump and an internal gear pump.

Describe the general operation of a lobe pump.

Describe the general operation of a sliding vane pump and a flexible vane pump.

Describe the general operation of a tubing pump.

Operating Procedures

Describe procedures involved in start ing up a rotary posit ive displacement pump.

Describe procedures involved in shutt ing down a rotary posit ive displacement pump.

Explain the purpose of a relief valve.

Subjects:

Types of Rotary Pumps

Screw Pumps

Gear and Lobe Pumps

Vane Pumps

Tubing Pumps

Operating Procedures

Rotary Pump Startup and Shutdown

Relief Valves

Course 89 of 245

Process Operations

REFRIGERATION SYSTEM: Basic Concepts (IHRDC_OM_AORBC)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to some of the basic principles of refrigeration system operation.

After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to explain what refrigerat ion is and how heat transfer occurs in a

refrigeration system. They should also be able to describe the basic parts, or steps, of a refrigerat ion cycle and explain how

these steps can be carried out by specific refrigeration system components.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Fundamentals

Define refrigeration.

Explain what a refrigerant is.

Explain the basic difference between sensible heat transfer and latent heat transfer.

Describe how pressure and temperature can affect heat transfer.

Define heat source and heat sink.

Refrigeration Systems

Describe the processes involved in a typical refrigeration cycle.

Describe the devices that accomplish the basic functions of a typical refrigeration cycle.

Explain how a refrigeration system can be used with a secondary cooling system.

Subjects:

Fundamentals

Introduction to Refrigeration

Heat Transfer

Refrigeration Systems

Basic Refrigeration Cycle

Refrigeration Components

Secondary Cooling Systems

Course 90 of 245

Process Operations

REFRIGERATION SYSTEM: Operation (IHRDC_OM_AOROP)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the operation of vapor compression refrigeration systems

and absorpt ion refrigeration systems. After completing this unit , t rainees should be able to describe the components and

operations of a vapor compression system and an absorption system. They should also be able to describe control devices,

indicat ing inst ruments, and operator checks associated with these systems, and identify some operating problems that may

occur.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Types of Systems

Ident ify the components of a typical vapor compression refrigerat ion system.

Describe the operation of a vapor compression refrigeration system.

Describe the operation of one type of absorption refrigeration system.

System Operation

Describe some control devices commonly used with refrigerat ion systems.

Describe some monitoring and indicat ing inst ruments commonly used with refrigeration systems.

Describe some operator checks commonly performed on a refrigerat ion system.

Ident ify some operating problems that may occur in a typical refrigeration system.

Subjects:

Types of Systems

Vapor Compression System

Absorption System

System Operation

Controls

Indicators and Checks

Operating Problems

Course 91 of 245

Process Operations

STATISTICAL PROCESS CONTROL: Basic Control Charts (IHRDC_OM_AOSBC)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with some of the basic control charts used in Statist ical Process

Control (SPC). After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the characterist ics of X+ charts, R charts, moving

X+ charts, moving R charts, and individual X charts. They should also be able to explain what each chart represents and how to

plot values on each chart.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Control Charts - 1

Describe how SPC is helpful in responding to an out-of-control process.

Explain what X+ charts represent.

Describe how to plot values on an X+ chart.

Explain what R charts represent.

Describe how to plot values on an R chart .

Explain why an X+ and an R chart are commonly used together.

Describe how to recognize abnormal variat ions on X+ charts and R charts.

Control Charts - 2

Describe the characterist ics of moving X+ charts.

Describe how to plot values on a moving X+ chart.

Describe the characterist ics of moving R charts.

Describe how to plot values on a moving R chart.

Describe the characterist ics of individual X charts.

Describe how to plot values on an individual X chart .

Subjects:

Control Charts - 1

SPC and Control Charts

X+ Charts

R Charts

Examples

Control Charts - 2

Moving X+ Charts

Moving R Charts

Individual X Charts

Course 92 of 245

Process Operations

STATISTICAL PROCESS CONTROL: Introduction (IHRDC_OM_AOSIN)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic principles of Statist ical Process Control (SPC). After

completing this unit, t rainees should be able to explain what SPC is and how it can be applied to a process. They should also be

able to describe the basic elements of an SPC control chart and relate an SPC control chart to an X-Y graph and to a normal

distribution curve.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

What is SPC?

Define quality in terms of the process industry.

Explain what Statist ical Process Control (SPC) is.

Describe the benefits of SPC.

Describe how SPC was developed.

Applying SPC

Describe what a process is.

Ident ify factors that affect a process.

Describe the two basic types of variat ion in a process.

Ident ify factors that affect how SPC is applied to a process.

Charts

Describe how to plot values on a basic X-Y graph.

Explain what a histogram is and how it relates to SPC control charts.

Explain what a standard deviation is.

Ident ify the basic elements of a typical Shewhart control chart.

Relate a Shewhart control chart to a normal distribution curve.

Subjects:

What is SPC?

SPC and Product Quality

Origin of SPC

Applying SPC

Factors Affecting a Process

Application to a Process

Charts

X-Y Graph

Histogram

Shewhart Control Chart

Course 93 of 245

Process Operations

STATISTICAL PROCESS CONTROL: Process Variations (IHRDC_OM_AOSPV)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with some basic techniques for using Statist ical Process Control

(SPC) to recognize and respond to variat ions in plant processes. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe

how plotted values on control charts can be interpreted, describe how an operator can use SPC to recognize and respond to

out-of-control condit ions and process instability, describe basic considerat ions for using SPC with a computer, and explain how

to use various types of attribute charts.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Control Charts

Describe how plotted values on control charts can be interpreted.

Describe common patterns of instability and identify condit ions that can cause these patterns to occur.

Operating with SPC

Describe how an operator can use SPC to recognize and respond to problems in a process.

Define CUSUM and explain how it can be used.

Describe how using CUSUM compares to using control charts.

Describe two common causes of an off-aim condit ion.

Describe how to reset CUSUM and how to set a new aim.

Attribute Charts

Define the terms defect and defective product.

Describe how to use C charts, U Charts, NP charts, and P charts.

Subjects:

Control Charts

Interpreting Charts

Recognizing Patterns

Operating With SPC

Using SPC

CUSUM

Attribute Charts

Types of Charts

Course 94 of 245

Process Operations

TROUBLESHOOTING: Basic Concepts (IHRDC_OM_AOPOB)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic concepts associated with troubleshooting a problem in

a process system. After complet ing this unit, t rainees should be able to explain what t roubleshooting is, and how it can be

carried out as a systematic, logical procedure. They should also be able to explain how to apply the major steps of a basic

t roubleshooting procedure to a problem in a process.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Introduction

Define t roubleshooting.

Ident ify and describe the main steps involved in troubleshooting.

Ident ify various sources of information that can be used for troubleshooting.

Explain how the following process of elimination methods are applied in troubleshooting: input/output test ing,

bracketing, the serial method, and the half-splitt ing method.

Troubleshooting

Describe a basic wastewater treatment process.

Describe how to troubleshoot a problem in a wastewater treatment process.

Subjects:

Introduction

What is Troubleshooting?

Process of Elimination

Troubleshooting

Process

Problem

Course 95 of 245

Process Operations

TROUBLESHOOTING: Process Examples (IHRDC_OM_AOPOP)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic concepts associated with troubleshooting problems in

process systems. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to follow a logical, systematic troubleshooting procedure to

identify and correct process problems.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Exercise 1 - Tank Level

Describe how troubleshooting techniques can be used to find and correct a problem in a process system. The

system in this example transfers liquid from a storage tank to a process feed tank.

Exercise 2 - Fluid Transfer


system used in this example t ransfers feed material to a dist illat ion process.

Exercise 3 - Process Column


system used in this example is a dist illat ion process.

Subjects:

Exercise 1 - Tank Level

Exercise 2 - Fluid Transfer

Exercise 3 - Process Column

Course 96 of 245

Process Operations

VALVES: Basic Types and Operation 1 (IHRDC_OM_AOVB1)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to the basic parts and operation of valves commonly used in

process systems. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the purpose and uses of valves in process

systems, identify the main parts of a typical valve, and describe the function of each part. They should also be able to describe

the specific uses, parts, and operat ion of gate valves, globe valves, plug valves, ball valves, and butterfly valves.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Introduction to Valves

Describe purposes and uses of valves in process systems.

Describe how valves are lined up.

Ident ify main parts of a typical valve and their functions.

Describe flanged, threaded, and welded methods of attaching valves to piping systems.

Describe the locations of typical valve leaks and how to stop a packing leak.

Describe one method of lubricating a typical valve.

Valve Types

Describe the function and operation of gate valves.

Describe typical applications of gate valves.

Describe the functions and operation of globe and needle valves and their typical applicat ions.

Ident ify a plug valve and describe its function and operation.

Ident ify a three-way and a four-way valve and describe their function and operat ion.

Describe typical applications of plug valves.

Ident ify a ball valve and describe its function and operation.

Describe typical applications of ball valves.

Ident ify a butterfly valve and describe its function and operat ion.

Describe typical applications of butterfly valves.

Subjects:

Introduction to Valves

Valves and the Process System

Valve Parts

Valve Problems and Maintenance

Valve Types

Gate Valves

Glove Valves

Plug Valves

Ball Valves

Butterfly Valves

Course 97 of 245

Process Operations

VALVES: Basic Types and Operation 2 (IHRDC_OM_AOVB2)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to some valves that are commonly used to isolate components,

to thrott le flow, to prevent reverse flow through a process system, and to protect systems from overpressure condit ions. After

completing this unit, t rainees should be able to identify and describe the basic functions and operat ion of diaphragm valves,

pinch valves, and check valves. They should also be able to explain how relief valves and safety valves protect system

equipment and piping from excessive pressure.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Valve Types

Ident ify a diaphragm valve and describe its functions and operation.

Ident ify a pinch valve and describe its functions and operation.

Ident ify swing check valves, lift check valves, and ball check valves, and describe their functions and

operation.

Relief and Safety Valves

Describe the function and operation of relief valves.

Describe typical uses of relief valves.

Describe the function and operation of safety valves.

Describe typical uses of safety valves.

Subjects:

Valve Types

Diaphragm Valves

Pinch Valves

Check Valves

Relief and Safety Valves

Relief Valves

Safety Valves

Course 98 of 245

Process Operations

VALVES: Electric and Hydraulic Actuators (IHRDC_OM_AOVEH)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to various types of electric and hydraulic actuators that are used

to control valves in process systems. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the basic operation of

solenoid actuators, motor-operated actuators, and various types of hydraulic actuators. They should also be able to explain

the funct ion of a pilot valve and describe problems associated with hydraulic actuators.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Electric Actuators

Describe the basic operation of a solenoid actuator.

Describe the basic operation of a motor-operated actuator.

Describe the function of torque switches.

Describe the function of limit switches.

Hydraulic Actuators

Describe the operation of a single-acting, spring-return hydraulic actuator.

Describe the basic operation of a double-acting hydraulic actuator.

Describe the function of a pilot valve.

Describe some ways to identify actuator problems.

Subjects:

Electric Actuators

Solenoid Actuators

Motor-Operated Actuators

Hydraulic Actuators

Single-Acting Hydraulic Actuators

Double-Act ing Hydraulic Actuators

Pilot Valves

Hydraulic Actuator Problems

Course 99 of 245

Process Operations

VALVES: Introduction of Actuators (IHRDC_OM_AOVIA)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to actuators in general, and pneumatic actuators, in part icular.

After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to identify and describe three basic types of actuators and explain how

actuators posit ion control valves. They should also be able to describe the basic design and operation of single- and double-

acting diaphragm actuators, single- and double-act ing piston actuators, van actuators, and posit ioners. Finally, t rainees

should be able to describe some common actuator problems.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Actuators and Control Valves

Define actuator and describe three basic types of actuators.

Describe the function of an actuator.

Describe the function of a controller.

Describe the function of a control valve.

Pneumatic Actuators

Describe the basic design and operation of single-acting diaphragm and double-acting actuators.

Describe the basic operation of single-acting and double-act ing piston actuators.

Describe the basic operation of a vane actuator.

Describe the function and basic operation of a posit ioner.

Describe some ways to identify actuator problems.

Describe some ways that an operator can identify actuator problems.

Describe a general procedure for handling a control valve failure.

Subjects:

Actuators and Control Valves

Types of Actuators

Control Valves

Pneumatic Actuators

Single-Acting Diaphragm Actuators

Double-Act ing Diaphragm Actuators

Single- and Double-Act ing Piston Actuators

Van Actuators

Posit ioners

Actuator Problems

Course 100 of 245

MAINTENANCE CURRICULUM




Maintenance

BEARINGS: Fundamentals (IHRDC_OM_AMBIN)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic operat ion and maintenance of bearings. After

completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the basic functions of bearings, the various types of sliding surface and

rolling contact bearings, and the procedures for removing a rolling contact bearing from a shaft . They should also know how to

install a rolling contact bearing on a shaft.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Bearing Basics

State three basic functions of bearings.

Describe two basic categories of bearings.

Describe journal bearings and how they are constructed.

Describe thrust bearings and how they are constructed.

Describe basic methods of lubricating sliding surface bearings.

Describe common types of sliding surface bearing failures.

Describe the basic construction of a typical rolling contact bearing.

Describe each of the following rolling contact type bearings: shallow groove ball bearings, deep groove ball

bearings, spherical race ball bearings, cylindrical roller bearings, t apered roller bearings, barrel roller bearings,

needle roller bearings, rolling contact t hrust bearings, and angular contact bearings.

Explain how rolling contact bearings can be lubricated.

Describe common types of rolling contact bearing failures.

Bearing Maintenance

Describe a procedure for removing a rolling contact bearing from a shaft .

Describe a procedure for cleaning and inspect ing a rolling contact bearing.

Describe a procedure for installing a new rolling contact bearing on a shaft.

Subjects:

Bearing Basics

Operation

Sliding Surface Bearings

Rolling Contact Bearings

Bearing Maintenance

Bearing Removal

Bearing Installat ion

Course 101 of 245

Maintenance

BEARINGS: Rolling Contact (IHRDC_OM_AMBRB)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic operat ion and maintenance of rolling contact

bearings. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe common types of rolling contact bearings, and explain

how they can be mounted and lubricated. Trainees should also be able to explain how to remove a failed rolling contact

bearing and how to install a new one.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Basic Concepts

Describe the basic functions of a bearing.

Ident ify the basic parts of a typical rolling contact bearing.

Describe common types of ball bearings.

Describe common types of roller bearings.

Explain the difference between a press fit and a push fit .

Describe common methods of mount ing rolling contact bearings.

Describe types of bearing housings.

Describe a common oil lubrication system for rolling contact bearings.

Describe a common method of greasing a bearing.

Bearing Failure and Removal

Describe symptoms and causes of common types of rolling contact bearing failures.

Describe a procedure for removing a rolling contact bearing from a shaft .

Installation

Describe preparations for installing a new rolling contact bearing.

Describe a procedure for installing a rolling contact bearing.

Subjects:

Basic Concepts

Functions and Features

Types of Bearings

Mountings and Housings

Lubrication

Bearing Failure and Removal

Types of Failures

Removal Technique

Installation

Preparing for Installat ion

Installat ion

Course 102 of 245

Maintenance

BEARINGS: Sliding Surface (IHRDC_OM_AMBSB)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic operat ion and maintenance of sliding surface

bearings. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe common types of journal bearings and thrust bearings,

and explain how sliding surface bearings can be lubricated. They should also be able to describe common indications of

bearing performance and common types of sliding surface bearing failures. Addit ionally, they should be able to describe

procedures for disassembling, inspecting, and reassembling journal bearings and thrust bearings.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Basic Concepts

Describe two general categories of sliding surface bearings.

Describe common types of journal bearings.

Describe common types of thrust bearings.

Describe the process of film lubrication.

Describe ways that sliding surface bearings can be lubricated.

Performance

Describe common indications of bearing performance.

Describe inst ruments that can be used to measure indicat ions of bearing performance.

Describe common causes of sliding surface bearing failure.

Maintenance

Describe a procedure for disassembling a journal bearing.

Describe what to look for during an inspection of a disassembled journal bearing.

Describe how to check the total clearance between a journal bearing and a shaft.

Describe a procedure for reassembling a journal bearing.

Describe how to take a thrust reading.

Describe a procedure for disassembling a thrust bearing.

Describe what to look for during the inspection of a disassembled thrust bearing.

Describe a procedure for reassembling a thrust bearing.

Subjects:

Basic Concepts

Types

Lubrication

Performance

Performance Indications

Types of Failure

Maintenance

Journal Bearing

Thrust Bearing

Course 103 of 245

Maintenance

CIRCUIT BREAKERS: Breakers and Switchgear 1 (IHRDC_OM_AECLV)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic operat ion and maintenance of low voltage circuit

breakers and switchgear. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the basic operation of a circuit breaker

and the basic functions of switchgear. They should be able to explain how an arc forms and how arcs can be ext inguished, and

also describe basic procedures for racking out a circuit breaker and performing maintenance and test ing on it .

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Basic Operation

Describe how an electromagnet ic t rip device operates in a typical circuit breaker.

Describe how a thermal element t rip device operates in a typical circuit breaker.

Describe how a dashpot can be used to delay the movement of a trip device.

Describe ways in which circuit breaker contacts can be closed.

Describe the functions of three sections of a typical switchgear assembly.

Describe how a typical circuit breaker is connected to primary power and control power.

Principles of Circuit Interruption

Describe what an arc is and how it forms.

Describe how speed, distance, and cooling affect ext inguishing an arc.

Describe how a metal fin arc chute can be used to ext inguish an arc in a typical circuit breaker.

Explain what current zero is.

Maintenance

Describe a procedure for racking a circuit breaker out for preventive maintenance.

Describe a procedure for cleaning and inspect ing a typical circuit breaker as part of preventive maintenance.

Describe how arc chutes and contacts are inspected and cleaned on a typical circuit breaker.

Describe how to clean a typical circuit breaker during an overhaul.

Describe how primary and secondary disconnect fingers are inspected on a typical circuit breaker.

Describe how to lubricate the moving parts in the operating mechanism of a typical circuit breaker.

Describe three checks that can be performed on the movable and stationary contacts of a typical circuit

breaker.

Describe how to perform an instantaneous trip test and a t ime delay trip test on a typical circuit breaker.

Subjects:

Basic Operation

Circuit Breakers

Switchgear

Principles of Circuit Interruption

Arcs

Ext inguishing an Arc

Maintenance

Prevent ive Maintenance

Overhaul

Test ing

Course 104 of 245

Maintenance

CIRCUIT BREAKERS: Breakers and Switchgear 2 (IHRDC_OM_AECHV)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic operat ion and maintenance of high voltage

breakers and switchgear. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the basic operation of an air-magnetic

circuit breaker and an oil circuit breaker. They should also be able to explain how each type of circuit breaker ext inguishes an

arc, and describe basic procedures for racking out high voltage circuit breakers and performing maintenance and test ing on

them.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:


Describe the main components of a typical air-magnet ic circuit breaker.

Describe how an arc is ext inguished in a typical air-magnet ic circuit breaker.

Describe the main components of a typical oil circuit breaker.

Describe how an arc is ext inguished in a typical oil circuit breaker.

Describe a typical undervoltage and overvoltage protection system used with high voltage circuit breakers.

Maintenance of Air-Magnetic Circuit Breakers

Describe one way to disconnect an air-magnet ic circuit breaker from power.

Describe how to inspect the interior of an empty switchgear cell.

Describe how to inspect the arc chutes and arc runners on a typical air-magnet ic circuit breaker.

Describe how to inspect and clean the stat ionary and movable contacts on a typical air-magnet ic circuit

breaker.

Describe how to inspect the operating mechanism and the primary and secondary disconnects on a typical

air-magnetic circuit breaker.

Describe how to perform electrical tests on a typical air-magnetic circuit breaker.

Maintenance of Oil Circuit Breakers

Describe a procedure for electrically isolating a typical oil circuit breaker.

Explain why an oil sample is typically taken from an oil circuit breaker before maintenance is performed.

Describe a procedure for disassembling a typical oil circuit breaker.

Describe how the contacts and the operating mechanism are maintained on a typical disassembled oil circuit

breaker.

Describe a procedure for reassembling a typical oil circuit breaker.

Subjects:


Air-Magnetic Circuit Breakers

Oil Circuit Breakers

Circuit Protection

Maintenance of Air-Magnetic Circuit Breakers

Preparations

Inspection and Cleaning

Electrical Tests

Maintenance of Oil Circuit Breakers

Preparations

Inspection, Cleaning, and Reassembly

Course 105 of 245

Maintenance

COMPRESSORS: Centrifugal (IHRDC_OM_AMCCC)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to explain centrifugal compressor components and operat ion. It also covers

disassembly and reassembly of a vert ically split compressor and the various checks and measurements that are made to

compressor components.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Introduction

Describe the operation of a centrifugal compressor.

Ident ify the components of a horizontally split centrifugal compressor.

Ident ify the components of a vert ically split centrifugal compressor.

Describe the main components of a compressor lubrication system.

Define surging.

Compressor Overhaul

Describe some common precautions and preparations associated with centrifugal compressor maintenance.

Describe one way to remove intercoolers, diffusers, impellers, diffuser covers, and pinion shaft assemblies from a

vert ically split centrifugal compressor.

Describe some common checks and measurements that are made during a compressor overhaul.

Describe a procedure for reassembling a vert ically split centrifugal compressor.

Subjects:

Introduction

Components and Operation

Support Systems

Compressor Overhaul

Maintenance Practices

Disassembly

Component Inspection

Reassembly

Course 106 of 245

Maintenance

COMPRESSORS: Reciprocating (IHRDC_OM_AMCAC)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic operat ion and maintenance of reciprocating

compressors. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to identify the main components of a reciprocating compressor,

explain how the compressor operates, and describe routine maintenance tasks that are commonly performed on reciprocating

compressors. They should also be able to describe tasks generally associated with a compressor overhaul.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Compressor Basics

Ident ify the main components of a reciprocating air compressor.

Describe the general operation of a reciprocating air compressor.

Describe factors that determine air compressor design.

Describe components that are part of lubrication, air flow, cooling, and moisture removal systems in a typical

reciprocating air compressor.

Describe tasks rout inely performed to maintain the efficiency of a reciprocat ing air compressor.

Overhaul

Ident ify and describe components of a reciprocating air compressor that are removed during compressor

disassembly.

Describe a procedure for disassembling a reciprocat ing air compressor.

Describe a procedure for cleaning and inspect ing internal components of a reciprocating air compressor.

Describe a procedure for reassembling a reciprocating air compressor.

Subjects:

Compressor Basics


Rout ine Maintenance

Overhaul

Disassembly

Cleaning and Inspection

Reassembly

Course 107 of 245

Maintenance

DIAGRAMS: Blueprints (IHRDC_OM_AEDBL)

Overview:

This interactive training unit introduces the basic features of const ruction blueprints. After completing this unit, t rainees should

be able to describe various types of blueprints; identify lines, symbols, and abbreviations that are commonly found in blueprints;

and explain how to properly care for blueprints.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Introduction

Describe what a blueprint is, and identify some of the methods used to create blueprints.

Ident ify two basic types of drawings that can be used to illustrate objects on paper.

Describe the types of drawings typically included in a set of blueprints:

Working Drawings (plan views, elevation drawings, section drawings, detail drawings)

Auxiliary Drawings (electrical plans, HVAC plans, plumbing plans, door and window schedules, framing

plans)

Describe the basic elements of a blueprint, including the design drawing area, t it le block, revision block, legend

and scale.

Scales and Symbols

Describe the Engineer's, Architect's and Metric scales commonly used as measuring tools for blueprints.

Describe the following types of lines commonly used on blueprints:

Property lines

Boundary lines

Main object lines

Hidden lines

Center lines

Dimension and extension lines

Break lines

Section lines

Reference lines for sections

Leader lines

Ident ify examples of building material symbols, electrical symbols, plumbing and piping symbols and door and

window symbols commonly used on blueprints.

Ident ify abbreviations commonly used on blueprints.

Using Blueprints

Describe how dimensions are used on blueprints to show sizes and distances.

Ident ify rules for protecting blueprints during their use.

Subjects:

Introduction

What is a Blueprint?

Working Drawings

Parts of a Blueprint

Scales and Symbols

Types of Scales

Line Scales

Symbols

Abbreviations

Using Blueprints

Dimensions

Care of Blueprints

Course 108 of 245

Maintenance

DIAGRAMS: Electrical (IHRDC_OM_AEDEL)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with various types of electrical diagrams. After completing this

unit, t rainees should be able to explain why symbols are used on electrical diagrams, and how to obtain informat ion from a t it le

block and an equipment location index. They should also be able to explain how to use each of the following types of

diagrams: block, single line, schematic, wiring, connection, interconnection, and raceway.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Diagram Basics

Explain why symbols are used on electrical diagrams.

State the purpose of the American Standard Device Function Numbers Table and the Standard Diagram

Abbreviations Table. State the purpose of legends on electrical diagrams.

Describe information commonly found in t it le blocks on electrical diagrams.

State the purpose of notes on electrical diagrams.

Define equipment locat ion index.

Describe how to use an equipment location index.

Types of Diagrams

State the purpose of a block diagram.

State the purpose of a single line diagram.

Ident ify symbols commonly used on single line diagrams.

Describe information that can be found on single line diagrams.

State the purpose of a schematic diagram.

Describe how to read a schematic diagram.

State the purpose of a wiring diagram.

Describe how to use a wiring diagram to locate components.

State the purpose of a connection diagram.

Describe how to read a connect ion diagram.

State the purpose of an interconnection diagram.

Describe how to read an interconnection diagram.

State the purpose of a raceway diagram.

Describe how to read a raceway diagram.

Explain how to use Raceway Notes, Symbols, and Detail Reference, and a Raceway Schedule.

Subjects:

Diagram Basics

Symbols

Tit le Blocks

Equipment Location Index

Types of Diagrams

Block Diagrams

Single Line Diagrams

Schematic Diagrams

Wiring Diagrams

Connection Diagrams

Raceway Diagrams

Course 109 of 245

Maintenance

DIAGRAMS: Industrial Process Systems (IHRDC_OM_AEDPR)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to plant system diagrams and diagram symbols. After completing

this unit, t rainees should be able to identify and describe the purpose of several kinds of system diagrams, and describe the

information found on each type. Trainees should also be able to identify symbols commonly used on piping and instrumentation

diagrams (P&IDs), describe the types of informat ion typically found on a legend, and use a P&ID to locate the components of a

system.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Types of Diagrams

Ident ify and describe the purpose of equipment arrangement diagrams, elevation drawings, piping system

(flow) diagrams, piping and instrumentat ion diagrams (P&IDs), electrical diagrams, and legends.

Describe, in general terms, the information found on each type of diagram.


Ident ify some of the basic symbols associated with flow diagrams.

Ident ify symbols commonly used to represent components in flow diagrams.

Briefly describe the basic operat ion of the components typically found in a fluid system.


Ident ify instruments using an identification chart.

Ident ify line symbols and instrument symbols used in piping and instrumentation diagrams.


Describe the types of information typically found on a legend.

Locate the components in a boiler fuel oil system by identifying the symbols used to represent them.

Subjects:

Types of Diagrams

Equipment Location Diagrams

System Diagrams


Tanks, Pumps, and Valves

Actuators

Heat Exchangers


Legends


Course 110 of 245

Maintenance

ELECTRIC MOTORS: AC Motor Controllers 1 (IHRDC_OM_AEEA1)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic funct ions and operation of AC motor controllers.

After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to explain how an AC motor controller operates and describe the operation

of master switches and pilot devices that can be used with AC motor controllers. They should also be able to explain how an

AC motor can provide overload protection and low voltage protection, and to describe the operation of special types of AC

motor controllers.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Introduction

Describe how a manual controller can be used to control a motor.

Describe how a magnetic controller can be used to control a motor.

Describe the parts and operation of a typical magnetic contactor.

Describe the operation of a magnetic contactor in a typical AC motor controller.

Describe the operation of maintaining master switches and momentary master switches.

Describe the operation of float switches, pressure switches, limit switches, and flow switches.

Describe the operation of bellows thermostats and bimetallic strip thermostats.

Explain how a mercury switch can be used in a pilot device.

Protective Devices

State the purpose of overload devices.

Describe the parts and operation of two types of thermal overload devices.

Describe the parts and operation of a typical magnetic overload device.

State the purpose of low voltage protection in a magnetic motor controller.

Describe the operation of an LVP and an LVR motor controller.

Explain how a low voltage relay operates.

Special Motor Controllers

Explain how a reduced voltage start motor controller provides protect ion to motors when they are first started.

Describe the operation of a two-speed and a reversible motor controller.

Subjects:

Introduction

Basic Principles

Contactors

Master Switches and Pilot Devices

Protective Devices

Overload Protection

Low Voltage Protection

Special Motor Controllers

Reduced Voltage Start

Two-Speed

Reversible

Course 111 of 245

Maintenance

ELECTRIC MOTORS: AC Motor Controllers 2 (IHRDC_OM_AEEA2)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic procedures for troubleshooting and maintaining AC

motor controllers. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to use diagrams and charts to obtain information about

an AC motor controller. They should also be able to explain how to troubleshoot a problem in an AC motor controller and how

to inspect and clean a controller's parts.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Introduction

Explain how to use a schematic diagram to obtain informat ion about the operation of an AC motor controller.

Explain how to use a wiring diagram to locate the components in an AC motor controller.

Describe a typical legend and a typical sequencing chart.

Describe a basic procedure for troubleshooting an AC motor controller.

Ident ify and describe typical sources of information about the normal operat ion of an AC motor controller.

Ident ify and describe possible sources of informat ion about an AC motor controller malfunction.

Describe how to use a schematic diagram to diagnose an AC motor controller malfunction.

Troubleshooting

Describe how a voltage tester can be used to locate a malfunction in an energized AC motor controller.

Describe how to test an AC motor controller to determine if it is de-energized.

Describe how a megohmmeter can be used to test a de-energized AC motor controller for grounds.

Describe how a mult imeter can be used to locate an open and a short in a

de-energized AC motor controller.

Maintenance

Explain why an AC motor controller should be kept clean.

Describe how an AC motor controller can be cleaned.

Describe a basic procedure for inspecting an AC motor controller's magnetic contactor.

Describe how to inspect an AC motor controller's wiring and components.

Subjects:

Introduction

Diagrams and Charts

Procedures

Troubleshooting

Energized Controllers

De-Energized Controllers

Maintenance

Cleaning

Inspection

Course 112 of 245

Maintenance

ELECTRIC MOTORS: DC Motors (IHRDC_OM_AEEDM)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic operat ion and maintenance of DC motors. After

completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the operation and basic parts of a DC motor. They should also be able

to describe basic procedures for maintaining and overhauling a DC motor.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Motor Principles

Explain what motor action is.

Describe armature reaction in DC motors.

Ident ify the basic parts of a DC motor.

Explain how DC motors can be classified.

Motor Maintenance

Describe problems that can occur with the brushes in a DC motor.

Describe the characterist ics of a good brush.

Explain how to inspect and replace brushes in a DC motor.

Describe how a commutator can be cleaned.

Describe typical commutator problems.

Describe a basic procedure for troubleshooting a DC motor's armature and field windings and their

connect ions.

Describe how to test for grounds, opens, and shorts in a DC motor.

Motor Overhaul

Describe how to disassemble a DC motor.

Describe how to inspect and clean a disassembled DC motor.

Describe how to reassemble a DC motor.

Subjects:

Motor Principles

Motor Action

DC Motors

Motor Maintenance

Brushes and Brush Rigging

Commutators

Troubleshooting

Motor Overhaul

Disassembly


Reassembly

Course 113 of 245

Maintenance

ELECTRIC MOTORS: Motor Branch Circuit Protection (IHRDC_OM_AEEMB)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic operat ion and maintenance of motor branch

circuits. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the components of a typical motor branch circuit,

preventive maintenance procedures, and one way to troubleshoot a problem in a motor branch circuit.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Motor Branch Circuits

Describe a typical motor branch circuit.

Ident ify and describe protect ion devices typically used in motor branch circuits.

Describe a procedure for overriding a safety switch enclosure interlock.

Describe general characterist ics of fuses commonly used in motor branch circuits.

Describe how to determine what size fuse to use when the proper fuse rating for a motor branch circuit is

unknown.

Describe a typical molded-case circuit breaker and explain how it can be reset.

Describe the operation of thermal, magnetic, and thermal-magnetic molded-case circuit breakers.

Maintenance

Describe a low-impedance grounding system typically used with motor branch circuits and explain how it can

be maintained.

Describe a general preventive maintenance procedure for a motor branch circuit.

Describe one way to troubleshoot a motor branch circuit.

Subjects:

Motor Branch Circuits

Circuits

Safety Switches

Circuit Breakers

Maintenance


Troubleshooting

Course 114 of 245

Maintenance

ELECTRIC MOTORS: Three Phase (IHRDC_OM_AEETP)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with three-phase AC motor operation, inspect ion, test ing, and

maintenance. After completing this unit , t rainees should be able to explain the basic principles of three-phase AC motor

operation, how to inspect one, and how to conduct electrical tests on one. They should also be able to explain how to

disconnect, disassemble, clean, reassemble, and reconnect a three-phase AC motor.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Motor Principles

Describe alternating current.

Explain the relationship between the three phases of three-phase alternating current.

Ident ify the basic parts of a three-phase AC motor.

Ident ify and describe common types of three-phase AC motors.

Describe the operation of a typical three-phase AC motor.

Explain what slip is, and describe the effects of increasing load on an AC motor.

Describe how speed control can be accomplished in a three-phase AC motor.

Inspection and Testing

Describe how an operating and non-operating three-phase AC motor can be inspected.

Explain the purpose of an insulation test and describe how it can be conducted on a three-phase AC motor.

Describe how to test for grounds in the stator of a three-phase AC motor.

Describe how to test for opens in a wye-connected stator of a three-phase AC motor.

Describe how to test for opens in a delta-connected stator of a three-phase AC motor.

Describe how to test for shorts in the stator of a three-phase AC motor.

Describe how to test for grounds, opens, and shorts in the rotor circuit of a wound three-phase AC motor.

Motor Maintenance

Describe how to disconnect and disassemble a three-phase AC motor.

Describe how to inspect and clean a disassembled three-phase AC motor.

Describe how to reassemble and reconnect a three-phase AC motor.

Subjects:

Motor Principles

AC Review

Three-Phase AC Motors

Speed Control


Motor Inspection

Insulation Test ing

Stator Test ing

Rotor Test ing

Motor Maintenance

Disconnection and Disassembly


Reassembly and Reconnect ion

Course 115 of 245

Maintenance

ELECTRICAL MAINTENANCE: Battery Systems (IHRDC_OM_AEETM)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to industrial battery systems, and battery cells, and how to

inspect and test batteries. After complet ing this unit, t rainees should know the characterist ics and baic operat ion of a typical

battery system and its components. They should also understand how to inspect and perform basic tests on industrial batteries.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Introduction to Battery Systems

Describe a typical industrial battery system.

List the basic components of a lead-acid cell.

Describe the electrochemical action in a cell that is charging.

Describe the electrochemical action in a cell that is discharging.

State the voltage rating for a typical cell at full charge.

Explain a cell's capacity rat ing.

Briefly describe the relationship of cell capacity, voltage, and specific gravity during discharge and recharge.

Describe the functions of a typical battery system charger.

List the common components of most battery chargers and describe their functions.


List the protective equipment and safety procedures associated with working on batteries.

Describe typical visual inspection checks.

State the purpose of and describe the basic steps for checking intercell and terminal connection resistances.

State the purpose of and describe the basic steps for checking specific gravity.

Explain the effect of temperature on specific gravity.

Subjects:

Introduction to Battery Systems

System Overview

Cell Components

Cell and Battery Ratings

Battery Chargers


Battery System Safety

Battery Inspection

Voltage and Resistance Test ing

Specific Gravity Test ing

Course 116 of 245

Maintenance

ELECTRICAL MAINTENANCE: Fasteners (IHRDC_OM_AEEFA)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with various types of fasteners used in electrical work. After

completing this unit, the trainees should be able to describe common types of threaded and non-threaded fasteners and

identify applications for which each type might be used. They should also be able to describe basic procedures for installing

fasteners.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Types of Fasteners

Describe some common types of threaded fasteners and identify applications for which these fasteners may be

used.

Describe some common types of non-threaded fasteners and identify applicat ions for which these fasteners

may be used.

Installing Fasteners

Describe general steps for installing threaded fasteners.

Describe a typical procedure for installing a toggle bolt.

Describe a typical procedure for installing an anchor bolt in wet concrete.

Describe a typical procedure for installing an expansion anchor bolt in hardened concrete.

Describe a typical procedure for installing blind rivets.

Subjects:

Types of Fasteners

Threaded Fasteners

Non-Threaded Fasteners

Installing Fasteners

Basic Steps

Installing Toggle Bolts

Installing Anchor Bolts

Installing Blind Rivets

Course 117 of 245

Maintenance

ELECTRICAL MAINTENANCE: Introduction to the NEC (IHRDC_OM_AEEIN)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the organizat ion and layout of the National Electrical Code.

After completing this unit, the trainees should be able to use the NEC to locate specific types of information.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Overview

Explain the purpose and describe the history of the NEC.

Describe how the NEC was developed and revised.

Describe the role of test ing laboratories in developing the NEC.

Describe the purpose of the NFPA and the NEMA.

Explain the difference between mandatory rules and advisory rules.

Describe the kinds of informat ion found in Art icles 90, 100, and 110 of the NEC.

Define the terms labeled and listed.

Describe how the chapters of the NEC are organized.

Describe the different types of text used in the NEC.

Using the NEC

Explain how to locate information for a part icular procedure in the NEC.

Ident ify and describe key sections of the NEC that are often used as references for servicing electrical systems.

Describe how the NEC can be used as a reference for installing electrical systems.

Subjects:

Overview

Purpose and History

Layout

Using the NEC

Navigating

Examples

Course 118 of 245

Maintenance

ELECTRICAL MAINTENANCE: Relays 1 (IHRDC_OM_TDRE1)

Overview:

The purpose of this unit is to teach the basic principles of protect ive relays and to introduce directional and nondirectional

relays. The unit begins with the basic theory of protective relays, commonly used types of relays, and a brief explanation of how

these relays are used. Addit ional details and examples are provided for directional and nondirectional relays. At the conclusion

of this unit , the trainees should have a basic understanding of how protective relays work. They should be able to explain the

need for protective relays and to list commonly used types of relays and their functions. They should also be able to explain how

directional and nondirect ional relays work and give examples of how they are used.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Introduction to relays

Explain the purpose of protective relays in a T&D system and describe how they are used. Describe five common

relay elements and how they work.

Overcurrent relays

Describe the basic operating principles of overcurrent relays and the condit ions that cause them to operate.

Directional overcurrent relays

Ident ify T&D equipment typically protected by directional overcurrent relays.

Describe the basic operating principles of directional overcurrent relays and the condit ions that cause them to

operate.

Reclosing relays

Describe the basic function and operating principles of reclosing relays.

Voltage relays

Ident ify the type of equipment that voltage relays typically protect.

Describe the basic operating principles of voltage relays and the condit ions that cause them to operate.

Auxiliary relays

Describe the basic function and operatiing principles of auxiliary relays.

Solid-state relays

Describe the basic operating principles of solid-state relays.

Define the terms analog signal, digital signal and logic circuit .

Subjects:


Purpose and use of relays

Relay elements: plunger element, clapper element, induct ion disc element, induction cup element and

solid-state circuitry.

Overcurrent relays: Instantaneous overcurrent relays; t ime-delay overcurrent relays

Directional overcurrent relays: Usage and operation; three-phase directional relays

Reclosing relays: function, components and operat ion

Voltage relays

Overvoltage and undervoltage relays with plunger elements; overvoltage relay with an induction disc element;

overvoltage/undervoltage relay

Auxiliary relays

Function of auxiliary relays

Auxiliary relay used to trip mult iple breakers

Auxiliary relay used to trip mult iple overcurrent relays

Solid-state relays

Operating principles of solid state relays; Logic gates

Course 119 of 245

Maintenance

ELECTRICAL MAINTENANCE: Relays 2 (IHRDC_OM_TDRE2)

Overview:

This unit continues the development begun in Relays 1 by introducing differential and pilot relays and discussing routine relay

maintenance. At the conclusion of this unit, t rainees should be able to explain how differential and pilot relays work and give

examples of situations where they are used. They should also be able to describe how to approach routine inspection and

maintenance and how to put a relay in or out of service.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:


Ident ify five common relay elements. Describe the funct ions of overcurrent, direct ional overcurrent, reclosing,

voltage, and auxiliary relays.

Differential relays

Ident ify what different ial relays typically protect. Describe the basic operating principles of different ial relays

and the condit ion that causes a differential relay to operate.

Transfer tripping

Describe the function of a transfer tripping system and identify its main components.

Ident ify four communication channels used for transfer tripping and explain how they work.

Ident ify the main equipment components associated with transfer tripping communication channels and

describe their funct ions.

Distance relays

Ident ify what distance relays typically protect.

Describe the basic operating principles of distance relays and the condit ion that causes a distance relay to

operate.

Pilot wire relaying

Describe the function of a pilot wire relaying system.

Ident ify the main components of a pilot wire relaying system and describe its basic operating principles.

Breaker failure relaying

Ident ify the function and the main components of a breaker failure relaying system.

Describe the general operation of a breaker failure relaying system.

Describe the basic operating principles of (1) a breaker failure relay and (2) a t iming relay in a breaker failure

relaying system.

Subjects:


Relay elements (plunger element, clapper element, iInduction disc element, induction cup element and

solid-state circuitry)

Basic protect ive relay functions (overcurrent relays, directional overcurrent relays, reclosing relays, voltage relays

and auxiliary relays)

Differential relays

Different ial relay operation; current backfeed and different ial relay operation; types

Transfer tripping

Function of transfer tripping; transfer tripping example; communication channels and equipment

Distance relays

Function of distance relays; zoned protection; construction and operation of a distance relay

Pilot wire relaying

Pilot wire relaying system components and operation; pilot wire relay components and operation

Breaker failure relaying system components and operation

Timing relay components and operation

Course 120 of 245

Maintenance

ELECTRICAL MAINTENANCE: Troubleshooting Electrical Circuits (IHRDC_OM_AEETA)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the use of basic troubleshooting procedures to troubleshoot

problems in electrical circuits. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to identify and describe the mainsteps of a

basic troubleshooting procedure and use the procedure to t roubleshoot problems in electrical equipments and electrical

systems.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Troubleshooting Fundamentals

Explain what troubleshooting is.

Ident ify and describe the main steps of a basic t roubleshooting procedure.

Describe how electrical tests can be used in the process of eliminat ion.

Describe two basic ways that the process of elimination can be used in t roubleshooting.

Troubleshooting Examples

Describe how to troubleshoot a problem in a piece of electrical equipment.

Describe how to troubleshoot a problem in an electrical system.

Subjects:

Troubleshooting Fundamentals

What is Troubleshooting?

The Process of Elimination

Troubleshooting Examples

Electrical Equipment

Electrical Systems

Course 121 of 245

Maintenance

ELECTRICAL THEORY: AC Circuits (IHRDC_OM_AEEAC)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic concepts associated with the operation of AC circuits.

After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to explain how current flows through AC circuits and how AC current and

voltage are affected by inductance and capacitance. They should also be able to define t rue power, reactive power,

apparent power, and power factor, and to identify various types of single-phase and three-phase systems.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Alternating Current

Explain the difference between direct current and alternating current.

Explain how current flow and polarity change in AC circuits.

Describe a sine wave that represents AC voltage.

Explain what frequency is, and how it is measured.

Define peak value, peak-to-peak value, and effective value with respect to AC voltage and current.

Inductance

Define inductance and inductive reactance.

Explain how inductive reactance limits current flow.

Explain how the inductive reactance in a circuit can be increased.

Describe the effects of inductance on current and voltage.

Capacitance

Define capacitance and capacit ive reactance.

Explain how a capacitor is charged.

Describe the effects of capacitance on current and voltage.

AC Power

Different iate between true power, reactive power, and apparent power.

Explain how power factor is used in calculating true power in AC circuits.

Explain how a three-wire single-phase AC system supplies two different voltages.

Different iate between delta-connected and wye-connected three-phase AC systems.

Subjects:

Alternating Current

Current Flow

Sine Waves

Peak Values and Effective Values

Inductance

Inductance and Induct ive Reactance

Factors That Affect Inductive Reactance

Inductance, Current, and Voltage

Capacitance

Capacitance and Capacit ive Reactance

Capacitance, Current and Voltage

AC Power

True Power, Reactive Power, and Apparent Power

Single Phase and Three-Phase Systems

Course 122 of 245

Maintenance

ELECTRICAL THEORY: Basic Electricity Review (IHRDC_OM_AEBER)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with some of the basic principles associated with electricity and

electrical circuits. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to explain where electricity comes from; what voltage,

current, and resistance are; and how their values can be calculated for various types of circuits. They should also be able to

explain how electrical circuits are affected by induct ion, inductance, and capacitance.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Basic Concepts

Explain what atoms are, and how they are constructed.

Explain what voltage is, and how it can be produced.

Explain what current is, and state the basic difference between direct current and alternating current.

Explain what resistance is, and state the basic difference between a conductor and an insulator.

Explain how voltage, current, and resistance can be measured.

Explain what power and electrical energy are and how they can be measured.

Explain how Ohm's Law relates to current, voltage, and resistance.

Explain how to use Ohm's Law to calculate current, voltage, or resistance when the other two values are

known.

Circuit Types

Describe the basic operating principles of a series circuit.

Explain how to calculate values for current, voltage, and resistance in a series circuit.

Describe the basic operating principles of a parallel circuit.

Explain how to calculate values for current, voltage, and resistance in a parallel circuit.

Describe the basic operating principles of a series-parallel circuit .

Explain how to calculate values for current, voltage, and resistance in a series-parallel circuit.

Circuit Characteristics

Explain what induction is and how voltage can be induced in a conductor.

Describe the basic operation of a transformer.

Explain what inductance is and how it affects electrical circuits.

Explain how the inductance of an inductor can be increased.

Explain what capacitance is and how it affects electrical circuits.

Describe the basic operation of a capacitor.

Subjects:

Basic Concepts

Where Does Electricity Come From?

Basic Electrical Quantit ies

Ohm's Law

Circuit Types

Series

Parallel

Series-Parallel

Circuit Characteristics

Induction

Inductance

Capacitance

Course 123 of 245

Maintenance

ELECTRICAL WIRING: Cables and Conductors (IHRDC_OM_AEECC)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic construction and installat ion of electrical cables

and conductors. After completing this unit , t rainees should be able to describe the basic const ruction of cables and

conductors, and how conductors are classified and rated. They should also be able to describe factors that affect the

installat ion of a conductor for a specific application, and how to make splices and terminations.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Basic Concepts

Describe the basic construction of conductors.

Describe how the physical characterist ics of a conductor's wires affect how the conductor is classified and

rated.

Describe how the physical characterist ics of a conductor's insulation affect how the conductor is classified and

rated.

Installation Requirements

Describe factors that determine the current requirements of a circuit.

Describe factors that determine the voltage requirements of a circuit.

Describe characterist ics in an environment that affect the type of conductor that should be installed.

Explain how environmental temperatures affect the type of conductor that should be installed.

Electrical Connections

Describe factors that should be considered when a mechanical connector is selected.

Describe factors that should be considered when replacement insulat ion is selected.

Describe how to make a splice.

Describe how to make a termination.

Subjects:

Basic Concepts

Construction

Classifications and Rat ings

Installation Requirements

The Circuit

The Environment

Electrical Connections

Connectors and Replacement Insulation

Splices and Terminations

Course 124 of 245

Maintenance

ELECTRICAL WIRING: Conduit Installation (IHRDC_OM_AEECI)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic concepts of conduit and conduit fitt ings, and

typical methods of cutt ing, bending, and installing conduit . After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the

basic types of metallic and nonmetallic conduit, common types of conduit fitt ings, and procedures for cutt ing, bending, and

installing metallic and nonmetallic conduit.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Materials

Define terms that are commonly used to describe conduit and conduit installat ions.

Describe common types of metallic conduit .

Describe common types of nonmetallic conduit .

Fittings

Describe types of couplings that are used to connect conduit in a straight line.

Describe types of fit t ings that are used to change the direction of a conduit run.

Describe types of fit t ings that are used to secure conduit when it is installed.

Cutting

Describe a method for cutt ing rigid types of metal conduit.

Describe a method for cutt ing flexible types of metal conduit.

Describe methods for cutt ing nonmetallic conduit.

Bending

Describe different types of conduit bends and explain where they might be used in an installat ion.

Explain how bends affect conduit measurements.

Describe how rigid-type metal conduit can be bent.

Describe how rigid PVC can be bent.

Installing

Describe tasks associated with terminating conduit to an electrical control box.

Describe how conductors can be installed in conduit.

Subjects:

Materials

Overview

Metallic Conduit

Nonmetallic Conduit

Fittings

Making Straight Connections

Changing Run Direction

Securing Conduit

Bending

Bend Types

Measurements

Demonstrations

Installing

Termination to a Box

Pulling Conductors

Course 125 of 245

Maintenance

ELECTRICAL WIRING: Splices and Terminations (IHRDC_OM_AESAT)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with splices and terminations used in electrical systems of less than

600 volts. After completing this unit, the t rainees should be able to identify basic types of electrical wiring, conductor terminals,

and connectors; describe tools and materials required to make conductor splices and terminations; explain what makes a

good electrical connection; describe common types of splices; and explain how to connect conductors to a terminal box on a

3-phase AC motor.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Hardware and Accessories

Ident ify and describe basic types of electrical wiring.

Ident ify types of conductor terminals and connectors and describe the applications for which they are suitable.

Ident ify and describe tools and materials typically used in making conductor splices and terminations.

Making Connections

Ident ify the basic requirements for a good electrical connection.

Describe how to make some common types of splices and identify the applications for which each type of splice

is suitable.

Ident ify requirements for terminating conductors in enclosures.

Describe how to make up connections to a terminal box on a 3-pnase AC motor.

Subjects:

Hardware and Accessories

Types and Sizes of Conductors

Terminals

Solder Connectors

Solderless Connectors (Compression and Mechanical)

Ring Terminal

Spade (Fork) Terminal

Quick Disconnect Terminals

Butt Splice and Reducing Connectors

Compression Connector Variat ions

Mechanical Connectors

Dual-Rated Connectors

Wire Connectors

Strippers and Crimpers

Solder and Soldering Tools

Insulation (Tubing and Tapes)

Cable Ties and Cable Clips

Making Connections

De-energizing Electrical Systems

Stripping Insulation

Selecting Connectors, Materials

Common Splicing Methods (Western Union Splice, Rattail Joint, Fixture Joint ,

and Knotted Tap Joint)

Enclosures

Motor Connect ions

Course 126 of 245

Maintenance

FORKLIFTS: Operation (IHRDC_OM_AMFOO)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic design and operation of forklifts. After completing

this unit, t rainees should be able to describe how forklift s can be classified and identify the major features and common working

dimensions of a forklift . They should also be able to explain how to inspect a forklift , how to recharge or refuel a forklift , and how

to operate a forklift safely.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Basics

Describe ways in which forklifts can be classified and identify the types of forklifts that are most appropriate for

use in specific working condit ions.

Ident ify the major features of most forklifts.

Describe the common working dimensions of a forklift .

Describe how to operate a typical forklift .

Describe general safety considerations associated with forklift operation.

Routine Tasks

Describe tasks that are performed during typical forklift startup and prevent ive inspect ions.

Describe basic procedures and safety precautions associated with recharging electric forklifts and refueling

forklifts that have internal combustion engines.

Forklift Stability and Loads

Explain the basic principles of forklift stability and describe how they affect forklift operation.

Describe general guidelines for handling loads safely with a forklift .

Subjects:

Basics

Types of Forklift s

Major Features

Basic Forklift Operation

Forklift Traffic Safety

Routine Tasks

Inspections

Recharging and Refueling

Forklift Stability and Loads

Stability

Handling Loads

Course 127 of 245

Maintenance

GEARS: Overhauls (IHRDC_OM_AMGG1)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to explain major tasks involved in gearbox overhauls. Trainees learn about disassembly

and reassembly procedures for two types of gearboxes: a double action unit and a worm gear unit. Trainees will also learn

typical checks and measurements performed during gearbox overhauls.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Disassembly and Reassembly

Describe precautions associated with the disassembly of a double-reduction gearbox.

Describe one way to remove the upper housing of a double-reduction gearbox.

Describe how to remove the bearing endcaps and internal components of a double-reduction gearbox.

Describe common methods of removing and installing a gear on its shaft.

Describe precautions associated with gearbox reassembly.

Describe the installat ion of the gears and endcaps in a typical double-reduction gearbox.

Describe how to complete the reassembly of a typical double-reduction gearbox.

Ident ify differences in preparing a unit to be stored and preparing a unit to be returned to service.

Checks and Measurement

Describe the procedure to check for shaft endplay.

Describe the procedure to check for backlash and tooth contact.

Describe the procedure to check for shaft runout.

Worm Gearset

Ident ify the main components of a motor actuator that uses a worm gearset.

Describe one way to disassemble a worm gearbox.

Describe one way to reassemble a worm gearbox.

Explain how tooth contact checks are made on a worm gear arrangement.

Subjects:

Disassembly and Reassembly

Disassembly

Gear Removal and Replacement

Reassembly

Checks and Measurements

Endplay

Backlash and Tooth Contact

Shaft Runout

Worm Gearsets

Basic Components

Disassembly

Reassembly

Course 128 of 245

Maintenance

GEARS: Types and Characteristics (IHRDC_OM_AMGG2)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to int roduce trainees to gears and gear arrangements. After completing this unit ,

t rainees should know how a gearset basically works. They should be familiar with different types of gears and gear

arrangements, and understand commonly used gear terminology. They should also be able to identify common gear problems.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Fundamentals

Describe the function of gears.

Describe how power, speed, and torque are involved in the operation of gears.

Describe characterist ics of spur gears.

Describe characterist ics of bevel gears.

Describe characterist ics of spiral bevel gears.

Describe characterist ics of helical gears.

Describe characterist ics of hypoid gears.

Describe characterist ics of worm gears.

Define the term backlash.

Define the term endplay.

Define the term tooth contact.

Gearsets

Ident ify the components of a typical gearbox.

Describe characterist ics of a mechanical differential gearset arrangement.

Gear Problems

Ident ify some problems that can cause bearing failure.

Describe gear tooth breakage and some condit ions that can cause it .

Describe some gear lubricat ion problems.

Describe how scoring affects gears.

Describe how pitt ing affects gears.

Subjects:

Fundamentals

Speed and Torque

Basic Types of Gears

Worm Gears

Backlash, Endplay, and Tooth Contact

Gearsets

Basic Gearbox Components

Mechanical Differentials

Gear Problems

Bearing Failures

Tooth Breakage

Improper Lubrication

Scoring and Pitt ing

Course 129 of 245

Maintenance

HYDRAULICS: Actuators (IHRDC_OM_AHHAC)

Overview:

This unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the operation of various types of cylinders and hydraulic motors in hydraulic

systems. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the basic components and common types of single-

acting cylinders and double-acting cylinders. They should also be able to describe the basic components and operation of

common types of vane motors, gear motors, piston motors, and part ial rotation actuators.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Cylinders

Describe the basic components and operation of a single-acting load-return cylinder.

Describe the basic components and operation of a single-acting spring return cylinder.

Describe the basic components and operation of a telescoping cylinder.

Describe the basic components and operation of a double-acting cylinder.

Describe the basic components and operation of a double-rod cylinder.

Describe the basic functions of piston rings, rod seals, rod wipers, and cylinder cushions.

Describe how fixed and pivoting cylinder mountings can be used to mount linear actuators.

Motors

Describe the basic components and operation of a vane motor.

Explain what a balanced vane motor is.

Describe the basic components and operation of an external gear motor.

Describe the basic components and operation of an internal gear motor.

Describe the basic components and operation of a gerotor motor.

Describe the basic components and operation of an in-line piston motor.

Describe the basic components and operation of a variable displacement in-line piston motor.

Describe the basic components and operation of a bent-axis piston motor.

Describe the basic components and operation of a vane type rotary actuator.

Describe the basic components and operation of a crank type piston actuator.

Describe the basic components and operation of a rack type piston actuator.

Subjects:

Cylinders

Single-Acting

Double-Act ing

Features

Motors

Vane

Gear

Piston

Part ial Rotation Actuators

Course 130 of 245

Maintenance

HYDRAULICS: Component Inspection and Replacement (IHRDC_OM_AHHCI)

Overview:

This unit is designed to familiarize trainees with typical procedures for removing, inspecting, reassembling, and reinstalling

hydraulic system components. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe typical procedures for

disassembling, inspecting, recondit ioning, reassembling, and reinstalling valves, pumps, and cylinders.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Removal and Inspection

Describe general precaut ions and preparations for safely removing and disassembling components from a

hydraulic system.

Describe typical procedures for disassembling and inspecting valves that are commonly used in hydraulic

systems.

Describe typical procedures for disassembling and inspecting a fixed displacement vane pump.

Describe typical procedures for disassembling and inspecting a hydraulic cylinder.

Reassembly and Reinstallation

Describe general procedures for reassembling and reinstalling hydraulic system components.

Describe typical procedures for recondit ioning, reassembling, and reinstalling valves that are used in a hydraulic

system

Describe typical procedures for recondit ioning and reassembling a fixed displacement vane pump.

Describe typical procedures for reinstalling a pressure compensated, variable displacement piston pump.

Describe typical procedures for recondit ioning, reassembling, and reinstalling a hydraulic cylinder.

Subjects:

Removal and Inspection

Basic Preparations

Valve Inspection

Pump Inspection

Cylinder Inspection

Reassembly and Reinstallation

General Guidelines

Valve Recondit ioning and Reinstallat ion

Pump Recondit ioning and Reinstallat ion

Cylinder Recondit ioning and Reinstallat ion

Course 131 of 245

Maintenance

HYDRAULICS: Diagrams (IHRDC_OM_AHHDI)

Overview:

This unit is designed to familiarize trainees with hydraulic system schematic diagrams. After completing this unit, t rainees should

be able to interpret symbols that are used in hydraulic system schematic diagrams and use schematic diagrams to trace fluid

flow through various types of hydraulic circuits.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Symbols

Ident ify symbols used to represent the basic parts of a hydraulic circuit.

Ident ify types of lines represented on a hydraulic schematic diagram.

Ident ify symbols used to represent the following pumps: unidirectional fixed displacement, bi-directional fixed

displacement, unidirectional variable displacement, bi-directional variable displacement.

Ident ify symbols used to represent the following components: reservoirs, accumulators, heaters, coolers, and

filters.

Ident ify symbols used to represent the following linear actuators: single-act ing, double-act ing, fixed cushion

cylinder and adjustable cushion.

Ident ify symbols used to represent the following hydraulic motors: unidirectional, fixed displacement,

bi-directional, fixed displacement, unidirectional, variable displacement, bi-directional, variable displacement.

Ident ify symbols used to represent the following valves: pressure relief valve, flow control valve, and directional

control valve.

Reading Diagrams

Describe basic guidelines for reading hydraulic schematic diagrams.

Use a schematic diagram to describe how fluid flows through an automatic venting circuit .

Use a schematic diagram to describe how fluid flows though an accumulator circuit.

Use a schematic diagram to describe how fluid flows through a regenerat ive circuit.

Subjects:

Symbols

Overview

Pumps

Fluid Storage and Fluid Containers

Actuators

Valves

Reading Diagrams

Diagram Reading Basics

Automatic Venting Circuit

Accumulator Circuit

Regenerative Circuit

Course 132 of 245

Maintenance

HYDRAULICS: Fluid and Reservoirs (IHRDC_OM_AHHFS)

Overview:

This unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the fluid used in hydraulic systems and with the basic functions and uses of filters

and st rainers, reservoirs, conductors, and accumulators. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the

functions, characterist ics, and types of fluid that may be used in hydraulic systems. They should also be able to describe typical

uses of filters and strainers, the components and accessories of typical reservoirs, the various types of conductors and fit t ings,

and the basic functions and common uses of accumulators in hydraulic systems.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Hydraulic Fluid

Describe the functions of the fluid in a hydraulic system.

Describe propert ies that are considered when hydraulic fluid is selected for a specific application.

Describe the basic characterist ics of various types of hydraulic fluid.

Explain how filters and strainers can be classified.

Describe typical uses of strainers and filters in hydraulic systems.

Reservoirs and Conductors

State the function of a reservoir in a hydraulic system.

Describe the components and accessories of a typical hydraulic fluid reservoir.

Describe various types of heat exchangers that may be used with hydraulic fluid reservoirs.

Describe types of conductors and fitt ings that are used in hydraulic systems.

Accumulators

Describe the basic function and common uses of accumulators in hydraulic systems.

Describe the components and operat ion of various types of accumulators.

Subjects:

Hydraulic Fluid

Types of Fluid

Filters and St rainers

Reservoirs and Conductors

Reservoirs

Conductors

Accumulators

Function and Applications

Types of Accumulators

Course 133 of 245

Maintenance

HYDRAULICS: Principles and Circuits (IHRDC_OM_AHHPC)

Overview:

This unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the principles of hydraulic system operation and the components and operation

of some typical hydraulic circuits. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to explain how force is transmitted through

a liquid and how pressure and flow are related in a hydraulic system. They should also be able to describe the main concepts

and basic operation of several types of hydraulic circuits.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Principles

Explain what a liquid is and how liquids differ from solids and gases.

Explain how force is transmitted through a liquid.

Define the following terms: pressure, head, atmospheric pressure, vacuum, laminar flow, turbulent flow, velocity,

and flow rate.

Describe the relationship between pressure and flow in a hydraulic system.

Circuits

List the main components of a basic hydraulic circuit and describe the funct ion of each component.

Describe the basic operation of an automatic vent ing circuit.

Describe the basic operation of an accumulator circuit.

Describe the basic operation of a regenerative circuit.

Subjects:

Principles

Characterist ics of Liquids

Pressure and Flow

Circuits

Circuit Components

Typical Hydraulic Circuits

Course 134 of 245

Maintenance

HYDRAULICS: Pumps (IHRDC_OM_AHHPU)

Overview:

This unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the operation of various types of pumps in hydraulic systems. After completing

this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the basic operation of common types of gear pumps, vane pumps, radial piston

pumps, axial piston pumps, and pressure compensated piston pumps.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Types of Pumps

Describe the basic operation of a hydraulic power circuit .

Describe the role of a pump in a typical hydraulic power circuit.

Describe how posit ive displacement pumps work and explain why they are used in hydraulic power circuits.

Describe the differences between a fixed displacement pump and a variable displacement pump.

Rotary Pumps

Describe the basic operation of an external gear pump.

Describe the basic operation of an internal gear pump.

Describe the basic operation of a gerotor pump.

Describe the basic operation of an unbalanced vane pump.

Describe the basic operation of a pressure compensated vane pump.

Describe the basic operation of a balanced vane pump.

Piston Pumps

Describe the basic operation of a fixed displacement radial piston pump.

Describe the basic operation of a variable displacement radial piston pump.

Describe the basic operation of a fixed displacement axial piston pump.

Describe the basic operation of a variable displacement axial pump.

Describe the basic operation of a fixed displacement bent-axis pump.

Describe the basic operation of a variable displacement bent-axis pump.

Describe the basic operation of a pressure compensated axial piston pump.

Subjects:

Types of Pumps

Pump Basics

Posit ive Displacement Pumps

Rotary Pumps

Gear Pumps

Vane Pumps

Piston Pumps

Radial Piston Pumps

Axial Piston Pumps

Pressure Compensated Piston Pumps

Course 135 of 245

Maintenance

HYDRAULICS: Routine Maintenance (IHRDC_OM_AHHRM)

Overview:

This unit is designed to familiarize trainees with tasks associated with the regular or routine maintenance of hydraulic systems.

After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe general considerations and safety precautions associated with

routine maintenance. They should also be able to describe procedures for performing external inspect ions and for maintaining

the hydraulic fluid, the reservoir, filters and strainers, accumulators, and heat exchangers.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

General Recommendations

Describe what routine maintenance is, and state its purpose.

Describe four steps involved in establishing a rout ine maintenance program.

Describe personal protective equipment and clothing that should be worn by personnel performing routine

maintenance tasks.

Ident ify hazards of hydraulic fluid spills and describe one method of cleaning up a spill.

Describe what is generally meant by lock out and tag out and describe the purpose of such a procedure.

System Inspections

List components that are typically checked during a visual inspection and explain why they are checked.

Describe problems to look for during a visual inspection of fluid lines on an operating hydraulic system.

Ident ify areas where fluid leaks are commonly found, and describe possible causes.

Describe the term starving the pump and identify one possible cause.

Explain what a sounding rod is, and describe specific condit ions or malfunctions that can cause components to

make unusual sounds.

Define the term hot spot and explain how hot spots can be detected in a hydraulic system.

List possible causes of excessive vibration in a hydraulic system and list some possible results of this problem.

Component Maintenance

Describe two types of contaminants that are typically found in hydraulic fluid, and identify likely causes of each.

Describe how filters and strainers are maintained and explain why they must be maintained.

Describe a procedure for cleaning a hydraulic reservoir and explain the purpose of this task.

Explain the purpose of checking the charge of a nitrogen-charged accumulator.

Describe a procedure for cleaning an air-cooled heat exchanger, and explain why this is necessary.

Subjects:

General Recommendations

Establishing a Program

Safety

System Inspections

Visual Inspections

Other External Inspections

Component Maintenance

Fluid and Reservoir

Accumulators and Heat Exchangers

Course 136 of 245

Maintenance

HYDRAULICS: Troubleshooting (IHRDC_OM_AHHTR)

Overview:

This unit is designed to familiarize trainees with general steps for analyzing problems in hydraulic systems. After completing this

unit, t rainees should be able to explain how to ident ify problems in hydraulic systems and describe common problems

associated with hydraulic system components.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Problem Analysis

Ident ify prerequisite knowledge and skills that mechanics should have in order to troubleshoot hydraulic systems

effectively.

Ident ify the basic steps of the troubleshooting process.

Describe the process of identifying a problem and taking prevent ive action in immediate response to a

hydraulic system operating problem.

Describe how to evaluate common general symptoms of problems in a hydraulic system.

Describe common methods for applying the process of elimination to troubleshoot problems in hydraulic

systems.

Describe major concerns associated with correcting problems and safely returning a hydraulic system to service.

Component Problems

Describe common problems that may be associated with the hydraulic fluid, hoses, and accumulators in a

hydraulic system.

Describe common problems that may be associated with the valves in a hydraulic system.

Describe common problems that may be associated with the cylinders in a hydraulic system.

Describe common problems that may be associated with the pumps and hydraulic motors in a hydraulic

system.

Subjects:

Problem Analysis

Basics

Immediate Response

Problem Correct ion

Component Problems

Fluid, Hose, and Accumulator Problems

Valve Problems

Cylinder Problems

Pump and Hydraulic Motor Problems

Course 137 of 245

Maintenance

HYDRAULICS: Valves 1 (IHRDC_OM_AHHV1)

Overview:

This unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic design and operation of various types of valves used in hydraulic

systems. After completing this unit, t rainees will be able to describe the functions of flow and pressure in a hydraulic system, and

identify and describe various types of manually adjusted valves, sliding spool valves, and spring-biased valves. They should also

be able to describe various ways in which valves can be actuated.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Valve Basics

Define flow and describe its function in a hydraulic system.

Define pressure and describe its funct ion in a hydraulic system.

Explain the functions of valves in a hydraulic system.

Explain the term thrott ling.

Ident ify and describe a typical needle valve.

Ident ify and describe a typical globe valve.

Ident ify and describe a typical plug valve.

Ident ify and describe a typical ball valve.

Ident ify and describe a typical gate valve.

Actuated Valves

Ident ify and describe the main components of a typical directional control, sliding spool valve.

Explain posit ioning of a directional control sliding spool valve.

Ident ify and describe a typical check valve.

Ident ify and describe a typical relief valve.

Ident ify and describe a typical pressure reducing valve.

Define cracking pressure and pressure override.

Describe three methods of valve actuat ion.

Explain what a solenoid does, and describe two different types of solenoids.

Describe a servo system and explain what it does.

Describe what a pilot-operated valve is and how it works.

Subjects:

Valve Basics

Basic Principles

Manually-Adjusted Valves

Actuated Valves

Sliding Spool Valves

Spring-Biased Valves

Methods of Actuation

Course 138 of 245

Maintenance

HYDRAULICS: Valves 2 (IHRDC_OM_AHHV2)

Overview:

This unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the functions performed by various types of valves in hydraulic systems. After

completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe how valves control flow rate, flow direction, and pressure in a hydraulic

system. They should be able to describe the basic operat ion of a pressure-compensated flow control valve, a temperature-

compensated flow control valve, various types of flow control circuits, a pressure reducing valve, a relief valve, a sequence

valve, and a counterbalance valve.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Flow and Directional Control

Describe what a non-adjustable orifice is and what it does.

List three factors that affect thrott led flow through a valve.

Describe how a pressure-compensated flow control valve works.

Describe how a temperature-compensated flow control valve works.

Ident ify three different flow control circuits.

Describe a bleed-off circuit and how it is used.

Describe a meter-in circuit and how it is used.

Describe a meter-out circuit and how it is used.

Explain how a directional control sliding spool valve controls fluid direction in a hydraulic system.

Pressure Control

Explain what a pressure reducing valve does and how it works.

Explain what a relief valve does and how it works.

Explain what a sequence valve does and how it works.

Explain what a counterbalance valve does and how it works.

Subjects:

Flow and Directional Control

Flow Control Valves

Flow Control Circuits

Directional Control

Pressure Control

Pressure Reduction and Relief

Sequencing and Counterbalancing

Course 139 of 245

Maintenance

LUBRICATION: Lubrication Basics (IHRDC_OM_AMLBA)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the propert ies and uses of various types of lubricants. After

completing this unit, t rainees should be able to explain why lubricants are used and describe some characterist ic propert ies of

lubricants. They should also be able to describe procedures for storing, handling, and applying lubricants.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Introduction to Lubrication

Describe three types of frict ion, three types of lubricants, and three levels of lubrication.

Describe some of the characterist ic propert ies of lubricants.

Ident ify factors that usually affect the selection of a lubricant for a specific situation.

Explain how to use a typical lubrication chart.

Storing and Handling Lubricants

Describe proper procedures for, and safety concerns associated with the storage of lubricants.

Describe common types of lubricant equipment.

Describe common safety concerns and precautions that are associated with the handling of lubricants.

Describe common procedures for handling, dispensing, and applying lubricants.

Oils and Greases

Describe some of the typical groups of general oils.

Describe common methods of oil lubrication.

Describe some unique propert ies of greases.

Compare the uses of greases and oils for lubrication.

Describe some common methods of applying grease.

Subjects:

Introduction to Lubrication

Frict ion and Lubrication

Propert ies of Lubricants

Lubricant Selection

Storing and Handling Lubricants

Lubricant Storage

Lubrication Equipment

Lubricant Handling

Oils and Greases

Types of Oils

Oil Lubrication

Propert ies of Grease

Applying Grease

Course 140 of 245

Maintenance

MATH: Basics of Math (IHRDC_OM_AMMBA)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic mathematical applications that can be used on the

job. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to interpret measurements that include fractions and decimal values,

measurements in English and metric units, and perform mathematical applications involving fractions and decimals. They

should also be able to calculate dimensions associated with rectangles, t riangles, and circles.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Working With Numbers

Interpret measurements that include fract ions.

Add and subtract fractional measurements.

Mult iply and divide fractional measurements.

Convert a fraction to a decimal, and a decimal to a fraction.

Convert a decimal to a percent, and a percent to a decimal.

Perform mathematical operations with decimal numbers.

Use a calculator to perform mathematical operations.

Round off a decimal to a specific number of places.

Interpret measurements in metric units.

Angles and Shapes

Explain what an angle is, and how angles are measured.

Explain what a rectangle is, and define the terms length and width.

Explain what a t riangle is, and define the terms base and height.

Explain what a circle is, and define the terms diameter and radius.

Calculate the perimeter of a rectangle.

Calculate the length of the hypotenuse of a right angle.

Calculate the circumference of a circle.

Areas and Volumes

Calculate the area of a rectangle, a right triangle, and a circle.

Calculate the volume of a rectangular solid.

Calculate the volume of a cylinder.

Subjects:

Working With Numbers

Fractions and Measurements

Working With Fractions

Decimals

Using a Calculator

Metric Measurements

Angles and Shapes

Angles

Rectangles, Triangles, and Circles

Working With Shapes

Areas and Volumes

Areas

Volumes

Course 141 of 245

Maintenance

PIPES AND VALVES: Motor Operators (IHRDC_OM_AMPMO)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic operat ion and maintenance of motor operators.

After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to identify the main parts of a motor operator and explain how a motor

operator opens and closes a valve. They should also be able to describe the parts and operation of limit and torque switches,

and explain how these switches can be replaced and adjusted. In addit ion, they should be able to describe preventive

maintenance procedures for a motor operator and explain how to troubleshoot a motor operator problem.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Mechanical Components

Name the basic parts of a typical motor operator and describe the function of each part .

Describe how the gears in a typical motor operator work during motor-driven operation and during manual

operation.

Electrical Controls

Describe the parts and operation of a typical rotary drum limit switch, and explain how the switch is replaced

and adjusted.

Describe the parts and operation of a typical torque switch, and explain how the switch is replaced and

adjusted.

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Describe preventive maintenance procedures for a typical motor operator.

Explain how to troubleshoot a typical motor operator.

Subjects:

Mechanical Components

Basic Components

Motor and Gear Operation

Electrical Controls

Limit Switches

Torque Switches

Maintenance and Troubleshooting


Troubleshooting

Course 142 of 245

Maintenance

PIPES AND VALVES: Pipes and Pipe Fittings (IHRDC_OM_AMPPP)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with common types of pipes, pipe joints, and pipe fit t ings, and to

provide general guidelines for working with pipes. After completing this unit , t rainees should be able to identify common

materials used to make pipes, and explain how pipes are identified and sized. They should also be able to identify common

types of pipe joints and pipe fitt ings, and describe procedures for calculating pipe lengths, cutt ing pipe, and threading pipe.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Basics

Ident ify some common materials used to make pipe and describe characterist ics of those materials.

Describe how pipes are usually sized and explain how they are marked for identification.

Describe some common signs of wear and damage to look for during a pipe inspection.

State some basic guidelines for handling and storing pipes.

Joints and Fittings

Ident ify some common types of pipe joints and describe their characterist ics.

Ident ify some common types of pipe fit t ings and describe their funct ions.

Installation

Describe some basic methods for calculating the length of pipe needed between fitt ings.

Ident ify some common tools used to cut pipe and explain how they operate.

Explain how to use a pipe die to cut threads in a pipe.

Subjects:

Basics

Pipe Materials

Sizes and Identification

Inspection, Handling, and Storage

Joints and Fittings

Joints

Fitt ings

Installation

Calculating Pipe Length

Cutt ing Pipe

Threading Pipe

Course 143 of 245

Maintenance

PIPES AND VALVES: Safety Valves (IHRDC_OM_AMPSV)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic operat ion and maintenance of types of safety

valves commonly found in indust rial facilit ies. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the parts and

operation of a huddling chamber safety valve, a safety-relief valve, and a pilot-actuated relief valve. They should also be able

to describe procedures for inspecting, disassembling, reassembling, and test ing a safety valve.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Types of Safety Valves

Describe the parts and operation of a typical huddling chamber safety valve.

Describe the parts and operation of a typical safety-relief valve and a typical pilot-actuated valve.

Safety Valve Maintenance

Describe the procedure for performing an external inspect ion on a safety valve.

Describe procedures for disassembling a safety valve and inspecting its internal components.

Describe procedures for reassembling and test ing a safety valve before putt ing it in service.

Subjects:

Types of Safety Valves

Huddling Chamber Safety Valves

Specialized Relief Valves

Safety Valve Maintenance

External Inspection

Disassembly and Inspection

Reassembly and Test ing

Course 144 of 245

Maintenance

PIPES AND VALVES: Steam Traps (IHRDC_OM_AMPST)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic operat ion and maintenance of types of steam

traps commonly found in industrial facilit ies. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe functions commonly

performed by steam traps, describe common types of steam traps, and describe procedures for performing steam trap surveys

and replacing worn or damaged steam trap components.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Basics

Describe functions typically performed by steam traps.

Describe the components of a typical steam trap station.

Types of Steam Traps

Describe the basic operation of two common types of mechanical steam traps: inverted bucket and float, and

thermostatic.

Describe the basic operation of two common types of thermostatic steam traps: bellows and

bi-metallic.Describe the basic operation of a typical thermodynamic disc-type steam trap.

Inspecting and Replacing

Describe what to check for during a survey or inspection of a steam trap stat ion.

Describe typical procedures for performing a temperature inspection, a sound inspection, and a visual

inspection of a steam trap.

Describe a typical procedure for replacing worn or damaged steam trap components.

Subjects:

Basics

Functions of Steam Traps

Steam Trap Stat ions

Types of Steam Traps

Mechanical Traps

Thermostatic Traps

Inspecting and Replacing

Surveying Steam Trap Stations

Surveying Steam Traps

Replacing Steam Traps

Course 145 of 245

Maintenance

PIPES AND VALVES: Valve Maintenance (IHRDC_OM_AMPV2)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic procedures for performing routing maintenance on

a valve and for performing a valve overhaul. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe tasks involved in

preparing for valve maintenance and explain how to adjust and replace valve packing. They should also be able to describe

how to disassemble a valve, inspect its parts, perform maintenance on it , and reassemble it .

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Routine Maintenance

Describe tasks typically completed in preparation for performing maintenance on a valve.

Describe how to adjust packing in a valve.

Describe how to remove packing from a valve.

Describe how to replace the packing in a valve.

Valve Overhaul

Describe a basic procedure for disassembling a valve.

Describe tasks associated with inspecting the parts of a valve.

Explain how lapping and spott ing-in are performed on a valve seating area.

Describe a basic procedure for reassembling a valve and returning it to service.

Subjects:

Routine Maintenance

Maintenance Preparations

Adjust ing and Replacing Packing

Valve Overhaul


Maintenance

Reassembly

Course 146 of 245

Maintenance

PIPES AND VALVES: Valve Types and Operation (IHRDC_OM_AMPV1)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic components and operation of valves commonly

found in industrial sites. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to explain how valves can be classified, describe the

parts and operation of various types of valves, and describe how valves can be operated.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Valve Fundamentals

Describe the basic purpose of a valve.

Ident ify the basic components of a valve.

Ident ify the valves that are commonly classified.

Valve Types

Describe the basic components and operation of a gate valve.

Describe the basic components and operation of common types of globe valves.

Describe the basic components and operation of a plug valve, a ball valve, and a butterfly valve.

Describe the basic components and operation of a diaphragm valve.

Describe the basic components and operation of a swing check valve, a lift check valve, and a ball check

valve.

Valve Operation

Describe how a handwheel is used to operate a valve.

Describe how a handle is used to operate a valve.

Ident ify and describe common types of pneumatically, hydraulically, and electrically powered mechanical

operators for valves.

Subjects:

Valve Fundamentals

Valve Characterist ics

Valve Classificat ions

Valve Types

Gate Valves

Globe Valves

Plug, Ball, and Butterfly Valves

Diaphragm Valves

Check Valves

Valve Operation

Manual Operation

Mechanical Operators

Course 147 of 245

Maintenance

PUMPS: Centrifugal Pump Basics and Troubleshooting (IHRDC_OM_AMPC1)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic operat ion of centrifugal pumps and general

procedures for troubleshooting centrifugal pump problems. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the

basic operation of a centrifugal pump, explain how centrifugal pumps can be classified, identify the main parts of a centrifugal

pump, and describe problems that can occur in them.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Pump Basics

Name the two most common types of pumps and describe the differences between them.

Describe the basic operation of a centrifugal pump.

Ident ify and describe characterist ics that are used to classify centrifugal pumps.

Describe advantages and applications of various types of centrifugal pumps.

Pump Parts

Name the main external parts of a centrifugal pump and describe the function of each.

Name the main internal parts of a centrifugal pump and describe the function of each.

Troubleshooting

Describe some general considerations associated with troubleshooting a centrifugal pump.

Describe symptoms of a centrifugal pump problem that can be heard, and list the probable causes of those

symptoms.

Describe the causes and effects of cavitation, and explain how it can be eliminated.

Describe symptoms of a centrifugal pump problem that can be seen, and list the probable causes of those

symptoms.

Describe symptoms of a centrifugal pump problem that can be felt , and list the probable causes of those

symptoms.

Describe some general preparations for working on a pump.

Describe some problems that can be detected by inspecting the internal parts of a centrifugal pump.

Subjects:

Pump Basics

Types of Pumps

Centrifugal Pump Operat ion

Classification of Centrifugal Pumps

Pump Parts

External Parts

Internal Parts

Troubleshooting

General Considerations

Common Symptoms

Internal Problems

Course 148 of 245

Maintenance

PUMPS: Centrifugal Pump Overhaul (IHRDC_OM_AMPC2)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic procedures for overhauling a centrifugal pump. After

completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe preparations for a centrifugal pump overhaul, procedures for

disassembling a centrifugal pump, inspecting its parts, and reassembling it .

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Preliminary Steps

Describe general preparations for a centrifugal pump overhaul.

Describe safety precautions that should be taken as part of preparing to work on a centrifugal pump.

Describe a procedure for removing the upper half of a horizontally split centrifugal pump casing.

Describe a procedure for preliminary inspection of the internal parts of a centrifugal pump.

Disassembly and Assembly

Describe a procedure for disassembling the internal parts of a centrifugal pump.

Ident ify the parts of a centrifugal pump to be inspected and state what to look for in each part.

Describe how to measure the clearance between a casing wearing ring and an impeller.

Explain how to determine if casing wearing rings are round.

Describe the procedure for performing a shaft runout test .

Reassembly

List steps that are commonly taken in preparing to reassemble a centrifugal pump.

Describe a procedure for reinstalling an impeller.

Describe a procedure for reassembling and reinstalling a rotor.

Describe a procedure for reassembling the casing of a centrifugal pump.

Subjects:

Preliminary Steps

Preparation

Casing Removal

Preliminary Inspect ion


Disassembly

Inspection

Wearing Ring Measurements

Shaft Tests

Reassembly

Reinstalling the Impeller

Reassembling and Reinstalling the Rotor

Reassembling the Casing

Course 149 of 245

Maintenance

PUMPS: Multistage Centrifugal (IHRDC_OM_AMPMC)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic operat ion, disassembly, and reassembly of a typical

mult istage centrifugal pump. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the components and operation of

a mult istage centrifugal pump and explain how this kind of pump can be disassembled and reassembled when necessary.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Basic Concepts

Ident ifyand describe the components of a typical mult istage centrifugal pump.

Describe the operation of a typical mult istage centrifugal pump.

Describe techniques that are commonly used to minimize axial thrust in a mult istage centrifugal pump.

Describe techniques that are commonly used to minimize radial thrust in a mult istage centrifugal pump.

Ident ify problems commonly found in mult istage centrifugal pumps.

Describe techniques used to ident ify problems in a mult istage centrifugal pump.

Pump Assembly

Describe tasks that are commonly part of preparing for a pump disassembly.

Describe a general procedure for disassembling an axially split mult istage centrifugal pump.

Describe tasks that are commonly performed when a radially split mult istage centrifugal pump is disassembled.

Describe tasks that are commonly performed as part of removing components from a pump shaft assembly.

Pump Reassembly

Describe tasks that are commonly performed when pump shaft assembly components are installed.

Describe a general procedure for reassembling an axially split mult istage centrifugal pump.

Describe tasks that are commonly performed when a radially split mult istage centrifugal pump is reassembled.

Describe tasks that are commonly performed when a mult istage centrifugal pump is returned to service.

Subjects:

Basic Concepts

Types of Mult istage Centrifugal Pumps


Minimizing Axial and Radial Thrust

Ident ifying Common Problems

Pump Disassembly

Preparations

Axially Split Pumps

Radially Split Pumps

Shaft Assemblies

Pump Reassembly

Shaft Assemblies

Axially Split Pumps

Radially Split Pumps

Return to Service

Course 150 of 245

Maintenance

PUMPS: Positive Displacement (IHRDC_OM_AMPPD)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic operat ion and maintenance of posit ive

displacement pumps. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the basic operation of various types of

reciprocating and rotary posit ive displacement pumps. They should also be able to describe how to prepare for overhauling a

posit ive displacement pump, disassemble the pump, clean and inspect its parts, and then reassemble it .

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Types and Operation

Describe the basic operation of a piston pump.

Describe the basic operation of a plunger pump.

Describe the basic operation of a diaphragm pump.

Describe the basic operation of a double-acting pump.

Explain what a duplex pump is.

Describe the basic operation of a screw pump.

Describe the basic operation of a gear pump.

Describe the basic operation of a lobe pump.

Describe the basic operation of a sliding vane pump.

Describe the basic operation of a flexible member pump.

Overhaul Preparations and Pump Assembly

Describe general preparations for a pump overhaul.

Describe basic tasks associated with disconnecting a pump from its motor and bedplate.

Explain how to remove the t iming gears and the outboard bearing bracket from a two-screw rotary pump.

Describe a basic procedure for removing mechanical seals from a two-screw rotary pump.

Describe basic guidelines for removing the rotors from a two-screw rotary pump.

Cleaning, Inspection, and Reassembly

Describe precautions associated with cleaning pump components.

Describe basic steps for inspect ing the components of a two-screw rotary pump.

Describe general preparations that should be made before a pump is reassembled.

Describe a basic procedure for reassembling a two-screw rotary pump.

Subjects:

Types and Operation

Reciprocating Pumps

Rotary Pumps

Overhaul Preparations and Pump Assembly

Overhaul Preparations

Init ial Disassembly

Final Disassembly

Cleaning, Inspection and Reassembly

Cleaning and Inspection

Reassembly

Course 151 of 245

Maintenance

RIGGING: Basic Lifting (IHRDC_OM_AMRLL)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the proper use of devices designed to lift and move loads.

After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe how to use a simple block and tackle, a compound block and

tackle, a hoist, a jack, a winch, a turnbuckle, and a load leveler. They should also be able to describe the effects of sling angles

and hitch patterns on a sling's lift ing ability.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Block and Tackle

Ident ify the parts of a simple block and tackle.

Describe the proper use of a simple block and tackle.

Ident ify the parts of a typical compound block and tackle.

Describe inspections that are typically performed before a compound block and tackle is used.

Explain what is involved in reeving a block and tackle.

Describe the proper use of a compound block and tackle.

Define mechanical advantage.

Explain how to use a formula to select the appropriate block and tackle needed to lift a given weight.

Hoists, Jacks, and Winches

Describe the basic operation of a chain hoist.

Describe the basic operation of a come-along.

Describe the basic operation of a ratchet jack.

Describe the basic operation of a screw jack.

Describe the basic operation of a hydraulic jack.

Describe basic safety precautions associated with using a jack.

Describe the basic operation of a winch.

Slings and Levelers

Describe the effects of sling angles on a sling's lift ing capacity.

Describe the effects of hitch patterns on a sling's lift ing capacity.

Describe how a turnbuckle can be used to adjust sling length.

Describe how a load leveler can be used to balance a load.

Subjects:

Block and Tackle

Simple Block and Tackle

Compound Block and Tackle

Mechanical Advantage

Hoists, Jacks and Winches

Hoists

Jacks

Winches

Slings and Levelers

Slings

Leveling Devices

Course 152 of 245

Maintenance

RIGGING: Heavy Lifting (IHRDC_OM_AMRHL)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with equipment and procedures used for lift ing and moving

heavy objects. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe various types of rigging hardware and cranes.

They should also be able to explain how to use lift ing capacity charts and how to balance loads.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Heavy Lifting Equipment

Describe the following rigging components and identify basic inspect ion checks that should be made to them:

Shackles

Hooks

Swivels

Turnbuckles

Rigging links and equalizer plates

Lift ing lugs and eyebolts

Spreader beams and lift ing beams

Tag lines

Heavy Lifting Procedures

Describe how to read and interpret lift ing capacity charts.

Describe load balancing techniques commonly used during heavy lift ing.

Describe basic procedures involved in planning and completing a heavy lift ing job using a crawler crane.

Subjects:

Heavy Lifting Equipment

Hardware

Bridge Cranes

Boom Cranes

Crane Inspections

Heavy Lifting Procedures

Capacity Charts

Load Balancing

Crawler Crane Job

Course 153 of 245

Maintenance

RIGGING: Ladders and Scaffolds (IHRDC_OM_AMRLS)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with various types of ladders and scaffolds that enable personnel

to work at elevated heights. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe how to select the proper ladder for

a job and then use the ladder safely. They should also be able to describe general safety precautions associated with using

scaffolds, and the basic operat ion and use of various types of fixed and powered scaffolds.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Ladders

Describe various types of ladders and their rat ings.

Explain how to select the proper ladder for the job.

Explain how to use a ladder safely.

Fixed Scaffolds

Describe general safety precautions associated with stationary, or fixed scaffolds.

Describe the assembly, use, and disassembly of a systems scaffold.

Describe the assembly, use, and disassembly of a tubular welded frame scaffold.

Powered Scaffolds

Describe the basic components and operation of a pneumatic scaffold.

Describe the basic components and operation of a hydraulic scaffold.

Subjects:

Ladders

Types of Ladders

Ladder Safety

Fixed Scaffolds

Scaffold Safety

Systems Scaffolds

Tubular Welded Frame Scaffolds

Powered Scaffolds

Pneumatic Scaffolds

Hydraulic Scaffolds

Course 154 of 245

Maintenance

RIGGING: Overview (IHRDC_OM_AMROV)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic principles involved in moving materials and

equipment from one place to another. After complet ing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the funct ions of various

types of rigging equipment and explain how to select and inspect equipment for a job that involves rigging.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Introduction to Rigging

Describe the basic characterist ics of fiber rope, wire rope, and chain.

Ident ify and describe the functions of the following end fitt ings and connectors: eye splices, thimbles, wire rope

clips, shackles, sockets, wedge sockets and hooks.

Ident ify and describe the uses bridle slings, choker hitch slings and basket hitch slings.

Explain how to inspect wire rope, chains, synthetic web slings, hooks, shackles and sockets, and equipment to

be rigged.

Derricks and Cranes

Ident ify the following types of derricks:

A-frame and Gin pole derricks

Guy derricks and St iffleg derricks

Chicago boom derricks

Ident ify the following types of cranes:

Crawler cranes

Truck-mounted cranes

Truck-mounted hydraulic cranes

Gantry-mounted cranes

Tower-mounted cranes

Hammerhead cranes

Rough-terrain cranes

Carrydeck cranes

Describe hand signals commonly used for different types of cranes.

Rigging and Moving Loads

Explain how to est imate the size and weight of a load.

Explain how to find a load's center of gravity.

Ident ify the following types of knots: bowline, running bowline, t imber hitch, half hitch, square know, clove hitch

and barrel hitch.

Describe the basic rigging safety precautions.

Describe basic steps involved in planning a rigging job.

Describe how to select the proper equipment for a rigging job.

Subjects:

Introduction to Rigging

Ropes and Chains

End Fitt ings, Connectors, and Slings

Equipment Inspections

Derricks and Cranes

Derricks and Cranes

Crane Hand Signals

Rigging and Moving Loads

Est imating Size, Weight, and Center of Gravity

Tying Knots

Rigging and Moving Materials and Equipment

Course 155 of 245

Maintenance

SAFETY: Basics (IHRDC_OM_AMSBA)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with hazards they may encounter on the job, and ways in which

they can protect themselves from these hazards. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe causes of

on-the-job accidents, explain how company safety policies can help prevent accidents, describe actions that can be taken to

make a work site safe, and explain how workers can protect themselves from electrical hazards and fire hazards.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Preventing Accidents

Describe causes of on-the-job accidents.

Explain how good housekeeping can prevent accidents.

Explain why it is important to follow all company safety policies.

Explain why it is important to report on-the-job injuries, accidents, and near misses.

Explain why it is important for workers to know and follow company evacuation procedures.

Work Site Safety

Describe typical personal protective equipment, and explain when and why each type of equipment is used.

Describe how to inspect and care for personal protect ive equipment.

Describe safe procedures for lift ing heavy objects.

Describe common workplace hazards.

Describe rules and guidelines for general work site safety.

Describe safety requirements for working in confined spaces.

Describe safe pract ices for operating or working near motorized vehicles.

Describe safe lockout/tagout procedures.

Describe safe pract ices for working around barriers and barricades.

State the purpose of the OSHA Hazard Communicat ion Standard and the function of Material Safety Data

Sheets.

Describe rules and guidelines for working safely around hazardous substances.

Describe how to inspect and work safely with ladders.

Describe how to inspect and work safely with scaffolds.

Electrical and Fire Safety

Describe typical work site electrical hazards.

Describe safe pract ices for working around electrical hazards.

Describe actions that should be taken when an electrical shock occurs.

Explain how fires start.

Describe common fire prevent ion practices.

Ident ify the classes of fires and the type of ext inguisher to use for each class.

Describe actions that should be taken if a fire occurs.

Subjects:

Preventing Accidents

Accidents; Safety Policies

Work Site Safety

Personal Protection; Safe Work Practices

Equipment and Materials

Ladders and Scaffolds

Electrical and Fire Safety

Course 156 of 245

Maintenance

SAFETY: Chemical Health Hazards (IHRDC_OM_AMSHS)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with chemical health hazards that might be present in the

workplace. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to identify various types of physical hazards and health hazards

associated with chemicals and describe how they can protect themselves from those hazards.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Identification

Define the terms physical hazard and health hazard and identify examples of each.

Define the term route of entry and describe three examples.

Define the terms acute effects and chronic effects and describe examples of each.

Describe information that is provided on Material Safety Data Sheets.

Explain what the colors and numbers represent in the NFPA fire diamond.

Explain what the colors and numbers represent in the HMIS labeling system.

Explain what the colors and numbers represent in the DOT labeling system.

Protection

Describe two types of respirators.

Describe how to determine if a respirator is in safe working condit ion.

Describe how to properly select and use goggles.

Describe how to properly select and use chemical-resistant clothing.

Describe two propert ies of a chemical that can indicate a hazardous situation.

Describe general steps for responding to a chemical emergency.

Subjects:

Identification

Types of Hazards

Documents and Labels

Protection

Respirators

Clothing and Equipment

Emergency Response

Course 157 of 245

Maintenance

SAFETY: Electrical (IHRDC_OM_AMSEL)

Overview:

The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a general understanding of basic principles of electricity and electrical safety. At the

conclusion of ht is unit, t rainees will have a basic understanding of various aspects of working safely around electrical

equipment

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Electrical Concepts

Describe the basic electrical quantit ies of current, voltage, and resistance.

Shock

State what an electrical shock is.

Describe factors that affect the severity of an electrical shock.

Describe the physical effects of current passing through the human body.

Hazards

Describe hazards associated with working near electrical equipment.

Protection

Describe ways of providing protect ion to personnel from hazards associated with electricity.

Emergencies

Describe how to safely give aid to an electrical shock vict im.

Describe how to safely respond to an electrical fire.

Subjects:

Electrical Concepts

Friend or Foe?

Current

Voltage

Resistance

Shock

What Is Shock?

Amount of Current

Length of Time

Path Through the Body

Effects

Hazards

High Voltage Area

Overloaded Circuits

Damaged Cords

Bare Connectors

Long and Tall Objects

Mobile Equipment

Standing Water

Course 158 of 245

Maintenance

SEALS: Gaskets and Packing (IHRDC_OM_AMMSG)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the use of gaskets and packing to prevent or minimize

leakage from equipment such as pumps and valves. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to identify various types

of gaskets and explain how to cut and install gaskets. They should also be able to identify the components of a packing gland

and explain how to remove and install packing.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Gaskets

Explain how gaskets work.

Describe common types of gaskets.

Describe a procedure for using a gasket cutter.

Describe a procedure for cutt ing a gasket by hand.

Describe a procedure for installing a basic flat gasket on a pump casing.

Describe a procedure for installing an "O" ring on a flange.

Packing

Describe packing and explain how it works.

Describe components of a typical packing gland.

Describe compression and hydraulic packing.

Describe a procedure for removing old packing from a pump.

Describe a procedure for installing new packing on a pump.

Subjects:

Gaskets

Operation

Cutt ing Gaskets

Installing Gaskets

Packing

Operation

Packing Removal

Packing Installat ion

Course 159 of 245

Maintenance

SEALS: Mechanical (IHRDC_OM_AMMES)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the use and installat ion of various types of mechanical seals.

After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to identify the components of commonly used types of mechanical seals,

explain why mechanical seals can fail, and identify causes of seal failures by examining seal components. They should also be

able to disassemble a pump to remove a mechanical seal, take the appropriate installat ion measurements, and install a new

mechanical seal.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Introduction

Ident ify the components of a typical mechanical seal.

Describe how a typical mechanical seal operates.

Ident ify commonly used types of mechanical seals.

Describe some common causes of mechanical seal failures.

Explain how to identify causes of seal failures by examining seal components.

Preparations for Seal Installations

Describe one way to disassemble a pump to remove a mechanical seal.

Describe checks and measurements commonly made during and after the pump disassembly to prepare for a

mechanical seal installat ion.

Seal Installations

Explain how certain pump components are temporarily reassembled so that preliminary measurements can be

taken before a new mechanical seal is installed.

Describe one way to install an inside pusher seal.

Describe one way to install an elastomer bellows seal.

Describe one way to install a metal bellows seal.

Describe one way to install an outside seal.

Describe one way to install a cartridge seal.

Subjects:

Introduction

Seal Components

Types of Mechanical Seals

Mechanical Seal Failures

Preparations for Seal Installations

Pump Disassembly

Pump Component Checks

Seal Installations

Installat ion Measurements

Inside Pusher Seal Installat ion

Non-Pusher Seal Installat ion

Outside and Cartridge Seals

Course 160 of 245

Maintenance

SHAFT ALIGNMENT: Fundamentals (IHRDC_OM_AMSAF)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic principles associated with measuring and

correcting shaft misalignment. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe the basic types of misalignment,

condit ions that may affect shaft alignment, and how to perform a rough alignment.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Introduction

Describe the basic types of misalignment.

Describe how a proper orientation to equipment should be established prior to alignment procedure.

Describe basic measurements that are necessary for determining misalignment.

Describe how misalignment is corrected.

Describe the basic operation of two types of dial indicators commonly used for alignment work.

Conditions Affecting Alignment

Ident ify common foundation problems and describe preparations performed on equipment foundations.

Describe what a soft foot is.

Describe a procedure for measuring and correcting a soft foot condit ion.

Describe what pipe st rain is, and how it can affect shaft alignment.

Describe a procedure for measuring pipe strain.

Describe how a bent shaft or bad bearings can affect shaft alignment.

Describe a procedure for measuring shaft runout.

Describe what thermal growth is and how it can affect shaft alignment.

Describe procedures for measuring thermal growth.

Rough Alignment Procedure

Describe a procedure for measuring and sett ing the mechanical center of a pump's shaft.

Describe a procedure for determining the magnetic center of an electric motor.

Describe a rough alignment procedure using the straightedge and feeler gage method.

Subjects:

Introduction

Types of Misalignment

Alignment Orientation

Basic Measurements and Corrections

Conditions Affecting Alignment

Foundat ion Problems

Soft Foot

Pipe Strain

Shaft and Bearing Problems

Thermal Growth

Rough Alignment Procedure

Basic Preparations

Straightedge and Feeler Gage Method

Course 161 of 245

Maintenance

SHAFT ALIGNMENT: Reverse Dial and Laser (IHRDC_OM_AMSRD)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with equipment and procedures for aligning shafts using the

reverse dial method and using a laser system. After complet ing this unit, t rainees should be able to prepare and set up

equipment for a reverse dial and laser-based alignment. They should also be able to measure shaft misalignment and

determine how it should be corrected so that the alignment is within specified tolerances.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Preparing for a Reverse Dial Alignment

Review the basic types of shaft misalignment.

Describe the arrangement of instruments used to perform a reverse alignment.

Describe the general types of preparations required for a shaft alignment using the reverse dial method.

Performing a Reverse Dial Alignment

Explain how to measure misalignment in the vert ical plane using the reverse dial method.

Explain how to construct a graph representing misalignment in the vert ical plane that is measured by the

reverse dial method.

Describe how to correct misalignment in the vert ical plane.

Explain how to measure misalignment in the horizontal plane using the reverse dial method.

Explain how to construct a graph representing misalignment in the horizontal plane that is measured by the

reverse dial method.

Describe how to correct misalignment in the horizontal plane.

Explain how to determine if a shaft alignment is within tolerances.

Laser Alignment

Describe the basic parts and operation of a laser alignment system.

Subjects:

Preparing for a Reverse Dial Alignment

Fundamentals

Equipment Preparations

Performing a Reverse Dial Alignment

Overview

Measuring Vert ical Plane Alignment

Measuring Horizontal Plane Alignment

Graphing and Correct ing Horizontal Misalignment

Alighment Tolerances

Laser Alignment

System Parts and Operation

Course 162 of 245

Maintenance

SHAFT ALIGNMENT: Rim and Face (IHRDC_OM_AMSRF)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic principles associated with measuring and

correcting shaft misalignment using the rim and face method. After complet ing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe

the basic types of misalignment, general preparations for a rim and face shaft alignment procedure, and explain how to use

the rim and face shaft alignment procedure. They should also be able to explain how to use the rim and face method to

measure and correct misalignment on horizontally mounted equipment and on vert ically mounted equipment.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Getting Started

Review the basic types of shaft alignment.

Describe the arrangement of dial indicators and their mount ing brackets for a rim and face shaft alignment.

Describe equipment checks and adjustments that are generally made before alignment readings are taken

using the rim and face method.

Aligning Horizontally Mounted Equipment

Explain how to take measurements on horizontally mounted equipment for a rim and face alignment.

Explain how to measure misalignment in the vert ical plane using the rim and face method.

Explain how to construct a graph representing misalignment in the vert ical plane that is measured by the rim

and face method.

Describe how to correct a misalignment in the vert ical plane.

Explain how to measure misalignment on the horizontal plane using the rim and face method.

Explain how to construct a graph representing misalignment in the horizontal plane that is measured by the rim

and face method.

Describe how to correct misalignment in the horizontal plane.

Aligning Vertically Mounted Equipment

Explain how to take measurements on vert ically mounted equipment for a rim and face alignment.

Explain how to measure misalignment on vert ically mounted equipment using the rim and face method.

Explain how to construct graphs representing misalignment measured by the rim and face method.

Describe how to correct misalignment on vert ically mounted equipment.

Subjects:

Getting Started

Fundamentals

General Preparations

Aligning Horizontally Mounted Equipment

Preliminary Measurements

Vert ical Plane Misalignment

Horizontal Plane Misalignment

Aligning Vertically Mounted Equipment

Preparations

Measuring Misalignment

Correcting Misalignment

Course 163 of 245

Maintenance

TOOLS: Introduction to Hand Tools (IHRDC_OM_AMTIH)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the proper use of hand tools. After completing this unit ,

t rainees should be able to explain how to properly use hammers, punches, prying tools, screwdrivers, wrenches, measuring tools,

cutt ing tools, vises and clamps.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Hammers, Punches, and Prying Tools

Explain how to properly use a hammer. Describe the difference between a claw hammer and a ball peen

hammer. Explain how to properly use a sledgehammer.

Explain how to properly use a wedge.

Explain how to properly use a punch. Identify two types of punches.

Explain how to properly use a ripping bar.

Explain how to properly use a nail puller.

Screwdrivers and Wrenches

Explain how to properly use a screwdriver. Describe the difference between a straight-blade screwdriver and a

Phillips-head screwdriver.

Explain the proper use of non-adjustable, socket and torque wrenches.

Measuring Tools

Define the terms level and plumb. Explain the proper uses of a level, a plumb bob and a chalk line.

Explain how to properly use a framing square and a combination square.

Explain how to properly use a steel rule, a measuring tape and a wooden folding rule.

Cutting Tools

Explain how to properly use a hand saw. Describe the differences between a crosscut saw and a rip saw.

Explain how to properly use a file. Describe four types of files: a single-cut file, a double-cut file, a curved tooth

file, and a rasp-cut file.

Explain how to use a wire brush to clean tools such as files.

Explain how to properly use a chisel. Dist inguish between a wood chisel and a cold chisel.

Explain how to properly use a ut ility knife.

Gripping and Holding Tools

Explain how to properly use slip joint, long nose, and lineman pliers.

Explain how to properly use a bench vise and a C-clamp.

Subjects:

Hammers, Punches, and Prying Tools

Hammers and sledgehammers

Wedges and punches

Ripping Bars and nail pullers

Screwdrivers and Wrenches

Screwdrivers

Wrenches and socket wrenches

Measuring Tools

Levels, plumb bobs and chalk lines

Squares, rulers and measuring tapes

Cutting Tools

Saws, files and chisels

Utility knives

Course 164 of 245

Maintenance

TOOLS: Introduction to Power Tools (IHRDC_OM_AMTIP)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the proper use of various types of power tools. After

completing this unit, t rainees should be able to explain how to properly use and maintain power drills, power saws, power

grinders, jackhammers, and hydraulic jacks.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Types of Power Tools

Ident ify and describe some common ways of classifying power tools.

Ident ify and describe commonly used types of power drills.

Ident ify and describe commonly used types of power saws.

Ident ify and describe commonly used types of power grinders.

Ident ify and describe common examples of jackhammers and hydraulic jacks.

Power Tool Safety

Describe safety procedures associated with the use of power tools in general.

Describe safety procedures associated specifically with the use of electric power tools.

Describe safety precautions and procedures associated specifically with the use of pneumatic power tools.

Power Tool Operation and Maintenance

Describe the basic procedures for the safe operation and proper maintenance of different types of power drills.

Describe the basic procedures for the safe operation and proper maintenance of different types of power saws.

Describe the basic procedures for the safe operation and proper maintenance of different types of power

grinders.

Describe the basic procedures for the safe operation and proper maintenance of a typical jackhammer and a

typical hydraulic jack.

Subjects:

Types of Power Tools

Power Tool Classifications

Power Drills

Power Saws

Power Grinders

Jackhammers and Hydraulic Jacks

Power Tool Safety

General Safety Concerns

Electric Tool Safety

Pneumatic Tool Safety

Power Tool Operation and Maintenance

Using Power Drills

Using Power Saws

Using Power Grinders

Using Jackhammers and Hydraulic Jacks

Course 165 of 245

Maintenance

TOOLS: Precision Measurement Instruments (IHRDC_OM_AMTMI)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with use of vernier calipers, different types of micrometers, dial

indicators, and fixed gauges. This program also describes basic calibrat ion procedures for several types of instruments and some

basic guidelines for caring for precision measurement tools.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Vernier Caliper

Ident ify the purpose and parts of a vernier caliper.

Explain the procedures for using a vernier caliper properly.

Demonstrate how to read a vernier scale.

Micrometers

Demonstrate the procedure for using an outside micrometer.

Explain how to read an outside micrometer's scale.

Demonstrate the procedure for using an inside micrometer.

Demonstrate the procedure for taking measurements with a telescoping gauge.

Demonstrate the procedure for using a micrometer depth gauge.

Dial Indicators

Describe how to use a dial indicator.

Fixed Gauges

Explain how measurements are taken with feeler gauges.

Explain how measurements are taken with a taper gauge.

Calibration and Care

Describe general procedures for calibrating several precision measurement instruments.

Describe some basic guidelines for caring for precision measurement tools.

Subjects:

Vernier Caliper

Basics

Reading a Vernier Caliper

Micrometers

Outside Micrometers

Inside Micrometers

Telescoping Gauges

Depth Micrometers

Dial Indicators

Features

Fixed Gauges

Feeler Gauge

Taper Gauge

Calibration and Care

Calibration

Care

Course 166 of 245

Maintenance

VIBRATION ANALYSIS: Introduction (IHRDC_OM_AMVAI)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic principles associated with measuring and analyzing

vibration in rotating equipment. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to explain what vibration is and why it

occurs in rotating equipment. They should also be able to describe how to measure vibration using a transducer, a vibration

meter, and a vibration analyzer. Addit ionally, they should be able to explain how to analyze vibration using baseline data,

vibration severity charts, and vibrat ion signatures.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Fundamentals

Define vibration.

Define terms associated with vibration.

Describe characterist ics of rotating equipment that are associated with vibration.

Describe causes of vibration in rotating equipment.

Measuring Vibration

Define t ransducer.

Describe considerations associated with using a transducer.

Describe how a typical vibration meter can be used in vibration analysis.

Describe how a typical portable vibration analyzer can be used in vibration analysis.

Describe how a typical computer-based vibration analyzer can be used in vibrat ion analysis.

Analyzing Vibration

Describe how informat ion about a vibration's characterist ics can be used to analyze the vibration.

Describe how baseline data can be used in vibration analysis.

Describe how to use a vibration severity chart .

Describe how a vibration signature can be used in vibration analysis.

Subjects:

Fundamentals

Characterist ics of Vibration

Vibration and Rotating Equipment

Measuring Vibration

Basic Concepts

Vibration Severity Charts

Vibration Signatures

Course 167 of 245

Maintenance

WELDING: Arc Welding (IHRDC_OM_AEEDC)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic concepts associated with arc welding. After

completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe various hazards associated with arc welding and what can be done

to protect personnel from those hazards, identify and describe the parts and operation of a basic arc welding machine, and

describe basic tasks involved in preparing for a welding job. They should also be able to identify and describe the equipment

used for three common arc welding methods: shielded metal arc welding, metal inert gas arc welding, and tungsten inert gas

arc welding.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Fundamentals

Describe hazards associated with welding.

Describe ways of providing basic protection to personnel from hazards associated with welding.

Describe precautions that should be taken when an arc welding unit is set up.

Describe the basic process of arc welding.

Ident ify and describe the parts of a basic arc welding unit.

Describe the basic operation of an arc welding unit.

Describe basic tasks involved to prepare for a welding job.

Welding Methods

Ident ify and describe the equipment used for shielded metal arc welding.

Ident ify and describe the equipment used for metal inert gas arc welding.

Ident ify and describe the equipment used for tungsten inert gas arc welding.

Subjects:

Fundamentals

Safety

Welding Equipment

Preparations

Welding Methods

Shielded Metal Arc Welding

Metal Inert Gas Welding

Tungsten Inert Gas Welding

Course 168 of 245

Maintenance

WELDING: Oxy-Fuel Gas Welding (IHRDC_OM_AMWIG)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic parts and safe operation of oxy-fuel gas welding

rigs. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe common oxy-fuel gas welding applications and safety

concerns associated with the use of oxy-fuel gas welding equipment. They should also be able to describe the parts of a typical

oxy-fuel gas welding rig and explain how to assemble a rig, light the torch, and then disassemble the rig.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Basics

Describe common oxy-fuel gas welding applicat ions.

Describe characterist ics of oxygen and acetylene.

Describe safety concerns associated with oxy-fuel gas welding and identify precautions that can be taken.

Parts and Maintenance

Describe characterist ics of oxygen and acetylene cylinders.

State precautions associated with properly storing and transport ing oxygen and acetylene cylinders.

Describe oxygen and acetylene regulator types and gauges.

State some basic guidelines for handling regulators.

Describe oxygen and acetylene hoses.

State some basic guidelines for handling hoses.

Describe characterist ics of welding and cutt ing torches and t ips.

Assembly, Lighting and Disassembly

Describe tasks associated with assembling an oxy-fuel gas welding rig.

Describe three types of oxy-fuel flames.

Explain how to light a torch and adjust a flame.

Describe a procedure for shutt ing down and disassembling an oxy-fuel gas welding rig.

Subjects:

Basics

Applications

Oxygen and Acetylene

Safety

Parts and Maintenance

Assembly

Lighting

Disassembly

Course 169 of 245

HEALTH, SAFETY & ENVIRONMENT CURRICULUM




Health, Safety & Environment

ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION: Air Pollution (IHRDC_OM_AOEAP)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic concepts associated with what air pollut ion is and how

it can be controlled. After complet ing this unit, trainees should be able to explain what air pollut ion is, where it comes from, and

how it can be monitored. They should also be able to explain how air pollut ion from industrial facilit ies can be controlled.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Introduction to Pollution

Explain what air pollut ion is and how it can be harmful.

List two sources of air pollut ion and name one way in which air pollut ion is monitored.

Give an example of a unit used to measure pollutant concentrat ions in the air.

Controlling Air Pollution

Describe one way of preventing part iculates from gett ing into the air.

Provide a basic descript ion of how a process can be modified to reduce air pollut ion from gases.

Explain how material subst itut ion can reduce air pollut ion.

Ident ify four devices that can be used to remove part iculates from a stream of exhaust of air or gases.

Explain how an electrostatic precipitator can capture part iculates and remove them from a stream of exhaust

gases.

Give a basic descript ion of a method to capture a potent ially pollut ing vapor for reuse in a process.

Name two ways to destroy waste gases.

Explain how a scrubber that captures gases operates.

Subjects:

Introduction to Pollution

What is Pollut ion?

Sources of Air Pollut ion

Controlling Air Pollution

Prevent ion

Removal of Part iculates

Removal of Gases

Course 170 of 245


ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION: Water Pollution and Waste Disposal

(IHRDC_OM_AOEWP)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic principles of preventing pollutants from gett ing

into plant wastewater and removing pollutants from plant wastewater before the water is released into the environment. Also

covered are methods of waste disposal and general considerations associated with hazardous wastes. After completing this

unit, t rainees should be able to identify sources of water pollut ion and explain how pollutants are kept out of plant wastewater.

They should also be able to describe wastewater treatment methods and waste disposal methods.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Introduction to Water Pollution

List two sources of water pollut ion.

Name one way that water pollut ion is monitored.

Name a unit used to measure pollutant concentrations in water.

List two ways to keep pollutants from gett ing into wastewater.

Explain the purpose of a retention pond.

Wastewater Treatment

Explain why removing inorganic chemicals from wastewater requires flocculation and sett ling.

List how bacteria use oxygen to break down organic chemicals.

Describe a typical organic waste treatment facility that includes biological (bacterial) treatment.

Explain what happens in anthracite and activated carbon filters used to remove organic chemicals from

wastewater.

Describe the flow of air and water through a typical cooling tower.

Waste Disposal

List two ways of disposing of wastes.

List why hazardous waste disposal must be carefully controlled.

Explain what a manifest is and how using a manifest helps keep hazardous wastes out of the environment.

Subjects:

Introduction to Water Pollution

Sources of Water Pollut ion

Containment

Wastewater Treatment

Treatment Methods

Filters

Cooling Towers

Waste Disposal

Disposal

Hazardous Waste

Course 171 of 245


FIRE SAFETY: Classes of Fires and Extinguishers (IHRDC_OM_BBCOF)

Overview:

The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a general understanding of basic principles of fire, types of fire ext inguishers, and how

to identify different types of fire ext inguishers.

At the conclusion of this unit, t rainees will have a basic understanding of three elements of combustion, four classes of fires,

common types of fire ext inguishers and extinguishing agents, and ways of ident ifying different types of fire ext inguishers.

Duration:

0.75 hrs

Objectives:

Fire Basics

Name three elements of combustion.

Describe the four classes of fires.

Extinguishers & Extinguishing Agents

Describe common types of fire ext inguishers and extinguishing agents.

Extinguisher Identification

Describe several ways of identifying different types of fire ext inguishers.

Subjects:

Fire Basics

Elements of Combustion

Classes of Fires

Extinguishers & Extinguishing Agents

Water

Mult ipurpose Dry Chemicals

Carbon Dioxide

Foam

Class D Agents

Extinguisher Identification

Ident ification

Symbols

Pictures

Course 172 of 245


FIRE SAFETY: Fire Safety (IHRDC_OM_BBFSA)

Overview:

The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a general understanding of basic principles associated with fire, fire prevention, and

managing fire situat ions.

At the conclusion of this unit, t rainees will have a basic understanding of how fires start, general categories of fire prevention

methods, common workplace evacuation procedures, and how to select and use common types of portable fire ext inguishing

equipment.

Duration:

0.75 hrs

Objectives:

How Fires Start

Explain how fires start.

Preventing Fires

Describe two general categories of fire prevention methods and list examples of each.

Managing Fire Situations

Describe some common workplace evacuation procedures.

Explain how to select and use common types of portable fire ext inguishing equipment.

Subjects:

How Fires Start

Basic Elements of Fire

Ignit ing a Fire

Preventing Fires

Controlling Sources of Heat

Controlling Sources of Fuel

Managing Fire Situations

Evacuation Procedures

Emergency and Fire Prevention Plans

Fire Types and Fire Ext inguishers

Using a Fire Ext inguisher

Using a Fire Hose/Standpipe System

Course 173 of 245


FORKLIFT SAFETY: Forklift Safety Checks (IHRDC_OM_BBFSC)

Overview:

The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a general understanding of performing safety checks on a forklift .

At the conclusion of this unit, t rainees will have a basic understanding of tasks performed as part of a structural check of a

forklift , tasks performed as part of a power system check of a forklift , and tasks that can be performed as part of an operational

check of a forklift .

Duration:

0.75 hrs

Objectives:

Structural Checks

Describe tasks that can be performed as part of a structural check of a forklift .

Power System Checks

Describe tasks that can be performed as part of a power system check of a forklift .

Operational Checks

Describe tasks that can be performed as part of an operational check of a forklift .

Subjects:

Structural Checks

Preparation

Major Components

Safety Components

Power System Checks

Hydraulic System

Electrical System

Internal Combustion Engines

Propane Gas Cylinders

Operational Checks

Before-Use Checks

During-Use Checks

After-Use Checks

Course 174 of 245


FORKLIFT SAFETY: Safe Forklift Operation (IHRDC_OM_BBSFO)

Overview:

The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a general understanding of various aspects of operating a forklift safely. At the

conclusion of this unit, t rainees will have a basic understanding of some techniques that are commonly used to maneuver a

forklift including some special situations they will probably encounter, traffic safety issues associated with forklift operation, and

how to safely handle loads using a forklift .

Duration:

0.75 hrs

Objectives:

Maneuvering a Forklift

Describe how to maneuver a forklift .

Traffic Safety

Describe how to drive a forklift to protect yourself, others and property from injury or damage.

Handling Loads

Describe general guidelines associated with handling loads safely with a forklift .

Subjects:

Maneuvering a Forklift

Rear Wheel Steering

Turning a Corner

Turning in an Aisle

Turning Around

Entering Trucks/Trailers/Rail Cars

Driving on Slopes

Elevators

Traffic Safety

Personal Preparedness

In Case of a Tipover

Pedestrians and Other Vehicles

Obstacles and Hazards

Parking a Forklift

Handling Loads

Visual Inspection

Weights of Loads

Preparing to Move a Load

Moving a Load

Placing a Load

Disengaging the Forks

Other Considerations

Course 175 of 245


FORKLIFT SAFETY: Understanding Forklifts (IHRDC_OM_BBUFL)

Overview:

The training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with some basic information about forklifts.

After completing this unit, the trainees should be able to describe the various types of forklifts and some differences between

forklifts and cars, the standard components of most forklifts, and the principles of forklift safety.

Duration:

0.75 hrs

Objectives:

Forklift Basics

Describe the various types of forklifts.

Describe the differences between a forklift and a car.

Forklift Components

Describe the basic components of a forklift .

Describe a forklift 's operat ing controls and gauges.

Principles of Stability

Describe the factors that affect the stability of a forklift .

Subjects:

Forklift Basics

How Forklifts are Powered

Forklift Sizes and Capacit ies

Forklift Attachments

Forklift Components

Major Sections of a Forklift

Forklift Operating Controls

Principles of Stability

Three-Point Suspension Systems

Center of Gravity

Load Center

Course 176 of 245


HAZARDOUS WASTE OPERATIONS: Hazard Communication (IHRDC_OM_BBHAC)

Overview:

The purpose of this unit is to provide trainees with a basic understanding of what hazard communication is and how to use it .

At the conclusion of this unit, t rainees will have a general understanding of the types of hazards associated with hazardous

substances, safety guidelines that reduce the risks of working with hazardous substances, and various ways to obtain

information about hazardous substances.

Duration:

0.75 hrs

Objectives:

Types of Hazards

Define the term "physical hazard" and identify examples of physical hazards.

Define the term "health hazard" and identify examples of health hazards.

Define the terms "acute effects" and "chronic effects," and identify examples of each.

Operations and Emergency Response

Describe information that should be included in a facility's standard operating procedures for working with

hazardous substances.

Describe information that should be included in a facility's emergency response plan.

Warning Labels

Describe labeling requirements for hazardous substances in the workplace.

Explain what the colors, numbers, and symbols represent on an NFPA fire diamond.

Explain what the colors, numbers, and symbols represent on an HMIS label.

Material Safety Data Sheets

Describe information that can be found on Material Safety Data Sheets.

Written Training Plan

Describe requirements of hazard communication training and what informat ion it must contain.

Subjects:

Types of Hazards

Physical Hazards

Health Hazards

Acute Effects

Chronic Effects

Operations and Emergency Response

Standard Operating Procedures

Emergency Response Plan

Warning Labels

Labeling Requirements

NFPA Fire Diamond

HMIS Labels


Types of Information

Written Training Plan

Requirements


Course 177 of 245


HAZARDOUS WASTE OPERATIONS: Introduction (IHRDC_OM_BBWOP)

Overview:

The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a general understanding of what "HAZWOPER" means, the purpose of the OSHA

HAZWOPER Standard, and the requirements associated with safety and health training and medical surveillance. At the

conclusion of this unit, t rainees will know what "HAZWOPER" means and the purpose of the OSHA HAZWOPER Standard. They

will also have a general understanding of chemical hazards, control measures, and the basic requirements of emergency

response t raining.

Duration:

0.75 hrs

Objectives:

What is HAZWOPER?

Explain what "HAZWOPER" means and explain the purpose of the OSHA HAZWOPER Standard.

List the two general areas of informat ion contained in the Safety and Health Plan as required by HAZWOPER.

List the two general goals of the safety and health training program.

Explain the purpose of the HAZWOPER medical surveillance program.

Chemical Hazards

List the two general types of chemical hazards and describe the risks associated with each type.

Describe the four routes of chemical exposure.

Control Measures

List three general types of control measures to reduce exposure to hazardous chemicals.

Describe the four levels of personal protect ive equipment.

Emergency Response

List the five levels of emergency response training and describe the general requirements of each level.

Subjects:

What is HAZWOPER?

What "HAZWOPER" Means

Safety and Health Program

Training

Medical Surveillance

Chemical Hazards

Physical Hazards

Health Hazards

Routes of Exposure

Control Measures

Engineering Controls and Work Practices

Personal Protective Equipment

Emergency Response

Emergency Response Training

Course 178 of 245


HAZARDOUS WASTE OPERATIONS: First Responder - Awareness Level

(IHRDC_OM_BBHFR)

Overview:

The purpose of this unit is to provide trainees with a general understanding of what hazardous materials are and how to

respond to a hazardous materials emergency. At the conclusion of this unit, t rainees will have a basic understanding of what

hazardous materials are, how hazardous materials can be ident ified, and what to do if they are first on the scene of a

hazardous materials incident.

Duration:

0.75 hrs

Objectives:

Hazardous Materials

Explain what hazardous materials are.

List the two general types of hazards associated with hazardous materials and describe the general risks

associated with each type.

Hazardous Materials Emergencies

Describe some of the potential outcomes of an emergency when hazardous materials are present.

Identifying Hazardous Materials

List some ways that the presence of hazardous materials can be recognized.

List some ways that hazardous materials can be ident ified.

First on the Scene

Describe some general procedures to follow if you are first on the scene of a hazardous materials incident.

Describe some roles that a first responder "Awareness Level" may be required to fill in a hazardous materials

emergency.

Describe the general contents of the DOT Emergency Response Guidebook.

Subjects:

Hazardous Materials

What is a HAZMAT?

Physical Hazards

Health Hazards

Hazardous Materials Emergencies

Fire and Explosion Hazards

Corrosive Materials

Toxic Materials

Hazards Not Directly Related to Chemical Hazards

Identifying Hazardous Materials

Recognizing Hazardous Materials

Ident ifying Hazardous Materials

First on the Scene

First on the Scene - What to Do

The Roles of a First Responder

The DOT Emergency Response Guidebook

Course 179 of 245


HEALTH: Bloodborne Pathogens (IHRDC_OM_BBBPA)

Overview:

The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a general understanding of hazards associated with exposure to blood in the

workplace and basic methods to help minimize exposure. At the conclusion of this unit, t rainees will have a basic

understanding of the potential hazards of exposure to blood, how to minimize the risk of exposure, and basic principles of the

OSHA bloodborne pathogen standard.

Duration:

0.75 hrs

Objectives:

Blood as a Hazardous Material

Explain what bloodborne pathogens are.

Describe the general effects of exposure to the HIV virus.

Describe the general effects of exposure to the HBV virus.

The Risks of Occupational Exposure

List some job categories in the healthcare indust ry that are potentially at risk for exposure to bloodborne

pathogens.

List some job categories outside the healthcare industry that are potentially at risk for exposure to bloodborne

pathogens.

Describe some situations that are not directly related to a job where someone might be at risk for exposure to

bloodborne pathogens.

Minimizing the Risk of Occupational Exposure

Describe the four routes of exposure for bloodborne pathogens, and describe some ways to protect yourself

from exposure through each route of exposure.

The OSHA Bloodborne Pathogens Standard

List the general requirements of the OSHA Bloodborne Pathogens Standard, including the Exposure Control

Plan.

Explain the meaning of the term "exposure incident."

Subjects:

Blood as a Hazardous Material

What are Bloodborne Pathogens?

HIV

HBV

The Risks of Occupational Exposure

Healthcare Industry

General Industry

Other Exposure Risks

Minimizing the Risk of Occupational Exposure

Routes of Exposure

Personal Protection

Other Protective Measures

The OSHA Bloodborne Pathogens Standard

General Requirements

Exposure Control Plan

Exposure Incident

Course 180 of 245


HEALTH: Hearing Conservation (IHRDC_OM_BBHCO)

Overview:

The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a basic understanding of how to protect themselves from hazardous levels of noise in

the workplace. At the conclusion of this unit, t rainees will have a general understanding of when noise levels are hazardous,

the basic requirements of the OSHA regulation on hearing conservation, and devices that are used to provide hearing

protection.

Duration:

0.75 hrs

Objectives:

Hazardous Noise Levels

Define the following terms: sound, sound wave, and noise

Describe two propert ies of sound waves: intensity and frequency

OSHA Standard

Describe the OSHA regulations for hearing conservat ion.

Hearing Protection Equipment

Describe how ear plus and earmuffs provide hearing protection.

Subjects:

Hazardous Noise Levels

Sound

Sound Waves

Noise

Action Level

OSHA Standard

Requirements

Hearing Conservation Program

Hearing Tests

Hearing Protection Equipment

Ear Plugs

Ear Muffs

Noise Reduct ion Rating

Course 181 of 245


HEALTH: Workplace Ergonomics (IHRDC_OM_BBWPE)

Overview:

The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a general understanding of ergonomics in the workplace. At the conclusion of this

unit, t rainees will have a basic understanding of how ergonomics can prevent MSDs; be able to identify ergonomic risk factors

and work activit ies associated with MSD hazards; describe some common MSDs, including their signs and symptoms and the

importance of report ing them early; and describe the actions that they can take to control ergonomic hazards.

Duration:

0.75 hrs

Objectives:

Ergonomics Basics

Describe musculoskeletal disorders.

Explain the term "ergonomics."

Ergonomic Risk Factors

Describe ergonomic risk factors associated with MSDs.

Describe work activit ies that involve ergonomic risk factors.

Common MSDs

Describe common MSDs.

Explain the importance of report ing signs and symptoms early.

Controlling Ergonomic Hazards

Explain what a job hazard analysis is.

Describe some things you can do to reduce MSD hazards.

Raynaud's Phenomenon

Recognize Signs and Symptoms of MSDs

Subjects:

Ergonomics Basics

Musculoskeletal Disorders

Ergonomics Explained

Ergonomic Risk Factors

Awkward Postures

Force

Repetit ion

Contact Stress

Vibration

Static Postures

Cold Temperatures

Mult iple Risk Factors

Common MSDs

Tendinit is and Tenosynovit is

Carpal Tunnel Syndrome

Epicondylit is

Shoulder and Neck Pain

Low Back Pain

Raynaud's Phenomenon

Recognize Signs and Symptoms of

MSDs

Controlling Ergonomic Hazards

Job Hazard Analysis

Things You Can Do to Reduce

Ergonomic Hazards

Course 182 of 245


MATERIAL HANDLING: Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) (IHRDC_OM_BBMSD)

Overview:

The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a general understanding of the types of information that can be found in Material

Safety Data Sheets. At the conclusion of this unit, t rainees will know why an MSDS is important and what types of information

an MSDS provides. They will also know how to find specific types of information in an MSDS.

Duration:

0.75 hrs

Objectives:

MSDS Overview

Describe types of information contained in the product identificat ion sect ion of an MSDS.

Characteristics and Physical Hazards

Describe types of information contained in an MSDS about a chemical's characterist ics.

Describe types of information contained in an MSDS about a chemical's physical hazards.

Health Hazards

Describe types of information contained in the health hazards section of an MSDS.

How to Protect Yourself

Describe types of information contained in an MSDS on how to protect yourself from hazardous chemicals.

Subjects:

MSDS Overview

What an MSDS IS

Why an MSDS Is Important

Product Ident ification Section

Characteristics and Physical Hazards

Chemical Ingredients

Physical Data

Fire and Explosion Data

Reactivity Data

Health Hazards

Exposure Limits

Routes of Entry

Effects of Exposure

First Aid

How to Protect Yourself

Spills

Waste Disposal

Storage and Handling

Course 183 of 245


MATERIAL HANDLING: Tank Trucks (IHRDC_OM_AOMTT)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic concepts of material handling using tank trucks. After

completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe characterist ics of liquids that can affect liquid handling operations.

They should also be able to describe precautions, procedures, and equipment associated with handling hazardous liquids.

Trainees should also be able to describe features of a typical tank truck and typical procedures for its loading and unloading.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

General Concerns

Explain how toxicity, viscosity, volatility, temperature, and pressure can affect liquid handling operations.

Describe how static electricity can affect the handling of bulk liquids.

Describe how operators can identify hazardous materials.

Ident ify precaut ions, procedures, and equipment associated with handling hazardous chemicals.

Loading and Unloading

Describe the major features of a typical tank truck.

Ident ify associated equipment used with tanks during liquid transfers.

Ident ify equipment commonly associated with tank trucks.

Ident ify methods of transferring bulk liquids.

Describe the basic tasks involved in transferring bulk liquids.

Ident ify items that should be checked during pre-t ransfer and post-t ransfer inspections.

Describe typical procedures for top-loading a tank truck.

Describe how bottom-loading a tank truck differs from top-loading a tank truck.

Describe typical procedures for pressurized top unloading from a tank truck by pressurizing with air.

Describe common safety concerns and regulations associated with tank t rucks.

Subjects:

General Concerns

Characterist ics of Liquids

Handling Hazardous Materials

Loading and Unloading

Tank Truck Features

Loading a Tank Truck

Unloading a Tank Truck

Course 184 of 245


MATERIAL HANDLING: Transporting Hazardous Materials (IHRDC_OM_BBTHM)

Overview:

The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a general understanding of the requirements associated with transport ing hazardous

materials.

At the conclusion of this unit, t rainees will have a basic understanding of how hazardous materials and their containers are

prepared for t ransport, what types of documentation are required, and how hazardous materials are ident ified according to

DOT requirements.

Duration:

0.75 hrs

Objectives:

Classifications

Define the term "hazardous materials," and identify the Department of Transportation regulations that control

the shipment of these materials.

Ident ify and describe the different classes of hazardous materials.

Ident ify and describe terms and symbols used to identify hazardous materials.

Documentation and Packaging

Describe documentation that is needed to transport hazardous materials.

Describe types of packaging used to t ransport hazardous materials.

Describe markings used to ident ify hazardous materials contained in packaging.

Labels and Placarding

Ident ify and describe labels and placarding used to identify hazardous materials.

Subjects:

Classifications

What are Hazardous Materials?

Classes of Hazardous Materials

Terms and Symbols

Documentation and Packaging

Documentation

Packaging

Labels

Labels and Placarding

Labels

Course 185 of 245


MATERIAL HANDLING: Warning Signs and Labels (IHRDC_OM_BBWST)

Overview:

The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a general understanding of the purpose and use of warning signs and various types of

labels.

At the conclusion of this unit, t rainees will have a basic understanding of government regulations that deal with labeling. They

will also have a general understanding of the types of information that can be obtained from hazardous product labels,

shipping labels and warning signs.

Duration:

0.75 hrs

Objectives:

Overview

Ident ify government regulations regarding labeling.

Hazardous Product Labels

Describe types of information that can be found on hazardous product labels.

Shipping Labels

Describe types of information that can be found on DOT shipping labels and markings.

Warning Signs

Describe types of information that can be found on warning signs.

Subjects:

Overview

Resource Conservat ion and Recovery Act

OSHA Hazard Communication Standard

DOT Regulations

Examples of Warning Signs and Labels

Hazardous Product Labels

NFPA Hazard Rating System

HMIS Rating System

Shipping Labels

DOT Shipping Labels and Markings

Warning Signs


Protection

Informing Workers

Prevent ing Exposure

Prevent ing Accidental Operation

Tools

Equipment

Personal Gear

Emergencies

Aiding a Shock Vict im

Fighting an Electrical Fire

Course 186 of 245


PERSONAL PROTECTION EQUIPMENT : Respirator Fit Testing (IHRDC_OM_BBRFT)

Overview:

The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a general understanding of respirator fit factors and methods for performing basic

respirator test ing.

At the conclusion of this unit, t rainees will understand how to select a respirator of the proper size, and how to perform fit

checks and test ing to ensure that the respirator will protect the user from airborne contaminants.

Duration:

0.75 hrs

Objectives:

Fittings

Explain how proper respirator fit is determined, and ident ify factors that may prevent s respirator from properly

fitt ing an individual.

Disposable Respirators

Describe how to ensure a proper fit with a disposable filter mask respirator.

Fit Checks

Describe basic procedures for performing exhalation and inhalat ion fit checks.

Testing

Describe basic procedures for performing qualitat ive test ing.

Describe basic procedures for performing quantitat ive test ing.

Subjects:

Fittings

Proper Fit

Fitt ing Factors

Disposable Respirators

Types of Disposable Respirators

Selecting the Proper Size

Ensuring the Proper Fit

Fit Checks

Checking General Condit ion

Posit ive Pressure Check

Negative Pressure Check

Testing

Qualitat ive Test ing

Quantitat ive Test ing

Course 187 of 245


PERSONAL PROTECTION EQUIPMENT: Personal Protection Equipment

(IHRDC_OM_BBPPE)

Overview:

The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a general understanding of basic types of personal protection equipment.

At the conclusion of this unit, t rainees will have a basic understanding of personal protective clothing and equipment,

including respiratory protection and fall protection.

Duration:

0.75 hrs

Objectives:

Protective Clothing

Describe basic clothing that can be worn to protect against job related hazards.

Describe types of gloves worn to protect the hands from job related hazards.

Describe types of work shoes worn to protect the feet from job related hazards.


Describe a typical hard hat and other head protection used to protect the head from job related hazards.

Describe types and uses of protective equipment commonly used to protect eyesight and hearing.

Respiratory Protection

Describe equipment used for respiratory protection.

Fall Protection

Describe typical equipment used for fall protection.

Subjects:

Protective Clothing

Protective Clothing

Wearing Clothing Properly

Protecting Hands and Feet


Head Protection

Eye Protection

Hearing Protection

Respiratory Protection

Types of Respirators

Fall Protection

Fall Protection Equipment

Course 188 of 245


PERSONAL PROTECTION EQUIPMENT: Respiratory Protection (IHRDC_OM_BBRPR)

Overview:

The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a general understanding of basic types of respirators and proper methods for the use

and care of respirators.

At the conclusion of this unit, t rainees will have a basic understanding of air purifying respirators, air supplied respirators, and

how to properly use and care for respirators.

Duration:

0.75 hrs

Objectives:

Air Purifying Respirators

Describe what an air purifying respirator is and identify common types of air purifying respirators.

Describe a typical disposable filter mask and explain how it can be used.

Describe a typical chemical cartridge mask and explain how it can be used.

Explain how to choose the proper cartridge for a chemical cartridge respirator.

Describe a typical gas mask and explain how it can be used.

Air Supplied Respirators

Ident ify basic types of air supplied respirators.

Describe a typical air line respirator and explain how it can be used.

Describe a typical self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) and explain how it can be used.

Describe a typical portable escape respirator and explain how it can be used.

Use and Care of Respirators

Ident ify factors that affect respirator selection.

Describe general rules for the inspection and safe use of respirators.

Describe general rules for the cleaning and storage of respirators.

Subjects:

Air Purifying Respirators

What is an Air Purifying Respirator?

Disposable Filter Masks

Chemical Cart ridge, Filter and Canister Masks

Gas Masks

Air Supplied Respirators

What is an Air Supplied Respirator?

Types of Air Flow

Air Line Respirators

SCBAs

Portable Escape Respirators

Use and Care of Respirators

Selecting a Respirator

Inspection

Proper Use

Cleaning and Disinfecting

Reassembly and Test ing

Course 189 of 245


SAFETY: Back Safety (IHRDC_OM_BBBBA)

Overview:

The purpose of this unit is to provide trainees with a general understanding of how to minimize their chances of sustaining a

back injury. At the conclusion of this unit, t rainees will know how to maintain good posture as they go about their daily

activit ies, how to safely lift and move loads, and how to perform some simple exercises that are helpful in maintaining a healthy

back.

Duration:

0.75 hrs

Objectives:

Posture

Explain what is meant by the term "good posture."

Describe techniques for maintaining good posture during various activit ies.

Safe Lifting

Describe the proper technique for lift ing and moving an object.

Describe proper techniques for carrying a long load, stacking a load, and performing activit ies that involve

twist ing or turning.

Back Exercises

Describe basic exercises that can be done in an office.

Describe basic exercises that can be done at home or at a gym.

Subjects:

Posture

"Good Posture"

Sitt ing

Standing

Walking and Turning

Reaching Overhead

Picking Up an Object from the Floor

Safe Lifting

"Mental Lifts"

Lift ing an Object

Lowering an Object

Carrying a Long Load

Stacking a Load

Turning a Valve Wheel

Back Exercises

At the Office

At Home or at the Gym

Course 190 of 245


SAFETY: Confined Space Entry (IHRDC_OM_BBCSE)

Overview:

The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a basic understanding of confined space hazards and the general requirements of

the OSHA Confined Space Standard. At the conclusion of this unit , t rainees will know the difference between a confined

space and a "permit-required" confined space. They will also have a general understanding of the hazards associated with

working in confined spaces and how to protect themselves from these hazards.

Duration:

0.75 hrs

Objectives:

Confined Space Characteristics

Describe the characterist ics of a confined space.

List some examples of confined spaces.

Explain how a "permit-required" confined space differs from one that does not require a permit.

Confined Space Hazards

Describe the main types of hazards found in "permit-required" confined spaces.

OSHA Confined Space Standard

Describe the general requirements of the OSHA "Permit-Required" Confined Space Standard.

Describe the general requirements for a written Permit Space Program.

Describe the general requirements of a typical entry permit.

Protective Measures

Describe some general protective measures used to protect workers in confined spaces.

The Attendant

Describe general responsibilit ies of the confined space attendant.

Subjects:

Confined Space Characteristics

Confined Spaces

"Permit-Required" Confined Spaces

Confined Space Hazards

Hazardous Atmospheres

Engulfment Hazard

Configurat ion Hazard

Other Hazards

OSHA Confined Space Standard


Written Permit Space Program

A Typical Entry Permit

Protective Measures

Preparing the Space


Other Safety Equipment

The Attendant

The Attendant's Responsibilit ies

Course 191 of 245


SAFETY: Driving Safety (IHRDC_OM_BBDRS)

Overview:

The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a general understanding of driving safety. At the conclusion of this unit, t rainees will

have a basic understanding of the general circumstances that cause vehicle accidents, the role of defensive driving and

space management in preventing accidents, the importance of the mental and physical condit ion of the driver, and how

proper vehicle maintenance and use of the car's safety features can minimize or prevent accidents.

Duration:

0.75 hrs

Objectives:

Understanding Motor Vehicle Accidents

Explain the factors typically involved in motor vehicle accidents.

Explain the difference between "not at fault " and "accident-free."

Defensive Driving

Explain the terms "defensive driving" and "space management."

Discuss specific defensive driving and space management techniques.

Condition of the Driver

Explain error-prone states of mind: frustrat ion/anger, rushing, distracted and drowsy.

Discuss the role of alcohol in motor vehicle accidents.

Vehicle Condition and Safety Features

Discuss the importance of the condit ion of the vehicle.

Discuss safety belts, air bags, and antilock braking systems.

Subjects:

Understanding Motor Vehicle Accidents

Typical factors in motor vehicle accidents

The difference between "not at fault" and "accident-free"

Defensive Driving

Defensive driving defined

Delayed start

Changing lanes on a highway

Space management defined

Managing space in front

Managing space to the side and rear

Space management when not moving

Condition of the Driver

Frustration and anger

Rushing

Distracted

Drowsy

Alcohol

Vehicle Condition and Safety Features

Condit ion of the vehicle

Safety belts

Air bags

Antilock braking systems

Course 192 of 245


SAFETY: Electrical Safety (IHRDC_OM_BBESA)

Overview:

The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a general understanding of basic principles of electricity and electrical safety.

At the conclusion of this unit, t rainees will have a basic understanding of various aspects of working safely around electrical

equipment.

Duration:

0.75 hrs

Objectives:

Electrical Safety

Describe the basic electrical quantit ies of current, voltage and resistance.

Shock

State what an electrical shock is.

Describe factors that affect the severity of an electrical shock.

Describe the physical effects of current passing through the human body.

Hazards

Describe hazards associated with working near electrical equipment.

Protection

Describe ways of providing protect ion to personnel from hazards associated with electricity.

Emergencies

Describe how to safely give aid to an electrical shock vict im.

Describe how to safely respond to an electrical fire.

Subjects:

Electrical Concepts

Friend or Foe?

Current

Voltage

Resistance

Shock

What is Shock?

Amount of Current

Length of Time

Path Through the Body

Effects

Hazards

High Voltage Area

Overloaded Circuits

Damaged Cords

Bare Connectors

Long & Tail Objects

Mobile Equipment

Standing Water

Protection

Warning Tape, Signs, Locks and Tags

Compressed Air Tools

Battery Powered Tools

Proper Grounding

Emergencies

Electrical Shock Vict im

Electrical Fire

Course 193 of 245


SAFETY: Fall Protection (IHRDC_OM_BBFPR)

Overview:

The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a general understanding of when fall protection is required and how to select and use

a personal fall arrest system. At the conclusion of this unit , t rainees will have a basic understanding of condit ions in which fall

protection is required, how fall protection can be achieved, how to identify the basic parts of a typical fall arrest system, and

how to select, use, and care for a personal fall arrest system.

Duration:

0.75 hrs

Objectives:

Introduction

Describe working condit ions in which fall protection is required and the purposes served by fall protection.

Ident ify the basic means by which fall protect ion can be achieved.

Ident ify the major topics that must be covered to provide personnel with adequate fall protection training.

Describe the difference between fall prevention and fall arrest.

Ident ify and describe typical equipment used to prevent falls.


Ident ify and describe the basic parts of a typical fall arrest system.

Selection, Use and Care

Describe the proper selection, use, and care of a personal fall arrest system.

Subjects:

Introduction

Condit ions in Which Fall Protection Is Required

Purposes of Fall Protection

Basic Means of Achieving Fall Protect ion

Fall Protection Training

Fall Prevention and Fall Arrest


Parts of a Typical Fall Arrest System

Selection, Use and Care

Selecting a Personal Fall Arrest System

Using a Personal Fall Arrest System

Caring for a personal Fall Arrest System

Course 194 of 245


SAFETY: Laboratory Safety (IHRDC_OM_BBLSA)

Overview:

The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a general understanding of basic principles of safety in a laboratory sett ing.

At the conclusion of this unit, t rainees will have a basic understanding of general hazards that exist in laboratories, basic

personal protection equipment to protect from those hazards, how to locate information about chemicals, basic standard

operating procedures and chemical hygiene practices, and how to respond in emergency situations.

Duration:

0.75 hrs

Objectives:

Hazards in the Laboratory

Describe two broad categories of chemical hazards

Explain the difference between acute and chronic health effects from chemical exposure.

Describe the four routes of chemical exposure.

Minimizing the Risks

Describe the four basic principles of safety in the laboratory

Describe three main types of personal protect ive equipment used in the laboratory.

The OSHA Lab Standard

State the primary requirements of the OSHA Lab Standard and describe some methods of meeting that

requirement.

Describe the general requirements of the written Chemical Hygiene Plan and explain some ways those

requirements can be met.

Chemical Hygiene Practices

Describe some basic chemical hygiene practices that will help minimize exposure to hazardous chemicals in the

lab.

Chemical Storage

Describe some general guidelines for chemical storage and list five classes of chemicals that should be

considered for storage purposes.

Emergency

Explain some general procedures to follow in the event of an emergency in the lab.

Subjects:

Hazards in the Laboratory

Physical Hazards

Health Hazards

Routes of Exposure

Minimizing the Risks

Four Basic Safety Principles


The OSHA Lab Standard


The Chemical Hygiene Plan

Chemical Hygiene Practices

Safety Awareness

Minimizing Exposure

Chemical Storage

General Storage Requirements

Five Classes of Chemicals

Emergency

Emergency Response Plan

Emergency Equipment/In Case of Exposure

Course 195 of 245


SAFETY: Lockout/Tagout (IHRDC_OM_BBLOT)

Overview:

The purpose of this unit is to give trainees a general understanding of standards governing the control of hazardous energy. At

the conclusion of this unit, t rainees will have a basic understanding of various aspects of lockout/tagout, including safe

lockout/tagout techniques.

Duration:

0.75 hrs

Objectives:

What is Lockout/Tagout?

Define "hazardous energy."

Explain why standards governing the control of hazardous energy are necessary. Describe the purpose and

scope of the OSHA standard that governs the control of hazardous energy.

Hazardous Energy

Ident ify various types of hazardous energy.

Requirements

Ident ify and describe the basic contents of an energy control program.

Describe the protective materials and hardware required by the OSHA energy control standard to perform

lockout/tagout.

Describe the differences between a lockout and a tagout procedure.

Procedures

Describe the basic steps of a typical lockout/tagout procedure.

Special Situations

Describe special situations that can occur during lockout/tagout.

Subjects:

What is Lockout/Tagout?

Accidents

Guidelines

Purpose, Scope and Benefits

Hazardous Energy

Types; Active Energy and Residual Energy

Variat ions

Effects

Requirements

Energy Control Programs and Procedures

Materials & Hardware

Lockout/Tagout Procedures

Training

Inspection

Procedure

Shutdown and Removal of Energy

Applying of Lockout/Tagout Devices

Verification of Safe Condit ion and Preparation for Startup

Removal of Lockout/Tagout Devices and Return to Service

Special Situations

Introduction

Energizing Equipment

Contractors

Group Lockout/Tagout

Shift/Personnel Changes

Course 196 of 245


SAFETY: Safety Orientation (IHRDC_OM_BBSOR)

Overview:

The purpose of this unit is to provide trainees with a brief overview of common safety issues that are associated with safety in

the workplace.

At the conclusion of this unit, t rainees with have a general understanding of workplace safety issues that are associated with

safe work habits, personal protective equipment, hazard communication, and fire prevention.

Duration:

0.75 hrs

Objectives:

Safe Work Habits

Define fitness for duty and identify condit ions that can affect a worker's fitness for duty.

Describe good housekeeping practices that are associated with workplace safety.

Describe safety concerns and procedures that are associated with the proper use of tools.

Describe safety concerns and procedures that are associated with the energy sources that are used to operate

industrial equipment.


Ident ify and describe basic types of personal protect ive equipment that are commonly required for workplace

safety.

Ident ify and describe common types of personal protective equipment that may be required for special

hazards.

Hazard Communication

Describe the types of information that may be obtained from Material Safety Data Sheets.

Describe common types of warning signs, tags, and labels that may be used to communicate information

about hazards in a workplace.

Describe safety concerns and procedures that are commonly associated with hazardous waste operations

(HAZWOPER).

Fire Prevention

Describe basic concerns and procedures that are associated with fire safety.

Ident ify the different classes of fire ext inguishers and the types of fires on which each class of fire ext inguisher is

designed to be used.

Subjects:

Safe Work Habits

Fitness for Duty

Housekeeping

Tool Use

Energy Sources


Basic Types

Specialized Types

Hazard Communication


Warning Signs, Tags, and Labels

Introduction to HAZWOPER

Fire Prevention

Fire Safety

Classes of Fire Ext inguishers

Course 197 of 245


WATER TREATMENT: Wastewater 1 (IHRDC_OM_AOWT1)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic concepts associated with treating industrial

wastewater to prepare it for safe discharge and reuse. After completing this unit , t rainees should be able to describe processes

and equipment typically used for wastewater collection and primary treatment, describe the use of chemical precipitat ion

and dissolved air flotation in intermediate treatment, and describe the use of activated sludge in secondary treatment.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Primary Treatment

Explain what wastewater is, where it comes from, and why it must be treated.

Define the following terms: sewer, sewage, and effluent.

Describe processes and equipment typically used in wastewater collection and primary treatment.

Explain why the pH of water may have to be adjusted.

Describe the process of clarification and explain how an upflow clarifier works.

Intermediate Treatment

Describe how clarification is used with chemical precipitation to remove some types of dissolved materials.

Describe the principles of operation for dissolved air flotation.

Secondary Treatment

Define the following terms: micro-organisms, return act ivated sludge, waste activated sludge, and mixed liquor.

Describe the activated sludge process.

Explain the basic requirements that must be met in order for micro-organisms to work efficiently in the activated

sludge process.

Define sludge handling.

Describe some typical methods of sludge handling.

Subjects:

Primary Treatment

Introduction to Wastewater

Wastewater Flow and Screening

Equalization and pH Adjustment

Clarification

Intermediate Treatment

Chemical Precipitation

Dissolved Air Flotation

Secondary Treatment

The Activated Sludge Process

Sludge Handling

Course 198 of 245


WATER TREATMENT: Wastewater 2 (IHRDC_OM_AOWT2)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic concepts associated with treating industrial

wastewater so that it can be safely reused or discharged into the environment. After completing this unit , t rainees should be

able to describe how filt rat ion and activated carbon adsorption can be used in tert iary treatment, and how final effluent

quality standards affect the discharge of wastewater from an industrial facility. They should also be able to describe general

operator responsibilit ies associated with wastewater treatment and specific operator responsibilit ies associated with activated

sludge systems.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Tertiary Treatment

Explain how filt rat ion can be used in tert iary treatment.

Explain how activated carbon adsorption can be used in tert iary treatment.

Describe how established quality standards affect the discharge of wastewater from an indust rial facility.

Operator Responsibilities

Describe tasks that an operator routinely performs to make sure that equipment used in wastewater treatment

is funct ioning properly.

Describe the purpose of sampling and analysis programs for wastewater treatment units.

Describe the role of safety in wastewater treatment unit operations.

Ident ify process variables that operators monitor and adjust when operat ing wastewater treatment systems.

Define the following terms: sludge blanket level, biochemical oxygen demand, food to micro-organisms ratio,

mean cell residence t ime, and shock.

Subjects:

Tertiary Treatment

Filt rat ion and Activated Carbon Adsorption

Final Effluent Quality Standards

Operator Responsibilities

General Responsibilit ies

Secondary Treatment Responsibilit ies

Course 199 of 245


WATER TREATMENT: Water for Plant Systems 1 (IHRDC_OM_AOWW1)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with basic concepts associated with primary water t reatment

and chlorination. After completing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe problems that can be caused by impurit ies in

the water used in plant systems and explain how some of these impurit ies can be removed by screens, clarifiers, and filters. They

should also be able to explain why and how chlorine is used in water treatment.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Primary Water Treatment

Describe primary and secondary water treatment and the uses of water after each treatment.

Describe problems with plant equipment that can be caused by dissolved solids, dissolved gases, and

suspended solids.

Describe organic and inorganic suspended solids.

Describe the function and operation of screens.

Describe the function and operation of clarifiers.

Describe the coagulat ion, flocculation, and sett ling stages of clarification.

Describe the function and operation of filters.

Chlorination

Describe some of the effects that micro-organisms can have on plant equipment.

Describe the functions and operation of a typical chlorine evaporator and a typical chlorinator.

Describe safety precautions associated with operations involving chlorine.

Subjects:

Primary Water Treatment

Introduction

Screens

Clarifiers

Filters

Chlorination

Micro-Organisms

Chlorine Addit ion Equipment

Safety Precaut ions

Course 200 of 245


WATER TREATMENT: Water for Plant Systems 2 (IHRDC_OM_AOWW2)

Overview:

This interactive training unit is designed to familiarize trainees with the process of removing dissolved solids and gases from

water, and with the safe use of chemicals in water treatment. After complet ing this unit, t rainees should be able to describe

ways in which dissolved solids and gases can cause problems in plant equipment. They should also be able to describe how

these impurit ies can be removed by devices such as water softeners, demineralizers, activated carbon filters, aerators, and

de-aerators. In addit ion, t rainees should be able to explain how chemicals are used in water treatment and identify safety

precautions for the use of chemicals.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Dissolved Solids Removal

Describe ways in which dissolved solids can cause problems in plant equipment.

Describe the general function and operat ion of a water softener.

Describe the general function and operat ion of a demineralizer.

Dissolved Gas Removal

Describe ways in which dissolved gases can cause problems in plant equipment.

Describe how gases such as oxygen, carbon dioxide, and hydrogen sulfide become dissolved in water.

Describe ways that corrosion can be prevented or controlled.

Describe the general function and operat ion of an activated carbon filter.

Describe the general function and operat ion of an aerator.

Describe the general function and operat ion of a de-aerator.

Chemical Treatment

Describe how corrosion inhibitors, scale inhibitors, and other chemicals are used in t reating water.

Describe the general operation of a chemical injection pump.

Describe safety precautions that should be taken when working around chemicals.

Subjects:

Dissolved Solids Removal

Dissolved Solids

Water Softeners

Demineralizers

Dissolved Gas Removal

Dissolved Gases

Carbon Filters

Aerators

De-aerators

Chemical Treatment

Chemicals in Water Treatment

Chemical Safety

Course 201 of 245

CONTROL SYSTEMS CURRICULUM




Control Systems

CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Field Devices: Analog Configuration (IHRDC_OM_ACPCA)

Overview:

The CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Field Devices - Analog Configuration t raining program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees

with basic procedures for configuring tradit ional and "smart" analog field devices. After completing this program, the trainees

should be able to explain how to set zero and span and perform a calibration procedure on a tradit ional analog transmitter.

They should also be able to explain the basics of how to configure a smart analog field device using a portable communicator

or a laptop PC.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Define "analog" as it relates to process control signals.

Explain how analog field devices function in process control systems.

Explain how to set zero and span on a tradit ional electronic transmitter.

Explain how to perform a calibrat ion procedure on a non-smart transmitter.

Explain the relationship between the value of a process variable and a transmitter's 4-20 milliamp output signal.

Ident ify the basic configuration parameters for smart transmitters.

Calculate a process measurement from a smart transmitter's analog signal output.

Explain how to configure a smart field devices with a portable communicator.

Explain how to configure a smart field device with a laptop PC.

Subjects:

Analog Field Devices

Analog Field Devices

Tradit ional Electronic Devices

Configuring Smart Devices

Configuration Methods

Portable Communicators

Laptop PCs

Course 202 of 245

Control Systems

CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Field Devices: Analytical (IHRDC_OM_ACPAF)

Overview:

The Field Devices - Analyt ical t raining program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with input field devices that perform

online analyses. After completing this program, the trainees should be able to describe common applications and procedures

that are associated with the use of online analyzers. They should also be able to describe some of the many different types of

online analyzers that are used in cont inuous process systems.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Describe common applications of online analyt ical field devices in continuous process systems.

Describe the essent ial components of most online process analyzers.

Describe general concerns associated with the installat ion, operation, and maintenance of online analyzers.

Describe common types of electrochemical analyzers that use property- or compound-specific sensors for online

analyses in continuous process systems.

Describe one type of flammable vapor analyzer that is commonly used in continuous process systems.

Describe common maintenance concerns associated with electromagnet ic analyzers.

Describe optical analyzers that are commonly used for online analyses in continuous process systems.

Describe mass spectrometers that are commonly used for online analyses in continuous process systems.

Describe nuclear devices that are commonly used for online analysis of density.

Describe common maintenance concerns associated with electromagnet ic analyzers.

Describe chromatographs that are commonly used for online analyses in continuous process systems.

Describe common maintenance concerns associated with gas chromatographs.

Subjects:

Introduction

Typical Applicat ions

Basic Concerns

Types of Online Analyzers

Electrochemical Analyzers

Electromagnetic Analyzers

Chromatographs

Course 203 of 245

Control Systems

CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Field Devices: Configuring with a Laptop PC

(IHRDC_OM_ACPCL)

Overview:

The Field Devices - Configuring with a Laptop PC training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with basic

procedures for using a laptop PC to configure analog field devices. After complet ing this program, the trainees should be able

to explain how to configure an input device such as a transmitter and an output device such as a control valve.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Use Foxboro's PC-10 program to configure a transmitter.

Use Foxboro's PC-20 program to configure a control valve.

Subjects:

Configuring Input Field Devices

Configuring a Transmitter

Configuring Output Field Devices

Configuring a Control Valve

Course 204 of 245

Control Systems

CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Field Devices: Digital Configuration with a DCS

(IHRDC_OM_ACPCD)

Overview:

The CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Field Devices - Digital Configurat ion with DCSs training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize

t rainees with basic procedures for using a distributed control system (DCS) to configure digital field devices. After completing

this program, the trainees should be able to explain how to use the Honeywell TDC 3000 and the Fisher-Rosemount DeltaV to

configure a digital field device.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Explain how digital field devices differ from analog field devices.

Describe how a DCS is used to monitor and control a process.

Ident ify and describe the information that is provided on the point detail screens of a typical DCS.

Describe a basic procedure for using a DCS to configure a digital field device.

Describe the basic operating principles and architecture of fieldbus technology.

Describe a basic procedure for using the DeltaV to configure a field device.

Subjects:

The DCS

Digital Field Devices

Distributed Control Systems

Honeywell TDC 3000

Point Details

Configurat ion of Digital Field Devices

Fisher Rosemount DeltaV

Fieldbus Technology

DeltaV Digital Configuration

Course 205 of 245

Control Systems

CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Field Devices: Level and Flow (IHRDC_OM_ACPLF)

Overview:

The Field Devices - Level and Flow t raining program is designed to familiarize trainees with input field devices that sense and

monitor level or flow. After completing this program, the t rainees should be able to describe the basic operation of various

types of level measurement and flow measurement devices.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Define the following terms: level, point level measurement, continuous level measurement, direct level measurement,

and indirect level measurement.

Ident ify common examples of point, continuous, direct, and indirect level measurement devices.

Ident ify factors that determine the type of level measurement device used for a part icular application.

Define the termsdensity, specific gravity, and hydrostat ic pressure.

Describe how pressure gauges, differential pressure transmitters, bubblers, and displacers provide level measurements.

Describe common applications and limitations associated with pressure gauges, differential pressure transmitters,

bubblers, and displacers.

Describe factors that must be considered during the configuration of pressure gauges, differential pressure transmitters,

bubblers, and displacers.

Describe how capacitance, or radio frequency (RF) devices, and conductance devices measure level.

Describe common applications and limitations associated with capacitance and conductance devices.

Describe factors that must be considered during the configuration of capacitance and conductance devices.

Describe how radar, ultrasonic, laser, and nuclear level measurement devices work.

Describe common applications and limitations associated with radar, ultrasonic, laser, and nuclear level measurement

devices.

Describe how tuning fork sensors and weight devices provide level measurements. Describe common applications and

limitat ions associated with tuning fork sensors and weight devices.

Describe how different ial pressure flowmeters provide flow measurements. Identify common primary flow elements that

are used in differential pressure measurement.

Describe common problems that can affect the operation of differential pressure flowmeters.

Describe how posit ive displacement flowmeters measure flow.

Describe how turbine flowmeters measure flow.

Describe applications and limitations associated with posit ive displacement flowmeters and turbine flowmeters.

Describe how magnetic, vortex, and ultrasonic flowmeters measure flow. Describe applications and limitat ions

associated with magnetic, vortex, and ultrasonic flowmeters.

Describe operating principles and applications, limitations, and installat ion considerations for Coriolis flowmeters and

thermal flowmeters.

Subjects:

Level Measurement

Types of Level Measurement

Pressure- and Density-Based Devices

Capacitance and Conductance Devices

Non-Contact Devices

Tuning Fork Sensors and Weight Devices

Flow Measurement

Different ial Pressure Flowmeters

Mechanical Flowmeters

Electronic Flowmeters

Mass Flowmeters

Course 206 of 245

Control Systems

CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Field Devices: Pressure,Temperature & Weight

(IHRDC_OM_ACPPT)

Overview:

The Field Devices - Temperature, Pressure, and Weight t raining program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with input

field devices that sense and monitor temperature, pressure, or weight. After completing this program, the t rainees should be

able to describe the basic operation of various types of temperature, pressure, and weight transducers and transmitters.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

List typical temperature, pressure, and weight applications.

Explain how thermocouples, RTDs, and thermistors work.

Explain reference junction compensat ion.

Explain RTD lead length compensat ion.

Explain how load cells work.

Explain absolute, gauge, and differential pressure measurement.

Explain the function of set points.

Describe transmitter operating parameters, and define the following terms: range, LRL, URL, LRV, URV, span, turndown

ratio, engineering units, PV, and SV.

Explain how transmitter accuracy can be specified.

Ident ify and describe common transmitter configurat ion options.

Describe the ways that transmitters communicate signal information.

Describe how to set up a tradit ional t ransmitter.

Explain how to communicate with, configure, and test a smart transmitter.

Subjects:

Temperature, Pressure, and Weight Inputs

Applications

Temperature Transducers

Pressure and Weight Transducers

Sensor Switches

Signal Equipment

Transmitter Characterist ics

Transmitter Procedures

Course 207 of 245

Control Systems

CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Field Devices: Using Field Communicators

(IHRDC_OM_ACPFC)

Overview:

The CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Field Devices - Using Field Communicators training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize

t rainees with basic procedures for using field communicators to configure "smart " analog field devices. After completing this

program, the trainees should be able to explain how to configure smart analog transmitters using a HART communicator, a

Honeywell communicator, a Yokogawa communicator, and the Foxboro Local Display Module.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Explain how to use the HART communicator to perform the basic configurat ion of a magflow transmitter.

Explain how to use a Honeywell SFC to perform the basic configurat ion of a differential pressure t ransmitter.

Explain how to use the Yokogawa BT200 to perform the basic configuration of a pressure transmitter.

Explain how to use the Foxboro Local Display Module to perform the basic configurat ion of a transmitter.

Subjects:

HART Protocol - Magnetic Flow Transmitter

Using the HART Communicator

Honeywell Protocol - Pressure (DP) Transmitter

Using the Honeywell Communicator

Yokogawa Protocol - Pressure Transmitter

Using the Yokogawa Communicator

Foxboro - Local Display Module

Using the Foxboro Local Display Module

Course 208 of 245

Control Systems

CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Introduction to Distributed Control Systems

(IHRDC_OM_ACPID)

Overview:

The Introduction to Distributed Control Systems training program, or unit , is designed to familiarize trainees with DCS

architecture and basic tasks that DCS technicians may be asked to perform. After completing this program, the trainees

should be able to describe the architectural organizat ion of DCS field components, central components, and control loops.

They should also be able to describe ways that a DCS technician typically works with a DCS.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Explain the functions of input and output devices.

Describe the difference between digital and analog I/O devices.

List examples of I/O field devices.

Describe how I/O devices communicate.

Ident ify I/O devices from a piping and instrument diagram.

Describe typical I/O field termination equipment.

Describe typical I/O and control processor cards and functions.

Explain the data functions of the system server.

Explain how to use a DCS user interface for basic informat ion retrieval.

Describe DCS networks.

Explain why and how PLCs are sometimes part of a DCS.

Describe typical control loops.

Describe the information that can be obtained from loop sheets.

Describe preparations for working on a field device.

Describe basic service operations that may have to be performed on a field device.

Ident ify troubleshooting tasks that can be performed in a rack room.

Ident ify tasks that can be performed at a DCS user interface.

Subjects:

DCS Architecture

Field Components

Central Components

Control Loops

Working with a DCS

Field Device Tasks

Rack Room Tasks

At the User Interface

Course 209 of 245

Control Systems

CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Multiple Loop Control (IHRDC_OM_ACPML)

Overview:

The Mult iple Loop Control training program, or unit , is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic operat ion and use of

mult iple loop control. After complet ing this program, the trainees should be able to explain the basic operation of mult iple

single loops, cascade control, rat io control, feedforward control, and special connections that are used with mult iple loop

control. They should also be able to use a P & ID to trace boiler control functionality.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Explain typical interactions between single control loops.

Explain several types and applications of cascade control.

Explain several types and applications of rat io control.

Describe computational components that are typically used in mult iple loop control.

Explain how limiters, interlocks, override controls and selective controls are used.

Explain the difference between feedback control and feedforward control.

Describe the advantages, problems, and applications of feedforward control.

Ident ify the main boiler control components and connections on a P & ID.

Trace boiler control functionality.

Subjects:

Multiple Loop Applications

Mult iple Single Loops

Cascade Control

Ratio Control

Special Mult iple Loop Connections

Feedforward Control

Boiler Master Controls

P & ID Conventions and Symbology

Boiler Control Operation

Course 210 of 245

Control Systems

CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Pneumatic Controls (IHRDC_OM_ACPPC )

Overview:

The Pneumatic Controls training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize t rainees with the basic operation, maintenance,

and calibrat ion of components in a pneumatic control system. After completing this program, the trainees should be able

describe to how to service the various devices that help dry and filter the air and how to check pressure control devices in the

system for proper operation. They should also be able to describe the basic operation and maintenance of some typical control

components in a pneumatic system.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Describe the operation and maintenance of air supply components that dry and filter compressed air in a pneumatic

control system.

Describe the operation and maintenance of pressure control components in a pneumatic control system.

Describe the operating principles of pneumatic control components.

Ident ify the basic types of pneumatic sensor-transmitters.

Describe the operation and maintenance of sensor-transmitters.

Ident ify and describe common types of pneumatic receiver-controllers.

Describe basic calibration procedures for a typical receiver-controller.

Ident ify and describe common types of pneumatic actuators.

Describe procedures involved in test ing, calibrating, and maintaining pneumatic actuators.

Subjects:

Air Supply Maintenance

Air Filtering

Pressure Control

Control Components

Basic Operation

Sensor-Transmitters

Receiver-Controllers

Actuators

Course 211 of 245

Control Systems

CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Principles (IHRDC_OM_ACPCR)

Overview:

The Principles training program, or unit , is designed to familiarize trainees with some of the basic material, process, and system

characterist ics that can affect process control. After completing this program, the trainees should be able to identify and

describe some basic factors that affect process control. They should also be able to describe common process control methods

and the operat ion of loops that control crit ical process variables.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Ident ify variables that are routinely monitored and controlled by process control systems.

Describe basic material propert ies and fluid flow characterist ics.

Describe the relationship between temperature and pressure in fluids.

Describe the basic principles and methods of heat transfer.

Ident ify and describe some basic factors that affect process control.

Describe on/off, proport ional, integral (reset), derivat ive (rate), and PID control algorithms.

Ident ify and describe pressure, temperature, level, flow, and pH control loops in a typical boiler system.

Subjects:

Process Characterist ics

Example System Layout

Material Attributes

Control Systems

Basic Control Factors

Process Control Methods

Process Control Loops

Course 212 of 245

Control Systems

CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Single Loop Control (IHRDC_OM_ACPSL)

Overview:

The Single Loop Control training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic operation and use of single

control loops. After complet ing this program, the trainees should be able to explain the basic operation of a feedback control

loop, describe how the proport ional-integral-derivative (PID) control algorithm works, and ident ify and describe features that

may be used to enhance the performance of a PID controller.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Describe a typical feedback control loop.

Describe how the proport ional-integral-derivative (PID) control algorithm works.

Ident ify and describe features that are commonly used to enhance the performance of a PID controller.

Describe a typical single-loop pressure control system.

Describe a typical single-loop temperature control system.

Describe a typical single-loop level control system.

Describe a typical single-loop flow control system.

Describe a typical single-loop pH control system.

Subjects:

Control Basics

Feedback Control Loop

PID Control

Controller Enhancements

Course 213 of 245

Control Systems

CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Smart Controllers (IHRDC_OM_ACPSC)

Overview:

The Smart Controllers t raining program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with the operation and use of smart controllers.

After completing this program, the trainees should be able to describe basic procedures for installing, configuring, operating,

and tuning smart controllers.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Describe the purpose of a smart controller.

Describe a smart controller's common control options.

Explain how to install and wire a new or replacement smart controller.

Explain how to configure a smart controller.

Explain how to operate a smart controller.

Explain how to tune a smart controller for optimum performance.

Describe the procedures for troubleshooting a single loop process controlled by a smart controller.

Describe the procedures for tuning a single loop process controlled by a smart controller.

Subjects:

Setting Up Smart Controllers

Characterist ics

Installat ion and Configurat ion

Using Smart Controllers

Operation and Tuning

Demonstration

Course 214 of 245

Control Systems

CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Troubleshooting DCS I/Os: Practices (IHRDC_OM_ACPTP)

Overview:

The Troubleshooting DCS I/Os: Practices t raining program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with some practical

applicat ions of basic procedures for troubleshoot ing the inputs and outputs of a distributed control system. After completing

this program, the trainees should be able to explain how to troubleshoot problems in digital I/O devices that are part of a DCS,

analog I/O devices that are part of a DCS, and miscellaneous I/O components of a DCS.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Describe basic steps for troubleshoot ing a problem in a digital I/O device that is part of a DCS.

Describe basic steps for troubleshoot ing a problem in an analog I/O device that is part of a DCS.

Describe basic steps for troubleshoot ing a problem in a miscellaneous I/O component of a DCS.

Subjects:

Troubleshooting Practices

Troubleshooting Digital I/O Devices

Troubleshooting Analog I/O Devices

Troubleshooting Miscellaneous I/O Components

Course 215 of 245

Control Systems

CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Troubleshooting DCS I/Os: Procedures (IHRDC_OM_ACPTD)

Overview:

The Troubleshooting DCS I/Os: Procedures training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize t rainees with basic procedures for

t roubleshooting the inputs and outputs of a distributed control system. After complet ing this program, the trainees should be

able to explain how to gather information about a DCS I/O problem, identify possible causes of the problem, test the possible

causes, and finish up the troubleshooting procedure.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Explain how to gather information about a DCS I/O problem.

Explain how to eliminate possible causes of a DCS I/O problem.

Explain how to priorit ize possible causes of a DCS I/O problem.

Explain how to test possible causes of a DCS I/O problem in a logical order.

Explain how to complete the procedures for troubleshooting a DCS I/O problem.

Subjects:

Troubleshooting Procedures

Invest igating Symptoms

Ident ifying Possible Causes

Test ing Possible Causes

Finishing Up

Course 216 of 245

Control Systems

CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Troubleshooting Loops (IHRDC_OM_ACPTS)

Overview:

The Troubleshooting Loops training program, or unit , is designed to familiarize trainees with basic procedures for troubleshooting

control loop problems. After completing this program, the trainees should be able to explain how to use a systematic

t roubleshooting procedure to t roubleshoot problems in control loops.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Explain how to gather information about a control loop problem.

Explain how to eliminate components or functional elements as possible causes of a control loop problem.

Explain how to priorit ize possible causes of a control loop problem.

Explain how to test possible causes of a control loop problem in a logical order.

Describe the steps that should be taken to complete the troubleshooting of a control loop problem.

Describe a basic procedure for troubleshooting a discrete control loop.

Describe a basic procedure for troubleshooting a single analog control loop.

Describe considerations in t roubleshooting a mult iloop control system.

Subjects:

The Troubleshooting Procedure

Invest igating Symptoms

Ident ifying Possible Causes

Test ing Possible Causes

Finishing Up

Loop Troubleshooting Examples

Discrete Loop

Single Control Loop

Mult iloop Control

Course 217 of 245

Control Systems

CONTINUOUS PROCESS: Tuning Loops (IHRDC_OM_ACPTL)

Overview:

The Tuning Loops training program, or unit , is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic principles of tuning control loops.

After completing this program, the trainees should be able to describe how to prepare for tuning a loop and how to tune a

loop manually using a systematic trial and error method, the Ziegler-Nichols open loop method, and the Ziegler-Nichols closed

loop method. They should also be able describe how tuning can be accomplished by the auto-tune function, by art ificial

intelligence features, and by tuning software.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Describe tuning in relation to loop response.

Describe the types of process upsets.

Explain process delays.

Describe the effects of gain, reset , and rate on response curves.

Explain how to identify and assess asymmetry, non-linearity, and noise.

Explain how to correct or reduce hysteresis, st ict ion, and noise.

Dist inguish between random tuning and systematic trial and error tuning.

Describe the precautions necessary when tuning by trial and error.

Explain the procedure for tuning using the Z-N open loop method.

Explain the procedure for tuning using the Z-N closed loop, or ult imate gain, method.

Describe how the auto-tune function tunes.

Describe art ificial intelligence (fuzzy logic) tuning features.

Explain how to connect and run tuning programs.

Describe the options tuning programs may provide.

Subjects:

Closed Loop Operation

Control Loop Response

Before Tuning

Manual Tuning

Trial and Error Tuning

Ziegler-Nichols Tuning Methods

Automated Tuning

Self-Tuning

Software Tuning

Course 218 of 245

Control Systems

CORE: Basic Electrical Test Equipment (IHRDC_OM_ACCBE)

Overview:

The Basic Electrical Test Equipment training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with various types of electrical

test instruments. After complet ing this program, the trainees should be able to follow safe work pract ices and procedures while

properly using circuit testers, mult imeters, ammeters, megohmmeters, and digital low resistance ohmmeters.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Follow safe work practices and procedures while using electrical test equipment.

Use circuit testers to indicate the presence of energized electrical circuits.

Use an analog mult imeter to measure voltage, resistance, and current in AC and DC circuits.

Use a digital mult imeter to measure voltage, resistance, and current in AC and DC circuits.

Ident ify in-line and clamp-on ammeters.

Use an analog ammeter to measure current through a conductor.

Use a digital ammeter to measure current through a conductor.

Use a megohmmeter to test the insulation resistance of a conductor, transformer, and motor.

Explain how to measure the resistance of electrical circuits and equipment with a DLRO.

Subjects:

Test Equipment Safety

Safe Work Practices

Circuit Testers

Basic Operation

Multimeters

Basic Operation

Ammeters

Basic Operation

Megohmmeters

Basic Operation

DLRO

Basic Operation

Course 219 of 245

Control Systems

CORE: Digital and Analog Oscilloscopes (IHRDC_OM_ACCDA)

Overview:

The Digital and Analog Oscilloscopes training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic operation and

use of digital and analog oscilloscopes. After completing this program, the trainees should be able to explain what an

oscilloscope does, explain how to set up an oscilloscope for use, identify the controls used to adjust an oscilloscope display, and

explain how to use an oscilloscope to make voltage measurements and t ime measurements.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Briefly explain how an oscilloscope converts a voltage input to an on-screen trace.

Describe how an oscilloscope display is graduated.

Explain why proper grounding is important.

Explain how to set the controls to "standard posit ion" for the init ial setup of an oscilloscope.

Explain how to select, compensate, and use oscilloscope probes.

Ident ify the controls used to adjust an oscilloscope display and explain their functions.

Explain what an oscilloscope's vert ical controls do and how to use them.

Explain what an oscilloscope's horizontal controls do and how to use them.

Determine an applied voltage by counting oscilloscope screen divisions.

Determine frequency by measuring the period on an oscilloscope screen.

Determine a pulse width and rise t ime.

Subjects:

Fundamentals

Basic Operating Theory

Display Fundamentals

Setting Up

Grounding and Safety

Controls

Probes

Control Use

Display

Vert ical

Horizontal

Measurement Techniques

Voltage

Time

Course 220 of 245

Control Systems

CORE: Introduction to Control and Data Systems (IHRDC_OM_ACCIC)

Overview:

The Introduction to Control and Data Systems training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with the role of

information systems in plant operations and the elements of modern information systems. After completing this program, the

trainees should be able to identify the information needs of typical plant functional elements and explain how information gets

into an information system. They should also be able to describe system architecture and explain how to use environment

software and applicat ion software.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

List the information needs of typical plant functional elements.

Explain how alarms work in modern plants.

List the routes by which information gets into the system.

Explain I/O bus, LAN, WAN, client-server, and the role of network standards.

Explain the function of an operating system.

Describe the characterist ics of common operat ing systems.

Explain the role of operating system and network software.

Explain virtual instrumentation.

Explain programmable logic controller (PLC) program creation.

Describe how to use graphical objects to create the system data structure and HMI.

Describe password hierarchy and the need for security.

Describe the functions and architecture of a SCADA system.

Subjects:

Information and Plant Operations

Information Needs

Information Sources

Information Systems

System Architecture

Environment Software

Application Software

Course 221 of 245

Control Systems

CORE: Introduction to Process Control (IHRDC_OM_ACCIN )

Overview:

The Introduction training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic elements, terminology, and functions

of control systems. After completing this program, the trainees should be able to identify and describe various types of input

and output devices that are commonly used with automated control systems. They should also be able to identify and

describe common types of control devices and control loop arrangement

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Define terms commonly associated with the input side of a control system.

Ident ify and describe common types of temperature sensors that provide input information to a control system.

Ident ify and describe common types of posit ion sensors.

Ident ify and describe common types of pressure sensors, flow sensors, and level sensors.

Ident ify and describe common types of electric instruments, t imers, counters, recorders, and pneumatic sensors.

Ident ify and describe common actuating devices used in the output side of a control system.

Describe common decision-making devices that connect the input and output elements in a control system.

Describe common control loop arrangements used in automatic control systems.

Subjects:

Input Elements

Terminology

Temperature Sensors

Posit ion Sensors

Pressure, Flow, and Level Sensors

Other Input Devices

Output Elements

Actuating Devices

Control Elements

Decision-Making Devices

Control Loops

Course 222 of 245

Control Systems

CORE: Principles of Calibration (IHRDC_OM_ACCCA )

Overview:

The Principles of Calibration t raining program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic principles associated with

the calibration of input field devices and control loops. After completing this program, the trainees should be able to explain

how to test, adjust , and calibrate various types of gauges and transmitters. They should also be able to explain how to test , set

up, and adjust input field devices and calibrate control loops.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Explain how to decide the best t ime to test and calibrate.

Describe the proper steps involved in a lockout/tagout procedure.

Describe how to perform basic calibrat ion procedures on a typical pressure gauge, pressure transmitter, and

thermocouple.

Describe how to adjust a typical sensor that switches in response to discrete posit ion.

Describe how to test and adjust a typical sensor that switches at a temperature, pressure, or control signal set point .

Describe how to test and calibrate a typical sensor that responds to concentrations.

Describe how to test, set up, and adjust a typical sensor that responds to flow.

Describe how to perform basic calibrat ion procedures on a typical output field device.

Describe how to perform basic calibrat ion procedures on a typical control loop.

Subjects:

Gauges and Transmitters

Preparation

Pressure Gauge

Pressure Transmitter

Temperature Devices

Field Devices and Control Loops

Input Field Devices

Output Device and Loop Calibration

Course 223 of 245

Control Systems

CORE: Principles of Control (IHRDC_OM_ACCCO)

Overview:

The Principles of Control training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic operating principles of

controllers used with discrete input/output devices and analog input/output devices. After completing this program, the

trainees should be able to explain the control logic used in systems with discrete (digital) I/O, describe how to troubleshoot

systems that use individual relays and solid state controllers, and describe how to program a PLC and troubleshoot PLC system

problems. They should also be able to explain how analog variables can be converted to digital data and vice-versa, describe

PID control, describe common controller options and applications, and describe how to diagnose problems in single and

mult iple control loops.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Explain the control logic used in systems with discrete (digital) I/O.

Describe how to troubleshoot systems that use individual relays and solid state controllers.

Describe how to program a PLC, test the program, run and adjust the program, and troubleshoot PLC system problems.

Explain how analog variables can be converted to digital data and vice-versa.

Describe proport ional control, derivative control, and integral control.

Describe common controller options and applications.

Diagnose problems in single and mult iple control loops.

Subjects:

Controllers Used with Discrete I/O

Digital Logic

Individual Relays

PLC Applications

Controllers Used with Analog I/O

Analog/Digital Conversion

PID Control

Special Controller Features

Troubleshooting Control Loops

Course 224 of 245

Control Systems

CORE: The Human-Machine Interface (IHRDC_OM_ACCHM)

Overview:

The The Human-Machine Interface t raining program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with the different types of HMIs

that are likely to be found in a modern plant. After completing this program, the trainees should be able to obtain process

information using typical instruments, operate typical switch controls, use smart I/O devices and controller interfaces, and

perform common computer operations.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Read typical instruments.

Use typical switch controls.

Configure smart I/O devices.

Operate portable instruments.

Operate and program a variable frequency drive.

Take readings from and program a loop controller.

Use dedicated graphics terminals.

Describe the role of software in computer operation.

Describe the main funct ional components of a computer.

Use common DOS and character-based keyboard/screen functions.

Use common GUI keyboard/screen functions.

Turn a computer on and log on.

Find and run a program, enter data, save, print , exit , and shut down a computer.

Subjects:

Traditional Equipment Interfaces

Instruments

Controls

Microprocessor-Based HMIs

Smart I/O Interfaces

Controller Interfaces

The Computer Interface

Basic Computer Hardware and Operation

The Human-Computer Interface

Common Computer Operations

Course 225 of 245

Control Systems

NETWORKS: Fiber Optic Systems (IHRDC_OM_ACNFO )

Overview:

The NETWORKS: Fiber Optic Systems training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize t rainees with the basic operating

principles of fiber optic systems and some of the basic installat ion and test ing methods. After completing this program, the

trainees should be able to describe characterist ics of glass fibers and describe the function and types of fiber optic connectors.

They should also be able to describe basic procedures for installing and test ing fiber optics.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Describe the composit ion of a common glass fiber.

Describe characterist ics of mult i-mode fiber.

Describe characterist ics of single-mode fiber.

Describe characterist ics of optic fibers and cables.

Describe the function and types of fiber optic connectors.

Describe hazards and work precaut ions associated with fiber optics.

List the main steps associated with running a new fiber optic drop.

Describe steps that are commonly used to terminate fiber.

Describe steps that are commonly used to make fiber splices.

Describe steps that can be used to check newly installed fibers.

Subjects:

Operating Principles

Glass Fibers

Basic System Hardware

Installation Tasks

Safety

Installing Cable

Terminations and Splices

Course 226 of 245

Control Systems

NETWORKS: Introduction (IHRDC_OM_ACNIN )

Overview:

The NETWORKS: Introduction training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with some different types of control

systems and some basic concepts that apply to control system networks. After completing this program, the trainees should be

able to describe the layout and operation of tradit ional non-networked control systems and the layout and operation of some

common networked control systems. They should also be able to describe factors that can affect the speed at which signals

can be sent across a network, describe the various levels of network protocol, and describe common physical network layouts,

or topologies.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Describe the layout and operation of tradit ional non-networked control systems.

Describe the layout and operation of some common networked control systems.

Describe how informat ion is coded as digital data for network transmission.

Ident ify and describe factors that can affect the speed at which signals can be sent across a network.

Ident ify and describe the various levels, or layers, of network protocol (the rules that govern how a network functions).

Ident ify and describe common physical network layouts, or topologies

Ident ify common protocols used in network control systems.

Subjects:

Control Systems Overview

Non-Networked Systems

Networked Systems

Basic Network Concepts

Digital Data

Network Speed and Traffic

Network Protocol and Topology

Common Protocol Types

Course 227 of 245

Control Systems

NETWORKS: Setting Up and Troubleshooting (IHRDC_OM_ACNST )

Overview:

The NETWORKS: Sett ing Up and Troubleshooting training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize t rainees with basic concepts

that apply to sett ing up and troubleshooting control networks. After complet ing this program, the trainees should be able to

describe different types of cables and connectors that are used to link together devices in control networks. They should also

be able to describe basic procedures for installing, test ing, and troubleshooting control networks.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Describe coaxial cable and explain how to install a connector onto the cable.

Describe common types of twisted pair cable and explain how to install connectors onto the cables.

Ident ify and describe factors that must be considered when cable is routed.

Describe how to connect and use a cable tester to perform various tests on network cabling.

Describe common hardware configuration procedures that need to be performed during network installat ion.

Describe common troubleshooting techniques that are helpful for ident ifying problems with network cabling and

devices.

Subjects:

Cables and Connectors

Coaxial Cable

Twisted Pair Cable

Network Installation

Cable Routing

Circuit Test ing

Hardware Configuration

Troubleshooting

Course 228 of 245

Control Systems

PLCs: Architecture, Types and Networks (IHRDC_OM_ACLAT)

Overview:

The PLCs: Architecture, Types and Networks t raining program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic operation

and components of programmable logic controllers (PLCs). After completing this program, the trainees should be able to

explain what a PLC does, identify and describe PLC components, and explain how PLCs communicate.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Explain how PLCs can be used to replace conventional, hard-wired ladder diagrams.

Explain how PLC programs can be used to control machines and processes.

Ident ify the three main parts of a PLC system.

Recognize a processor for a PLC and describe its functions.

Recognize different types of input modules.

Explain how to wire input devices into input modules.

Recognize different types of output modules.

Explain how to wire output devices into output modules.

Recognize power supplies.

Recognize different types of programming terminals.

Ident ify the three main t ime periods of the PLC scan cycle.

Ident ify factors that can affect the scan cycle t ime of a PLC.

Recognize different types of PLC networks.

List devices that typically communicate across different types of PLC networks.

Recognize that automated networks may include methods of machine control other than PLCs.

Subjects:

PLC Operations

Basic PLC Concepts

System Components

The Processor

The Input System

The Output System

Other Components

The PLC Scan

The PLC Scan Cycle

Scan Time

How PLCs Communicate

Networking PLCs

Other Methods of Machine Control

Course 229 of 245

Control Systems

PLCs: Human Machine Interface and Troubleshooting (IHRDC_OM_ACLMT)

Overview:

The PLCs: HMIs and Troubleshooting training program, or unit , is designed to familiarize trainees with human-machine interfaces

and how they can be used in the troubleshoot ing of programmable logic controller system problems. After completing this

program, the trainees should be able to identify various types of HMIs and explain how they are connected and used. They

should also be able to describe the five steps of troubleshooting and explain how to use those steps and an HMI to

t roubleshoot a problem in a PLC system.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Ident ify common types of HMIs.

List different ways to connect an HMI to a PLC.

Describe some basic factors involved in using a PC-based HMI.

Explain why it is important to know the equipment before you start to troubleshoot.

List the aids available to you in invest igating the symptoms.

Explain how to use the half-splitt ing method of identifying symptoms.

Explain how to priorit ize and eliminate possible causes.

Explain the importance of determining root causes of malfunct ions.

Explain how to use an HMI and the five-step troubleshoot ing process to troubleshoot a PLC-controlled system.

Subjects:

The Human-Machine Interface

Types of HMIs

Connection to the PLC

Using an HMI

The Five Steps of Troubleshooting

Know the Equipment

Invest igate Symptoms

List Probable Causes

Test Probable Causes

Discover Root Causes

A Troubleshooting Case Study

Course 230 of 245

Control Systems

PLCs: I/O Communication (IHRDC_OM_ACLIO)

Overview:

The PLCs: I/O Communication training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with the various ways in which

real-world devices can be connected to the input and output systems of a programmable logic controller. After completing

this program, the trainees should be able to identify various types of I/O modules and field devices, and explain how direct I/O

connect ions are made. They should also be able to ident ify some common device networks and ident ify some devices, other

than PLC devices, that you might find on a typical device network.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Ident ify the pieces of hardware that make up a PLC rack.

Different iate between serial and parallel communication between racks.

Ident ify the three types of I/O modules.

Describe a typical I/O addressing scheme.

Describe the differences between discrete, or bit , devices; word devices; and analog field devices.

Describe the difference between sinking and sourcing I/O modules.

Explain why proper fusing, shielding and grounding are important when field devices are wired.

Relate I/O modules to the input and output image tables, and to the scan cycle.

Ident ify some common proprietary and non-proprietary device networks.

Ident ify some devices, other than PLC devices, that you might find on a typical device network.

Subjects:

Direct I/O Connections

How I/O Modules Are Mounted

I/O Module Types

I/O Module Addressing

Field Devices

Field Wiring

I/O Data Processing

Networked I/O Modules

Types of Device Networks

Devices

Course 231 of 245

Control Systems

PLCs: Installing and Maintaining (IHRDC_OM_ACLIM)

Overview:

The PLCs: Installing and Maintaining t raining program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic procedures

involved in installing and sett ing up PLC equipment. After completing this program, the trainees should be able to explain how

to mount and wire up PLC hardware. They should also be able to describe how to establish communications between a PC

and a PLC, clear the processor memory, and init ially configure the processor.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Describe what must be taken into consideration when mounting PLC hardware.

Describe how to connect various types of PLC power supplies.

Explain why emergency stop circuits must be hardwired.

Explain what to be aware of when populating PLC chassis.

Describe what to be aware of when wiring I/O field devices.

Describe what to be aware of when making network connections.

Explain how to establish communication between a PLC and a PC.

Explain the steps necessary to clear the memory of a PLC.

Explain the steps necessary to perform the init ial configurat ion of a PLC.

Subjects:

Installing the PLC

Mounting PLC Chassis

Power Supplies and Connections

E-Stop Circuits

Configuring and Populating the Chassis

I/O Wiring

Network Connections

Initial Configuration

Establishing Communications

Clearing Memory

Performing Init ial Configuration

Course 232 of 245

Control Systems

PLCs: Introduction to Programming (IHRDC_OM_ACLIP)

Overview:

The PLCs: Int roduction to Programming training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with the basics of

programming a programmable logic controller. After completing this program, the trainees should be able to enter a simple

ladder diagram program into the memory of a PLC.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Explain how to start programming software and verify proper drivers, connections, and node addresses.

Name the two main file types in PLC memory.

Explain how to clear PLC memory.

Ident ify PLC bit and word I/O addresses.

Explain how to use RSLogix to insert a rung into a PLC.

Ident ify input and output inst ructions and explain how to add them to a rung.

Explain how to use RSLogix to add instruct ions and branches to a rung in a PLC.

Different iate between the inst ructions for a discrete input device and the inst ructions for input-type contacts on an

output device.

Different iate between the inst ructions for real I/O devices and the instructions for virtual I/O devices.

Explain how to connect real, discrete I/O devices to a PLC.

Explain how to determine input and output addresses for PLC screw terminals.

Explain how to use RSLogix to program a PLC to emulate a hard-wired program.

Subjects:

Establishing Communications

Programming with a PC

The PLC Memory Model

Preparing to Program the PLC

Programming a Rung

Basic Rung Using Discrete I/O

Complex Rungs

Complex Discrete I/O Inst ructions

A Real System Example

The Hardware

The PLC Program

Course 233 of 245

Control Systems

PLCs: Ladder Logic and Symbology (IHRDC_OM_ACLLL)

Overview:

The PLCs: Ladder Logic and Symbology training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize t rainees with how PLCs use ladder

diagrams and what the symbols used on ladder diagrams mean. After completing this program, the trainees should be able to

identify common ladder diagram symbols, explain how a ladder diagram rung performs the logic functions necessary to

determine whether the rung is true or false, and interpret the meaning of some common PLC instructions.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Ident ify the major parts of a ladder diagram.

Describe how a ladder diagram forms a parallel circuit.

Ident ify the NEMA symbols for common input devices.

Ident ify the NEMA symbols for common output devices.

Different iate between the Boolean AND, OR and NOT functions for mult iple devices on a rung.

Ident ify how each rung performs the logic functions necessary to determine whether the rung is t rue or false.

Recognize rung numbers on a ladder diagram.

Interpret cross references on a ladder diagram.

Explain the PLC mode of operation with the Run-Rem-Prog key switch in each of it s posit ions.

Ident ify the typical symbols used in a PLC ladder program and explain the function of mnemonics.

Ident ify each of the three parts of the PLC scan cycle.

Interpret the meaning of some common complex instructions.

Ident ify several things that may interrupt the normal scan cycle.

Subjects:

The Ladder Diagram Rung

The Ladder Diagram as a Parallel Circuit

Ladder Diagram Symbols

Mult iple Devices on a Rung

Complete Ladder Diagrams

The Mult iple Rung Control Program

Rung Numbers and Cross References

Ladder Logic Execution

PLC vs. Hardwired Program Execution

Complex Instructions

Interruptions to the Scan Cycle

Course 234 of 245

Control Systems

PLCs: Numerics (IHRDC_OM_ACLNU)

Overview:

The PLCs: Numerics t raining program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with numbering systems and codes commonly

used by programmable logic controllers (PLCs). After complet ing this program, the trainees should be able to interpret place

values for decimal, binary, octal, and hexadecimal numbers and convert numbers from one numbering system to another. They

should also be able to explain what BCD and ASCII codes are and how they are used.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Ident ify commonly used numbering systems.

Explain the organization of a posit ional numbering system.

Interpret place values for binary numbers.

Describe ways that signed binary numbers may be represented in a PLC.

Convert between binary and decimal numbers.

Interpret place values for octal numbers.

Convert between octal, binary, and decimal numbers.

Interpret place values for hexadecimal numbers.

Convert between hexadecimal, octal, binary, and decimal numbers.

Explain what BCD code is.

Express and interpret information in BCD code.

Explain what ASCII code is.

Subjects:

Numbering Systems

Numbering System Basics

Posit ional Systems

Binary Numbering

Place Values

Signed Binary Numbers

Conversions

Octal Numbering

Place Values

Conversions

Hexadecimal Numbering

Place Values

Conversions

Codes

BCD Code

BCD Conversions

ASCII Code

Course 235 of 245

Control Systems

PLCs: Program Entry, Testing and Modification (IHRDC_OM_ACLPE)

Overview:

The PLCs: Program Entry, Test ing, and Modification training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize t rainees with the

techniques used to install, test, and modify a PLC program, or project. After completing this program, the t rainees should be

able to explain how to prepare a system for program entry and how to download or enter the program. They should also be

able to explain how to test and debug the program and make changes to the program in various processor modes.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Explain how to establish communication between a PLC and a PC.

Explain the steps necessary to clear the memory of a PLC.

Explain how to install a project in a PLC.

Explain some common techniques used in test and debug operations.

Explain what must be done when a PLC's hardware or software configuration is changed.

Explain how to use the PLC EEPROM for program backup.

Explain how to use a PC hard drive for program backup.

Explain the differences between online and offline programming.

Describe the process for changing the PLC program while the system is in the program mode.

Describe the process for changing the PLC program while the system is in the run mode.

Subjects:

Entering and Testing the Program

Preparing for Program Entry

Downloading or Entering a Project

Test ing and Debugging

Configuration and Program Changes

Configurat ion Changes

Uploading and Downloading Projects

Changes While in Program Mode

Changes While in Run Mode

Course 236 of 245

Control Systems

PLCs: Programming Common Functions (IHRDC_OM_ACLCF)

Overview:

The PLCs: Programming Common Functions training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize t rainees with the basics of

programming common functions for a programmable logic controller. After completing this program, the trainees should be

able to identify common non-I/O PLC inst ructions and explain how they are used.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Different iate between bit addresses and word addresses.

Explain the function of each part of a t imer.

Explain the function of each part of a counter.

Explain how to use word addresses to send data to and from analog I/O modules.

Explain how program control instructions modify the normal program scan sequence.

Explain how immediate instructions interrupt the normal program scan cycle.

Explain how data comparison instructions are used to make program decisions.

Explain how math instructions are used to perform calculat ions and modify data.

Explain how registers and sequencers are used to emulate motor-driven cam switches.

Explain how file instructions are used to move and manipulate data.

Explain the operating concept of a PID feedback loop.

Explain how to connect real, word I/O devices to a PLC.

Explain how to use RSLogix to program a PLC with some common functions.

Subjects:

Simple Word Instructions

Word Addresses

Timers

Counters

Analog I/O

Program Control Instructions

Modifying the Scan Sequence

Modifying the Scan Cycle

Comparison and Math Instructions

Data Comparison Instructions

Math Instructions

Data Manipulation Instructions

Registers and Sequencers

File Instructions

PID Loop Instruction

A Real System Example

The Hardware

The PLC Program

Course 237 of 245

Control Systems

PLCs: Troubleshooting Hardware (IHRDC_OM_ACLTH)

Overview:

The PLCs: Troubleshoot ing Hardware training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize t rainees with tools and procedures for

t roubleshooting hardware-related PLC problems. After completing this program, the trainees should be able to explain how to

isolate a PLC problem to either hardware or software and network and how to use PLC hardware indicators, programming

software, and appropriate test equipment to troubleshoot processor faults and I/O problems.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Explain how to isolate a problem to hardware vs. software and network.

Explain how to identify a software and network problem.

Explain the meanings of common processor indicators.

Describe common I/O problems.

Ident ify the troubleshoot ing aids commonly found on a PLC power supply.

Ident ify the indicators commonly found on a PLC processor module.

Ident ify the indicators commonly found on a PLC I/O module.

Explain how to go on-line using RSLogix.

Explain how to use common search functions.

Explain how to force an input or output instruction.

Describe how cross references and I/O monitors can be used in troubleshooting.

Ident ify the three main parts of a typical I/O system.

Different iate between test equipment that is and is not appropriate for t roubleshooting PLC systems.

Use the appropriate programming software and test equipment to troubleshoot a typical input system.

Use the appropriate programming software and test equipment to troubleshoot a typical output system.

Subjects:

Isolating PLC Problems

Isolat ing the Problem

Software and Network Problems

Hardware Problems

Hardware Indicators

Power Supply

Processor

I/O Modules

Troubleshooting with Programming Software

Start ing the Software

Using the Search Functions

Using the Force Functions

Using Cross References and I/O Monitors

Troubleshooting I/O Systems

I/O System Organization

Using Test Equipment on I/O Systems

Troubleshooting an Input System

Troubleshooting an Output System

Course 238 of 245

Control Systems

PLCs: Troubleshooting Software and Networks (IHRDC_OM_ACLSN)

Overview:

The PLCs: Troubleshoot ing Software and Networks training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with how to use

PLC programming software to isolate software and network problems. After completing this program, the trainees should be

able to go on-line to connect to a PLC network and be able to identify and describe the major parts of the PLC memory and

some memory protection options. They should be able to explain how to diagnose t imer, counter, and sequencer problems and

how to use PLC indicators, processor status information, TND and SUS instructions, Custom Data Monitors, and histograms to

troubleshoot software problems. They should also be able to explain how to use processor indicators and communications

software to isolate network problems, how to isolate network media problems, how to find and fix a network configuration

problem, and how to connect to a PLC across a network and then troubleshoot a problem.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Explain how to start software and select drivers.

Explain how to use a browser to connect to a stand-alone or networked PLC.

Describe the major parts of the PLC memory.

Describe some major memory protection options.

Explain how to use the five-step troubleshoot ing process to troubleshoot a PLC-controlled system.

Explain how to isolate a problem to software and network vs. hardware.

Explain how to isolate a problem to software vs. network.

Explain how the fault indicat ion in the processor status box can be used for troubleshooting.

Explain how to use processor status table information to isolate problems.

Explain how to check I/O configuration.

Explain how to use the TND and SUS instructions to monitor program control instructions.

Explain how to diagnose t imer, counter, and sequencer problems.

Explain how to use the Custom Data Monitor.

Explain how to use histograms.

Explain how to isolate a problem to a specific network node on DH+.

Explain how to isolate a problem to a specific network node on Rem I/O.

Explain how to isolate an HMI communication problem.

Explain how to isolate network media problems.

Explain how to find and fix network configuration problems.

Explain how to connect to a PLC across a network.

Explain how the key switch affects programming across a network.

Subjects:

Connecting to the PLC Network

Start ing the Software

Examining the PLC Memory

Troubleshooting Software Problems

Isolat ing Problems

Using PLC Status and Configuration Files

Program Control Problems

Timer, Counter, and Sequencer Problems

Using Data Monitors

Troubleshooting Network Problems

Isolat ing the Problem

Problems with Network Media

Problems with Network Configuration

Troubleshooting PLCs Across a Network

Course 239 of 245

Control Systems

VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES: Applications (IHRDC_OM_ACVDA)

Overview:

The VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES - Applicat ions training program, or unit , is designed to familiarize trainees with common

applicat ions of variable speed drives and basic procedures for variable speed drive installat ion. After completing this program,

the trainees should be able to describe ways in which variable speed drives are used and ways in which they are set up and

tested.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Ident ify common applications for variable speed drives.

Describe typical network configurations for drives

Ident ify common problems associated with the installat ion of variable speed drives.

Set up a variable speed drive for operation.

Test the operation of a variable speed drive.

Create checkpointing documentation for a variable speed drive installat ion.

Subjects:

Common Applications

Selecting Drives

Networking Drives

Ident ifying Problems

VSD Installation

Sett ing Up

Test ing the Setup

Creating Checkpointing

Course 240 of 245

Control Systems

VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES: Controllers and Troubleshooting (IHRDC_OM_ACVCT)

Overview:

The VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES: Controllers and Troubleshooting training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize t rainees with

general procedures for using a variable speed drive controller to troubleshoot system problems and for troubleshooting

problems in the controller itself. After completing this program, the trainees should be able to describe how to safely use a

variable speed drive controller to locate basic system problems. They should also be able to explain how to use a test point

checklist to troubleshoot a variable speed drive controller and how to test the major components of the controller.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Describe safe work practices for troubleshooting a variable speed drive.

Ident ify and describe the four basic categories of electrical test equipment.

Explain how to use a controller display to locate operat ing problems in a variable speed drive.

Explain how to set up, interpret, and use a key test point checklist to troubleshoot a variable speed drive controller.

Explain how to check the major components of a variable speed drive controller.

Subjects:

Troubleshooting with the Controller

Safety Basics

Common Drive Problems

Troubleshooting the Controller

Test Point Checking

Component Checking

Course 241 of 245

Control Systems

VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES: Introduction to VSDs (IHRDC_OM_ACVSD)

Overview:

The Introduction to Variable Speed Drives training program, or unit , is designed to familiarize trainees with the operation and

use of variable speed drives. After completing this program, the trainees should be able to identify different types of DC and

AC drives and explain how they control motor operation.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Ident ify different types of variable speed DC drives.

Explain the operation of a DC motor controlled by a variable speed controller.

Ident ify the major components of a variable speed controller operating a DC motor.

Explain the operation of a variable speed controller operating a DC motor.

Ident ify different types of inverter drives.

Explain the operation of a AC motor controlled by an inverter.

Ident ify the major components of a PWM inverter operating an AC motor.

Explain the operation of a PWM inverter operating an AC motor.

Ident ify the major components of a flux vector drive.

Explain the operation of an AC motor controlled by a flux vector drive.

Ident ify different types of flux vector drives.

Explain the operation of a flux vector drive.

Subjects:

DC Drives

Control of DC Motors

DC Controller Components

DC Controller Operation

Inverter Drives

Inverter Control of AC Motors

AC Inverter Components

PWM Controller Operat ion

Flux Vector Drives

Flux Vector Control of AC Motors

Flux Vector Controller Operation

Course 242 of 245

Control Systems

VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES: Programming Controllers (IHRDC_OM_ACVPC)

Overview:

The VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES: Programming Controllers training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with the basic

principles of programming controllers for variable speed DC and AC motors. After completing this program, the t rainees should

be able to identify and describe common parameters that may have to be programmed for a DC variable speed controller

and for an AC variable speed controller. They should also be able to describe addit ional programming that may be required

when an AC variable speed controller is set up for flux vector operat ion.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Ident ify and describe common parameters that may have to be programmed during the setup of a DC variable speed

drive controller.

Ident ify and describe common parameters that may have to be programmed when configuring the I/O for a DC

variable speed drive controller.

Ident ify and describe common parameters that may have to be programmed in order to monitor the operation of a

DC variable speed drive controller.

Ident ify and describe common parameters that may have to be programmed during the setup of an AC variable

speed drive controller.

Ident ify and describe common parameters that may have to be programmed when configuring the I/O for an AC

variable speed drive controller.

Ident ify and describe common parameters that may have to be programmed in order to monitor the operation of an

AC variable speed drive controller.

Describe addit ional programming that may be required when an AC variable speed controller is set up for flux vector

operation.

Subjects:

Programming DC Controllers

Setup

I/O Configurat ion

Monitoring

Programming AC Controllers

Setup

I/O Configurat ion

Monitoring

Flux Vector Programming

Course 243 of 245

Control Systems

VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES: System Troubleshooting (IHRDC_OM_ACVST)

Overview:

The VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES: System Troubleshoot ing training program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with the use of

a basic five-step troubleshooting method to troubleshoot a variable speed drive system. After completing this program, the

trainees should be able to describe problems associated with a variable speed drive system's motor, wiring, and electrical

supply. They should also be able to describe each step of the five-step troubleshoot ing process and explain how to use those

steps to troubleshoot a problem in a variable speed drive system.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Explain how to locate and correct loose motor connections.

Explain how to detect condit ions that could lead to motor winding failure, and suggest remedies for those condit ions.

Explain how to detect condit ions that could lead to motor bearing failure, and suggest remedies for those condit ions.

Explain how to detect motor leakage currents, and suggest remedies for the problem.

Explain how to locate and correct loose wiring connections.

Ident ify and suggest modifications to variable speed drives affected by improper shielding and grounding.

Explain how to check and monitor control system feedback.

Ident ify and suggest modifications to variable speed drives affected by overvoltage reflect ions.

Explain how to locate and correct loose wiring connections.

Ident ify and suggest methods for correcting voltage imbalance in variable speed drive systems.

Explain how to detect single phasing in variable speed drive applications.

Explain how to detect harmonic anomalies, and suggest remedies for those condit ions.

Explain why it is important to know the equipment before you start to troubleshoot.

List the aids available to you in invest igating the symptoms.

Explain how to identify probable causes.

Explain how to priorit ize probable causes.

Explain why it is important to determine the root causes of malfunctions.

Explain how to use the five-step troubleshoot ing method to troubleshoot a variable speed drive.

Subjects:

Troubleshooting a VSD System

Troubleshooting the Motor

Troubleshooting the Wiring

Troubleshooting the Electrical Supply

Five-Step Troubleshooting Method

Know the Equipment

Invest igate Symptoms

List Probable Causes

Test Probable Causes

Discover Root Causes

Troubleshooting Case Study

Course 244 of 245

Control Systems

VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES: Systems and Integration (IHRDC_OM_ACVSI)

Overview:

The VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES: System Integration t raining program, or unit, is designed to familiarize trainees with several

common ways in which variable speed drives and automated systems are linked together. After completing this program, the

trainees should be able to describe how variable speed drives are integrated into distributed control systems and

programmable control systems. They should also be able to describe the operation of tachometers, encoders, and resolvers,

and explain how to install field devices for variable speed drives.

Duration:

2 hrs

Objectives:

Describe how variable speed drives are integrated into distributed control systems.

Ident ify the network connect ions between a variable speed drive and a distributed control system.

Explain how to install a variable speed drive in a distributed control system.

Describe how variable speed drives are integrated into programmable control systems.

Ident ify the network connect ions between a variable speed drive and a programmable control system.

Explain how to install a variable speed drive in a programmable control system.

Describe the operation of a tachometer used to control a variable speed drive.

Explain how to install and set up tachometers for variable speed drives.

Describe the operation of an encoder used to control a variable speed drive.

Explain how to install and set up encoders for variable speed drives.

Describe the operation of a resolver used to control a variable speed drive.

Explain how to install and set up resolvers for variable speed drives.

Explain how to install field devices for variable speed drives.

Subjects:

Control System Integration

DCS Integrat ion

PLC Integration

Feedback and Field Device Integration

Tachometers

Encoders and Resolvers

Field Devices

Course 245 of 245